Microchip Technology Aktienkurs
Insights zu Microchip Technology
Insights
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Mit KI besser investieren
aktien.guide Unlimited – alle Details der KI-Analysen
👉 Detailliertere Insights
👉 Exklusive Einblicke in Chancen & Risiken
👉 Klare Antworten auf deine Fragen
Jetzt kostenlos registrieren, um einen Alarm für die Microchip Technology Aktie zu aktivieren.
Aktiviere Alarme zum Aktienkurs, zur Dividendenrendite, zur Bewertung (z. B. KGV oder EV/Sales) oder zu Strategie-Scores und lehne Dich entspannt zurück.
aktien.guide Basis
Kennzahlen
📘 Marktkapitalisierung
📈 Was ist das?
Die Marktkapitalisierung zeigt, wie viel ein Unternehmen laut Börse aktuell wert ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft Unternehmen in Größenklassen (Large, Mid, Small Cap) einzuordnen und gibt Hinweise auf Marktmacht und Stabilität.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Große Unternehmen gelten als stabiler, zahlen oft Dividenden, wachsen aber langsamer.
- Kleine Firmen können stärker wachsen, sind aber schwankungsanfälliger.
- Die Marktkapitalisierung ist ein guter Indikator für Unternehmensgröße, aber kein Maß für Unter- oder Überbewertung.
📘 Enterprise Value (Unternehmenswert)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Enterprise Value (EV) zeigt, was ein Unternehmen tatsächlich kostet, wenn man es komplett übernehmen würde – inklusive Schulden und abzüglich Cash.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
(= Marktkapitalisierung + Nettoverschuldung)
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der EV ist eine realistischere Bewertungsbasis als die Marktkapitalisierung, da er die Kapitalstruktur berücksichtigt. Er ist Grundlage für Kennzahlen wie EV/FCF oder EV/Sales.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Der Enterprise Value zeigt, was ein Unternehmen tatsächlich wert ist – unabhängig davon, wie es finanziert ist.
- Er ist besonders wichtig für professionelle Investoren, da er eine objektivere Grundlage für Bewertungsvergleiche bietet als die Marktkapitalisierung allein.
- Ein Unternehmen mit hoher Verschuldung erscheint im EV teurer, eines mit viel Cash günstiger – auch wenn sie an der Börse gleich viel wert sind.
📘 Nettoverschuldung
📈 Was ist das?
Die Nettoverschuldung zeigt, wie viele Schulden nach Abzug des verfügbaren Cashs tatsächlich verbleiben.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen von Fremdkapital abhängig ist – und wie gut es in der Lage ist, seine Schulden kurzfristig zu bedienen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine niedrige oder negative Nettoverschuldung bedeutet hohe finanzielle Stabilität.
- Unternehmen mit viel Cash und geringer Verschuldung sind besser gerüstet für Krisen.
- Eine hohe Nettoverschuldung erhöht das Risiko – besonders bei steigenden Zinsen oder konjunkturellen Schwächen.
📘 Cash
📈 Was ist das?
Der Cashbestand zeigt, wie viele liquide Mittel einem Unternehmen sofort zur Verfügung stehen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Er gibt Auskunft über die finanzielle Flexibilität: Ein hoher Cashbestand ermöglicht Investitionen, Rückkäufe oder Krisenresistenz.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Cashbestand zeigt finanzielle Stärke und Handlungsspielraum.
- Cash kann für Investitionen, Schuldentilgung oder Aktienrückkäufe genutzt werden.
- Allerdings: Zu viel ungenutztes Kapital kann auch auf mangelnde Investitionsideen hinweisen.
📘 Anzahl ausstehender Aktien
📈 Was ist das?
Die Anzahl ausstehender Aktien gibt an, wie viele Aktien eines Unternehmens aktuell im Umlauf sind und von Investoren gehalten werden.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie ist die Grundlage für viele Kennzahlen wie Gewinn je Aktie (EPS), Marktkapitalisierung oder KGV.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Je weniger Aktien im Umlauf sind, desto höher fällt z. B. der Gewinn je Aktie aus – wichtig für Bewertung und Dividendenrendite.
- Aktienrückkäufe verringern die Anzahl ausstehender Aktien – und steigern den Wert je Aktie.
- Kapitalerhöhungen haben den gegenteiligen Effekt: mehr Aktien → Verwässerung der bestehenden Anteile.
📘 Kurs-Gewinn-Verhältnis (KGV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KGV zeigt, wie oft der Gewinn pro Aktie im aktuellen Aktienkurs enthalten ist – also wie „teuer“ eine Aktie im Verhältnis zum Gewinn ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KGV gehört zu den bekanntesten Bewertungskennzahlen. Es hilft Anlegern einzuschätzen, ob eine Aktie im Vergleich zu ihrem Gewinn eher günstig oder teuer erscheint.
🧮 Berechnung
📊 KGV (TTM) = bezogen auf den Gewinn der letzten 12 Monate (Trailing Twelve Months):🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges KGV kann auf eine günstige Bewertung hindeuten – oder auf Probleme im Geschäftsmodell.
- Ein hohes KGV kann Wachstumserwartungen widerspiegeln – oder eine überbewertete Aktie.
📘 Kurs-Umsatz-Verhältnis (KUV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KUV zeigt, wie viel Anleger für 1 € Umsatz eines Unternehmens zahlen – unabhängig vom Gewinn.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KUV ist besonders bei wachstumsstarken oder noch nicht profitablen Unternehmen hilfreich. Es zeigt, wie hoch der Umsatz an der Börse bewertet wird.
🧮 Berechnung
Marktkapitalisierung = 45,88 Mrd. $ | Umsatz (TTM) = 4,71 Mrd. $
Marktkapitalisierung = 45,88 Mrd. $ | Umsatz erwartet = 6,30 Mrd. $
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges KUV kann auf Unterbewertung hindeuten – oder auf schwache Margen.
- Ein hohes KUV kann hohe Erwartungen widerspiegeln – oder übermäßigen Optimismus.
- Besonders sinnvoll bei Wachstumsunternehmen, bei denen der Gewinn oder Free Cashflow (noch) keine Aussagekraft hat.
📘 Unternehmenswert zu Umsatz (EV/Sales)
📈 Was ist das?
EV/Sales zeigt, wie viel Anleger für 1 € Umsatz eines Unternehmens zahlen, wenn man auch Schulden und Cash berücksichtigt – es ist eine kapitalstrukturbereinigte Version des KUV.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl eignet sich besonders für den Vergleich von Unternehmen mit unterschiedlicher Verschuldung – sie zeigt, wie teuer ein Unternehmen tatsächlich im Verhältnis zum Umsatz ist.
🧮 Berechnung
Enterprise Value = 51,14 Mrd. $ | Umsatz (TTM) = 4,71 Mrd. $
Enterprise Value = 51,14 Mrd. $ | Umsatz erwartet = 6,30 Mrd. $
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- EV/Sales ist neutral gegenüber der Kapitalstruktur und eignet sich gut für Unternehmensvergleiche.
- Ein niedriges Verhältnis kann auf eine günstig bewertete Aktie hindeuten – ein hohes Verhältnis auf hohe Erwartungen oder Überbewertung.
- Besonders nützlich bei wachstumsstarken, noch nicht profitablen Firmen.
📘 Unternehmenswert zu Free Cashflow (EV/FCF)
📈 Was ist das?
EV/FCF zeigt, wie viele Jahre es dauern würde, bis ein Unternehmen seinen Unternehmenswert durch freien Cashflow „zurückverdient”.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl hilft, Unternehmen auf Basis ihrer tatsächlichen Cash-Erträge zu bewerten – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln oder buchhalterischem Gewinn.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriges EV/FCF deutet auf eine günstige Bewertung bei starker Cashgenerierung hin.
- Ein hohes EV/FCF kann entweder auf Optimismus oder auf temporär schwachen Cashflow hindeuten.
- Besonders hilfreich bei reifen, profitablen Unternehmen mit stabilen Cashflows.
📘 Kurs-Buchwert-Verhältnis (KBV)
📈 Was ist das?
Das KBV zeigt, wie hoch der Marktwert eines Unternehmens im Verhältnis zu seinem bilanziellen Eigenkapital ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das KBV ist besonders bei Substanzwerten (z. B. Banken, Industrie) relevant. Es hilft Anlegern zu erkennen, ob ein Unternehmen unter oder über seinem buchhalterischen Vermögen bewertet ist.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein KBV unter 1 kann auf Unterbewertung oder schwache Rentabilität hindeuten.
- Ein KBV über 1 zeigt, dass der Markt dem Unternehmen Mehrwert über den Buchwert hinaus zuschreibt (z. B. Marken, Patente, Wachstum).
- Das KBV eignet sich besonders gut für Unternehmen mit stabilen, materiellen Vermögenswerten.
📘 Dividende je Aktie
📈 Was ist das?
Die Dividende je Aktie zeigt, wie viel Geld ein Unternehmen pro Aktie an seine Aktionäre ausschüttet – typischerweise jährlich oder quartalsweise.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie ist die absolute Größe der Auszahlung je Aktie – wichtig für alle, die regelmäßige Erträge suchen oder Dividendenstrategien verfolgen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine stabile oder wachsende Dividende je Aktie ist oft ein Zeichen für ein solides Geschäftsmodell.
- Die Dividende je Aktie allein sagt aber nichts über die Rendite – dafür ist auch der Aktienkurs relevant (→ Dividendenrendite).
- Langfristig steigende Dividenden sind oft ein sehr gutes Merkmal (z. B. Dividenden-Aristokraten).
📘 Dividendenrendite
📈 Was ist das?
Die Dividendenrendite zeigt, wie hoch die Dividende eines Unternehmens im Verhältnis zum Aktienkurs ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft dabei, Dividendenaktien vergleichbar zu machen – unabhängig vom absoluten Auszahlungsbetrag.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine stabile Dividendenrendite kann auf verlässliche Ausschüttungen hinweisen.
- Ein Vergleich der 1J- und 5J-Rendite hilft zu erkennen, ob das Dividendenwachstum mit dem Kurswachstum Schritt hält.
- Eine niedrige Rendite ist nicht zwingend negativ – sie kann auf starkes Kurswachstum hindeuten.
📘 Dividendenwachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Dividendenwachstum zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen seine Dividende je Aktie über die Zeit gesteigert hat.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
5J: durchschnittliche jährliche Wachstumsrate (CAGR)
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Stetig steigende Dividenden gelten als Zeichen für finanzielle Stärke und Aktionärsorientierung – besonders interessant für langfristige Investoren.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein stabiles Dividendenwachstum ist ein Zeichen nachhaltiger Ertragskraft.
- Ein hohes Dividendenwachstum kann ein erheblicher Hebel deiner Rendite sein:
- Wenn ein Unternehmen z. B. 1 € Dividende zahlt und diese über 5 Jahre jährlich um 15 % erhöht, bekommst du im 5. Jahr bereits 2 € je Aktie – doppelt so viel wie zu Beginn!
📘 Ausschüttungsquote (Payout)
📈 Was ist das?
Die Ausschüttungsquote zeigt, wie viel Prozent des Unternehmensgewinns (pro Aktie) als Dividende an die Aktionäre ausgeschüttet wird.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Quote hilft einzuschätzen, ob eine Dividende auf Dauer tragfähig ist – besonders im Verhältnis zum erzielten Gewinn.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine niedrige Ausschüttungsquote bedeutet: Das Unternehmen behält einen größeren Teil des Gewinns für Investitionen – typisch für Wachstumsunternehmen.
- Eine moderate Quote (z. B. 25–50 %) steht oft für ein gesundes Gleichgewicht zwischen Ausschüttung und Zukunftsinvestitionen.
- Hohe Ausschüttungsquoten können attraktiv wirken, sind aber riskanter, wenn die Gewinne schwanken oder sinken.
📘 Dividendensteigerungen in Folge (Erhöhungen)
📈 Was ist das?
Diese Kennzahl zeigt, wie viele Jahre in Folge ein Unternehmen seine Dividende pro Aktie erhöht hat – ohne Kürzung oder Aussetzung.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein langer Track Record kontinuierlicher Erhöhungen spricht für Verlässlichkeit, solide Finanzen und aktionärsfreundliche Unternehmenspolitik.
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein langer Zeitraum mit Dividendensteigerungen stärkt das Vertrauen – besonders in Krisenzeiten.
- Solche Unternehmen gelten als verlässlich und planbar für Einkommensinvestoren.
- Je länger die Serie, desto stärker das Commitment gegenüber den Aktionären.
📘 Umsatz
📈 Was ist das?
Der Umsatz zeigt, wie viel ein Unternehmen insgesamt mit seinen Produkten und Dienstleistungen verdient – also den Bruttoerlös vor Abzug von Kosten.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Umsatz ist eine der zentralen Kennzahlen zur Einschätzung der Unternehmensgröße, Marktstellung und Wachstumskraft.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein wachsender Umsatz zeigt eine steigende Nachfrage und kann ein guter Frühindikator für Gewinnsteigerungen sein.
- Vergleiche von aktuellem und erwartetem Umsatz geben Hinweise auf das Marktumfeld und Analystenerwartungen.
- Wichtig: Starker Umsatz allein genügt nicht – auch Margen und Profitabilität zählen.
📘 EBITDA
📈 Was ist das?
EBITDA steht für „Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization“ – also Gewinn vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen. Es zeigt das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens, bereinigt um bilanztechnische und finanzierungsbedingte Effekte.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EBITDA ist eine verbreitete Kennzahl zur Beurteilung der operativen Leistungsfähigkeit – insbesondere bei kapitalintensiven Unternehmen oder im internationalen Vergleich.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hohes oder wachsendes EBITDA spricht für starke operative Erträge – unabhängig von Bilanzierung oder Steuerlast.
- EBITDA ist besonders nützlich, um Unternehmen branchenübergreifend zu vergleichen.
- Wichtig: EBITDA ist keine offizielle Gewinnkennzahl – Abschreibungen und Finanzierungskosten werden ausgeklammert.
📘 EBIT
📈 Was ist das?
EBIT steht für „Earnings Before Interest and Taxes“ – also Gewinn vor Zinsen und Steuern. Es zeigt das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Finanzierungs- und Steueraufwand.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EBIT ist eine zentrale Kennzahl zur Beurteilung der Profitabilität aus dem Kerngeschäft – unabhängig von Kapitalstruktur oder Steuersystem.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hohes EBIT deutet auf ein profitables Kerngeschäft hin – vor Zinslasten oder steuerlichen Effekten.
- Es erlaubt objektivere Vergleiche zwischen Unternehmen mit unterschiedlicher Finanzierung.
- Im Vergleich mit EBITDA zeigt EBIT bereits den Einfluss von Abschreibungen auf das operative Ergebnis.
📘 Nettogewinn
📈 Was ist das?
Der Nettogewinn ist der verbleibende Jahresüberschuss (oder -fehlbetrag) eines Unternehmens – nach Abzug aller Kosten, Steuern, Zinsen und Abschreibungen
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Nettogewinn ist die zentrale Erfolgskennzahl – er zeigt, wie profitabel ein Unternehmen nach allen Kosten tatsächlich arbeitet.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein steigender Nettogewinn zeigt, dass das Unternehmen effizient wirtschaftet – trotz aller Kosten.
- Die Entwicklung des Gewinns beeinflusst z. B. direkt das KGV und weitere Kennzahlen.
- Im Zeitverlauf lässt sich ablesen, wie stabil und profitabel ein Geschäftsmodell wirklich ist.
📘 Free Cashflow (FCF)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Free Cashflow gibt Aufschluss über die echte finanzielle Stärke eines Unternehmens – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln. Er zeigt, wie viel Spielraum für Dividenden, Aktienrückkäufe oder Schuldenabbau besteht.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
FCF reflects a company’s real financial strength – regardless of accounting profits. It shows how much flexibility a company has for dividends, share buybacks, or debt reduction.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Free Cashflow bedeutet, dass ein Unternehmen echte Finanzkraft besitzt – unabhängig vom bilanzierten Gewinn.
- Er ist oft die solideste Grundlage für nachhaltige Dividenden und Aktienrückkäufe.
- Sinkender FCF kann ein Warnsignal sein – auch wenn der Gewinn stabil aussieht.
📘 Umsatzwachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Umsatzwachstum zeigt, wie stark sich die Erlöse eines Unternehmens im Vergleich zum Vorjahr verändert haben – tatsächlich (TTM) und auf Prognosebasis (erwartet).
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (Umsatz erwartet ÷ Umsatz Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein wachsender Umsatz ist ein zentrales Signal für steigende Nachfrage, Geschäftsausweitung und Marktanteilsgewinne – besonders bei Wachstumsunternehmen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Wachstum ist der Motor langfristiger Wertsteigerung – besonders bei Technologie- und Wachstumsaktien.
- Wichtig ist nicht nur das aktuelle Wachstum, sondern auch dessen Nachhaltigkeit.
- Prognosen zeigen, ob Analysten weiteres Potenzial erwarten – oder eine Verlangsamung.
📘 EBITDA-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das EBITDA-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen im Vergleich zum Vorjahr gestiegen oder gesunken ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwartetes EBITDA ÷ EBITDA Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Ein steigendes EBITDA ist ein Zeichen für verbesserte operative Ertragskraft – unabhängig von Finanzierungsstruktur oder Abschreibungen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Starkes EBITDA-Wachstum signalisiert operative Effizienz und Skalierung – besonders relevant in Wachstumsphasen.
- EBITDA-Wachstum ist ein Frühindikator für Margen- und Gewinnentwicklung – sollte aber stets im Zusammenhang mit Umsatz und EBIT betrachtet werden.
📘 EBIT Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das EBIT-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark das operative Ergebnis eines Unternehmens (nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Zinsen und Steuern) im Vergleich zum Vorjahr gewachsen ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwartetes EBIT ÷ EBIT Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Erwartetes Wachstum basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Das EBIT-Wachstum ist ein direkter Indikator für die wirtschaftliche Entwicklung des operativen Geschäfts – unter Berücksichtigung der Kapitalintensität (Abschreibungen).
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Steigendes EBIT signalisiert wachsende operative Rentabilität – auch unter Berücksichtigung von Abschreibungen.
- Das EBIT-Wachstum ist ein wichtiges Maß zur Beurteilung von Geschäftsmodellen mit hohen Investitionskosten.
- Im Zusammenspiel mit Umsatz- und EBITDA-Wachstum ergibt sich ein umfassendes Bild zur operativen Entwicklung.
📘 Nettogewinn-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Nettogewinn-Wachstum zeigt, wie stark der Jahresüberschuss eines Unternehmens gegenüber dem Vorjahr gestiegen oder gesunken ist – sowohl tatsächlich (TTM) als auch auf Basis von Prognosen (erwartet).
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Erwartet = (erwarteter Nettogewinn ÷ Nettogewinn Vorjahr − 1) × 100
Der erwartete Wert basiert auf Analystenschätzungen für das laufende Geschäftsjahr.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der Gewinn ist die entscheidende Ergebnisgröße für ein Unternehmen. Ein wachsender Nettogewinn deutet auf steigende Effizienz, stabile Kostenkontrolle und nachhaltige Ertragskraft hin.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Wachsender Nettogewinn stärkt die Bewertung, Dividendenfähigkeit und Kursfantasie.
- Stagnierender oder rückläufiger Gewinn trotz Umsatzwachstum kann auf Margendruck hinweisen.
📘 Free Cashflow-Wachstum
📈 Was ist das?
Das Free-Cashflow-Wachstum zeigt, wie sich der freie Mittelzufluss eines Unternehmens im Vergleich zum Vorjahr verändert hat – also der Betrag, der nach allen operativen Ausgaben und Investitionen übrig bleibt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Free Cashflow ist der echte, verfügbare Geldzufluss. Wachstum in diesem Bereich ist ein Zeichen für finanzielle Stärke und steigende Flexibilität bei Dividenden, Rückkäufen oder Investitionen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Sinkender Free Cashflow kann auf steigende Investitionen, höhere Kosten oder stagnierende operative Erträge hindeuten.
- Besonders bei Dividendenwerten ist das FCF-Wachstum wichtig – denn Dividenden werden letztlich aus dem verfügbaren Cash gezahlt.
- Ein negativer Trend sollte genauer analysiert werden – er ist nicht zwangsläufig schlecht, aber potenziell ein Warnsignal.
📘 Bruttomarge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Bruttomarge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug der direkten Herstellungskosten (Material, Produktion) als Bruttogewinn übrig bleibt – also der „Rohgewinn“ eines Unternehmens.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Auch: Bruttomarge = Bruttogewinn ÷ Umsatz × 100
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Bruttomarge gibt Aufschluss über die Profitabilität eines Produkts oder Geschäftsmodells vor Fixkosten, Steuern und Zinsen. Sie zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen produzieren oder einkaufen kann.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Bruttomarge deutet auf starke Preissetzungsmacht und effiziente Herstellung hin.
- Sinkende Bruttomargen können auf Kostensteigerungen oder Preisdruck hindeuten.
- Besonders im Vergleich zu Wettbewerbern liefert die Bruttomarge wertvolle Einblicke in die Geschäftsqualität.
📘 EBITDA-Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die EBITDA-Marge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz als operativer Gewinn vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen (EBITDA) übrig bleibt. Sie misst die operative Effizienz – ohne Verzerrungen durch Finanzierung oder Buchwerte.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die EBITDA-Marge hilft zu verstehen, wie viel operativer Gewinn ein Unternehmen aus jedem Euro Umsatz erzielt – unabhängig von Kapitalstruktur oder steuerlichem Umfeld.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe EBITDA-Marge zeigt starke operative Ertragskraft – unabhängig von Bilanzierungseffekten.
- Die Marge ermöglicht gute Vergleiche zwischen Unternehmen und Branchen.
- Ein stabiler oder wachsender Wert kann auf effiziente Kostenkontrolle und Skalierbarkeit hindeuten.
📘 EBIT-Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die EBIT-Marge zeigt, wie viel Prozent des Umsatzes als operativer Gewinn nach Abschreibungen, aber vor Zinsen und Steuern übrig bleiben.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die EBIT-Marge misst die operative Ertragskraft eines Unternehmens unter Berücksichtigung der Kapitalintensität (z. B. Maschinen, Anlagen). Sie eignet sich gut zum Vergleich von Geschäftsmodellen mit unterschiedlich hohen Abschreibungen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe EBIT-Marge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen auch nach Abschreibungen effizient arbeitet.
- Sie ist besonders relevant in kapitalintensiven Branchen.
- Langfristig stabile oder steigende Margen sind ein Zeichen wirtschaftlicher Stärke und Preissetzungsmacht.
📘 Nettomarge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Nettomarge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz am Ende als „Reingewinn“ übrig bleibt – also nach Abzug aller Kosten, Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Nettomarge gibt an, wie effizient ein Unternehmen über alle Stufen hinweg wirtschaftet. Sie zeigt, wie viel Gewinn tatsächlich je Euro Umsatz übrig bleibt.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Nettomarge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen nicht nur operativ stark ist, sondern auch seine Finanzierung und Steuerbelastung im Griff hat.
- Vergleiche mit Wettbewerbern geben Einblicke in die wirtschaftliche Qualität.
- Sinkende Nettomargen trotz Umsatzwachstum können ein Warnsignal sein – etwa für steigende Kosten oder sinkende Effizienz.
📘 Free Cashflow Marge
📈 Was ist das?
Die Free-Cashflow-Marge zeigt, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug aller operativen Ausgaben und Investitionen tatsächlich als freier Mittelzufluss übrig bleibt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Marge misst die echte Liquidität, die ein Unternehmen erwirtschaftet – unabhängig von Bilanzierungsregeln oder Abschreibungen. Sie ist besonders relevant für Dividenden, Rückkäufe und Investitionen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Free-Cashflow-Marge zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen nachhaltig liquide Mittel erwirtschaftet.
- Sie ist ein starkes Signal für finanzielle Stabilität und Ausschüttungspotenzial.
- Wichtig ist der langfristige Trend – sinkende Werte können auf steigende Investitionen oder rückläufige operative Effizienz hindeuten.
📘 Eigenkapitalquote
📈 Was ist das?
Die Eigenkapitalquote zeigt, wie hoch der Anteil des Eigenkapitals an der Bilanzsumme eines Unternehmens ist – also wie stark es sich aus eigenen Mitteln finanziert.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Eine hohe Eigenkapitalquote steht für finanzielle Stabilität, Krisenfestigkeit und gute Bonität. Sie ist besonders relevant bei der Beurteilung der Verschuldung.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Eigenkapitalquote signalisiert finanzielle Stabilität – besonders in Krisenzeiten.
- Ein niedriger Wert kann auf ein höheres Risiko oder eine aggressive Verschuldung hinweisen.
- Wichtig: Die Eigenkapitalquote sollte immer gemeinsam mit der Eigenkapitalrendite betrachtet werden. Nur so lässt sich beurteilen, ob ein Unternehmen nicht nur solide, sondern auch effizient wirtschaftet.
📘 Eigenkapitalrendite (ROE)
📈 Was ist das?
Die Eigenkapitalrendite zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen mit dem Kapital seiner Aktionäre arbeitet – also wie viel Gewinn es pro Euro Eigenkapital erwirtschaftet.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Eigenkapitalrendite ist eine zentrale Rentabilitätskennzahl. Sie hilft Anlegern zu erkennen, ob das Unternehmen eine attraktive Verzinsung auf das eingesetzte Eigenkapital erwirtschaftet.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Eine hohe Eigenkapitalrendite spricht für ein starkes, effizientes Geschäftsmodell.
- Besonders interessant ist sie bei kapitalintensiven Firmen oder solchen mit hoher Eigenkapitalquote.
- Wichtig: Ein sehr hoher ROE kann auch auf hohe Schulden hinweisen – daher sollte sie immer im Kontext mit der Eigenkapitalquote betrachtet werden.
📘 Return on Capital Employed (ROCE)
📈 Was ist das?
ROCE misst die Gesamtrentabilität eines Unternehmens – also wie effizient es das eingesetzte Kapital (Eigen- und Fremdkapital) zur Gewinnerzielung nutzt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Das eingesetzte Kapital ist das gesamte betriebsnotwendige Kapital, unabhängig von der Finanzierungsquelle.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
ROCE eignet sich besonders gut für den Vergleich unterschiedlich finanzierter Unternehmen. Es zeigt, wie effektiv ein Unternehmen Kapital investiert – unabhängig von der Kapitalstruktur.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher ROCE zeigt, dass ein Unternehmen sein Kapital effizient einsetzt – unabhängig davon, ob es durch Eigen- oder Fremdkapital finanziert ist.
- Je höher der ROCE im Vergleich zu ähnlichen Unternehmen, desto mehr Wert schafft das Unternehmen mit seinem investierten Kapital.
- Besonders wichtig ist der ROCE bei Firmen mit hohen Investitionen – z. B. in Industrie, Energie oder Infrastruktur.
📘 Return on Invested Capital (ROIC)
📈 Was ist das?
ROIC zeigt, wie effizient ein Unternehmen das Kapital investiert, das langfristig im operativen Geschäft gebunden ist – unabhängig davon, ob es aus Eigen- oder Fremdkapital stammt.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
- NOPAT = „Net Operating Profit After Taxes“
- Investiertes Kapital = operatives Vermögen abzüglich nicht-verzinster Schulden
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
ROIC ist eine der präzisesten Kennzahlen zur Bewertung der Kapitalrendite – besonders im Vergleich zur Eigenkapitalrendite, weil es Verzerrungen durch Schulden vermeidet. Er zeigt, ob ein Unternehmen Mehrwert für alle Kapitalgeber schafft.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher ROIC zeigt, wie gut ein Unternehmen mit dem tatsächlich investierten (betriebsnotwendigen) Kapital wirtschaftet.
- Im Unterschied zu ROCE wird nur Kapital betrachtet, das wirklich zur Finanzierung operativer Aktivitäten dient – und verzinst werden muss.
- Besonders hilfreich, um die Kapitalrendite von Unternehmen mit viel „überschüssigem“ Kapital oder zinsfreien Verbindlichkeiten realistisch zu vergleichen.
📘 Verschuldungsgrad (Leverage Ratio)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Verschuldungsgrad zeigt, wie stark ein Unternehmen durch verzinsliche Schulden (z. B. Kredite und Anleihen) im Verhältnis zum Eigenkapital finanziert ist.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Die Kennzahl hilft, das finanzielle Risiko und die Abhängigkeit von Fremdkapital zu beurteilen. Ein hoher Verschuldungsgrad kann die Eigenkapitalrendite steigern – birgt aber auch erhöhte Risiken bei Zinsanstiegen oder Liquiditätsengpässen.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriger Verschuldungsgrad steht für finanzielle Stabilität und Unabhängigkeit.
- Ein hoher Wert kann auf erhöhte Risiken hinweisen – insbesondere bei schwankenden Zinsen oder konjunkturellen Schwächen.
- Wichtig: Immer im Kontext zur Branche und Kapitalintensität bewerten.
📘 Ergebnis je Aktie (EPS)
📈 Was ist das?
Das Ergebnis je Aktie (EPS) zeigt, wie viel Gewinn auf eine einzelne Aktie entfällt – und ist eine der wichtigsten Kennzahlen zur Bewertung von Unternehmen.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Die verwässerte Aktienanzahl berücksichtigt auch potenzielle neue Aktien, etwa durch Optionen, Wandelanleihen oder andere Umtauschrechte.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
EPS bildet die Basis für viele Bewertungskennzahlen wie KGV, PEG oder Payout Ratio. Es macht den Gewinn für Aktionäre vergleichbar – unabhängig von der Unternehmensgröße.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- EPS hilft, die Profitabilität pro Aktie zu erfassen – und ist besonders wichtig im Zeitvergleich oder im Vergleich mit Analystenschätzungen.
- Steigendes EPS kann ein Zeichen für stabiles Wachstum oder Aktienrückkäufe sein.
- Wichtig: Verwende verwässertes EPS für realistische Bewertungen – besonders bei stark aktienbasierten Vergütungssystemen.
📘 Free Cashflow je Aktie (FCF je Aktie)
📈 Was ist das?
Der Free Cashflow je Aktie zeigt, wie viel freier Mittelzufluss einem Unternehmen pro Aktie zur Verfügung steht – nach Investitionen, aber vor Dividenden oder Schuldentilgung.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Der FCF je Aktie zeigt, wie viel liquide Mittel pro Aktie tatsächlich im Unternehmen verbleiben – wichtig für Dividenden, Aktienrückkäufe oder Schuldentilgung. Im Gegensatz zum Gewinn ist er schwerer manipulierbar und daher besonders aussagekräftig.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Free Cashflow je Aktie ist ein Zeichen für hohe finanzielle Flexibilität.
- Er zeigt, wie viel Kapital ein Unternehmen effektiv einsetzen oder ausschütten kann.
- Besonders relevant für dividendenstarke Unternehmen oder solche mit starker Kapitalrendite.
📘 Short Interest
📈 Was ist das?
Short Interest zeigt, wie viele Aktien eines Unternehmens aktuell leerverkauft wurden – also von Investoren geliehen und verkauft, in der Erwartung fallender Kurse.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Der Wert zeigt den Anteil der Aktien, der aktuell auf fallende Kurse spekuliert wird.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Short Interest dient als Stimmungsindikator: Ein hoher Wert deutet auf Skepsis oder negative Erwartungen gegenüber dem Unternehmen hin – kann aber auch zu einem „Short Squeeze“ führen, wenn der Kurs plötzlich steigt.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein niedriger Short Interest deutet auf Vertrauen in das Unternehmen hin.
- Ein hoher Wert kann ein Warnsignal sein – oder eine Chance, wenn sich die Stimmung dreht.
- Besonders spannend in volatilen Märkten oder vor wichtigen Quartalszahlen.
📘 Employees
📈 Was ist das?
Die Mitarbeiteranzahl zeigt, wie viele Personen ein Unternehmen weltweit beschäftigt – ein Indikator für Größe, Struktur und Geschäftsmodell.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Sie hilft bei der Einschätzung von Skaleneffekten, Effizienz und Personalkosten. Zusammen mit Umsatz und Gewinn lassen sich Kennzahlen wie Produktivität je Mitarbeiter ableiten.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Viele Mitarbeiter bedeuten große operative Komplexität – aber auch hohes Umsatzpotenzial.
- Produktivität je Mitarbeiter ist ein wichtiger Indikator für Effizienz.
- Besonders spannend bei stark wachsenden Tech- oder Industrieunternehmen.
📘 Umsatz je Mitarbeiter
📈 Was ist das?
Der Umsatz je Mitarbeiter zeigt, wie viel Erlös ein Unternehmen durchschnittlich pro Beschäftigtem erwirtschaftet – eine Kennzahl für Effizienz und Produktivität.
🧮 Wie wird es berechnet?
Die Mitarbeiterzahl stammt in der Regel aus dem letzten verfügbaren Jahresbericht.
🏛️ Wofür ist es wichtig?
Diese Kennzahl hilft, Geschäftsmodelle zu vergleichen – insbesondere zwischen arbeitsintensiven und technologiegetriebenen Unternehmen. Ein hoher Wert deutet auf Automatisierung, Effizienz oder hohen Wertschöpfungsanteil hin.
🧮 Berechnung
🎯 Was bedeutet das für Anleger?
- Ein hoher Umsatz je Mitarbeiter spricht für ein skalierbares und margenstarkes Geschäftsmodell.
- Ein niedriger Wert kann auf arbeitsintensive Prozesse oder geringere Wertschöpfung hinweisen.
- Besonders hilfreich beim Vergleich von Tech- vs. Industrieunternehmen.
Microchip Technology Aktie Analyse
Analystenmeinungen
33 Analysten haben eine Microchip Technology Prognose abgegeben:
Analystenmeinungen
33 Analysten haben eine Microchip Technology Prognose abgegeben:
Beta Microchip Technology Events
🇩🇪 Neu: Alle Transkripte jetzt auch auf Deutsch verfügbar!
Abonniere Premium, um Transkripte und KI-Zusammenfassungen auf Deutsch zu lesen.
Vergangene Events
|
JUN
2
2026 Evercore Global TMT Conference
vor etwa einem Monat
|
|
JUN
2
Bank of America 2026 Global Technology Conference
vor etwa einem Monat
|
|
MAI
28
TD Cowen's 54th Annual Technology
vor etwa einem Monat
|
|
MAI
20
J.P. Morgan 54th Annual Global Technology
vor etwa 2 Monaten
|
|
MAI
7
Q4 2026 Earnings Call
vor etwa 2 Monaten
|
|
MÄR
10
2026 Cantor Global Technology & Industrial Growth Conference
vor 4 Monaten
|
|
MÄR
3
Morgan Stanley Technology
vor 4 Monaten
|
|
FEB
11
Wolfe Research Auto
vor 5 Monaten
|
|
FEB
5
Q3 2026 Earnings Call
vor 5 Monaten
|
|
DEZ
11
Barclays 23rd Annual Global Technology Conference
vor 7 Monaten
|
|
DEZ
3
UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
vor 7 Monaten
|
|
NOV
18
Wells Fargo's 9th Annual TMT Summit
vor 8 Monaten
|
|
NOV
6
Q2 2026 Earnings Call
vor 8 Monaten
|
|
SEP
8
Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
SEP
4
Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
vor 10 Monaten
|
|
AUG
19
Shareholder/Analyst Call - Microchip Technology Incorporated
vor 11 Monaten
|
|
AUG
12
KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
vor 11 Monaten
|
|
AUG
7
Q1 2026 Earnings Call
vor 11 Monaten
|
aktien.guide Basis
Microchip Technology — 2026 Evercore Global TMT Conference
1. Question Answer
Welcome to the Microchip fireside chat. My name is Mark Lipacis, I'm the senior semiconductor analyst from Evercore ISI. We're very honored to and excited to have Steve Sanghi, the Chairman and CEO of Microchip; and Eric Bjornholt, who is the Senior Vice President and CFO.
So I think we'll just jump right into it. One of the biggest questions that we get is how big is any one of our company's data center and AI exposure. And you guys had a press release this week, which kind of spelled this out. You talked about 2 different -- 2 segments here, and there's a Venn diagram, and the data center and compute end market, which is 18% of your revenues. And then data center solutions business unit which was $300 million in '25 expected to grow 65% to $500 million in 2026. So Steve, maybe if you could help us understand what is the difference between these 2 categories that you broke out for us?
Yes. Thank you, Mark. I think many of the investors we have talked to were a bit confused and they felt that the $303 million that we broke out was the total size of our data center exposure, and that is really not correct. So let me take a chance to clarify it.
So the end market that we break out every year is data center and compute end market. And that is 18% of our total business. So when you do 18% of our calendar year '25 sales, that comes out to be $787 million business, that is data center and compute.
Now out of that $787 million, our Data Center Solutions business unit, which makes products 100% for the data center only market, was the $303 million, which leaves the $484 million unaccounted for. And some of that is data center and some of that is compute. And that is harder to break out because that has our catalog microcontrollers, our catalog analog products, mixed signal products, memory, security, timing, temperature sensors, fan control units, all that kind of stuff that goes in PCs, it goes in data centers, it goes into power supplies and they could be for data center or PC. So a portion of that $484 million is also in the data center. And therefore, the total data center exposure is a $303 million plus a significant portion of the $484 million.
Got you. So the $303 million that is products that you make specifically for the data center. So is it fair to say those are ASSP kinds of products or...
They are. They include PCI Express. They include storage controllers, storage accelerators. They include the storage memory products, PCI Express memory controller, CXL memory controllers, so all those parts, exclusively made for the data center. And then you have a huge amount of exposure to the data centers from catalog products.
Got you. Okay. So now you talk about a 65% growth for the -- for that business, the Data Center Solutions business, the products that are specifically made for the data center business, you didn't talk about the growth of the broader category data center and compute end market. Is it fair to say that, that in aggregate, that 18% of revenues would be a higher growth business for you than what you would expect for your corporate average. Is that fair to say?
So we didn't try to estimate the $787 million because $787 million is a mixture of it. A portion of those are microcontrollers that are going to laptops and loading docks and others and their growth rate is nowhere close to the data center growth rate. So in that, there are some high-growth products for the data center, but there are also some low growth products for PCs and docks and printers and all that. And we didn't try to estimate the overall growth rate of that. But year-over-year, our end market mix hasn't changed that much.
Fair enough. Okay. And then now in the press release, I believe you also discussed price increases. We do channel checks every quarter. And this past quarter, we identified 16 separate analog companies that took their prices up. But you were highlighted as one of the few companies that did not. So the question is, why did you wait so long to do so?
So it's a very good question. So I think there are 2 kinds of products in the industry. There are commodity products where they're easily exchangeable from one supplier to the other like the memory products. And on those commodity products, often you can increase the price when the supply is tight, and then purchasing manager will beat you down when the supply is excess and the parts -- the costs go down and the ASP goes down. But then there are second kind of products, which are proprietary products, which is what we make, microcontrollers, analogs, FPGA, data center products and others.
Historically, in our industry, prices have not gone up for the proprietary products. There is an unwritten promise to the customer that if you design with my proprietary products, you can safely think that I can deliver this price for the length of that design. COVID was the first time in my memory post-COVID where the shortages were so acute that people took advantage and raise the prices on all the proprietary products also. There were also a high amount of input cost inflation at that time. So it became necessary to pass some of those price increases. But that was really the first time. Historically, prices have always gone down, maybe low single digit.
So this is now the second time after COVID where some of our competitors have raised prices just because they can. Now we raised prices 3x post-COVID and we managed to damage our relationship with the customers. Some of them were upset. Pricing was not the only thing. We also had a very unpopular PSP program which force the customer to take the products when they no longer wanted the product, and then they got left with a year, 2 years' worth of inventory, which they have been bleeding for the last 3 years. And finally, it's coming close to correction.
So we came to an era of significantly, negatively affected damage customer relationships. When I returned back to this job in November of 2024 for the past 18 months, we have visited thousands of customers around the world and repairing our relationship, which I consider was a very successful project. And relationships are good. We're winning business. We're gaining market share. So therefore, we have taken all the input costs that have gone up so far in the first half of the year. And they're mostly internal cost, people cost, gold, copper, some raw materials and others. And we have absorbed them without giving a price increase to the customer.
In fact, despite that, our gross margin has gone up 950 bps in the last year. So we were pretty pleased with that, and we are in the striking range of our long-term target of 65% when while we were repairing the relationships, we took the high road and while others were raising prices, our customers were praising us how we were doing.
So now why the switch? So during this first half, while we had some internal cost increases, we absorbed them, we did not get external cost increases from our foundries and assembly test partners. We were able to hold them at bay. And finally, we can't hold them at bay. Now we have price increases with effective dates and percentage wafer cost or assembly test cost is going up in the second half of the year. So therefore, we felt prudent that we can no longer do that, and we needed to take those costs and pass it to our customers.
So what we're doing is we're taking the costs we have absorbed in the first half plus the new cost increases that are coming in the second half. We have totaled them up and we'll margin it up and distribute it among our customers. So considering we have absorbed the first half cost ourselves it will be slightly margin accretive, but the goal is really to be margin neutral. But the fact that it's a very complex equation across thousands of customers and 100,000 SKUs. We do not know how to hit the bull's eye, so we're going to hit on the right of it and not allow it to go on the left of it. So therefore, it would be slightly margin accretive.
Got you. How -- I appreciate that you don't want to give the specific variance even though I know I'm going to guess you have the variance, but how are you able to absorb the cost? What did you do to absorb those costs? And your gross margins went up despite higher input costs?
So we had very large inventory reserve charges. We have very large underutilization charges. I believe 3 or 4 quarters ago, seem to remember the number, we had $122 million of inventory reserves plus underutilization charges in 1 quarter. I believe that was a June quarter last year.
And as a business started ramping and as we cut production in the fab, our inventory charges came down by a huge amount and these internal cost increases was a small fraction of it. So our gross margin was rising, while we absorb those small amount of costs.
Got you. And what is the -- what is the impact to the customer relation shift? Is it -- as you held off raising prices, and we -- to me, it was remarkable to see 16 companies that we identified, and I'm sure there's more that they raised up prices. Does that drive -- does that help you win some share back or...
It did. It did. We have thousands of customers coming back to us. We've gotten praise from our customers, how we treated them. And we told them we were not increasing the prices, and they were very happy with it. So one, it helped us improve the relationship, which we already were doing it through other means. When the competitors started raising prices, it accelerated our customer relationship improvement, and we got -- we're winning new designs, we're winning every push because customers think, others are raising prices and we're not.
So the question obviously comes now as we also raised the price, how would that go? Number one, our price increase would be small. Number two, it will be very justified. We are passing on our cost increases to customers will understand. Competitors have raised prices, some of them more than once and we held them off for the first quarter -- first half, and we're going to raise some in the second half. Most of these will not be attractive until probably in September. So mostly the effect will be in the fourth quarter. So I think customers will really appreciate and it will not damage our relationship.
So -- and that's interesting for me because our checks indicated that those 16 companies were effectively raising them instantaneously. So it sounds like you're still like a 6-month window where you're not racing relative to the competition out there.
So on proprietary products, you can essentially raise the price and put the gun to the customers head and forced it. It doesn't mean you have to do it. You can do it, but it doesn't mean you have to do it. And we have decided not to do it.
And that, in part, at least, is driven by your desire to rebuild the goodwill with your customers?
Yes.
So -- and if we look at the data center solutions business, you mentioned the 3 buckets like storage controllers, PCI Express, CXL and switches and retimers. How -- like rough numbers, like are these equally sized businesses roughly? Or is there like a skew on one group versus the other?
They are equal size, wide brackets, but they're roughly equal, 1/3 in the storage controller area, 1/3 in the memory controller area, where we have the solid state disk drive controller as well as hard disk drive controllers and some CXL and then the PCI Express, the retimer revenue is 0, we just haven't even put the first part in production.
Got you. And then can we -- can you drill down on the PCI Express Gen 6 product that you have? I believe that you mentioned your market share on the Gen 4 product was pretty good. Gen 5, you missed a product cycle and so quite a bit disappeared. And now you're coming back with Gen 6, and you seem to be optimistic there. So can you help us like quantify like what did you lose? And what could you come back? And why do you -- where does the confidence come from?
So this business was acquired through Microsemi. Microsemi had acquired PMC-Sierra and then when we acquired Microsemi in 2018, we got that business. And PMC-Sierra/Microsemi had done pretty good on Gen 2, Gen 3, Gen 4. Actually, Gen 4 happened on MYCLOCK after 2018, between 2018 and 2021. So in all those generations, we had a good share of the market. It was very good business, high profitability.
And then during the COVID and post-COVID years. It was era after Gen 5 and Microchip was about 2 years late to production on Gen 5. Basically, we tried to design -- I wasn't the CEO at that time. I kind of stepped down, so it was a different management team. We tried to design SerDes inside. And every 2 weeks, it looked like we were 2 weeks away, and it kept on for too long and nobody really pulled the trigger and saying, enough is enough. We need to get the product out to the market and let's go license SerDes from somebody else, which is what I did on Gen 6, and that's what we're doing for Gen 7. But when we were 2 years late to the market, we basically lost the market, people designed it with whoever had the part.
So then eventually, when we came out with Gen 5 2 years late, we won some designs in the last 1.5 years. But they're all in the second source position because the pole position had gone to somebody else.
So what I have generally said is we lost several hundred million dollars of business per year on that Gen 5 alone. We haven't quantified exactly, but it was several hundred million dollars. So it's a very, very large loss and in that way, we can never allow it to happen again. And when we came on Gen 6, now we have one of the best parts in the industry, the only 3-nanometer part in the industry on PCI Express Gen 6. We now have 8 design wins. One of them is a $100 million per year design win that we have talked about. Every customer that we had in Gen 2, Gen 3, Gen 4, and including all the customers that we lost in Gen 5, they're all evaluating our chip because it's a better chip in the market.
Now the question is how many of those we will get back when we hurt them on Gen 5 because many of them were waiting on Gen 5. We made commitments, and we didn't meet and then withdrew the part almost from the market because we didn't have it. So we got some amending to do. And so therefore, we are conservative in the amount of penetration we can make on Gen 6. We think we should do better than anybody is saying, but we're not quite willing to say that yet.
Well, if you have 1 design win at $100 million annually, it seems like you're climbing some of that back, climbing some of that back.
But it seems like in the data center market, winning a $500 million design is not too much. So the $100 million uphill...
That would be a lot for me.
I'm looking for my $1 billion design win.
Right. So -- and can you help us understand is to what extent is this a product that ships into data centers that are an enterprise-oriented versus hyperscalers. I think there's a view that it's not a hyperscaler product per se. So what can you...
It is a hyperscaler product. So every hyperscaler, every server manufacturer and lots of semiconductor manufacturers that build boards by bundling their CPU, GPUs together with PCI Express. They're all looking at the part, and they're all either customers or potential customers of PCI Express.
One point I wanted to add is, over the last couple of years, 2 or 3 years, while it was the era of training the large language models, the GPU to CPU ratio was like 10:1. Now as that is shifting towards more inference, the GPU to CPU ratio is dramatically changing in the favor of CPUs. Most people are saying it's at least 1:1. I've also read people saying it's 1 GPU to 2 CPUs.
So therefore, when the -- in the data center, the percentage of GPUs to CPU moves in the favor of CPUs, it's a bonanza for PCI Express because PCI Express connect the GPU to CPU, CPU to memory, CPU to any peripheral, GPU to any peripheral. When there are lots of GPUs, the GPU to GPU is through NVLink. But GPU to anything else or CPU to anything else is often through PCI Express. So therefore, any estimates that we have seen so far on the size of the PCI Express market, and I don't have any numbers to quote, would be found underestimated. Therefore, it's a big opportunity for us.
So I will say, our own checks indicate when we talk to you about a couple of dozen hyperscalers that CPU to GPU ratio goes to 1:1 or 2:1 and that's kind of where they -- the average is landing between 1:1 and 2:1. But we also have learned this week that with agentic that the agents are calling more database workloads, and that's causing more demand for your standard CPUs also. So it's not just an agentic -- agentic CPU idea, it's agents caused demand for the standard CPUs also, which is quite interesting.
And those CPUs will require PCI Express to access memory, storage, RAID cards, peripherals, anything else.
Got you. Okay. So I want to shift to the aerospace and defense market, which I believe is one of your fastest-growing businesses. But was there anything else in the data center business you think is important for investors to keep in mind?
Anything else going on?
Yes, we covered it. Okay. Got you. All right. So this was, I believe, it made up 18% of your revenues in fiscal '26. Can you talk about the segments here? What's driving that?
So there are 3 segments in aerospace and defense. There is aviation. There is military hardware, offensive and defensive and then there is space. And there are things happening on all 3. For a while, the aviation production was way down when the MAX [ 750 ] planes were not really being manufactured. And now Boeing has the largest backlog ever in the building planes like crazy and -- and we are in other planes, too, French planes and others. And parts are loaded with Microchip's products on these planes. So that part of the business is doing very well.
When you look at the number 2, which is a military hardware and software, first it is the largest among the 3. And we used up about half of the arsenal we had built in 20 years and 2 months war. And so they're trying to rebuild it and Trump has asked all the primes to ramp their production 4x and to ramp production 4x, many of them have to build the new buildings and new factories. So this is not a short-term kicker, but it's a very long-term sustainable growth from the military hardware buildup.
And those primes are coming to you...
Those primes are coming to you. I've taken direct phone calls from CEOs or primes and saying, what is your capability to ramp up? And I'm asking, give me the order. They just said, are you ready? We're ready to do work. I mean we make thousands of products. You have to give me a specific product. How many do you want? Is it missile? Is it plane? Is it -- so the thing is that we are in every single military offensive and defensive hardware. We're in every missile, every plane, every battle tank, every rifle, every radar installation, every interceptor, every drone. And so it's very, very broad, and there are hundreds and hundreds of products that go into that structure. So they really -- you need to work either by a forecast or by order on specific parts. And we're getting those orders, but majority of them, we haven't gotten yet because it's still being worked, and they're really getting their own act together because our product is not the only product needed and it starts with ammunition and metal and housing and all that casings.
You need a complete kit...
Yes, you need a complete kit, and they've got challenges all over the place in being able to ramp it. So that part of the business looks very good.
And third piece of that is space. America has new fascination with space that I haven't seen since the Apollo years. We want to go back to moon and land the man on the moon in '28 and the recent Lunar mission where we went around the Lunar orbit, it was loaded with Microchip product. There are multimillion dollars of product in that mission and we'll have in every mission, I think there are 2 or 3 missions before we land the man on the moon. And then, we want to go to Mars and we want to colonize Mars and I don't know why, but as long as I'm making money. I'm okay with it.
And then you have the fourth piece of that, which is the new space. And these are low Earth orbit, the LEO, where SpaceX and others are trying to build a constellation of these satellites. And that market is a little different because they're not trying to send them up for the last 50 years like NASA is trying to do. If they last 5 years and come back in and run up in atmosphere, they just launched another 1,000 of them. They just do it in volume. They do it cheaply, and it's a different business model.
And many times, they're using lower-grade parts. They're certainly not using deep-space parts. Sometimes they're using the radiation-tolerant parts. Other times, they're simply using the automotive-grade parts and using them in parallel with a high amount of redundancies. If one fails, the other one will work and things like that. So we are participating in that, too, and we don't know how large that market becomes.
So when I think of this business, I think because you have to build in the redundancy or the -- and this -- the concept of rad-hard packaging, like I think, these are higher gross margin of businesses. Is that fair?
The space part of it, which is radiation-tolerant as well as radiation-hardened are very high gross margins with highest -- incredibly high gross margin. Because it very hard to make and it takes a long time to make them and then you have to build the parts and then take a sample and burn them in and test them with the radiations for a period of time, and then they pass, then you can ship a lot. So it's like a 9 months to a year production cycle. The parts that are going into LEO, especially if they're not radiation-hardened, if they're automotive-grade parts, then they're just off the shelf, they can be bought from distribution. So that model is different.
Got you. And do you -- some companies talk about -- we'll give a TAM per satellite? Is that something that you have shared in the past?
No, I don't know what that is.
Okay. Got you. Okay. So I know that you are a student of the cycle. And so I want to get your perspective on -- how do we think about where we are right now. Do you think your customers downstream from you, not just 1 layer deep but multiple layer deeps, where do you think they are in the inventory restocking cycle? Are they below normal? Are they normal? Are they above? Are they trying to restock? Where are we in the cycle?
So, we had a lot of inventory post-COVID because of the PSP program, we didn't allow customers to push out or cancel the parts they no longer needed. So as a result, we had nearly up to a year to 2 years of inventory, a lot of customers and distribution inventory was more than twice of really what would be normal. And we have spent the last 2, 2.5 years now cleaning up that inventory. The distribution inventory is now normal, actually, I could say, it's slightly below normal, but it's not perfect. Some distributors are below normal, some others still have a little high inventory. So it's kind of out of mix also.
And the customers is a very long-tail customer, 110,000 customers, hard to know who has worked, but seeing that thousands of customers who were no longer buying the part because they were using inventory and now they're buying the part and customer count is increasing by the 1,000 is a very good indication that thousands of customers' inventory is coming down. So they're reengaging to buy the part.
So I think that part of the cycle where the inventory correction happens is largely done, could have another quarter or so left. And then the customers are now buying to their consumption. Now at the same time, as they're buying to their consumption, volume has gone up significantly. We're up 34% versus the same quarter a year ago. So in that situation, and with the AI growth, AI is crowding out some of the assembly test capacity at subcontractors, some of the processes also.
So as those shortages start to materialize and work in the system and lead times start to go up, I think that will start the real upcycle of restocking, which in our business hasn't begun yet. Maybe it's begun in AI and all that, but automotive customers are not rebuilding inventory, industrial customers are not rebuilding inventory, appliance customers are not rebuilding inventory. Would they build in the second half? Maybe, but they're not building it yet because our internal inventory still coming down, customer inventory had just corrected. Some of them haven't even corrected yet. So it's early part to use the word restocking. I don't think it has begun yet or it will be done later.
But now what is happening on the top of the inventory-driven cycle is the innovation-driven cycle and innovation-driven growth is layering on the top of that. And you're seeing the innovation-driven growth in data centers we talked about. You have seen that innovation-driven growth in aerospace and defense we talked about. We're seeing the innovation-driven growth in automotive, we haven't talked about automotive, and we're seeing it in industrial. Industrial, as the onshoring is happening and factories are moving from China to here, they're not duplicating the Chinese labor incentive -- intensive factories in U.S. They are automating them. They're moving arms, their robots, there's conveyors. So it's really -- factories are really being retooled for a lower number of people working in the factory in a high amount of automation, which means they're loaded with our products with sensors and controllers and PCI Express or USB and connectivity and all over.
So there's stuff happening in the industrial sector. The things happening in medical, advanced medical equipment, is loaded with semiconductors or open phase MRI systems where you don't have that claustrophobic feeling that they push you in for 40 minutes inside that tube. All these innovation-driven growth things that we're seeing in the industrial market.
And the automotive market, what's happening in the automotive market is there are -- the unit growth is low single digit. But the content growth is much higher. We've got 81 chips in 100 Genesis. We have 61 chips in Mercedes S-Class cars and on, and on, and on. So the number of parts are multiplying.
And what's happening in the cars is, today, there are 6 or 7 distinct protocols for connectivity. There is a car area network, which is called CAN bus. There's a LIN bus. There's an entertainment bus that's called MOST. There's USB connectivity in every car. There is Ethernet. There's RS-232, there's RS-485.
Now when the car was in a connected car, then these protocols can reside in various modules themselves because they're not talking to anybody. But if you want to be able to press a button in the cockpit, like I can do my -- in my Tesla and saying, what is my tire pressure? In 3 seconds later, it shows a tire pressure of all 4 tires on my screen. Then you're connecting to every part of the car. And when you're connecting to the car and you have multiple protocols, then you need bridges to convert signal from one protocol to the other, so you can centrally access it on whatever your screen is connected to. And that is expensive and then it's a complex design.
So what automotive manufacturers are trying to do is converge all those protocols to a single Ethernet-based 10BASE-T1S protocol that runs 10 megahertz per second. It's fast enough for the automobile. It's not your office Ethernet wire, which is an 8-strand wire and can carry 10 gigahertz. The wire we're talking about is single pair twisted pair, 2-strand wire, and it can carry 10 megabit per second for the length of the car that is good enough. And all those protocols are converging to this single standard, and we're leading the standard, winning virtually every design. These are '28 production year starts, some in '27, more than '28 and '29. So that's the innovation-driven growth happening in the automotive.
So I think that's how I will describe the cycle where there is an inventory cycle driven growth, which is a normal semiconductor. And then there is just incredible innovation in these 4 segments, which seems like it's below normal innovation activity. It has really accelerated. And with the help of AI tools, customers design cycles are shrinking, our design cycles to deliver these innovative products are shrinking, time to write software is shrinking. So it's very productive delivery of this innovation that should drive revenue and be a very profitable revenue, exciting time.
So we have a cyclical dynamic here from my standpoint, our own -- we debated this yesterday, right? We still -- looks to us like you are still shipping below your trend line. And if your customers are shipping to demand, but they haven't started restocking, I would say that's consistent with our analysis. You have to have -- you have to bring your inventories back to a normal safety stock to get there.
And then there's a secular dynamic. And so it seems to you like you have an innovation -- you have innovation cycles on 4 dimensions. If I think about the past, I would say, oh, you have an innovation cycle in handsets and then -- or before that in PCs, but it seems like you have 4. And I'm wondering if you think about the industry, which has grown about 5% or 6% over time, if you have AI and automotive innovation and industrial innovation, is there a chance do you think about this opportunity for that long-term growth trend line for your industry or for Microchip to go higher than that historical 5% to 6%?
I mean, absolutely, we completed a 5-year strategic long-range plan. in January, putting all this understanding into it. And I asked our 20 business units to give me a long-range plan that you can sign in blood, means it's conservative. And they all did that, and 2 quarters have gone by, we're well ahead of what they put together, which means they were conservative. But even the conservative numbers that came up for the next 5 years, its growth was pleasurable. It was good. And it was much higher...
I guess, you're not going to share that.
No, we're not going to share that, but it's much higher than the numbers you talked about. And if that is conservative, that's even more music to my years.
So we have a little bit of time left. I want to ask -- I don't want to let Eric off of the hook. So I'm going to ask him one and I got one last one for you. So Eric, assuming we are in the place in the cycle that it seems like we're on the same page on. What is your -- what are you going to do with the cash, the free cash flow that you generate?
So obviously, we're going to continue to pay the dividend at the levels that it's at, but we are still really focused on paying down debt and getting our leverage down. We got into trouble in last cycle when the EBITDA fell so far. And with that, we had to actually come to the market with an equity instrument last March doing this mandatory convertible preferred.
So we don't want to find ourselves in that situation again. So going to maintain the dividend where it's at, not do stock buyback, generate cash, pay down debt and get the leverage down. So this quarter, we will end with net leverage below 3x. It's not where we want to be, but much improved from where we were, and I think we should make rapid progress through the rest of the year.
Got you. Okay. Fair enough. And then, Steve, last question. You, as much as any CEO, talk to investors, your shareholders. What do you think is the biggest disconnect or misperception about Microchip versus how you understand the fundamentals of the company and the opportunity?
Well, I think somewhere close to 60% to 75% of the time gets taken by the data center talk, and they just seem to not be able to get off that topic in most meetings. Automotive doesn't come up, industrial doesn't come up, aerospace and defense, when they get off data center, then start talking about SpaceX and others. So investors are very focused in these couple of segments. And sometimes they'd miss the beauty of Microchip's broad customer base, broad end market exposure into definitely 4 of these markets that are doing really great. Appliance market is kind of so-so. So I think that's -- sometimes they're going to miss out and sometime in any remaining time gets spent on trying to push us on why the margin should go higher than 65%.
I've heard that on the earnings call.
Yes.
So all right. Well, fair enough. Well, listen, we're out of time. Steve and Eric, thank you for joining. Thanks for sharing the insights about Microchip and the industry. Really enjoyed the conversation.
Thank you, Mark.
Thanks, Mark.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — 2026 Evercore Global TMT Conference
Microchip Technology — 2026 Evercore Global TMT Conference
Fireside-Chat: Microchip klärt Data‑Center‑Exposure, verteidigt Preisstrategie, betont PCIe Gen6‑Comeback und fokussiert Schuldenabbau.
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Fokus: Management will Missverständnisse zur Data‑Center‑Exponierung ausräumen, Marktanteile in High‑End‑Server‑Bausteinen zurückgewinnen und gleichzeitig Beziehungen zu Kunden reparieren.
- Risikosteuerung: Kurzfristige Preismaßnahmen erfolgen, um steigende Foundry‑ und Testkosten zu decken; langfristig Priorität auf Marge und Kundenbindung.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Data‑Center‑Segmente: 18% des Umsatzes sind Data‑Center/Compute (~$787M in CY'25); die reine Data Center Solutions‑Sparte ist $303M und spezialisiert auf Server‑ASSPs.
- PCIe Gen6: Rückkehr mit 3nm‑Lösung, acht Design‑Wins inklusive eines einzelnen Designs mit ~$100M/Jahr Potenzial; Ziel: Marktanteile zurückerobern.
- Luftfahrt & Verteidigung: Starkes, breit gestreutes Wachstum (Aviation, Military, Space) mit langfristigen Aufbauprogrammen und hohen Margen bei rad‑toleranten Teilen.
🆕 Neue Informationen
- Konkrete Zahlen: Data Center Solutions soll 2025 $303M erreichen und 2026 um ~65% auf $500M wachsen.
- Preisplan: Erstmals nach H1 werden Preisaufschläge in H2 umgesetzt; Wirkung überwiegend im Q4, Ziel: margin‑neutral bis leicht positiv.
- Kapitalallokation: Kein Buyback angekündigt; Dividende bleibt, freier Cashflow wird primär zur schnellen Schuldentilgung verwendet (Netto‑Leverage unter 3x Ende Quartal).
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Data‑Center‑Abgrenzung: Analysten forderten Klarheit zur Unterscheidung zwischen exclusive‑Data‑Center‑ASSPs ($303M) und katalogbasierten Teilen (anteiliges Exposure aus $484M).
- Preis‑Timing & Kundenreaktionen: Kritische Nachfrage, warum Microchip später als andere erhöht; Management betont bewussten Verzicht zur Wiederherstellung von Goodwill, nun aber notwendige Weitergabe gestiegener Zulieferkosten.
- Inventarzyklus: Nachfrage, ob Restocking begonnen hat; Management sieht Distribution weitgehend normalisiert, Kundenbestände größtenteils gesäubert, echtes Restocking aber noch nicht flächendeckend.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Relevanter strategischer Shift: Microchip balanciert Kundenbeziehungen und Margenschutz, konkretisiert Data‑Center‑Exposition und setzt auf technisches Comeback (PCIe Gen6) plus starkes Wachstum in Aerospace/Defense; kurzfristig bleibt der Hebel Inventar/Foundry‑Kosten, mittelfristig Chancen durch mehrere Innovations‑Treiber.
Microchip Technology — Bank of America 2026 Global Technology Conference
1. Question Answer
Okay. Good afternoon, everyone. Welcome back to the session of BofA Global Tech Conference. I'm Vivek Arya from BofA Semiconductor and Semicap Equipment research team and really honored to have the team from Microchip join us this afternoon. Steve Sanghi, Chairman and CEO; and Eric Bjornholt, Vice President and the Chief Financial Officer.
We will start with some opening remarks from Steve, then I'll go through my questions, but please feel free to raise your hand if you'd like to bring anything up.
With that, really warm welcome to you, Steve and Eric, really happy that you could join us at the conference. And Steve, maybe let me turn it over to you.
Thank you, Vivek. And before I begin, I wish to remind you that during this presentation, we may be making some projections and other forward-looking statements. These are predictions, and the actual results may vary materially. So I refer you to our filings with the SEC regarding some important risk factors about the company.
So what I'm going to talk about is 2 things, which were both in the press release yesterday, you must have read them, but just going to expand on it a little bit more. The first is the data center. So we have been getting numerous requests from investors to give them more information regarding our data center business. So the challenge is that in our end market breakdown, we have been breaking out the data center and compute as one of the end market, which is about 18% of our business. On a calendar year basis where we provided the information based on our calendar year 2025 revenue, that 18% comes out to be about $787 million. There's plus or minus 2% error band because there's a lot of suppositions and estimates in there.
Now out of that business, the challenge is that we have a data center solutions business unit, which is pure data center, 100% of their products going to data center. And that business unit produced $302.7 million in calendar '25, out of that $787 million total.
Now that doesn't mean that our data center business was only $302.7 million, there are a lot of additional products, some of our microcontrollers, analog, timing products, security products, memory products and others, which go into multiple markets, data center being one of them, and many of these products are catalog products that also get sold through distribution and contract manufacturers which will bundle the total sale in a given product, some portion is going to data center, but some could be going to industrial. So there are a lot of estimates involved.
And our total data center business is somewhere between that $303 million to $787 million. But since there is much more difficult because of going into multiple markets. What we decided to do is give you our revenue for just the Data Center Solutions business unit, which is 100% into data centers. And that was $302.7 million and expected to grow to about $500 million in calendar year '26.
Now we'll continue to do more work on it and see if we can take the difference between $787 million and $303 million and break it out further into what is in compute and what is in data center, but we were not able to do that by yesterday. So that was the one part of the press release. And as I had various one-on-ones, I think some people were still confused where they thought the total size of exposure to data center was $302.7 million. That is not the case. That is only the data center solutions business unit.
The second item in the press release was pricing. So until last week, we were essentially saying we're not increasing prices to our customers. Essentially, some of the operational cost increases we have incurred with people, chemicals, gases, transportation, energy, gold, copper and others, so far, we have absorbed them without giving a price increase to our customers. And despite all that, our gross margin in the last year has gone from 52% to 61.5% in the last quarter, and we're guiding to about 63 point -- I don't know what the exact guidance is this quarter, but...
62.75%.
62.75% this quarter. And that's happening despite us absorbing some of the cost increases. And so far, we were able to push back on our suppliers, foundry and OSAT and other suppliers that we can take a price increase and we didn't incur them. But now it's becoming much more difficult because essentially they have been able to pass those price increases to all of our competitors, and they're passing those price increases on us and there are dates and times and percentages by technology, by foundry, by OSAT, that will be coming up where our costs will be going up. So finally, and we've been doing this analysis for some time. But a decision was finally made 2 days ago, Sunday evening in a worldwide call where we put all this data together that we have been putting it together for some time and made a decision that we will have to increase prices to take the cost increase we're incurring and margin it up and give it to our customers.
Now at this point in time, we have no estimates on the amount of cost increase or price increase on the customer, which products wIll see it and which customers will see it, how we will deal with distribution, how we will deal with direct customers. All that work has to be put together in the next 2 to 3 weeks. And then our salespeople and business unit leaders will take those price increases to our customers. So we don't really have any more detail on that.
We will not be telling you the average price increase for obvious reasons, one, that's a competitive information. And second, if a customer knows what the average is, then nobody will take more than the average, and that would create a problem if we want to exempt some customers where we are still repairing our relationship. So we had to make that up by giving more cost increase to somebody who's a non-partner. But if you come up with an average number, then nobody will allow you to do that. So we will not be disclosing how much price we are increasing and just executed in the marketplace.
So with those 2 updates, I'm happy to take any questions, Vivek.
Thank you, Steve. So maybe continuing on that pricing theme. As you mentioned, Microchip has -- by being somewhat more resistant to taking pricing, right, whereas many, I would say, in fact, all of your, in analog and kind of power semi competitors have taken pricing. How much of that, Steve, was just because you were still in the customer relationship repairing mode. And now when they see this, what do you think is going to be their reaction, does it impact that progress that you've been making?
So I think you have to look at through cycles. So in the last cycle, we took pricing up a little too much, one time longer than probably they did, and we were much harsher on our PSP program in the noncancelable, nonreturnable, nonreschedulable, then our competitors were. So we upset some customers where our competitors treated them better.
Now fast forward in the last 1.5 years, we have done very good with our customers, repaired it lot of relationships. And this time, our competitors took the very first opportunity and raised the price on them, while we told our customers that we're absorbing the cost increases and you're not getting a price increase. So net flow of the customer has been towards us. We've won many, many designs and customers don't like our competitors today, they like us. And some of them have done 2 price increases already. We haven't even done one.
So when we go back to them saying we have held a price increase now all year, and we've treated you better and all that, and they have seen 2 price increases from the competitors. So when they hear from us that we're doing a price increase, number one, they will not be surprised. And if the amount is reasonable, I think they would be understanding our relationship will still be very good.
Got it. And just to confirm, this is not happening because of shortages, right? I mean, your lead times are still, right, reasonable.
It has nothing to do with shortages or excess. It has nothing to do with increasing the price because we can. I mean if we really wanted to, we could increase the price more. So it's just purely have to driven where we don't want to gouge the customers but we don't want a headwind on our gross margin. So we'll take an estimate of our cost increases, margin it up and give it to them and be able to explain it.
Got it. And historically, Steve, has this resulted in some kind of prebuying or extra buying, anticipating that, oh, look, there is this another price increase coming? So let me buy more now? Or do you think it could be...
So it depends on how you implement it. If you say we're going to -- if you wait too long, give them too much of a time to buy the product, then they will try to buy some product in advance at the lower prices, we will increase the price on the backlog. And any incremental orders we see over and above the run rate, we'll schedule them at a new price after the price increase was effective. So therefore, there will be no incentive. And if anybody places the order, we'll schedule them after and then we are at the new prices. So there should be no games really. I mean it shouldn't affect our revenue. There should be no pull-in effect because we get to schedule it, and we'll -- just based on the lead times, today have 7 to 8 weeks, the window will probably give them will be shorter than that. So essentially, all that will fall outside of the price increase.
Got it. Makes sense. And then is there a scenario where this is a tailwind, albeit a modest one to gross margins? Or do you expect it to be neutral? Or how should we think about the benefit?
So a couple of things. We have absorbed some of the internal operational cost increases thus far. And when we're increasing the price, we're including in it. So there is a little bit of the recovery that we have incurred the cost and I will pass it on, which will make it slightly accretive.
The second part is, our target is to be margin neutral, but you can never hit the bull's eye and I don't want to have the risk of being on the left side, so we want to be on the right side. So given at all, it will end up being slightly accretive, but only because of we can't be so precise.
Got it. This kind of bridges into the next few questions about your data center. Is it fair to think that most of your data center sales are coming from parts that you get from foundry. So if that is the fastest-growing part of the business that you are always kind of exposed to this inflationary impact?
Well, inflationary impact is not only on foundries. We are seeing the similar inflationary impact inside because foundries, their cost is going up on their people and chemicals and gases and energy and transportation and all that. And that shows up in their wafer costs and they give it to us a higher price. But our internal manufacturing is doing the same. They have the same inflationary cost increases.
But in answer to your question, our data center solutions business unit products are all outside, but not our total data center exposure, some of our analog products, our microcontroller products, some of our security products, timing products that go into data centers are produced inside.
Got it. Okay. And the growth rate that you described for the data center business, I think, 60% plus. How do you benchmark that, right? Do you think it's the right growth rate because there's such a wide range of growth rates that we see across the data center, right, is like can that be sustained over the next few years? How should investors think about just your data center? First, maybe let's start with what is in that data center number? What specific end markets applications and then growth rate?
So in the Data Center Solutions business unit, we make 3 product lines with the fourth one coming. And the first product line is our storage controllers, storage accelerators and storage expanders. And in that product line, we have about 3x performance advantage to our nearest competitor. So it's very state-of-the-art and it's doing very well.
The second product line in that is PCI memory controllers and CXL memory controllers. And there again, we're kind of leading the industry.
And the third product line is PCI Express Switch. Now in PCI Express Switch, we did very well when we bought the business from Microsemi, they had done the Gen 2, Gen 3 and Gen 4. I'm sorry -- Gen 2 and Gen 3. Gen 4 happened after we had bought the business and Gen 4 happened on MYCLOCK when I was CEO last time, and we did very well in those.
And then we screw up on Gen 5. That didn't happen on MYCLOCK but it happened under Microchip Clock. And we were 2 years late to the market on Gen 5. And therefore, all those Gen 5 designs went to the competition. When we eventually came up with the Gen 5 product that again happened in the last year, we won a lot of the designs again, but we got a fairly small share in the second source position, not in the primary position.
So the commitment we made is that we've got to regain our Mojo, and that's why we produce the Gen 6 product on time on one of the best products in the industry, the only 3-nanometer product, significantly higher performance than the competition and 30% to 40% lower power.
So that part is winning designs like crazy. Every single customer who did business with us is reengaged. We have publicly said in the last conference call, we have won 6 designs. And now we have won 2 more. We have 8 designs on Gen 6 Switch and we have won design on the retimer. Retimer doesn't go to production until January. So this is a very, very early win.
So I think if we had not lost all that on Gen 5, then it will be a little bit easier to make assessments of how fast it will grow or what will accelerate. We know the market is very large. And the upside is just totally incredible. If you keep winning these designs, they go to production next year, we can acquire the capacity then this could be very big. But I think we are cognizant of the fact that we are coming from behind, having missed a Gen 5, then. And we're competing with a formidable competitor with a B name in it. And so we are just a little cautious in trying to forecast anything.
Now, one of the things that's happening on the Switch side is, and you may have heard about it or read about it, during the training phase of large language models, it was the era of GPU. And the GPU to CPU ratio was as much as 10:1. But now as you convert from training phase to an inference phase, it is favoring the CPU and GPU to CPU ratio is going as much as 1:1, and I'm even starting to read 1 GPU and 2 CPU. And PCI Express connects the GPU to CPU, to CPU to CPU, GPU to memory, CPU to memory, CPU to anything, RAID card, memory controller, GPU. So as the new industries calling it CPU renaissance, if there is a new CPU renaissance and you're seeing Intel's capacity constrained, others are too. And as the CPU volumes explode, it is very, very positive for PCI Express. Because GPU to GPU connection is through NVLink. But GPU to CPU connection is through PCI Express, which is standard industry protocol.
So the market strength and conversion from training to inference favors PCI Express. So if that market grows more than anybody expects and we should really get a fair share of the market. And I think demand is going to be strong enough with probably overall TSMC capacity limited that everybody will get their fair share to what the capacity they can acquire.
All right. Is there some simple math, Steve, that you have in mind? So if, let's say, the CPU market, right, people used to talk about $60 billion, then they went to $100 billion. Now the new number is $200 billion. What does that tell you about kind of the PCI opportunity associated with it?
It is probably calculated, I haven't done that yet. I think that CPU renaissance is relatively new. So I don't think I have seen the PCI Express estimate because of that change. And that will only describe the TAM, total available market. It still wouldn't -- still it wouldn't tell us what we could win. Like I said, we are making up the loss.
Is it as simple as your share of 3-nanometer allocation at TSMC? Is that kind of the first order way of looking at your share or that other...
What we need on 3-nanometer is 0.1% or 0.2% of our [ Jensen ] need. So I'll just tell them and give me all I need and [ Jensen ] -- may feel the change and it's working so far.
So is it deterministic what your share is? Or do you think that...
It's not deterministic. We -- the part goes to production at the end of this month and winning 8 designs before the part is in production is kind of unprecedented. So because the part is that good and it's doing that good in customer tests when they put them in the board. So we think we have a winner on our hands, but we are shy in forecasting until we actually start to see these wins going in production and then multiplying like crazy.
So is there a scenario where these kind of growth rates are sustainable? Or one could...
I hope they're not only sustainable, but they accelerate. But I'm not really willing to put a number on that yet.
Okay. Understood. Next thing, Steve, is just kind of the broader analog cycle, right? Where are we -- usually, these cycles have sort of the inventory replenishment phase and then the end demand improvement phase, right? Where are we? Just because the size of these markets, especially in the data center are getting so big, so it's hard to separate out a cyclical recovery from what are kind of the secular drivers.
That's a very good question, and I've been talking about it. So the first phase of our growth in the last year has predominantly come from customers and distributors that were buying product well below their consumption level because their inventories were high. And asymptotically, they're trying to reach where they're buying equal to the consumption level. So that fed the first part of the growth, which is typically inventory depletion driven semiconductor cycle growth.
But what's being layered on it now is, 2 other things. One is the new design that we have won in the last 2 years and even in the data center, since we were so late to Gen 5 PCI Switch, we lost all those designs. But when we came back with it, we won a lot of designs where we are in the second source position. And so that PCI Express Gen 5 is ramping, waiting for the Gen 6 production to start. So we're getting some growth because of that.
But now the third phase really is the innovation-driven growth. And there is innovation happening in 4 of our end markets. It's happening in, obviously, data center. It's happening in automotive. It's happening in aerospace and defense, and it's happening in industrial. I'll spend a minute on each of them.
Data center, we have talked about, lots of innovation going on, it should grow. In the automotive, so number of automotive units per year grow in low single digits. So that has -- never been the story. The story is the consumption level inside. On some of the high-end automotive cars, we have 81 chips from Microchip in one car and 63 chips another car. So there's a large amount of Microchip content in the cars.
And today, there are so many different protocols inside the car. There is a car area network. So there's a CAN bus, there's a LIN bus , there's an entertainment bus called the MOST bus. There's USB connection inside, there's Ethernet, there's RS232.
And in the past, all these things don't need to talk to each other. Your microcontroller or tire pressure sensor. It doesn't need to talk to anything. But today, you could press the button and say, what's my tire pressure? And it will show you picture of your car, full tires, entire pressure in each of them. My Tesla does that.
So then now the car is talking to every node that is outside in a car. So therefore, in the current car setup, you have to go through bridges to convert from USB to Ethernet, car area network to USB or through Ethernet, MOST bus to Ethernet. And these bridges are expensive and bulky and extra chips that need to be added. So where the cars of '28 and '29 and '30 are going is to consolidate all those protocols into a single Ethernet-based network requiring no conversions, everything is basically that.
And we are leading that charge. That standard is called T1S, which ran on a single-twisted pair Ethernet wire, not the 8-strand wire you have in your office, but 2-strand wire, single-twisted there. And that should drive significant growth and -- there's a lot of innovation happening on it.
So we talked about data center, automotive and quickly, the third one is aerospace and defense. So aerospace and defense has aviation, has military hardware and space. And they're growing in all 3, like Boeing is building planes like crazy again where MAX 7 production is back up. Military hardware, they're trying to replenish all the hardware they have used in the wars and Trump is asking primes to quadruple their production, and that's a long-term growth for us because primes are adding capacity with brick and mortar and all that, and that revenue should do very well.
In space, U.S. as well as the world has a new fascination with space. The fascination that hasn't been seen since the Apollo days. And so we should do very well with all our space content.
And the fourth final market is industrial with what's happening in industrial with onshoring, when the factories are being onshore. They're more highly automotive. They're more highly automated. There's a lot more robotics in them than the factories. They're moving from in China. So there's more content from us. Sensors, microcontrollers, PCI Express and all these parts in the factory. And then all our parts going into humanoid and robotics and moving factory line and all that. So I think all that is innovation-driven growth, that's leading on the top of the inventory driven growth, and therefore, future looks bright.
Got it. One maybe a question on margins. I'll bring Eric into the discussion. So gross margin, right, you mentioned 62.75%, right, in June. The target is to get towards 65%. I imagine most of that is just an underutilization, right, kind of recovery?
Let me have Eric address that.
Sure. So last quarter or the March quarter, we had $46.6 million of underutilization charges. And if you add that back to our gross margin last quarter, we're essentially at 65%. So it's just going back into our capacity. It's not all going to happen at once. There's going to be a steady state that we're increasing production in the factories. We're essentially ramping our Oregon factory as hard as we can this quarter. We are shipping at a level that is well above what we're producing at. And so that's why inventory has been coming down, and we want to make sure that we bridge that gap so inventory doesn't get too low. So those underutilization charges will get much, much lower by the end of the fiscal year.
Got it. So then what about the OpEx leverage side of it? Is there a certain revenue run rate where you can achieve your target operating margins also?
I think it very much depends on the slope of the revenue curve. Today, we brought back a lot of programs that went away when we kind of went through the doldrums of the downturn. So bonuses are back to high levels of our variable comp programs, merit increases are back for employees. So there's going to be growth in OpEx dollars, but a significant portion of that happened over the last 2 quarters as we are bringing these programs back. So this quarter, we are guiding to OpEx as a percentage of revenue at about 29%. Our long-term target is 25%. And you should expect as revenue grows, that OpEx is going to grow at a slower rate as we drive towards that model.
Got it. Last question, Steve, maybe on -- we always kind of look back at history and say, look at the last peak of Microchip was here, right? Now you're still like 30% below that. Many of your peers have caught up. Now your last peak was kind of unique because of its own characteristics. What is the right way to kind of frame what your growth trajectory? Like is looking at the last peak even useful, right? What is the right way to think about that?
It is not useful. In the normal past semiconductor cycles, you could do the analysis of area end of the curve, you ship to higher and then that has to be below and when you consume it, then it returns back. That analysis is much more difficult to do from the last cycle because when we were shipping at the peak of the cycle, we were shipping hundreds of millions of dollars into inventory.
And so last peak, really, I mean, it was GAAP revenue by the definition of GAAP but it was not going into consumption. It was going into inventory. Customers, in many cases, didn't want the product, because of the LTSAs and PSP and all that, we jam that product down their throats. So therefore, that peak was very artificial.
And secondly, in the history of semiconductors, other than the memory, there haven't been price increases, right? Microcontrollers, analog, you don't go through price increase cycles -- price goes down low single digits every year for the last 40 years. So therefore, the analysis is apple-to-apple.
When there are so many price increases in the post-COVID cycle, then when you do the revenue-based analysis, it gets distorted, you've kind of got to -- go to the unit-based analysis and even in a unit-based analysis, the mix shifted a lot because during post-COVID, people gave on the low end of the businesses. So they can take the limited capacity and give it to the high end of the businesses, in high end of the businesses, there are more dollars but less units. So the unit-based analysis becomes very difficult. So I think pretty much in the last 1.5 years, every analyst or investors that have done that analysis on Microchip was really disappointed because that analysis didn't work. And we told them that it won't work, but nobody listened. So don't do that.
What is the right analysis, then?
There is none.
So how do you know whether you're at the right timeline?
How does it matter? We're growing from here and take the number and look at the opportunity ahead of us with all these 4 markets I talked about, and that's where it is. I'm already saying that the inventory depletion driven growth. It pretty much comes to an end in the next quarter or so. So rest is an innovation-driven growth. So what was the past peak? I mean, how does it help you?
Right. Makes sense.
It only confuses you.
Right. Okay. On that note, thank you so much, Steve. Thank you, Eric. Really enjoyed that discussion.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Bank of America 2026 Global Technology Conference
Microchip Technology — Bank of America 2026 Global Technology Conference
Microchip kündigt gezielte Preiserhöhungen an, veröffentlicht erstmals konkrete Zahlen zum Data‑Center‑Solutions‑BU und betont Gen6‑Switch als Wachstumstreiber.
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kern: Management legt neue Details zum Data‑Center‑Engagement offen (Data‑Center‑Solutions BU: $302,7M in CY'25, Ziel ~$500M in CY'26) und plant marktorientierte Preiserhöhungen, um gestiegene Fertigungs‑ und Betriebskosten teilweise zu kompensieren; Prognosen bleiben bewusst konservativ.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Preiserhöhung: Entscheidung zur schrittweisen Weitergabe von Kostensteigerungen an Kunden; Umfang, Produkte und Timing werden in den nächsten 2–3 Wochen operationalisiert, detaillierte Durchschnittswerte werden nicht offengelegt.
- Data‑Center: Gesamt-Exposure auf Endmarkt‑Ebene geschätzt bei ~$787M (18% des Geschäfts), die separat berichtete Data‑Center‑Solutions‑Einheit ist jedoch $302,7M und soll 2026 auf ~$500M wachsen.
- Produkt: Gen6 PCIe‑Switch auf 3‑nm‑Prozess mit deutlich besserer Leistung und 30–40% geringerem Stromverbrauch; bereits 8 Design‑Wins plus Retimer‑Design (Produktion ab Januar) — beschleunigte Kundengewinne möglich, aber Kapazitätszuweisung entscheidend.
🆕 Neue Informationen
- Zahlen: Erstmalige Nennung des Data‑Center‑Solutions‑Umsatzes ($302,7M in CY'25) und eines ~500M‑Ziels für CY'26 — unterscheidbar vom breiteren Compute/Data‑Center‑Endmarkt (~$787M, mit Schätzunsicherheit).
- Preispolitik: Konkrete Entscheidung zur Preisanpassung liegt vor; das Management will Details kunden‑ und wettbewerbsbedingt nicht veröffentlichen, erwartet aber leichte Margenverbesserung gegenüber Status quo.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Kundenreaktion: Wird als überschaubar eingeschätzt — viele Kunden hätten bereits Preiserhöhungen von Wettbewerbern gesehen; Microchip hofft, durch guter Kundenbeziehungen Akzeptanz zu erreichen.
- Pull‑In/Shortages: Management betont, die Maßnahme beruhe nicht auf Knappheit; Lead‑Times sind moderat (~7–8 Wochen) und Preiserhöhung soll Pull‑in‑Effekte durch Scheduling minimieren.
- Margendynamik: Ziel ist Margenneutralität bis leicht accretive; unter Berücksichtigung von $46,6M Underutilization‑Charges läge die Bruttomarge nahe 65% langfristig; OpEx aktuell ~29% vom Umsatz, Ziel ~25%.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Für Aktionäre bedeutet das: klarere, wenn auch konservative Signale zu Data‑Center‑Wachstum und eine bewusste Strategie zur Margensicherung durch Preisanpassungen. Entscheidende Faktoren sind die Umsetzung der Preismaßnahmen, Produktions‑/TSMC‑Kapazität für 3nm‑Teile und die tatsächliche Konversion der Gen6‑Design‑Wins in Serienumsatz.
Microchip Technology — TD Cowen's 54th Annual Technology
1. Question Answer
All right. Good morning. Welcome to our -- the second day of our 54th Annual TMT Conference. Really excited to be joined by Steve Sanghi and Eric Bjornholt from Microchip. Gentlemen, thank you so much for being here with us today.
Thank you.
Steve, we had a really interesting discussion at dinner last night, I think, about why -- how unique this past cycle was. And it feels like we're coming out of it and we can finally maybe stop talking about it.
But as we reflect on, again, coming out of the cycle and things sort of normalizing, what were things that you think is different about this cycle and perhaps are going to change for the industry going forward as we think about future balance between secular and cyclical growth?
So I think the post-COVID cycle was an extremely unique cycle. Prior cycles were driven by like we had a PC cycle years ago, we had a cell phone cycle. We had an Internet cycle. So there have been various different cycles and semiconductor inventory cycles. But the last cycle just was so extreme where artificial demand became so high and it turned out at the end that a lot of the demand that the customers asked for were not real.
And when the customers' business came down, it created a huge vacuum almost in the air pocket for almost every company. And it was almost the worst for Microchip because we had a program, which was very inflexible, which took customers' orders for a year and wouldn't take cancellations or push out and that prolonged the downturn for Microchip.
So that was the unique in that cycle. Now where we are today is for the past 2 years, the shipments to customers have been lower than what they have been using and our shipments to distributors have been lower than what they have been selling out.
And that gap has been closing. And we believe that last quarter, the shipments were distributors and their sales out were pretty close. It was only a few million dollar gap. A long tail of hundreds of thousands of customers is much harder to tell.
But by just customer count, our customer count is increasing by thousands of customers, meaning that they had inventory, they were not buying products and they're starting to buy products again.
We don't know every customer's inventory, but the customer count is increasing, indicating that a lot of the customers are coming back. So I think in another quarter or so, that part of the cycle normalizes. Customers and distributors are buying what they're using and that part of the business is normal.
But then what you have is the innovation-driven cycle that is creating the growth. During post-COVID, every design engineer was working on substituting parts, whatever they could find. And for a couple of years, there was not so much new design activity. When the parts became readily available in a down cycle, engineers went back to work to design new products and went back to innovation.
And you are seeing now the front end of all those designs going to production in industrial, in automation, in aerospace and defense, and automotive and data center. So we're seeing a huge amount of innovation-driven growth. And I would say, in 4 main markets, end markets.
Clearly, data center, we're seeing it in industrial. We're seeing in automotive. We're seeing it in aerospace and defense.
Okay. I want to get to those markets, but first, I want to basically get through the cyclical discussion. As we think about inventory levels, like we like to think about the 3 levels of on books, channel and downstream. It sounds like you're very comfortable with inventory on the balance sheet, at least in dollars, not necessarily days and channel is lean and end customer inventory levels, you're cautiously optimistic that's 90%, 95% done.
Is that the right way to think about it? And that in a quarter or 2, we will basically be shipping to consumption?
Yes.
Okay. Got it. And Eric, is that correct that like you guys -- again, the days are a little high right now, but you want to get back into that 130- to 150-day target on the balance sheet just by basically revenue growing into the inventory in dollars?
Yes. So our inventory days peaked at like 266 days a year ago, March, and we've got that down to 185 days as of the end of this last March, and that includes about 15 days of what we call last-time buy inventory from foundries that have end-of-life product that we bought product for, for the next 10 years.
So if you exclude that 15 days, that's on 170, we're growing at the midpoint of guidance this quarter, 11%. Days are dropping very rapidly to get in that 130 to 150-day range that we've set.
Okay. Last topic on the cycle, I think. So a lot of your peers have talked about raising prices more recently in light of rising input costs, but I think also just because the demand has been so strong. I think given what you mentioned regarding the PSP program, you guys seem a little bit more reluctant to raise pricing opportunistically, certainly.
Can you speak to how you're strategically thinking about pricing right now?
So there are 2 kinds of price increases. One is increasing the price opportunistically because you can when the supply is tight. Historically, in the industry, that has happened in memory and other commodity products. Design-in products, microcontrollers, FPGAs, processors and others have really in the industry not followed gouging the customer on a proprietary product.
So that is a price increase we are less interested in because our margins are good, margins are still rising. We're going to get to a model fairly soon as the underutilization goes away. So the opportunistic price increase to gouge the customer to have your margin, I think that's probably not a good thing for us to do. But the other piece is if our costs go up by our foundries and our assembly and test suppliers and we're paying higher wafer costs and this and that, then passing those to the customer is something we're more comfortable with.
Now in the history, semiconductor prices have never gone up on that. COVID -- post-COVID period was the first time where inflation just went so high and everybody landed up raising prices multiple times in those years. And this is the second time it's happening.
But I mean, largely, we have been sending the price increases and succeeding so far from our partners. But if we are not able to do that, then we'll be willing to raise the prices.
And are you guys thinking about this as an opportunity to lean in and gain share as your competitors raise prices? And how are...
Because of the first factor, where I said, if the others are raising prices opportunistically, we're not. We're having lots of their customers come engage with us.
And I guess on that note, I mean, one of your key priorities with your 9-point plan when you came back was repairing customer relationships that had been impaired partly, I think, because of the PSP program. Where are we, I guess, in that process? And is this an opportunity to, I guess, accelerate that?
So that process is largely complete. We had a massive program where we visited thousands of customers around the world. And that part of the process has gone to normal. If you were to do an unexpected price increase to gouge the customers, we'll be hurting and reversing that process.
And while our competitors are doing that, we're taking advantage of it. But the repairing part is kind of complete. I mean you have to always work with your customers and visit them and talk to them. But there's not a massive repair program that we put behind us.
Okay. Let's shift to some of the secular pieces. I think the one that's certainly on investors' mind the most for the industry, but also increasingly you guys is the data center piece. Can you walk through -- you've got products specifically for data center, but then also your broader product portfolio that is applicable to data center.
Can you walk through the key exposure and what secular opportunities you're most excited about in data center?
So we have 2 kinds of products going into data center. The first kind of the ones which are the products we design for data center and sell only in data center. That number is readily available and it's clean. And that comes from our data center business units that build 3 different product lines.
They build storage controllers, they build the memory controllers and they build PCI Express. And the business in them is about 1/3, 1/3, 1/3. And the fourth is a retimer, but it goes together with the PCI Express, so I put them in the same product category from a product line standpoint.
All 3 parts of those businesses are growing significantly from calendar '25 to calendar '26. And those are pure data center products. They only go in data centers, and that part of the business is doing very well. What complicates the data center exposure for us is all of our other catalog products coming from microcontroller business units, analog business units, security business units, power management business units that also go into data center, but they also go into the other market.
So take a digital power supply product that we could ship it to a customer that builds power supplies. They build the power supplies for PCs. They build it for servers. They build it for telecom equipment racks. And they don't break it out for us how much goes away, which is what makes this breakdown so complicated.
Similarly, we make security chips that secure access to PCs, access to cell phones, access to other communication gear and access to servers, which again is multi-market product. I can take a very simple product like a temperature sensor. The temperature sensor can go into a thermostat, which is a consumer product.
It can go into a PC to control the fan. It can go to a server also to control the fan or you can go to control an air conditioner. Now you got data center, PC, industrial, home. This is what makes the breakdown very, very complicated.
We have a substantial exposure to data center, but not yet comfortable in breaking the numbers in a way. We could make some wild guesses, and we could -- we're trying to get some more data from our customers to help us break it out, but our customer base is also very broad and long tail.
So any analysis would have some level of plus or minus around it. And we're working on it, and we want to share more information, but we don't have it today.
Maybe we could double-click on some of the more data center-specific products. And you're making a bit of a comeback with your PCIe Gen 6 switch. Can you talk about your legacy and heritage in the PCIe switching market, how you got that IP, why you lost some share in Gen 5 and then why you're optimistic that you're going to regain share in Gen 6?
So our data center business unit was acquired as part of the Microsemi acquisition in 2018. And we did -- they had done Gen 2, Gen 3 before and Gen 4 happened on our clock after 2018. And then Gen 5 happened during the post-COVID years.
And Microchip misexecuted on the Gen 5. Our part was nearly 2 years late to the market. And so therefore, all the designs went to the competitors. When we eventually came with the Gen 5 part, we got some of the designs, but we only got a second source position.
So we're shipping today Gen 5 in volume to a lot of customers, but much smaller volume than we were shipping Gen 4 and Gen 3 because we didn't have a primary position. We had a secondary position.
So we made a very strong commitment to Gen 6 and Gen 7, and we leapfrogged on Gen 6, where our competitors' parts are on 5-nanometer technology. Ours are on 3-nanometer. We have 160-lane device. Competitors have 120-lane device.
We have 30%, 40% lower power, significantly higher speed and more lane count. So we have a leadership part that is currently being looked at every hyperscaler, every enterprise, every server manufacturers, and we have disclosed 6 design wins, not by name, but there are many, many others who are looking at it.
So our knowledge of PCI Express and our knowledge of these customers and their knowledge about us is not new. We just executed one generation. And as we have a leadership part, it's very well recognized.
It's been written about. The companies who have design win with us, they have talked about it. They've given us testimonials, which we have shared with other customers. So I think our recovery and comeback on Gen 6 after the Gen 5 file would be very, very strong.
And I guess, can you talk about the competitive backdrop? I think the market has certainly gotten a lot bigger as data center infrastructure needs have grown. I guess, one, are you primarily competing with general purpose servers or accelerated server racks? And how has the competitive environment changed since you were more dominant in Gen 3 and 4 versus now?
So PCI Express is used in service and data access, GPU to CPU connection or CPU to other things connection. And as the data center market is exploding, the PCI Express demand with that is exploding. It can be in a scale up and scale out. So you're building new servers, you will need PCI Express. If you're replacing racks and putting high-performance things, which is kind of scale up, then you will need the high-performance PCI Express in that also. So the limitation of memory to CPU, memory to GPU doesn't become a constraint. So we're really participating in both scale up and scale out.
Okay. And then you talked about the 6 design wins. I think you've said that one of them alone is over $100 million. What's the time line in which we can expect that to sort of meaningfully start to layer into the model?
The device goes into production at the end of this quarter, which is another month, and then we start making a small amount of shipments, but the major ramp is next year. And the $100 million design we talked about will be production next year.
And you also recently announced your entry into the PCIe retimer market. Can you talk about where that IP came from? Why the concerted effort to move into that market? And then how synergistic is it and important with your PCIe switching business as well?
So we have some lower performance retimers in other markets, communication, et cetera. We didn't have a data server class retimer that will go with PCI Express in a very high performance, rebuilding the signal when it deteriorates. So this is our first retimer product for the data center market. And it works in conjunction with Gen 6 because as the signal weakens, retimer rebuilds a signal and provides a strong signal to go forward.
We basically did it ourselves. It's the same resources, data center business units, the design and application engineers that build the part. The part is -- has been evaluated by customers. We have one design win on it. Part only came out of fab about 6 weeks ago. And it works beautiful. I've seen it, and it works great, and I think we'll be very successful co-selling it along with our PCI Express...
Okay. One more on data center, maybe it's actually not data center. Earlier this week, you announced a 3.3 kilovolt silicon carbide module. I hadn't historically thought of Microchip is playing into that high-voltage power discrete and power semis market. Can you provide some background of what this part is targeting? And maybe your overall exposure to high-voltage power?
Yes. So we started a silicon carbide business quite a while ago, and we had grand aspirations in the silicon carbide when every EV was going to use it, there was a mandate nationally that by 2030, all the cars will be EV. The total size of the silicon carbide market was expected to be just very, very large.
And that's when we started the effort in the silicon carbide market. We made some FETs. We made some lower voltage 700 volt, 1,700-volt devices. This is the highest one. Then 2 things happened in the last 5 years. One, I believe it was Tesla that first came out and said that 80% of what we want to do in electric vehicle with silicon carbide, we can do it with silicon.
It's not as good as silicon carbide, but it is good. And that brought the market down significantly and crashed the whole silicon carbide. Second thing that happened is the EV mandates went away and consumer largely did not adopt EVs. They more adopted hybrids and range extenders and other things and the rate at which the EV market is growing significantly slowed down.
So there was a second blow to the silicon carbide market. And the third was the Chinese overbuilt for capacity in silicon carbide. So therefore, when I came back as CEO 1.5 years ago, in my deep dive analysis, we largely took the emphasis on silicon carbide away because of those reasons and combined it with our silicon power module business, so we're doing some silicon carbide, but the business unit resources are doing a lot of other things.
So this is one of the device that came from them. It will go into EV charging infrastructure. It could go into a data center. It could go into a power management where you want to do really high-power switching without loss of power, without heat generation.
And is this -- how should we think about, I guess, the time line for this materiality compared to the PCIe business, I guess?
This is not going to be a huge business.
Okay. Got it. Shifting gears, Aerospace and defense is, I think, an area that investors appreciate your position and high exposure, both from legacy Microchip, but also a lot of the Microsemi assets you acquired. Can you walk through some of the key products and exposures you have within aerospace and defense? And what are you seeing in the demand backdrop there?
Certainly. So in aerospace and defense, we have 3 businesses. We have business in aviation. We have business in water machines, offensive and defensive weapons and then we have business in space. They happen to be about 1/3, 1/3, 1/3. So aviation business is doing very good. Boeing wasn't building planes for a while when the MAX planes were down.
And now they're rebuilding, they got a 10-year backlog and those planes are loaded with our products and the demand is very, very strong. So that part of the business is doing very well. The offensive and defensive war machine, they had built this ammunition arsenal over 20 years, and they used it up in 2 months, half of it. And now they're trying to rebuild it.
So President Trump is asking prime suppliers that build these to ramp the production by 4x plus. I think the number I heard is 4x to 8x. Nobody can get to 4x, but they don't even know how to get to 4x. And for that now -- and I'm talking about primes like Raytheon and Knight Technologies and Honeywell and others. And so they're all ramping production. They're asking us.
I've spoken to CEOs of primes. They're asking our capability to ramp up. And we are in every single offensive and defensive weapon. We're in every missile, every plane, every radar installation, every drone, every interceptor, we're the largest supplier to that market, and we have broad penetration with all sorts of devices from diodes to controllers to voltage management to power management to RF to everything.
We are just huge. And so that business should do very, very well. But aerospace and defense business, it doesn't rise at the rate of the data center, but it has -- it prolongs. It will happen over multiple years. Some of these high reliability parts are -- have a long life cycle to build. It takes 9 months to build the parts sometimes.
So we're getting orders, backlog is building, and this should be a very, very good business in the coming year. It will last multiple years. The third piece of that is space. Now we are the largest supplier of rare hard or radiation hard parts to space. And space has 3 levels itself. There is a low orbit, then there's a medium orbit and there's deep space. And there's need a different level of radiation hardness to go to those 3 levels of space, and we make all of them.
And world has a new fascination with space. There was a huge fascination during Apollo times and all that. And then it kind of went away and we went to moon 40, 50 years ago, and then we didn't even go close. And now we want to land back on the moon in the next 2 or 3 years.
So a recent trip we had around the moon had millions of dollars of Microchip product on it. And as we are preparing to go to moon in 2028 and land on the moon, I think all the missions leading up to it will have a large amount of product in it. Plus we want to go to Mars, we want to land on Mars. Somebody wants to build a data center and moon. God love him, we'll have a lot of product.
I mean not very close, but closer to home on the LEO side. There's a lot of positivity now because of the SpaceX IPO. Is that something we should think about you guys participating and benefiting from given your heritage in radiation hardened products?
Or is it a different set of components than what goes further to the moon?
Some and some. I mean, Elon doesn't do anything in the normal way. So it's an incremental opportunity. But the difference is the regular space satellites that are launched by others historically are looking at longevity in a decade. It should last 20, 25 years.
Someday, slowly, it will come back in and burn off, but it will last long time. These constellation makers are looking at launching these things in volume with a high amount of redundancy, and they don't care if it burns up and comes back in, in 5 years. They'll just launch thousands more.
So they want to do it cheaply, but they want to do it in volume. So they're not using as much radiation harden devices. They are using many of the industrial and automotive-grade parts but using a large amount of redundancy to achieve the performance.
So therefore, the price level is a lot lower for the product. The business model is totally different. Business model looks a lot like the automotive industrial business model than the space business model. But the parts shipped there, if we know they're being bought by those companies, they would be an A&D business, and it's an incremental opportunity, but they also buy a lot of those parts from distributors.
So lower ASP, higher replacement cycle.
Yes. They buy those -- if they buy those parts from distributors, then we sometimes don't know who's buying it or what application they're going in to.
One of the markets we didn't talk about yet is automotive. I think you guys are optimistic that your portfolio of microcontrollers, Ethernet connectivity, 10Based-T are going to benefit from the shift to software-defined vehicle. How should we think about that in relation to your other growth drivers? And how much can that growth accelerate versus what it's done in the last few years for your auto business specifically?
So we're seeing a lot of auto growth right now, but they're not coming from T1S or ASA because those 2 protocols are still in design. Our growth is coming from automotive inventory running out, lots of new designs we have won in the regular USB, Ethernet, MOS bus and others.
So our automotive business is doing well, growing at a good rate. But what's layering on that is we're leaders in T1S and we're leaders in ASA. And essentially, what car manufacturers are trying to do is replace all the old protocols of CAN bus, LIN bus, MOS bus, Ethernet and everything else, RS-32 into a single T1S standard, which runs on a single twisted bear Ethernet wire.
So they don't have to use -- see, the past, all these modules were not connected. All these things didn't talk inside the car to each other. So the protocols could be different. When the car is getting all connected, software-defined, then they all have to talk to the central computer and talk to each other. And if they're not on the same protocol, then you have to build the bridge, the USB to Ethernet bridge, USB to MOS bridge, [indiscernible] network to Ethernet bridge. And these bridges are expensive and heavy and all that.
So therefore, there is a drive to take away all of those protocols and consolidate into a single standard. And we're leading that standard. We've got leadership devices in there. We have design wins with every major manufacturer. And these are '28, '29 production. It will largely begin in '28. Some could be late '27.
And they will add longevity to the cycle as the inventory-driven growth normalizes and we're getting growth in lots of other segments, and this will be just another layer. And when that begins, it will be a 10-year cycle where these protocols will merge over a long period of time.
Okay. Well, we're running out of time. So I'm going to ask Eric 2 questions at once. Eric, I think you're getting back up close to your 65% gross margin target. Inventory write-offs are pretty much done, but under loading charge is going to be here for a bit.
Can you talk about the levers to get back to that 65% level? And then also, can you speak to uses of cash right now? I know delevering is a priority, but how much longer do you think it will be until we can start to see some repurchases again also?
Yes. So the gross margin story is pretty simple at this point in time, right? If you take our gross margins from last quarter and add back $46.6 million of underutilization charges, we're at our long-term target. So it's a matter of growing back into our capacity. We're ramping fast.
I don't expect those underutilization charges to completely disappear by the end of the year, but they're going to be reduced significantly. So that progress is just blocking and tackling and growing back into our capacity. From a use of cash, we still are relatively highly levered. We do expect that our net leverage will fall below 3 this quarter, which is a good milestone for us.
But there's still work to go. We want to continue to reduce debt, make sure that our balance sheet is strong and can withstand the next cycle, which there will be another cycle in semiconductors. So we're going to continue to generate cash. Earnings are going to improve, EBITDA is growing, but the cash generation is going to go to support the current level of dividend and pay down debt.
Okay. All right. Well, gentlemen, we're out of time, but really appreciate you joining us. Thank you, Steve. Thank you, Eric.
All right. Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — TD Cowen's 54th Annual Technology
Microchip Technology — TD Cowen's 54th Annual Technology
Microchip signalisiert Zyklusnormalisierung und setzt auf PCIe Gen6, Data‑Center-Design‑Wins sowie Aerospace/Defense-Wachstum; Rückkehr zu Zielmargen abhängig von Auslastung.
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Takeaway: Zyklus normalisiert sich: Distributor- und Kundenabsatz nähern sich dem Verbrauch an, Inventartage fallen; Wachstum wird zunehmend von Innovations‑Designs in Data Center, Automotive und Aerospace/Defense getrieben.
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- PCIe Gen6: Führungsprodukt auf 3 nm mit 160 Lanes (höhere Leistung, tieferer Verbrauch) und sechs Design‑Wins; Serienstart Ende dieses Quartals, Ramp 2026.
- Datenzentrum: Reine Data‑Center‑Sparten (Storage‑Controller, Memory‑Controller, PCI Express) wachsen stark; zusätzliche Exposure über Microcontroller/Analog/Power‑Katalogprodukte, aber schwer exakt zuzuordnen.
- Aerospace/Defense & Auto: Starkes, langlebiges A&D‑Backlog (radiation‑hardened Teile, Raumfahrt) und Automotive‑Designs für software‑defined vehicles; neue Automotive‑Standards (genannt T1S und ASA) sollen ab 2028 breiter in Produktion gehen.
🆕 Neue Informationen
- Konkretes: Gen6 beginnt Produktion Ende Quartal; ein einzelner Design‑Win wird nächstes Jahr >$100M einbringen. Neuer PCIe‑Retimer aus eigener Entwicklung mit erstem Design‑Win; 3.3 kV Silicon‑Carbide‑Modul angekündigt, aber nicht materialer Wachstumstreiber.
- Inventar & Bilanz: Inventartage fielen von ~266 auf 185 (März), ohne Einmaleffekte ~170 Tage; Ziel bleibt 130–150 Tage. Nettohebel (Nettoverschuldung/EBITDA) soll dieses Quartal <3x fallen.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Inventar‑Timing: Management sieht Normalisierung binnen 1–2 Quartalen; Kundenzahl steigt, was auf wiederkehrende Nachfrage hinweist.
- Pricing‑Strategie: Microchip vermeidet opportunistische Preiserhöhungen zur Margensteigerung; bevorzugt Kostenweitergabe bei tatsächlichen Input‑Kostenanstiegen.
- Margin & Cash: Bruttomargen erreichen Zielniveaus, sobald Unterauslastungsaufwand (underutilization) weiter zurückgeht; Cash vorrangig Schuldentilgung und Dividende, Rückkäufe erst nach weiterem Deleveraging.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Relevanz: Für Aktionäre bedeutet das: Zyklische Risiken schwinden, signifikantes Upside durch PCIe Gen6‑Ramp und A&D‑Nachfrage; kurzfristig bleiben Auslastung, Execution bei Gen6‑Ramp und Unschärfen in der Data‑Center‑Zurechenbarkeit die zentralen Risiken.
Microchip Technology — J.P. Morgan 54th Annual Global Technology
1. Question Answer
All right. Good morning, and again, welcome to JPMorgan's 54th Annual Technology Media Communications Conference. My name is Harlan Sur. I'm the semiconductor analyst here for the firm.
Very pleased to have Eric Bjornholt, Chief Financial Officer of Microchip here with us today. We also have Sajid Daudi, who's Head of IR. Microchip top 5 microcontroller supplier globally, #1 market share in industrial market MCUs. 60% of the MCU portfolio is advanced 32-bit in higher architectures, solid analog power management portfolio, #3 market share leader in FPGAs.
It's been our busy earnings season, so I've asked Eric to start us off with a summary of the March quarter, June quarter outlook, an update on the 9-point recovery plan that Steve laid out in March of last year, and then we can go ahead and kick off the Q&A. So gentlemen, thank you for joining us this morning. And Eric, I will turn it over to you.
All right. Hey everybody. Thanks, Harlan. Appreciate the introduction. So during the course of this discussion, we will be making certain future forward-looking statements about the financial performance of Microchip, and I refer you to our filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors about the company. So a quick summary of our March quarter results. It was fiscal '26, which ended in March was a very good year for Microchip. March of '25 to March of '26, the company was up 35% in revenue our EPS went from $0.11 to $0.57 on a quarterly basis. So that definitely turned things around.
We made significant improvements in reducing the inventory overhang that we had. So inventory came down by I think $320 million, something like that from December of '24 to March of '26. So great progress there. We are ramping our factories as we speak because we don't want inventory to go too low. I think distribution inventory was corrected during that time period. Customer inventory is in a much better spot than what it was. And Steve Sanghi kicked off this 9-point plan in March of the prior year, and we've really executed well on that. We adjusted our manufacturing footprint. We shut down a factory, 1 of our wafer fabs in Arizona, and we are rightsized today with plenty of capacity to grow into.
Like I said, inventory has come down. Cash flow has improved significantly. Our leverage, which really went quite high during the down cycle is now back to a much better spot. I think we should end the June quarter with net leverage below 3, which is a good milestone for us, and we'll continue to make great progress from there as we see continued significant increases in EBITDA. So we're extremely focused today on getting towards our long-term operating model, which is a 65% gross margin and 40% operating margin.
Our guidance for the current quarter is for revenue to grow about 11% sequentially. The gross margin target is 62.5%. So you can see that we're making good progress towards that 65% target our operating expenses. We still have some work to do on that. The forecast for the current quarter is about 29% versus our 25% target, but overall operating margins are trending nicely towards the 40%, and we see a clear path to get there.
So with that, I'll turn it over to Harlan for questions.
Thank you very much. That was a great opening commentary. I appreciate having the team here. I'm going to start with some of the near-term dynamics in fundamentals. So you guys -- you called the bottom of your business in the March quarter of last year when bookings inflected meaningfully in that quarter. And since then, book-to-bill has remained strongly greater than 1, backlog has continued to grow.
First phase of the industry recovery is always excess inventory is bottoming at your customers, chip orders and proving to the level of your customers' consumption trends, right? Second phase of the recovery is restocking by customers in anticipation of continued sort of strong demand. You're starting to see restocking activity amongst your distribution customers. But are you also starting to see restocking activity in your direct customer base as well?
So it's harder to track, right? In distribution, we get inventory reporting from the distributors each month. So we can -- we know what their inventory is doing and their inventory is at levels now that are lower than they probably should be at about 26 days, and we think the restocking effort is happening there. And that word alone sometimes scares investors. But when we are projecting growth of the business at 11% sequentially, distributors need to restock, they need to build inventory just to keep up, so their months of inventory don't decline again. So I think that's normal behavior.
And direct customers, I think it's a mix. I think we still have some customers that are likely still working through inventory, but many of them that we haven't seen purchase from us for 12 or 18 months are coming back. And so I think inventory is getting rightsized there. It's just a little bit harder to measure.
Okay. Got it. Asia region, this is kind of interesting, which includes China came back very strong in the March quarter. It was the fastest-growing region in your March quarter, both sequentially and year-over-year, not sort of what we would expect, right, given Chinese New Year's holiday season, can you talk about the demand trends post Chinese New Year's and was the profile of demand out of that region fairly broad-based? And maybe what are you seeing so far this quarter out of the China region, Asia region?
Yes. So the recovery that we saw in Asia and in China was broad based. It was really across all of our end markets, nothing particular to call out there. Many of the distributors that we sell through in that region are thinly capitalized. And because of that, they really took inventory down hard and are now at a point where they have to be buying at least in line with where end consumption is. So I think that's probably the biggest driver, but it's broad-based.
And typically, post Chinese New Year's, obviously, given that the March quarter was strong. I mean, it seems like post Chinese New Year, you guys did see a pretty strong snapback in orders as the workforce came back to -- post the holidays. It sounds like sell-through was strong, and therefore, that led to sort of follow through and orders out of that region post-Chinese New Years.
That's correct. So sell-through activity was strong. We saw a nice bump in sell-through really in every geography last quarter, and that's continuing into this quarter. bookings activity was quite strong. We had a very strong book-to-bill in the March quarter. We highlighted in our earnings call that April bookings were the highest month of bookings that we've seen in almost 4 years.
So that trend has continued and is continuing into May. Bookings have continued to be quite strong, and it's broad-based again. I can't call out one particular end market or one geography. It's coming back across the board.
Good to see that trend continuing. On pricing, it's clear that many of your peers are starting to take up pricing in some beginning of this year, some in the second half of this year, a combination of strong demand, but rising input costs. What I said, I think Steve talked about monitoring input costs, looking at segments where product availability is tight customer by customer sort of basis.
But at this point, the team has not raised pricing. As you look into the second half of this year and next year, and the potential strong demand profile in front of you and your customers, is the team considering price increases?
So we are not considering any sort of broad-based price increase at this point in time. We've got a clear path to get to our gross margin target with where the cost structure is today. So I'm not going to sit here and say, "Hey, if there are significant supply chain cost increases, we will have to do something to pass those costs on". But we've been in a mode of wanting to regain market share. We wanted to rebuild customer relationships after some of the missteps we took in the last cycle. And we are seeing strong evidence of that with how our customers are coming back, opening up new designs for us. We want to keep that momentum going.
But there's no doubt if supply chain costs continue to rise, that we will have to do something. And we want to be very fair with our customers, at least our partner customers that have opened up all these design opportunities for us that we don't do anything to negatively impact that relationship. So it's a balance, and we really want to maximize our operating margin dollars long term. And if we can gain share and keep prices relatively flat, we will do that.
The one area where pricing is going up is as your customers build their systems, looking at their building materials, memory pricing for them continues to increase very meaningfully, right? And we do see some pullbacks in production on low to mid-end smartphones, PCs, consumer electronics, those segments of the market.
But what we've heard is even like big-ticket items like consumer appliances and industrial applications are being somewhat impacted by this dynamic, right? And I know consumer and PC is a small part of the team's overall business. But is the team seeing some of this memory dynamic being reflected across parts of your customer base?
In other words, maybe not as we look at the more seasonal second half of the year, your customers typically would be building in anticipation of that. But maybe for some of your customers because of some of the higher memory prices, maybe unit volume builds are a little bit lower than maybe what they've done historically. Have you seen any indications of memory pricing increases on customer [ new ] plans?
We've seen a little bit of that, right? So when something is constrained, customers can't necessarily build everything that they want to build. And with that, they might not be able to complete their system and because of that want to have us hold back on delivering to something them until a later date when they think they can get the entire bill of materials to build their system.
Specifically for our business, we do have a serial E-squared memory business. It's a small piece. We reported in the other category of revenue. It's not part of the microcontroller and analog revenue. And we have seen that business pick up as others are reallocating their capacity elsewhere. We're gaining some share there and seeing good bookings and order momentum for that piece of the business, but it's small.
Got it. Have you -- could you give us a sense like -- I've been asked this question before, my response is like it's like single digits percentage of Microchip's revenues. But if I were to look at the PC, smartphone, sort of consumer electronics, end market segments, do you have a sense of the rough contribution to your revenues for those particular end market segments? I mean, it's small. I just...
Yes. It's quite small. I mean we break out consumer as 8% to 9% of revenue overall. So it's really our smallest market segment.
Got it. That's -- actually, before I turn to the mega trends, let's see if there's any questions from the audience. If you do have a question, raise your hand, and we'll get the microphone over to you. Any questions?
Let's talk about the technology, the portfolio, the mega trends and data center and AI. The team has done a great job of helping us to understand your strong position, enterprise SSD controllers, PCIe switching, signal conditioning, networking, timing and security, right? This is a subsegment of your data center and compute end market, which was 18% of your overall revenues last fiscal year.
Most of your peers in MCUs and analog are driving their data center businesses currently like anywhere from 50% to 100% year-over-year. Any rough quantification on the current growth profile of your AI-focused products and maybe the percentage of your data center and compute business that represents AI?
Yes. So we haven't broken that out, and we're getting a lot of investor questions on it. So we are working on a way to break that out separately. So included in our end market that we break out as data center and compute, those are standard compute, which isn't really in that category. We sell a lot of kind of standard microcontroller or timing products, security products into that segment, too, that aren't going to exhibit the type of growth that you're talking about, 50% annual growth.
But what we've been trying to do is highlight our Data Center Solutions business unit. We've had Brian McCarson, who leads that business unit on 2 of our last 3 earnings calls, highlighting some of our product initiatives there like our PCIe Gen 6 that we brought to market, that's really the only product in that market that's on 3-nanometer from TSMC and bring some significant power savings to our customers, and we're seeing good momentum there.
It's not shipping in volume production today that starts to happen near the end of this fiscal year and more significantly into next fiscal year, but the momentum is behind it there. And we will find a way to provide investors better insight into that. And you can see that, that piece of the business is growing at the rates that you're talking about.
Perfect. On your total system solution strategy, this has been a dynamic and an initiative that the team has been talking about and focused on for quite some time, right? And the idea is to drive higher attach rates of Microchip's products to your anchor products, those anchor products being microcontrollers, your microprocessors, you have FPGA products, more analog attached, more power management attached, networking chip attach per MCU/MPU design in, right?
A year ago, you presented an insightful -- I thought it was a pretty insightful chart on anchor products, showing the attach rate that drove an average of 4 to 5 additional Microchip products per anchor product design win, right? And as you look at your design win pipeline over the past 12 months, I mean, has that attach rate remained at these levels or increasing? And what programs has the team put in place, sales, marketing, channel partners, reference platforms to drive the attach rates even higher going forward.
So I think the attach rates are likely similar to that growing modestly from there. That's pretty decent attach rate. But what we're continuing to do is roll out additional reference design with these anchor products, educate our sales team to take those to the customer. And really, we want to gain more and more share of the bill of materials out of customer by using this TSS strategy.
So it's working quite well. It's fully ingrained in our business units working together whether it's complementary products that sell together to bring those to market effectively and make the customers' job easier as they design their system and have reference designs that are working parts that work together easily and speeds their time to market. That's really important from an engineer's standpoint.
And on the team's 6 megatrend focus, Edge and IoT compute, data center AI, sustainability, e-mobility and networking, right? From fiscal '21 to fiscal '24, the megatrend revenues grew at a 26% CAGR, right? That's 2x faster than the overall franchise and represented 47% of your total revenues in fiscal '24.
I know in calendar '24 and part of calendar '25, the team was still working with customers on inventory work-downs. But since the recovery profile started in the first half of last year and into the first half of this year, have the megatrend focus areas started to outperform again, the broad-based business and any way to quantify that?
So the mega trends are all performing well, and it's still a significant focus with within our company today, mega trends are now more than 50% of our revenue, right? And to think that, that can continue to grow at 2x the overall rate in the company is probably not possible. But those areas are still high growth, significant focus rate that we have from a customer engagement perspective and a product development standpoint. So it's going extremely well. I think that strategy has played out as we expected and continues to be high growth for the company.
One of the other leadership areas that Microchip participates in is aerospace and defense. And as that spending continues strong, a big part of that is your leadership in Field-Programmable Gate Arrays what we call FPGA products, right? The market share rankings out are out. Your FPGA business continues to be a strong franchise. #3 global market share leader, $0.5 billion per year franchise. This business outperformed your overall business in calendar '25, you've got your PolarFire product line, which is a leader in aerospace and defense applications.
Outside of aerospace and defense though, we've seen a very big pickup in demand for mid-range FPGA solutions across a variety of applications. It's a highly gross margin accretive product family, PolarFire, your next-generation PolarFire 2 family. How is the team doing on expanding your leadership from aerospace and defense into that sort of broad market sort of midrange side of the market.
Yes, it's a good question. So FPGA is an important area of focus for the company. As you say, we're the #3 player there based on data that's recently been released. So the company has been really focused on areas outside of A&D that has really driven that market leadership and allowed us to gain market share really since 2013. We bought a company called Microsemi in 2018. They had bought a company called Actel for these products originated from.
And with PolarFire, with the upcoming introduction of PolarFire 2, we have really great capabilities across the midrange and have areas where we can go into the low-end FPGA and the higher-end FPGAs. We are really known for our power efficiency, physical security, and really the benefits that we bring to anything that needs like radiation hardened products, which is really helpful for us in A&D, which is a fast-growing market at this point in time with a lot of the replenishment that needs to happen and the arsenals that have been used around the world on the defense side. I know your question was really more focused on other areas like industrial, where we've expanded, but the company is doing well. We're continuing to double down on our investment there. And I think the opportunities are large for us going forward.
Perfect. Before I go...
Go ahead. Go ahead, Sajid.
I'm just going to add to it just a little bit that I think as you kind of think beyond just the aerospace and defense on the industrial complex, as you think about vision capture, smart agriculture. So the use case is really expanding as you think about Industry 4.0 type of applications. So FPGA kind of plays a big role there as well. Still early in its infancy stage, but certainly starting to pick up momentum.
Before I move on to -- I want to talk about manufacturing footprint and future expansion plans. Is there any questions from the audience? Again, if you have a question, just raise your hand, and we'll get a mic over to you.
Your wafer outlet mix is 35% internal, 65% external even after the Fab consolidation. What's the longer-term mix target associated with your new financial targets you outlined that in your prepared remarks, right? 65% gross margin, 45% up margin targets, revenue growth that industry plus. So what is embedded within that? How do you sort of that longer-term goal? How do you think about your wafer output mix internal versus external?
So I think generally, it's going to stay roughly in that 35% range, plus or minus for the coming years. Now some of our faster-growing areas when you think about the data center product and FPGA and some of the networking products, they are outsourced to the external foundries. And so maybe there's a small downtick that comes from our internal factories as a percentage of the total as we see some higher growth coming from some of these exciting areas that we've talked about.
But there's really nothing that's changing from how we're running the business. Really, anything that is 110-nanometer above can be manufactured internally. And I think 90-nanometer or below, we use an external foundry partner for. And then on the assembly and test side, we do about 70% of that in-house, either in Thailand or Philippines. And when we make the decision to bring something in-house is when the volume is high enough to justify the investment. And right now, that's 70% of the total. But I expect over time that, that percentage will inch up modestly.
Got it. Your Fab 5 in Colorado is still 6-inch diameter wafers. So do you have the capability to expand your output without any new greenfield expansion? And as we look forward in time, as your demand profile continues to improve, is this an option to the Microchip team as your business continues to scale higher, upgrading Fab 5 to 8-inch wafer diameter over the next few years. Is that still an option to the team?
It is still an option. So we shut down our Arizona fab. Fab 2, which was an 8-inch Fab. We expanded clean room space in both Oregon and Colorado. Oregon is our larger factory in...
That's 8-inch, right?
That is 8-inch. That is 8--inch. And Fab 5 does have the capabilities to do 8-inch longer term. We have not made that investment as of yet, but we could in the future without having to expand and build additional clean room space.
Got it. The team does have -- and we haven't revisited this in a while, but the team does have a China for China strategy, right, to serve your larger base of domestic China customers. The plan, I think, was to partner up with a lot of the China-based test and OSAT guys out there and ship your chips or dies to China. Your China-based OSAT partners will do the packaging, final test and then fulfillment, does the team already have that strategy in place? Or is that something that's sort of still on the come?
So we really abandoned that strategy. With what's happened on the tariff side and China really looking at the point of Fab being what is declared from a tariff perspective, there wasn't a big benefit for us to do that. And so really, what we're focusing on is continuing to bring cost-effective solutions that customers want to use to the marketplace. Obviously, our China customer base has chosen Microchip over the competition over time for those reasons.
Now we know that there's clearly going to be demand, particularly for domestic-based China companies to buy locally. And we can only offset by bringing products that, that competition doesn't have to them and doing it in a way where they are incentivized to use Microchip because we have the best product at the right cost structure for them to use. So that's really the focus.
And you had talked about 70% of your assembly and test being, I think, done in-house, right? And part of the 9-point plan was to take your Philippines and Thailand, complexes. You were going to optimize those footprints as well. How did -- did -- are you already through that sort of optimization process. And so without the China for China plan, I'm assuming that you're leveraging Philippines and Thailand for packaging and shipping across all of China -- I mean, across all of Asia, including China, is that kind of the right way to think about it?
You are correct. Really, the optimization that was -- that happened there was just head count reduction, which was mostly attrition because there's higher attrition that happens in those locations. So we are ramping head count in all those locations, particularly in Thailand today. Those are larger operations from an assembly and test perspective, there's a great workforce there to tap into, and we're being able to ramp quite efficiently. So we're in a good spot in ramping assembly and test operations.
Now that inventory write-downs have normalized. You still have about, I think, as of last quarter, $47 million per quarter of underutilization charges, 3.5 percentage points of gross margin goodness, right? This alone would get you to your target 65% gross margins. Given the significant acceleration of the demand profile that the team has seen very broad-based, is it possible that the team can wind down most of these charges exiting this year?
So my anticipation is that those charges will come down significantly, but won't be gone by the end of the fiscal year. So we have some limitations on how fast we can ramp our internal factories. We can only ramp our internal wafer fabs by like 15% to 20% in a quarter. And today, they are producing at a level that is well below than what we're shipping, and that's why inventory has been coming down.
So we are moving as fast as we can to add production specialists or direct labor force to particularly the Oregon factory to ramp it as quickly as we can. But we will still have underutilization charges when we leave the fiscal year, but they will come down each quarter. I think last quarter, it was down $6 million or something like that. It will probably come down a little bit more than that this quarter as we're really in heavy ramp phase, but it takes time.
Got it. There was one product question that I forgot to ask. But before that, any questions from the audience? On the product side, obviously, a top 5 supplier global microcontroller sort of market share, you actually do have a very diversified portfolio into the embedded processor space. You've got your 32-bit microprocessor. You have a hybrid microprocessor family. And in 2024, you introduced your next-generation very high-performance 64-bit embedded processor family for edge compute applications, where we are seeing a lot of activity.
Whereas your MCU and 32-bit product lines were ARM-based and PIC architecture based, the team chose to enter the 64-bit microprocessor arena with a RISC-V based architecture. This embedded processor market is a $5 billion market opportunity. Can you just give us an update on the team's efforts to penetrate the embedded processor market? And will the team rollout a more industry standard sort of ARM-based 64-bit processor family of products?
Yes. So we made the decision on RISC-V based on back from the customers that we were targeting with that particular product set. I believe that over time, we will have a mix of both RISC-V and ARM-based products in the 64-bit arena. And really, those decisions will be -- we'll choose the architecture based on the functionality of the product that is needed and which architecture suits at best.
So we've tended to be architecture-agnostic over time. We've had a bunch of different architectures in the portfolio and then make that choice based on the product, what the requirements of the customers are going to be. But it is a big market opportunity for us. You mentioned it's a $5 billion TAM opportunity, and we're continuing to introduce new products that we are doing quite well in the early stages of introducing products, both in 64-bit MPU and then MCUs are coming also. So the team is tracking well on that trajectory.
Sajid, anything that you would want to add on the high-end compute?
No. I think other than just that's maybe just a little milestone moment for us where recently, NASA and JPL kind of put out a press release on a product that we collaborated with them, which the computation and 500x what was set out to be originally than what the products are available. So again, small thing, but as I said, in the compute family, that was a good milestone for us.
Yes, that's the high-performance space compute.
Got it. On the financials, as I think about the financial model, your focus and things like you're focused on the 6 megatrends, your product evolution that includes augmenting the portfolio with high-performance compute networking, storage products, our performance in aerospace and defense, really good traction in the data center segments of the market.
It would seem to me that the product gross margin should be mixing higher going forward. In other words, as you look at your design win pipeline, you look at your development pipeline, your design win pipeline, over time, it feels like your mix is getting richer and richer and richer, right? Any way to quantify your design win pipeline and the product gross margin profile improvements you anticipate over the next several years as you create these more kind of higher value-added solutions for your customers?
Yes, it's a good question. So in some of these faster-growing areas, whether it's the data center products that we've talked about, our networking and connectivity products, FPGAs, these product lines tend to have higher than corporate average gross margins. And we think the growth from those product areas is also going to be higher over time. So I think we have a positive mix shift there that's going to be going to benefit us.
Obviously, we're going to continue to be competitive, trying to win share and price is a factor in that. But overall, we're very comfortable in getting to the 65%, you take away the underutilization charges and we're there. And then it's just a matter of how the business mix develops over time. And if we have good success in what we think are going to be our higher growth areas, margins could be in a very good spot.
We're not willing at this point to update our long-term margin profile. We are really targeting something that we can float around a 65% when the cycle is good and when the cycle is bad. And obviously, we need to do a much better job of managing inventory in the current cycle than we did in the last cycle for that to happen. So we don't have these large underutilization charges that we don't over invest from a capacity standpoint. But the team is focused on it, and I think our margins are going to continue to improve nicely.
Perfect. Eric, Sajid, thank you very much for your participation today. I look forward to continuing to monitor the execution of the team as the year unfolds. Thanks very much.
Thanks, everybody.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — J.P. Morgan 54th Annual Global Technology
Microchip Technology — J.P. Morgan 54th Annual Global Technology
Microchip betont erfolgreiche Erholung: starke Buchungen, Inventarrückbau und Ramp zu höher margenstarken Produkten bei zugleich moderater Preisdisziplin.
🎯 Kernbotschaft
⚡ Strategische Highlights
- Guidance: Umsatz erwartet +11% QoQ, Ziel-Bruttomarge 62.5% für das laufende Quartal.
- Portfolio‑Shift: Verstärktes Wachstum in Data‑Center/AI‑Produkten (PCIe Gen6 auf 3nm) und FPGA (PolarFire/PolarFire2) für höherwertige Märkte.
- Fertigung: Wafer‑Mix ~35% intern/65% extern bleibt, 8‑inch‑Ausbau von Fab5 möglich, Assembly/Test ~70% inhouse (Thailand/Philippinen).
🆕 Neue Informationen
April/May‑Buchungen sehr stark; PCIe‑Gen6‑Produkte sollen Ende des Fiskaljahres in Volumen starten; China‑Für‑China‑Packaging‑Strategie wurde verworfen; keine unmittelbaren, breit angelegten Preismaßnahmen geplant.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Restocking: Distribution restocket (≈26 Tage Inventar); direkte Kunden kehren zurück, aber schwerer zu messen.
- Pricing: Management vermeidet breite Preiserhöhung, will Marktanteile zurückgewinnen; Preisweitergabe nur bei anhaltenden Input‑Kostenanstiegen.
- Kapazität: Unterauslastungs‑Aufwände sollen sukzessive sinken, bleiben aber bis Jahresende bestehen; interne Fabs nur begrenzt quartalsweise skalierbar.
⚡ Bottom Line
Für Aktionäre: Microchip liefert eine glaubwürdige Erholungsstory mit konkreten Indikatoren (starke Buchungen, Inventarabbau, Produkt‑Momentum in Data‑Center/FPGA). Kurzfristig bleiben Underutilization‑Charges und Fertigungs‑Ramp Risiken; mittelfristig ist aber die Aussicht auf höhere Margen und stärkeres, qualitatives Wachstum positiv.
Microchip Technology — Q4 2026 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Greetings, and welcome to the Microchip's Q4 and Fiscal Year '26 Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded.
I would now like to turn the conference over to your host, Eric Bjornholt, Chief Financial Officer. You may begin.
Thanks, Kate, and good afternoon, everyone. During the course of this conference call, we will be making projections and other forward-looking statements regarding future events or the future financial performance of the company. We wish to caution you that such statements are predictions and that actual events or results may differ materially. We refer you to our press release of today as well as our recent filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors that may impact Microchip's business and results of operations.
In attendance with me today are Steve Sanghi, Microchip's President and CEO; Rich Simoncic, Microchip's COO; Brian McCarson, VP of Microchip's Data Center Solutions business unit; and Sajid Daudi, Microchip's Head of Investor Relations.
I will comment on our fourth quarter and full fiscal year 2026 financial performance. Brian will provide an update on our Data Center business, and then Steve will provide commentary on our results and discuss the current business environment as well as our guidance. We will then be available to respond to specific investor and analyst questions.
We are including information in our press release and this conference call on various GAAP and non-GAAP measures. We have posted a full GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliation on the Investor Relations page of our website at www.microchip.com, and included reconciliation information in our earnings press release, which we believe you will find useful when comparing our GAAP and non-GAAP results. We have also posted a summary of our outstanding debt and our leverage metrics on our website.
I will now go through some of the operating results, including net sales, gross margin and operating expenses. Other than net sales, I will be referring to these results on a non-GAAP basis, which is based on expenses prior to the effects of acquisition activities, share-based compensation and certain other adjustments as described in our earnings press release and in the reconciliations on our website.
Net sales in the March quarter were $1.311 billion, which was up 10.6% sequentially, and up 35.1% over the year ago March quarter. Our revenue results were above the high end of the guidance range we provided on February 5, 2026. We have posted a summary of our net sales by product line and geography as well as our fiscal year 2026 revenue by end market on our website for your reference.
Our end market mix did not change materially in fiscal year 2026 compared to fiscal year 2025. Industrial was 31% of sales. Data Center and Compute was 18%. Automotive was 17%. Aerospace & Defense was 16%. Communication was 9% and Consumer was 9%. These percentages are our best estimates of the end market splits and there's probably a couple of percent [ error band ] due to the fact that almost 50% of our business and the long tail of customers are serviced through distribution, which makes it difficult to track the end markets.
On a non-GAAP basis, gross margins were 61.6% in the March quarter, including capacity underutilization charges of $46.6 million. Operating expenses were at 31% of sales and operating income was 30.6% of sales. Non-GAAP net income was $327.3 million, and non-GAAP earnings per diluted share was $0.57, which was $0.07 above the midpoint of our guidance.
On a GAAP basis, in the March quarter, gross margins were 61%. Total operating expenses were $582.2 million and included acquisition intangible amortization of $107.8 million, special charges of $6.4 million which was primarily driven by costs associated with the closure of Fab 2. Share-based compensation of $59.9 million and $1 million of other expenses. The GAAP net income attributable to common shareholders was $116.4 million or $0.21 per share. For fiscal year 2026, net sales were $4.713 billion, and were up 7.1% from net sales in fiscal year 2025.
On a non-GAAP basis, gross margins were 58.5%. Operating expenses were 32.2% of sales, and operating income was 26.3% of sales. Non-GAAP net income was $933.9 million and EPS was $1.64 per diluted share.
On a GAAP basis, gross margins were 57.7%, operating expenses were 47.3% of sales and operating income was 10.4% of sales. The GAAP net income attributable to common shareholders was $118.8 million.
Our non-GAAP cash tax rate was 5.8% in the March quarter and 8.6% for fiscal year 2026. The cash taxes remitted in Q4 were lower than originally forecasted, while our pretax profit was much stronger than forecasted, driving the March quarter rate down. Our non-GAAP tax rate for fiscal year 2027 is expected to be about 10%, which is exclusive of any tax audit settlements related to taxes accrued in prior fiscal years.
Our inventory balance at March 31, 2026, was $1.035 billion and down $22.3 million from the balance at December 31, 2025. We had 185 days of inventory at the end of the March quarter, which was down 16 days from the prior quarter's level, driven by our inventory reduction actions and increased revenue. Included in our March ending inventory was 15 days of long life cycle, high-margin products whose manufacturing capacity has been end of life by our supply chain partners. Inventory at our distributors in the March quarter was at 26 days, which was down 2 days from the prior quarter's level and at the lower end of what we have experienced historically. We expect distribution restocking to occur in the near term as distributors will likely grow their inventory holdings above current levels to support growth.
Distribution sell-through increased by 11.4% during the quarter and distribution sell-in was just modestly lower than distribution sell-through. Our cash flow from operating activities was $257 million, and our adjusted free cash flow was $228 million in the March quarter. As of March 31, our consolidated cash and total investment position was $240.3 million. Our total debt increased by $143 million in the March quarter, the increase in debt was impacted by our refinancing activities in the quarter, which included issuing a 0% 4-year convertible bond for which we paid $68 million for 100% capped call to provide some protection from future equity dilution from stock price appreciation.
Our adjusted EBITDA in the March quarter was $466.8 million and 35.6% of net sales. Our quarterly adjusted EBITDA was up 132.9% from the March 2025 quarter. Our trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA was $1.496 billion, our net debt to adjusted EBITDA was 3.54 at March 31, 2026, and down from 4.18 at December 31, 2025. We expect the June 2026 quarter to be an excellent cash generation quarter for us, resulting in meaningful debt reduction and also expect our net debt to adjusted EBITDA to drop below 3.
Capital expenditures were $14.2 million in the March quarter and $91.1 million for fiscal year 2026. Our expectation for capital expenditures for fiscal year 2027 is to be approximately $100 million. Depreciation expense in the March quarter was $38.7 million.
I will now turn it over to Brian, who will provide some exciting insights into our Data Center Solutions business unit. Brian?
Thank you, Eric, and good afternoon, everyone. We are seeing significant momentum across all 3 major product families within our data center solutions business, and I'll summarize the progress we're making in each of them. Importantly, these wins are translating into higher content per system and a longer runway of production ramps, which we expect to support durable growth as the data center architectures continue to scale.
First, our storage controller products have supported some of the world's most reliable SAS, SATA, NVMe and RAID infrastructure over the past decade as a leading provider of data center storage control solutions.
And as AI inference and agentic AI workloads increased demand for persistent data access, demand for our products continues to grow. We've been strengthening our product road map and customers are responding positively. Most recently, our Adaptec, SmartRAID, NVMe storage accelerator received the Nimbus Innovation Award with benchmark results showing up to a 3x improvement in read and write performance versus a leading competitor's offering. This can translate into better XPU utilization in real-world data center workloads.
Second, our memory controller product family has been reinvigorated by the recent launch of our next-generation devices. We brought 3 new CXL and PCIe-based devices into production in calendar year 2025, and our next Gen 5 dual port device is scheduled to enter production this quarter. We've already secured meaningful design wins that have begun ramping and that we expect will continue to grow through fiscal '28. These next-generation devices have been externally benchmarked and our customers are reporting industry-leading performance in jitter tolerance, which is a key measure of storage controller performance.
Third, our Switchtec business has continued to build momentum since the announcement of our latest PCIe Gen 6 switch just 2 quarters ago. Since that time, we've secured a total of 6 significant design wins with customers citing our product quality, our signal integrity, differentiated features and our strong performance per watt as industry-leading. This is helping Microchip maintain its position as a leading PCIe data center switch provider, while gaining share in both scale-up and scale-out market segments. Our Gen 6 switch is scheduled to begin production ramp at the end of this quarter and many additional design wins are expected over the next year.
In addition, we're very excited to announce we've entered the PCIe retimer market this quarter. This retimer is architected as a companion die for our PCIe Gen 6 switches and is also designed to support the rapid growth of the active electrical cable market with compatibility spanning Gen 1 through Gen 6 speeds. Customer feedback has been encouraging and we have already secured a major OEM design win on an upcoming Gen 6 platform, displacing one of our competitors. Customers have been explicitly requesting that Microchip offer a companion retimer because sourcing both the switch and the retimer from a single vendor reduces implementation complexity and risk. This is helping drive these wins and strengthening our competitive position in new designs with an even more complete PCIe connectivity platform.
The wins I described across all 3 data center product families reflect several competitive advantages. First, power efficiency. Our Gen 6 switches and retimers deliver strong power efficiency relative to alternatives, which directly benefits operating costs and data center environments.
Second is feature completeness. By offering both the switch and the companion retimer, we provide customers with a more complete scale-up and scale-out PCIe solution, reducing the need to integrate products from multiple vendors. Third is quality and tools. We deliver the reliability, the performance and stability data center customers demand, while offering world-class diagnostic and configuration tools with ChipLink.
And finally, support through the entire customer journey. From initial design through production ramp and beyond, customers value a partner that has invested in their success at every stage. That combination of power efficiency, feature depth, quality and long-term partnership is helping drive these wins. We believe these factors position us well as design wins continue to convert into production ramps.
I'll pause here and turn the call over to Steve to provide an update on our business and the guidance going forward. Steve?
Thank you, Brian, and good afternoon, everyone. I will start by providing you a brief update on our nine-point recovery plan.
The first item was to rightsize our manufacturing footprint. This was completed, the remaining item left is selling our Tempe fab. We have several interested parties, but the deal has not closed yet.
The second was to bring the inventory down. We have brought the inventory down from 266 days at the end of December 2024 to 185 days at the end of March 2026. Our overall dollar value of inventory has decreased by $319 million from the December 2024 peak inventory of $1,356 million to March 2026 ending inventory of $1,037 million. We're now in a significant revenue growth mode. We expect our inventory will come down naturally towards our goal of 130 to 150 days as revenue grows, and we appropriately manage our manufacturing and foundry resources.
Third was the megatrend alignment. This goal was completed by creating a megatrend for AI replacing 5G and creating another for network and connectivity, replacing ADAS, which stands for Advanced Driver Assistance Systems.
The fourth item was business unit alignment. This goal was completed by realigning business units. We used to have essentially 2 pillars: microcontrollers and analog. We have now created 5 pillars which are microcontrollers, analog, networking and connectivity, high-performance compute, and artificial intelligence on the edge. We know a few requests for us to break out the revenue for some of these growth segments. We are thinking through this as some of the revenues intertwined and challenging to break out we will provide more visibility as we complete our analysis.
The fifth was to look at our distribution programs. This goal was completed by realigning our distribution program and how we compensate our distributors for various levels of demand creation and fulfillment. We also considered our network -- we also consolidated our network by terminating several small underperforming distributors.
Number six, was customer relationship improvement. We undertook a major effort to improve our relationships with a large number of customers where the relationship had deteriorated during the COVID cycle. We now consider our relationship with our customers to be good, but it is still an ongoing process.
Number seven, was the new business model. We unveiled a new business model in March of last year. The model contained a long-term non-GAAP targets of 65% gross margin, 25% operating expense and 40% operating margin. At the bottom of this last down cycle in March of 2025, we had a non-GAAP gross margin of 52% which has now improved to 61.6%. At the bottom of the cycle, we had a non-GAAP operating expense of 38%, which has now improved to 31%. And at the bottom of the cycle, we had a non-GAAP operating profit of 14%, which has now more than doubled to 30.6%. The improvements are ongoing towards our long-term business model.
Number eight, was the operating expense percentage. This was simply putting a plan together to achieve our long-term non-GAAP operating expense target of 25%. We have come down from 38% to 31%. We believe that revenue growth and productivity improvements will get us the rest of the way.
And the ninth, final one was CHIPS Act. We are essentially on hold given we are still growing into our current capacity.
So this was a comprehensive update on our nine-point plan. The only main items that remain are further reduction of inventory and making further improvements in our gross margin, operating expense percentage and operating profit percentage. The nine-point plan has been an extremely successful program that was very well executed.
Next, I will talk about our business environment. We are seeing recovery in all of our end markets: automotive, industrial, communication, data center, aerospace and defense, and consumer are all looking better. The strongest sales performance last quarter was in aerospace and defense sector. From a business unit perspective, the strongest performance was in FPGA products.
We believe that we have completed the distribution inventory correction. Our overall distribution inventory is now somewhat lower than normal. The distribution sell-in and sell-through was close to even last quarter. We are starting to see large orders from distribution, which show some restocking happening in the distribution channel. The distributors' customers' inventory has also come down significantly. After using up the excess inventory, we are seeing thousands of customers reengage in buying our products. Our customer count has started to go up. We're also seeing customers from new designs and from an improved relationships, start buying our products, adding to our bookings, revenue and customer count.
Now let's get into guidance for the June quarter. In the June quarter, we expect strong growth from data center, A&D sector, industrial and automotive end markets. From a business unit perspective, we expect nearly all business units to participate in the growth, thus broadening out this recovery.
Our bookings for the March quarter were significantly higher than those for the December quarter. The book-to-bill ratio for the March quarter was well above 1, resulting in a much higher backlog entering the June quarter compared to when we entered the March quarter. And April was the largest booking month in almost 4 years.
A comment about lead times. While lead time for our products have been 4 to 8 weeks for some time, we are continuing to see lead times increase on many of our products. We're running into challenges on certain kinds of substrates and subcontracting capacity and also foundry constraints on multiple nodes. These challenges previously were isolated to very specific areas, but are now starting to spread more broadly. Our customer requests for expedited shipments have increased significantly from a couple of quarters ago, pointing to some customers' inventories running very low.
Taking all of these factors into account, we expect our net sales for the June quarter to be up 11% sequentially plus or minus 1%. This at the midpoint would be up 35.3% from the year ago quarter. We expect our non-GAAP gross margin to be between 62.25% and 63.25% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP operating expenses to be between 28.75% and 29.25% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP operating profit to be between 33% and 34.5% of sales, and we expect our non-GAAP diluted earnings per share to be between $0.67 and $0.71 per share.
With that, Kate, will you please poll for questions.
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Timothy Arcuri from UBS.
2. Question Answer
Steve, thanks for the update on the nine-point plan. Another thing you were going to try to give us was, you were thinking about what the pro forma growth rate was for the company. I know if you pro forma everything, the growth rate is not as high as it truly is because you got out of a lot of businesses. So I know that's something that you've been looking at. Do you have any update on that? What do you think the pro forma growth rate is for Microchip?
Timothy, thanks for your question. I think we are just going through a phenomenal growth right now and trying to put a longer-term growth rate in this environment, I think it's challenging. Any number I give you, the growth rate in fiscal '27 which started on April 1 here would be substantially higher than that growth rate. So I think we'll push that out further.
Okay. And then Eric, did you give us inventory charges, I didn't hear that?
So we didn't. As we went through the quarter, we kind of implied that as we got through the March quarter that our inventory reserve charges would normalize. And that is essentially what has happened in the March quarter. When you look at the new reserve charges that we've taken, the benefit that we're getting from previously written off inventory are kind of netting to a number that is in a range of what we would expect on a go-forward basis.
So I think we're in a good position there. When you look at our gross margins, the biggest thing keeping us away from our 65% target at this point in time is our underutilization charges, which were $46.6 million last quarter. And if you divide that by the revenue and kind of add that future benefit back to gross margin, we're essentially at the 65% target. So we're in good shape. Inventory reserve charges have normalized. It's not really a headwind to gross margin at this point in time, and we're glad to have that behind us.
Your next question comes from the line of Vivek Arya with Bank of America Securities.
First one is kind of more near term, March and June, both well above seasonal. What is driving that upside? Is it a specific end market? Is it more distribution? Is it more direct? And I think on the last call, you had mentioned that some direct customers or some sort of distribution are still burning through inventory, are they done? And as we look to September, that also is usually a seasonally stronger quarter. Consensus has your September up 5% to 6%. I don't know whether you would describe your September quarter visibility at this point?
So Vivek, the way I will describe is I think there are 3 things happening. One is we have been telling you for a long time that the distributors are burning their inventory, direct customers are burning their inventory and distributors' customers are burning inventory. And they were all in various innings, but everybody was pretty much in the ninth inning. And we have seen the distribution inventory now fully corrected actually to be below normal and are seeing some restocking orders from distribution as they prepare for the huge growth.
Distributor customers are also seeing -- I'm sorry, distributors are also seeing their customers come back in droves because they have completed their inventory. So distributors are placing large orders to serve their customers who have not been buying a lot of products in the last year because of inventory.
And the other factor is, as I talked about, we have improved our relationship with thousands of customers and in many, many of those cases, we had design wins with the customers, but we were not getting our share of the revenue. In some cases, they had duplicate designs, and they were buying somebody else's product for a different model. As we look at our overall customer count, it has increased by several thousand customers. So we're seeing the customers reengage as we have improved our relationship.
And finally, I think we are seeing a meaningful improvement in end markets. A&D is very strong. Data center is very strong. Industrial is very strong. Automotive is coming back. A lot of the automotive designs we have incubated in the last couple of years are going to production. So we are seeing the end market strengthening effect also. Combination of all those have been really well above seasonal growth for June quarter, which we hope will continue for some time.
I think the last question that Vivek asked was related to September and visibility, and I'll just comment on it real quickly. Our backlog is growing nicely. At this point in time, our September quarter backlog is higher than the June quarter backlog at the same point in time. Steve spoke to the booking strength that we saw in April. So things look good, but we're not willing to make a call yet on kind of percentage of revenue growth in September, but things look good at this time.
Understood. And for my follow-up, I think you described aerospace, defense and data center. And what is interesting, though, is that when I look at your change in end market mix year-on-year, it actually showed that aerospace and defense actually came down somewhat and so did data center. I appreciate that these are kind of approximate numbers.
But I would have thought that, that mix would grow. So can you help us understand, right, are we doing the right apples-to-apples comparison? Are there certain traditional, older things in the data center that we should not be focusing as much on? So why did those -- that mix come down in fiscal '26? And how do you see that mix evolving in fiscal '27?
I think if you look at the A&D sector, there was a huge increase in A&D sector percentage from 2024 to 2025. I think it used to be about 10% of our business and it went up to about 18%. So A&D did not drop during the post-COVID cycle as much, and that's why its percentage had increased. Now some of the others did better as they caught up. So percentage kind of plays games because it's a whole year number and data center and A&D has seen very significant growth and improvement in the last 6 months or so. But when you look at the overall number, that's where the math is. But they're still the stronger sector, if you look at the last couple of quarters. And especially A&D had grown huge the year before.
Yes. Maybe the other point on data center is our data center business really kind of bottomed out in the June quarter of last year and we've seen significant growth since then. And so we've been speaking about that each quarter, but each of these end markets had a bottoming at a different point in time.
Your next question comes from the line of Matthew Prisco with Cantor Fitzgerald.
I guess, first on the data center side. Can you help breaking down the sizing of that market today and perhaps the exposure across those 3 buckets that you talked about? And then you talked about the 6 new customer wins now for the PCIe Gen 6. You kind of size that opportunity in any particular wins in? I think you talked about $100 million win last time. So any other sizing you could offer?
Brian?
Yes. Thank you for the question, Matt. So a few things around your queries. One is we don't readily comment on the specific customers that we design with. We are, however, disrupting our competitors in this space, and we're seeing our design wins displace some of the other incumbents, especially in the Gen 6 area. Typically, in the product life cycle, it's uncommon to see a lot of design wins prior to production ramp. Yet our 6 design wins that we've already secured are prior to us doing our production volume release at the end of this quarter. So given that fact and that once we're in production, we expect to see a steady increase in design wins, we should see a ramp in revenue and then hitting our stride from a volume perspective in production in the next fiscal year.
All right. And then on the gross margin side, you guys have talked about kind of ramping utilization in the front and back end. So can you maybe help us understand where these levels stand today versus more optimal levels? And then given the seemingly accelerated utilization push, how should we be thinking about underutilization charges declining from here?
Okay. So we are ramping all of our large factories at this time. We've been in serious inventory reduction mode over the last 5 quarters and have made great progress there. And now we're ramping our fabs as an example, and there's some limitations on what we can do there, and we don't want inventory to get too low. So we're maxing that out. And so underutilization charges are going to come down nicely is our expectation in the June quarter, but they don't go away. That's going to take multiple quarters for that to happen, but each quarter, they will be reducing and that we're also ramping our back-end operations in Thailand and Philippines to support what we needed from a finished goods perspective.
And we actually do about 70% of our volume in-house there. Whereas in wafer foundry or in the fabs, we only do about 35% of that volume internally. So they're all ramping. We are fortunate that in the last cycle, we put a lot of capacity in place. So it's just a matter of adding people, having the raw materials to start in the factory, and we're in a really good position to be able to respond to upside demand.
Your next question comes from the line of Chris Caso with Wolfe Research.
So Steve, based on your earlier comments, do you expect that now we're fully through customers and distributors taking inventory down and we're now shipping in line with end demand? And I recognize that may not be the same answer for every market segment. Just interested in your view overall and by particular segments.
So there is nothing really ever absolute. If we have 110,000 customers, you can never say every customer's inventory is corrected. But both distribution, distribution customers and our OEM customers' inventory is broadly corrected and lots and lots of customers coming back and buying the product based on their run rate because they no longer can reduce the inventory further. Are there some customers where they may be still high on SKU here and there? Yes, and that will continue to correct as we go. But the strength of the business, you see it coming back is because of thousands of customers are returning and distributor is buying products for their customers as well as restocking because the inventory has gone too low.
Understood. The next question is with regard to pricing. And we've heard from some others in the space from distributors and such that at least in some areas, we're starting to see some signs that pricing is moving higher. In some cases, it's about the tight supply you spoke about, in some cases, it's about input costs coming up. Can you talk about what Microchip is seeing? And what you are planning on doing with pricing as we go into the second half of the year?
So first, I'll talk about our philosophy and then what we're going to do this time. Our normal philosophy is that we engage with customers at the design location at the time of design and give customer a price which he can count on almost through the life of the design and then comfortably design with us and then be able to buy the parts at that kind of price. That sort of has been the philosophy probably for 30 years.
The post-COVID cycle was very unique with -- there were a lot of input cost increases in Microchip as well as everybody else raised prices. And I think we've also talked about during that time we hurt our relationship with many of our customers, and we have worked very hard in the last year to reestablish good relationships with thousands of customers. So how we're dealing with it right now is I think our gross margins are doing very well and heading very well towards the longer-term target as this underutilization goes away in the coming quarters as we are ramping the factories. So we are trying very hard to really stay on the good side of the customers and not do a indiscriminate broad-based price increase, at least to our partners, strong partner customers.
And beyond that, it will be a customer-by-customer. We're looking at our input costs. We're looking at pricing. In many cases, pricing is adequate. In certain cases, if the price that we got was very aggressive when input costs have gone up, then we may adjust it. But as we speak right now, we have not increased our prices.
Your next question comes from the line of Joe Quatrochi with Wells Fargo.
Yes. I was wondering if you could give us any color on just -- you previously talked about kind of revenue contributions from the megatrends, but and it's kind of difficult to break each one down. But any sort of help on the growth of just the megatrends in general in fiscal '26?
Rich?
So as a percentage of overall revenue, megatrends have increased, but we've broken them down and changed them. So we didn't release a breakdown of that this year in line with -- we stuck with our market review. But we've left the megatrends outside of that purview. Overall, megatrends have been increased. Data centers increased, our communications business has increased, our ADAS business, our networking and connectivity business continues to grow because we lead in 10BASE-T1S and a number of Ethernet products. And so all of those businesses continue to grow very well.
And then as a follow-up, I think in the prepared remarks, you had talked about like actively expanding capital equipment in selective capacities. Any sort of color you could provide on just where those areas are that you're increasing capacity?
Actually, we didn't say we were increasing capacity. That was not in the prepared remarks. I think we said we expect CapEx this year to be about $100 million. And a large part of that is going to be just a maintenance kind of capital, we have sufficient in-house capacity. The areas where we would be adding capacity would be testing capacity for our data center business, for Gen 6 switch as it starts to ramp and retimers and all that. There could be some capacity increase for FPGA where we see significant growth. It could also be some in the Ethernet T1S area. But really, our capacity increase needs are going to be -- our capital needs are going to be modest because we have a lot of capacity.
Right. So we're really mostly just growing back into capacity that was put in place in prior years in the last up cycle.
[Operator Instructions] Our next question comes from the line of Vijay Rakesh with Mizuho Securities.
Just going back on the aerospace, defense side. As you look out, given you are one of the biggest suppliers there and given all the geopolitical tension, wouldn't you expect that business to start to accelerate into fiscal '27, '28 here? And I have a follow-up.
So aerospace and defense business is doing very well. We're getting large orders and it's a good business and it will grow but you also -- also think about for that business to grow significantly, our primes have to grow their capacity. So we can provide more parts for a missile, but the missile production capacity needs to increase. So we are right now talking to every major prime. We're trying to build new facilities to grow their production so it's going to take some time from that standpoint.
Secondly, the cycle time to produce parts for that sector are very long. Sometimes it can be as long as 9 months of cycle time because you build parts and then you park the lot and take a sample, burn them in for many months and if there are no failures, then you can ship the lot. So the cycle time in that sector are very long. So that's why it did very well in the last year. It's doing well now, but it doesn't really go up like a hockey stick that can happen in a cell phone market or data center market. It's very steady growth.
Got it. And back on the data center side, when you look at that portfolio of the PCIe Gen 6 switches and CXL which is probably starting to pick up here and storage controllers. How does that data center portfolio grow? Obviously, a lot of focus on data center and spend there. But any way to size the growth or the pickup there?
Brian?
Well, there's a few important factors that are happening right now in the overall data center ecosystem. We've been experiencing a significant super cycle with respect to AI-based data centers in recent years, but that's been primarily for AI training workloads. And we're now starting to see increases in Agentic AI and inference-based workloads. And those require a significantly larger amount of access to components that are traditionally PCIe based. So CPU utilization, NVMe and storage access is heavily impacted by inference and Agentic AI workloads.
So we believe we're positioned to grow well with the market in the coming years as we see that become more of the predominant growth area in the data center market in the future. And that's across our customer base, which includes hyperscalers, it includes OEMs and traditional enterprise server manufacturers as well.
Your next question comes from the line of Joshua Buchalter with TD Cowen.
Congratulations on the very solid results. Maybe following up on Chris' question on pricing from earlier. I mean, your message was very clear on rebuilding relationships with customers and not raising pricing. I guess how aggressive are you observing your competitors on pricing right now? And is it at the point where you're able to lean in and gain share as a result? And I guess, is there a certain level of input costs rising where you'd have to change its philosophy a little bit in the near to medium term and raise pricing as well?
So I mean, I think you're partially answering the question in your question. We are repairing our relationship with our customers, and many of those are repaired, and we don't want to stress them.
Number two, we are watching very carefully what every competitor is doing to the extent we have information from the market. And number three, we have strong partners, and we have people that have a tactical relationship, they just buy parts. And so we're separating those 2 in a way. Partners mean one thing, and the people who have just a casual relationship mean another thing. And if we see any stress on our input costs in a specific area, then we will be willing to adjust prices -- even non-partners.
Got it. Okay. You mentioned some growing areas of tightness in the supply chain. You made the decision a couple of years ago to not invest in a 300-millimeter fab and are investing in a more targeted way now. Given we're still not that far away in the grand scheme of things from the shortages a few years ago. I was hoping you could maybe reflect on your confidence that there's enough foundry capacity and investment going on right now that you and I guess the industry as a whole have enough room to run in what seems like a growing up cycle?
When we were willing to invest in 300-millimeter capacity, it was going to be under a license from a major partner. Without that license, we don't really have 300-millimeter IP and starting stand-alone, building a fab, developing a process and then developing thousands of mask sets on it is really just not a very cost-effective exercise. So we were doing it when a major foundry partner had told us that they will grow capacity largely on the bleeding edge. And therefore, the trailing edge or medium edge capacity will not grow and they were willing to give us a license. That thing is really no longer true.
In the post cycle, there was plenty of capacity until very recently, there was a plenty of capacity. It's becoming a little tight now, but the partners are adding capacity, and we believe we'll have sufficient capacity available in the coming years. And the major tightness would be really on the bleeding edge like 3-nanometer. The rest of it, we are getting what we need. Is it tight? Yes, but it's really not horribly bad.
Your next question comes from the line of Harlan Sur with JPMorgan.
Memory pricing continues to increase fairly meaningfully and we do see some pullbacks in production of low-end, mid-end smartphones, PCs, consumer electronics segments of the market. I know this is a smaller part of Microchip's revenue mix. But even some of the big ticket items like consumer appliances, industrial applications are being somewhat impacted by this dynamic. Like, for example, as we've heard of some of the industrial customers having to scramble for memory, not because of pricing, but because of end of life of older DDR4 memory and now they're having to kind of requalify their systems. Is the team seeing some of this memory pricing dynamic reflected across your customer base?
Yes. So you're right. I mean I think it fits into specific areas. So driven by AI, the DRAM capacity is very tight. So what some of the NAND flash manufacturers have done is shifted some of that capacity to DRAM. And then the lower end of the NAND flash capacity, some of the NOR flash manufacturers have moved into NAND flash.
So the NOR flash got constrained. So some of the E-square manufacturers in Asia shifted their E-square capacity to build a NOR flash. So everybody has moved upstream. And the bottom of that pile is E-square, which is what we make, Serial E-square and number of people have really basically abandoned that, double the price, which really means they have abandoned it because it converted the capacity to something else. And we are seeing significant opportunity in that business. It's not a very large business for us. But I mean, it's up significantly.
That's very, very specific memory-related but our run-of-the-mill microcontrollers, 8, 16, 32-bit microcontroller, analog, power management, A2D converters, D2A converters, our BiCMOS, DMOS other products, I mean they're all fine. Can we double any of those short term? No, capacity is tight, but we have sufficient capacity to meet the numbers we're giving you, even create the upside of the demand and backlog were to come in. And that capacity will continue to increase in the coming quarters. And the business really remains looking for turns. It's not like we're turning business away because we don't have capacity.
Got it. And as aerospace and defense continues strong, a big part of that is the leadership that you guys have in FPGA. I think the market share rankings for last year out here. FPGA business continues to be a strong franchise, #3 global market share leader. This business outperformed your overall business in calendar '25. Obviously, PolarFire is a leader in aerospace and defense applications. But outside of aerospace and defense, we're seeing that there's strong pickup for just general-purpose mid-range FPGA applications across the wide variety of end markets. It's a highly gross margin accretive product family, PolarFire, PolarFire 2. How is the team doing on expanding your leadership in midrange to broader market applications?
Well, we are. We absolutely are. The PolarFire 2 is in the fab and shortly coming out, and we're very excited to be launching the PolarFire 2 later this year. It's software ecosystem is already out. And we got customers waiting for those parts. In fact, all the initial runs that we're doing even for samples are already spoken for. So there's a strong demand for that part, even outside the A&D sector as well as in the A&D sector. So I think we're already doing that. We're only selling lots and lots of those devices in the markets outside of A&D.
Your next question comes from the line of Tore Svanberg with Stifel.
Congrats on the results. Steve, you talked about lead times starting to extend. I was hoping maybe you could give us a bit more color there. Is it more broad-based? Is it specific products? And just based on the current environment, do you expect lead times to continue to extend as we go into the second half of the year?
So I think, in general, lead times are broadly expanding. And I think in another quarter or so, there could be nothing available in 4 to 6 weeks. I think it's entirely possible. Today, we still have -- when we say we have 185 days of inventory, even though a lot of that inventory, we keep it in the die form. But if the demand comes up in the exact mix where we have the die, we can still assemble, test and ship it in 4, 5 weeks. But that's not going to last very long. I think over the next 2 quarters, definitely, the inventory goes down significantly into the range of our long-term model. And I think many, many products, die inventory would really be fairly low. So the lead times could see a broad-based expansion in the coming quarters.
Very good. And as my follow-up, you talked about the 2 pillars moving to 5 pillars. I appreciate you're still doing all the work there. But I just want to make sure I understand some of the compositions obviously, networking is straightforward. But you mentioned HPC and Edge AI. Edge AI is pretty clear. But HPC, would that primarily be then storage for infrastructure? Or is there anything else that goes into that pillar?
The high-performance compute has really microprocessor business, our FPGA business, our timing business, those are most of the products in there.
Your next question comes from the line of Quinn Bolton with Needham & Company.
I guess I wanted to ask, you mentioned a couple of times in the script that you're starting to see the [ distis ] come back with larger orders. I guess, in the guidance for the June quarter, are you assuming some level of restocking? Or do you think that restocking happens later in the calendar year? And then I've got a follow-up.
So we are expecting some level of restocking, but you should think about that, but that doesn't necessarily mean that the months of inventory or days of inventory in distribution will go up. So we're guiding 11% up in revenue. And if you take a distributor and say they've got $50 million of Microchip product, and they are growing at that rate, we'll call it, 10%. They have to grow their inventory by $5 million just to keep their MOI flat if their sell-through is increasing at that rate.
So yes, we are expecting some restocking. The level of that, I think it's hard to predict, but I think it's needed. Distribution inventory is really low at this point in time. And in a growth environment, they got to position theirselves to be able to support their customers.
Got it. And then a quick follow-up for Steve. It sounds like, Steve, you feel pretty comfortable you can get the external foundry waivers. But any tightness on either OSAT, substrates, especially as you think about the PCI and the memory and storage controller business. Is there any tightness there?
Yes, of course. I mean like I said, there is tightness everywhere. Our foundries, and all major foundries we do business with, probably 70%, 80% of the process technology nodes are constrained. When I say constrained, I would say they are very tight. If I need a couple of hundred more wafers, can I work the system and be able to get it? The answer is, yes. But it isn't like you're sitting at a 80% utilization. And if I wanted more wafers, I have them right away.
You kind of got to work the system and make the calls high up and escalate it and request it and somebody else in the system has a downside. Then you get it, you may not get it today, but may get it 3 weeks from now. So everything is basically full. And I think that's the system we're looking at it. But we have a higher allocation as the future quarters come in because foundries are adding capacity. So we have increased allocation from them. And with that, the business will continue to grow. But like I said earlier, can I grow a business 50% in 1 quarter? No. But can I grow at the rate we're talking about? Yes, and there's even room for upside.
Now when you come to the most advanced capacity like 3-nanometer node, that's totally different equation. There the capacity is less than half of what the world requires.
In substrates?
In wafers.
Sorry, just advanced packaging substrates, any impact on the -- like the data center business?
Yes. So we are constrained on substrates. We're qualifying additional substrate suppliers. We are working with the existing suppliers to get more allocation. It's just like the wafer, substrates are very tight. One problem with the substrates is they have a shelf life, right?
12 months.
Yes. So they have a shelf life, and therefore, you can't build a whole bunch in the down cycle, thinking you can use them 1 year, 1.5 years from now. They have a shelf life. So you have to really buy it in time. Are substrate constrained? Yes. Is it impacting our data center business? Yes. Is it impacting our connectivity and networking and automotive business? Yes. And we have delinquency, our nonsupported dollar volume has gone up significantly, but it's not at a crisis level. It's not like it was post-COVID. We're working through it. And there are no real screaming customers so far. I think we're working through them.
Your next question comes from the line of Joe Moore with Morgan Stanley.
I wonder, you talked about your discussions with customers and kind of rebuilding relationships that had been strained during COVID. Can you give us some color on what those conversations are like and I guess some of the strain was enforcement of LTAs, price increases, things like that. How does that inform? How you're going to deal with those sort of same considerations in the next upturn?
No, I think our conversations in the last year have been very good and we visited a lot of customers, a lot of customers visited us, and we met them at events around the world from CES, to MASTERS conference, to other industry conferences. And we owned up to some of the mistakes we made in the past. And customers, engineers always liked us. We had a very good product. We're a high-quality product. We were reliable suppliers, but we just used some policies that turned off purchasing managers and manufacturing people and others. And we made commitments to really work with them better. And I think that has gone well. People have given us a chance.
And now what's happening is we are seeing our competitors hurt them with large price increases and all that. So they're even coming more to us. And since we haven't increased the prices, we're gaining share. So I think all that is kind of working well. Our competitors are actually helping us right now.
Your next question comes from the line of [ Janet Ramkissoon ] with [ Quadra Capital ].
Steve, thanks for the update on the nine-point plan. Just my question about substrates has already been asked. But just one on the business unit realignment. If you look at the 3 markets that you've added to the basic business, microcontrollers and analog both businesses have pretty large TAMs. And given the -- what's going on with AI and data center growth those markets could present significantly larger opportunities. At what point do you think that you might have to revisit your margin targets? Or am I being too optimistic about the growth prospects of these 3 new areas?
When you say -- Janet, first of all, thanks for asking the question. When you say we have to revisit our margin target, are you concerned our margin targets are too low or too high?
Too low.
Well, that will be a high-class problem. Let's -- when I came back 1.5 years ago, our gross margin was 52%. And when we gave a target of 65%, I've been fending the blows for 1.5 years, like why our target, how will we get there? And we were so low and this and that and competitors are doing this and competitors are doing that. Now it is in the striking range, if you take our underutilization and add it back, I think we get there. So let's get there and then if you're...
Yes, the reason -- I just want to add this. We look at a company like Anthropic, they went from $1 billion in revenues, and now they're talking about potentially exiting the year $45 billion. I mean this whole AI business has just taken off like a rocket. And we've never seen growth in any market like this ever. And so if you look at AI on the edge. No, Anthropic, they're one of the large language model providers. And you look at the growth there, you look at the growth in OpenAI, it just seems to me that if you -- that you might need to be preparing to keep up with a higher level of growth rate than you have been used to historically. That is just being a long-term shareholder, I just thought I'll throw that out there.
We'll welcome that opportunity. Yes. I mean we are working on it. We're developing the products. We see the market. We see the opportunity. That's what you've heard from Brian now in 2 out of the 3 last meetings and last meeting, we talked about T1S. So we are engaged. But I think it's premature for us to sign up to anything different than what we're signing up for.
Yes. Okay. I wasn't asking you to sign up. I was just trying to think just sort of think outside-the-box to try to figure out where your head might be.
Your last question comes from the line of Blayne Curtis with Jefferies.
I actually wanted to go back to a couple of the prior data center comments. I think you broke out at one point that within data center compute, data center was about 80%. I wanted to make sure that's the right way to think about it for the fiscal year. And then if you look at a lot of the peers with exposure -- analog peers with exposure to data center, that business is growing substantially double digits for the last couple of quarters. Just kind of curious, I know you probably don't want to give the exact numbers, but is that the kind of growth you're seeing? And is there any headwinds still in that segment that are going down.
So I'll start by saying I don't think we've given a percentage of our data center and compute what data center makes up. But it is the larger piece for sure. And then within that, there's various different areas that make that up. Brian's business unit Data Center Solutions is one of those, which we have high expectations for. I'll let Brian speak to the rest.
Yes. We're also seeing high growth in our digital power control for many of the power supplies that exist within data centers within our power group.
If you look at our Data Center business unit, Brian's business unit, year-over-year has a huge growth but we're not quite willing to break it out unless we do that as part of the overall breakout that we have talked to you about and we're analyzing it. The problem is the data center one is not as much as of a challenge. Some of the others are a significant challenge, like connectivity and networking and timing business and others because some business units have some parts which are analog, some have a microcontroller core, so the portion goes into microcontroller, is something IoT or is something networking? What is the difference? They look very close. Is it a data center business unit? Or is it a part that goes into data center, but it's a power management part that comes from AI -- I'm sorry, comes from analog business unit.
So we have content in data center market or data center servers, which are microcontrollers, which are power management parts, which are...
Ethernet, USB.
Ethernet, USB, so there are various business units, probably 7 or 8 business units contributing to our content inside the data center. Brian is just one part of it. With the storage controllers, PCI Express and the third one was memory, CXL and those. So it's a complicated breakout. And we are somewhat concerned about confusing you and not really helping the cause. So we're trying to figure that out and put it all together so we can share with you.
And then just a quick one for Eric. I know you have a big piece of variable in your OpEx. I'm just kind of curious how to think about OpEx for the fiscal year.
Yes. So you're right on that. So when the business is doing well, we have quarterly bonus programs for our employees, which were very low in the down cycle and now that we're coming back, those programs are coming back nicely and guiding 11% up. We're expecting it to be another good quarter for our employees from a bonus perspective. And so that's why you're seeing that along with other compensation elements that were kind of pent-up that we're bringing back to employees drive our OpEx dollars up in the current quarter. I think at the midpoint of guidance, it's about a $15 million growth quarter-on-quarter in OpEx.
And the nice thing about these plans is they are quarterly and we can modulate them in good times and bad times. High-growth quarters, lower growth quarters to keep operating expenses in check. So showing good progress there, but are making investments that we think are important to reward and incentivize our employees to stay with us and continue to produce great work.
This now concludes our question-and-answer session. I would like to turn the floor back over to Steve Sanghi for closing comments.
Well, thank you all for joining us today and hanging in there with us. We'll be attending several conferences coming up this quarter, I think, starting in early June. So we'll see you on that circuit.
Yes. We will actually be the first one. I think it was a JPMorgan conference in 2 weeks and then a number after that. So we look forward to seeing everybody.
Thank you.
Ladies and gentlemen, thank you for your participation. This does conclude today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines, and have a wonderful day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Q4 2026 Earnings Call
Microchip Technology — Q4 2026 Earnings Call
Starkes Umsatz‑ und Margen‑Recovery; Data‑Center‑Designwins und reduzierte Inventare treiben Erholung, Lieferengpässe bleiben Gegenwind.
Earnings Call Q4 / Fiskaljahr 2026: Management legte Zahlen vor, gab Guidance für Juni‑Quartal, diskutierte Data‑Center‑Momentum und Supply‑Chain‑Risiken.
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $1,311M (+10.6% q/q; +35.1% YoY)
- Jahresumsatz: $4,713M (+7.1% YoY)
- EPS (non‑GAAP): $0.57 (+$0.07 vs. Guidance‑Mitte)
- Bruttomarge: 61.6% non‑GAAP, inkl. Under‑utilization‑Charges $46.6M
- Cash & Hebel: Adjusted EBITDA $466.8M (35.6%); Net Debt/Adj EBITDA 3.54, Ziel <3 nach Juni‑Quartal
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Neun‑Punkte‑Plan: Rechte Größenanpassung, Inventarabbau (266→185 Tage) und organisatorische Neuausrichtung laufen; verbleibende Punkte: Tempe‑Fab‑Verkauf, weitere Margin‑/OpEx‑Verbesserung.
- Data‑Center‑Momentum: Designwins für PCIe Gen6‑Switches, CXL/PCIe Memory‑Controller und Storage‑Beschleuniger; erste Rampen und Benchmarks zeigen vorteilhafte Performance/Leistung pro Watt.
- Preis & Kapazität: Keine flächendeckenden Preiserhöhungen; kunden‑/partnerbezogene Preisanpassungen möglich; Foundry/Substrat‑Enge erwartet, qualifiziert zusätzliche Lieferanten.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- June‑Quartal: Umsatz erwartet +11% q/q ±1% (Midpoint +35.3% YoY).
- Margen & Ergebnis: non‑GAAP Bruttomarge 62.25–63.25%; OpEx 28.75–29.25%; Operative Marge 33–34.5%; non‑GAAP EPS $0.67–$0.71.
- Cash & CapEx: Starkes Cash‑Quarter erwartet, Ziel: deutliche Schuldenreduktion; FY‑CapEx ~ $100M.
- Risiken: Under‑utilization‑Charges (letzte: $46.6M), Lieferketten‑Engpässe (Foundry, Substrate, OSAT) und volatile Distributor‑Restocking‑Dynamik.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Data‑Center‑Sizing: Analysten drängten auf Marktgrößen und konkrete Win‑Sizings; Management nannte Designwins, aber keine kunden‑ oder umsatzbezogenen Pro‑Forma‑Zahlen.
- Inventar & Distribution: Diskussion über vollständige Korrektur der Distributionsbestände; Management sieht Restocking, aber keine übermäßige Lageraufbau‑Prognose.
- Supply‑Chain & Pricing: Fragen zu Lead‑Times, Substraten und Foundry‑Zuteilungen; Management bestätigt breitere Knappheit, spricht von selektiven Preismaßnahmen kundenindividuell.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Solide operative Erholung mit starker Umsatz‑ und Margenentwicklung; Data‑Center‑Rampen bieten nachhaltiges Upside, während Lieferketten‑engpässe und verbleibende Under‑utilization‑Kosten kurzfristige Risiken darstellen. Anleger sollten Wachstumspotenzial und De‑Leveraging beobachten, ebenso die Entwicklung der Lead‑Times und Margenverluste durch Supply‑Constraints.
Microchip Technology — 2026 Cantor Global Technology & Industrial Growth Conference
1. Question Answer
Good afternoon, everyone. I'm Matthew Prisco, analyst at Cantor Fitzgerald, covering semis and semi cap. Today I have the pleasure of hosting Eric Bjornholt, CFO at Microchip; as well as Sajid Daudi, Head of IR. So thank you both very much for joining us today.
Thanks for having us.
I wanted to open this chat with some near-term level setting. Last quarter, Microchip highlighted a number of positive developments in terms of cyclical indicators, one being booking strength as December quarter moved significantly higher and strength into January. Can you offer some color around any particular areas of strength within those bookings? Any particular areas that could be lagging? And then how have these dynamics develop through February and early March?
Sure. Sure. So I'll start by doing the safe harbor and saying I refer you to our filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors about the company. And we'll be making some forward-looking statements during this presentation and discussion.
So bookings have been really strong. So both January and February bookings were very, very strong. It's the strongest first 2 months of the quarter that we've seen since like the first quarter of fiscal 2023. So bookings have continued to be good, and that's even with the Chinese New Year falling in there. So it's been really good. Backlog is building nicely, obviously, filling up the current quarter and then building our visibility into the June quarter, giving us confidence.
The bookings have really been broad-based in nature. It's not one particular end market or geography that's driving it. It's broad-based. We think there's a lot of customers that are now coming back. They've depleted inventory or now having to buy in line with what end consumption is. So that's good to see. We have some secular drivers that I know we'll talk through as part of this discussion. We are seeing strength in data center aerospace and defense and some of our networking areas are also quite strong right now.
Okay. And I know you guys talked about expedites increasing significantly and lead times extending in spots as well. So -- can you offer us some more detail on specific areas where these dynamics are most prevalent today? And maybe how you expect these trends to develop over the coming quarters?
So what we're seeing in expedites is customers are placing orders and they might place them out in April and then try to pull those in, into March because once they know that we've got them started in our manufacturing line, we have capabilities to have pretty quick turns to them. So we're seeing quite a bit of that activity that's continued last quarter into this quarter. Second piece of your question was?
And then lead times, lead times are extending. And how do you think these dynamics kind of progress from here based on just what you're seeing in customer conversations?
Yes. So lead times are generally quite short, but there are some pockets where lead times have extended out. Everybody knows that 3-nanometer as an example, some of the more advanced process technologies are pretty full at the foundries. So we're seeing extension of lead times there. Also some of the substrates impacting some of the assembly and test portions of our business where we subcontract that out to a third party have extended, and we're reflecting those in our lead times, being sure that we're communicating with customers. They know what they are. But I'd say for 90% of our products lead times are still very short. We've got 200 days of inventory on the balance sheet and more capacity than we need at the current time. So I expect lead times for a lot of the products to stay quite short, but there's going to be these pockets and it tends to be that, that it will expand a little bit over time. But right now, it's a pretty small subset of products.
Okay. And maybe on the inventory front, how should we think about the duration of the customer inventory, I believe, in your direct customer inventory? I know from a [ disti ] side, it sounds like things are pretty good there. So how do you think about the customer side? When does that start really tracking your shipments in line with demand?
Yes. So as you said, distribution, we think, is pretty much corrected at this point in time. Last quarter, we ended with 28 days of inventory in the distribution channel, which is normal. The difference between what was sold out of distribution and what was sold in was only about $12 million last quarter that sell-through exceeded sell-in. And those might even normalize to be nothing. This quarter, we'll see how it plays out.
On the direct side, I think there is still pockets of inventory that are out there. We don't have great visibility into that other than through customer discussions and discussions with our distributors in terms of what they're seeing from their end customers, but we are watching things in distribution in terms of distribution sell-through. We would expect as that inventory depletes from their customers, the distribution sell-through will have to pick up. And in turn, what we're selling into distributors will rise with that.
So we look at sell-through very closely. And what we are seeing in many cases that we have new bookings activity coming in from customers that haven't bought from us for some time, and that's a clear sign that they've depleted out their inventory and need to come back and start to buy in line with end consumption.
Many customers buy multiple products from us. And so it doesn't happen for each product at the same time, but this gradual increase that we're seeing, I expect that to continue for the next few quarters.
Okay. Let me move into the segment side, starting with the industrial market, which accounts for roughly half of your revenues overall. How have you seen the recovery play out here today across the subsegments? And what gets you most excited in terms of growth here over the next few years?
So industrial is a big piece of our business, including aerospace and defense, which is about 18% of the business. We include that in Industrial. In total, it's about 48%. Aerospace and defense has been a really strong segment for us for quite some time. We are a large supplier to the Department of Defense. And obviously, conflict around the world isn't great, but that is a benefit to our business. And so we are seeing some upsides there and it's been very steady, high-margin business for us for quite some time. Other areas of industrial, and Sajid can chime in here also, but we're seeing anything, Industry 4.0, factory automization, robotics, things like that. Medical even is doing quite well. Anything else you want to add?
Yes, some of the edge IoT type of activity and FPGA plays on that. Industrial content growth, generally speaking, is increasing as well. And so other products are finding space there, too, in the value chain.
Perfect. Maybe digging a little bit deeper into aerospace and defense, given the current geopolitical landscape, can you give us any help in breaking down the revenue pay between those 2 markets? And -- where is Microchip best positioned? And have you seen any change in order patterns or customer conversations over the past couple of weeks?
So A&D has 3 broad categories for those defense, there's commercial aviation and there is space. And defense is the biggest piece of it. We don't break it out specifically. But obviously, the defense side is where we're seeing really good traction right now. Space also, there's a lot of things that are being launched up into the atmosphere. You've got new space, which Sajid again could talk about a little bit more if you'd like him to dig into it a bit. But we're seeing good activity there. Commercial aviation is also strong. We sell a lot of products into all the planes that are going up. And with that, our content has continued to grow. FPGA has a strong position in aerospace and defense for us, and that's been a really strong area of growth for us.
Okay. Perfect. I believe you've recently highlighted these new product introductions, which should start ramping in 2026 and bolster growth for Microchip. So can you maybe walk us through this dynamic? Any particular area that these wins have been accruing more than others? And how should we be thinking about the magnitude of these ramps and how that can contribute to outsized growth versus the market in '26? And does that continue through into '27?
Yes. So -- yes, absolutely, right. So we have actually two very significant platform level products that are ramping into '26-'27 time frame. And these are general and architectural changes rather than kind of a one-off product technology change. And so the first area is the Ethernet side, which is the automotive Ethernet side, and this is our 10BASE-T1S product. And here, we already have actually a platform design win with Hyundai Motors, which we announced last earnings call and additionally, some other kind of Tier 1 OEMs. Basically, these companies or these customers as they're looking to modernize their legacy architecture, which has traditionally been LIN and CAN [ archit ] nodes into the Ethernet side. That's really where this product kind of comes into play. And we feel that as we kind of progress to a zonal-based architecture into the next-generation EVs and a ADAS platform, the 10BASE-T1S product category, that's a pretty prevalent lift in here. It's a refresh cycle. It's a once in a multi-decade type of transition that's happening here.
And so all these legacy nodes will be eventually replaced by 10BASE-T1S on communicating in different areas of the car. So very exciting. And again, early stage. We just are ramping in there. So I think revenue contribution will be minimal in the '26 calendar time frame, but really ramp -- start ramping in the early, mid-, late '27 and beyond standpoint. And this is like I said, a multiyear trend that we think is happening.
And this isn't replacing anything you currently do. This is all fresh...
This is going to be all fresh, right? So this would be existing. So we're not going to cannibalize. Some of the existing legacy nodes. Obviously, we have a presence there, but then this will be incremental there. And then the other thing exciting thing that we have on the data center side is our -- so we now have the first production-ready Gen 6 PCIe switch on 3-nanometer. And this is something that's been -- again, Microchip has a long history of acquisitions and through our last one, which is Microsemi, we acquired this piece of the equation, and Microsemi was rolling up a whole bunch of players as well. So this kind of legacy goes back to the PMC-Sierra days for those who are familiar.
And so Microchip today is really the only company that has -- so PCI is not a new area for us. So today, we're serving it with Gen 3, Gen 4, Gen 5 and Gen 6. Gen 5, we had a little bit of misstep on where we tried to develop some SerDes in-house, and that delayed that product category. So we lost some share there because of that delay. And so for the Gen 6 launch, we went a technology improvement there from where competitors are on 5-nanometer. So we went 1 node lower to 3 nanometers. And what that does is just there creates quite a bit of value proposition where our product just going from a technology difference drives 15% to 20% greater power efficiency or better power efficiency using our products.
And again, as you kind of think of a gigawatt style data center, that's substantial savings and when the GPU clusters are expanding to no end. So that's another area. And again, like I said, that's ramping. We announced this. The product went to production a couple of quarters ago. And so last quarter, we announced 3 design wins on it as well. And so again, that's going to ramp minimal in the '26 time frame, but more so in the '27 area and again, a multiyear trend there. And our opportunity there is kind of multifold, right? A, just again being a technology leader, so just a pure play a share gainer from some of the established players in there. And then the other part would be as a dual source partner for a lot of these customers because as they look for optionality, that will be an opportunity as well.
And so -- like I said, today, we're the only one that's providing that entire suite of PCIe switches, which becomes a critical piece. One point I'll make is, even as you think of some of these new generation areas like robotics and stuff, a Gen 4 PCIe switch is more than capable to deliver some of that. So it doesn't need to be kind of the latest, greatest. And typically, what you see is hyperscalers as the first adopters of the latest generation. And then quickly followed by 18 months or so with enterprise adoption and stuff. So we think we have a good runway ahead of us in this area. And certainly, we have to kind of reestablish ourselves a little bit, but certainly, those are the 2 areas that we're pretty excited about, and the ramp is going to start coming through in the '27 area, more so significantly.
And on this PCIe, this is roughly a $2 billion market today and industry estimates are it's going to grow to about $10 billion by 2030. So the growth opportunity is large here.
Perfect. And I definitely want to dig more into data center, but just to wrap up Industrial quick. You guys made an interesting comment recently saying that hardware is becoming a little bit less important versus the tools and software being offered to customers and enabling the intelligent edge. So firstly, does that mean that the hardware such as the MCUs becoming generally kind of commoditized at this point with a broad array of offerings that are good enough? And if not, how does Microchip differentiate there? And then second, where does Microchip stand with the toolings and software? What are you offering to customers here? How should we think about investment focus in the space from the company? And maybe how do you differentiate from the competition?
Yes. So the hardware is still a very important element. You've got to have the right product that does what the customer needs you to do. But software is a growing element and we are doing lots of things to make the customers' journey and use of our products easier and provide more tools to them. We're doing all sorts of things internally with AI and machine learning, making some of that available to customers where we've trained this stuff for 5 or 6 years internally and now opening it up and they can use this. And from a tools perspective, from a design perspective, to save 30%, 40%, 50% of design time by using it. And that just -- everybody is limited on resources that they have on the engineering side. And so anything that we can do to help them with that is extremely important. Sajid, would you add anything else?
No, I think you kind of captured it well.
I mean is that bolstering the ASP side? Is that bolstering the margin side? Is it part of TSS? Like how does this kind of change Microchip story, not just today, but kind of looking out over the next 3, 5 years?
It's all those things, right? So TSS is selling total system solutions, and we've been working on that through the acquisition strategy that we essentially executed over about a decade. And so you go in with a base kind of anchor product, and that could be an MCU, it could be an FPGA, it could be MPU. And that's kind of the brains of the system. And then there's all this other stuff that goes around it, whether it's analog, timing products, security products, memory products, all these things. And we offer all that to our customers. We provide them working reference designs for that and then speed their time to market where they're not trying to get chips from 6 different companies to interact well with each other. We do that for them and give them a head start and bringing the market quicker. So that's a strategy we've been employing for the last decade or so, and it's just getting more refined every year, and we're helping customers save money.
Okay. Now shifting over to data center. You already touched on the PCIe Gen 6 opportunity there. I think the last quarter, you had said 3 customers. And I think intra-quarter, you guys said 4 customers. How do we think about kind of that pipeline converting from here? Can you, I guess, first give any color on those 4 customers that you have? And then how do these new customers roll in? Is it kind of proof of concept with these early customers to make sure it's working. And then we'll see in 6 months here is the next tranche of customers? Or -- just how does that kind of work?
So we started sampling back in October time frame. And it takes time. These are complex products. We have many designs that are in various phases right now. We've talked about 3 or 4 wins that we've had there. One of those wins is material from a revenue perspective that it's expected to be $100 million plus in calendar year '27. So that's important. And we've got, again, 20 or so others that are in various phases of design and we've got a product that we think has a very significant competitive advantage over the rest of the competition from a power consumption standpoint, what Sajid mentioned before. In these gigawatt data centers like 8% of the power is consumed by PCIe. So if we can provide a 20% advantage there a reduction, it's a meaningful advantage and people are strongly considering our products. So we're super excited about it, and we think the growth opportunity is quite large.
Yes. And even -- I'll just add to that is that even on the PCIe side, you almost vendor-agnostic, right? So you can have a media style GPU or an AMD or custom ASIC and still be able to use our PCI switches. So certainly, we're today sampling across the board with everybody and some. So really very healthy kind of sampling activity going in there and timing will just be defined by as these customers start coming in. But today, the reach is very strong, and the response has been really good. So we talked about 15%, 20%. I think if you really talk to our business leader there, you'll say field tests are coming back even more positive. And so this is what everybody is trying to solve for is what the power efficiency in the data center. And so we certainly have a solution there, and interest levels are very high at this point.
And we have more products coming over the next couple of months, we expect for our retimer products to come to market also that can sell alongside the switches.
I guess maybe how should we be thinking about Microchip's ability to maintain its advantage to transition to the Gen 7 PCIe switch. I think that's theoretically coming out this year. I mean, what type of improvements should we expect gen-over-gen, you talked about the 15% to 20% you're seeing now? Is that something similar next time around? And then maybe what are the technology shifts that would drive the customers to kind of adopt this next-gen offering?
So I think we're in a very good position because we're already on 3-nanometer, right? And Gen 7 will also be on 3-nanometer. So since we were the first there, I think we were a step ahead of the competition, which will likely transition to 3-nanometer and next gen, and it's always most difficult that first time that you're bringing up a new technology. So that's an advantage, and we absolutely expect that product to be out in the next 12 months. Anything you want to add to Gen 7?
And I think just the fact that we are today kind of have all of the generations in there. Once you get designed in the first 18 months or so is really where a lot of this design capture is happening. So once you get designed in and you can deliver to the customer that you have a viable product, and the next generation, the incumbent always just has an advantage, right? So it adds to that stickiness aspect to that relationship. So I think -- and again, I will just emphasize like today, we're really the only ones that are offering that Gen 3 to Gen 6 type of activity. And the product road map goes well beyond Gen 7, too. I think you talked to the team there, they have it scoped out for a very long time. And I think by Gen 10, Gen 11 is when you get to just a direct Ethernet connection at that point, right? So there's no intermediary in that area. But certainly, yes, long tail ahead of us along...
How about looking at the retimer opportunity to pair with these switches. Can you talk about expected adoption trends there? And what would drive the customer to choose the Microchip part here and maybe help size this opportunity versus whether it's switch, whether data center revenues?
Yes. So it's really complementary to the PCIe switch, right? As you kind of think of what a switch does, it's kind of giving you that communication between a GPU to GPU or memory controllers, this really kind of extends that communication out further distance, right? So it's really a complementary product there. And again, I think as you think about the opportunity size here, like Eric was saying, the retimer business is an incremental $2 billion to the $10 billion TAM that we said the industry size in there. So again, a smaller area, but goes pretty hand-in-hand. So that -- think about that total solution systems that we're providing. It just helps address a bunch of different areas for a customer as they're looking to design new products. So I think, again, the product is expected to be out next month. I think there's obviously active dialogues with existing customers that may be looking out to kind of trial it out and then go from there. But I think once we have more data points around what the customer feedback is and once it's out in the marketplace, we'll have more color to share. But at this point, we think it's very complementary and expected to come out very soon here.
And just to clarify that, the $2 billion that Sajid mentioned, that's a 2030 number that you're talking about for TAM, not today.
Okay. So $10 billion from the switches, $2 billion from retimers?
Correct.
Okay. How outside of the switch and retimer dynamic, what are other areas in Microchip's portfolio that excite you on the data center side of the business? And I don't know if you could help us understanding the composition of that portfolio.
Yes. So I can start, Eric. So it's really kind of -- it's a full stack solution. So obviously, we've got the switching connectivity side as kind of the one stack there. Then on the storage side, we have kind of RAID-on chip controllers. We have the NVMe, SSD storage controllers. We have the IO switches there as well, then included kind of beyond that as well as the power management products that we offer. So voltage regulators and again, just kind of balancing what the density of a lot of these required density requirements for a lot of these data centers are. So we have a lot of tools on the power side. Then kind of extending it further, you get into the clock and timing side of the equation, when you look at Root of Trust activity and all that, we have a lot of product offerings there as well. And so really a full stack solution and a kind of depth of product areas that we touch the data center with. And again, it's not limited to just the hyperscalers. Obviously, the enterprise data center side, which is a refresh that everybody is kind of waiting to happen because all the spend is going into the AI side today. But I think those would be the areas that would be kind of areas to highlight for the data center offerings.
When you think about those other areas, is there a share gain story we should be thinking about here? What's your market positioning? How should we think about growth? Is this just going to be linked to hyperscale CapEx? Is it going to be linked to something else?
It's probably the best way to think about it it's more linked to the size of the market, but we have competitive solutions in all these areas that Sajid talked about. And when you win some of these larger sockets, it opens up doors for you to have the discussions with these customers about where else we can win.
Yes. And that, I think kind of gets us to an interesting dynamic as well. So anybody that's been following Microchip, you always hear kind of 2-pillar story, right, where there are Fortes like microcontrollers and analog products primarily. And now today with connectivity and some of these other areas, these are kind of new pillars that are coming and getting established, meaning this is where customer dialogue is starting at and then you have a lot of attach opportunity based on what the customer wants to design. So Microchip, you're starting to see a shift from the kind of 2 key pillars to 5 pillars, which is connectivity, data center and AI/ML on the software tool side. So certainly just an expanding growth story here.
Perfect. So gross margins, they came in nicely ahead of expectations last quarter with decline in inventory reserve charges and better product mix. And maybe starting on that inventory reserve charge side of things. How should we be thinking about that number kind of normalizing into the March quarter? And what gives you confidence for a rather meaningful sequential decline there? And then how do we think about that kind of level throughout the remainder of the year?
Sure. So maybe just to highlight, previous quarter, the December quarter had kind of an abnormal event in it where we had an IP sale within our licensing group that added another $20 million, $25 million of revenue at 100% gross margin. So that helped the upside in gross margin that we saw compared to maybe what The Street was expecting, although it was in our forecast for the quarter. This quarter, we're still showing gross margin improvement. I think it's going at the midpoint of guidance to 61% compared to 60.5% last quarter. And that is with that licensing business not repeating in the current quarter. So we had a bit of a headwind on that front and still showing nice growth in revenue and margin.
Specifically on the inventory reserves, they were -- so new inventory reserves were about $58 million last quarter. I kind of like to view it that when things aren't normal, inventory is rightsized, demand is normal, that it's probably $15 million to $25 million a quarter. So we've got a continued benefit that's coming as those reserves reduce. I think we're pretty close to normalize this quarter when you combine what the new reserves are going to be plus what is likely to sell through of some inventory that was previously reserved based on our accounting policies. So with the 61% margin that we're forecasting this quarter at the midpoint, I think inventory reserves are pretty much normalized in that number.
Now on top of that, we've got underutilization charges in our factories of about $51 million, $52 million per quarter right now. And those are going to take longer to come down because we need to grow back into our capacity. And I'm projecting that's probably going to take us a couple of years to burn through those, but they should be coming down modestly each quarter as we move through the next 2 years.
Is there anything we should look to, to inform us of that decline? Like I know it has to be the internal products that grow for obviously utilization to tick higher. So what focus -- what areas should we be focusing on to kind of tell that your utilization rate is going to climb higher than your utilization charge can come down?
Yes. So I mean, we will be pretty specific with you on our earnings call and what our expectations are, but we need to ramp the factories. And we only do about 35% to 40% of our production in-house from a wafer fab perspective. We outsource the other 60% to the professional foundries. So we need growth on the products internally. Our internally produced products, which are kind of our standard microcontroller analog products, some of our timing products, some of our memory products get produced inside, so we need those to grow. Now a lot of the secular things that Sajid was emphasizing here as growth drivers for us, whether it's the data center products, our FPGA products, some of our Ethernet networking type products, most of those are outsourced. So we need growth on kind of the core MCU analog products to grow back into our capacity, which will happen over time, but it might not be as fast as growing as what we see coming from some of these secular areas where we rely on the foundry. So it takes some time, but we're confident we'll grow back into the capacity and have really high confidence about our 65% gross margin target that we have on the non-GAAP side. We've been giving some data each quarter about, hey, if we didn't have these inventory reserve charges under utilization, the underlying product gross margins are like 67%, 68%. So the health of the product line is there.
The good thing with some of these growth areas we've talked about in FPGA, in data center, in Ethernet, these have higher than corporate average gross margins. So they aren't going to help us fill the factories as they grow. But we'll have a bit of a tailwind on the gross margin side because they're highly complex, high-value products to our customers.
Perfect. How about the pricing side? How are you thinking about Microchip's pricing power today, particularly we've seen a number of analog pricing increases year-to-date. So how do you think about that today? And maybe moving forward, as we think about that annual pricing decline of low single digits typical in the industry. Any changes in the customer collaboration you have, the TSS, we're talking about all these dynamics they can kind of change that?
Yes. I would describe our pricing as stable. You're right that many of our competitors have raised prices. We were actually one of the last of our competitors to raise prices in the last up cycle. And you know one of the things when Steve Sanghi came back as CEO was he really wanted to focus on customer relationships. And so we want to be very careful with what we do from a pricing perspective and not gouge customers in any way. So there are clearly some increases that we are seeing in cost in the supply chain, right? It could be gold costs are up or some of the assembly and test subcontracting costs are up. And we will likely do something that is more specific with customers and be very transparent that, "Hey, if we have to raise your ASP by 3%, this is why, and here's the details behind this."
But we're not really thinking about a broad-based increase in pricing of the customers. We want to -- our gross margins have improved dramatically from the low that they were at last March at 52%. We're guiding to 61% non-GAAP gross margins. So margins are moving upward very nicely and getting closer to our target. We're not going to use pricing as a lever to get there. We want to focus on winning more designs at customers and gaining -- having them gain their confidence in us that Microchip is going to treat them the right way.
Got you. Okay. So with a minute left, I got one last question here, I'll give it a quick one. You talked last quarter about kind of increasing transparency in end markets and maybe something new is coming up. I guess, first, what's the impetus for doing that today? And second, what should we expect to see here in May when you kind of come out with the new thinking?
So a lot of our competitors give more details on a quarterly basis than we do on end markets or certain growth areas. And we've kind of used a once-a-year process to do that. So we've been refining our systems and processes and finding a way and discussing it as an executive team, how best to update investors in a consistent manner. So I can't share the details now. We'll share that in our May earnings call for the March quarter, but it is likely that you're going to see more information to allow you to gain some insights on how Microchip is growing in some of these secular areas because they get bundled into 3 categories. It's microcontroller, analog and other. We know we need to give more information on data center on FPGA as an example, on networking. And we'll do that. So we'll define that more and more to come in early May.
Perfect. Well, thank you guys so much. Really appreciate it.
Thanks for having us.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — 2026 Cantor Global Technology & Industrial Growth Conference
Microchip Technology — 2026 Cantor Global Technology & Industrial Growth Conference
📊 Kernbotschaft
- Kurzfassung: Microchip berichtet von deutlich stärkerer Nachfrage (buchungen Jan–Feb: stärkste ersten 2 Monate seit Q1 FY23) und einem wachsenden Auftragsbestand; Stärke breit gestreut (Data Center, Aerospace & Defense, Networking).
- Bestandslage: Bilanzbestand 200 Tage, Distribution normalisiert bei ~28 Tagen Sell‑through; direkte Kundenbestände teils noch vorhanden.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- PCIe Gen6: Produktion auf 3‑Nanometer, 3–4 Design‑Wins (ein Kunde >$100M in CY‑2027), Produktvorteil: ~15–20% bessere Energieeffizienz vs. Konkurrenz.
- Automotive Ethernet: 10BASE‑T1S Plattform (Design‑Win bei Hyundai), Umsatzbeitrag voraussichtlich minimal 2026, Ramp ab 2027 und danach mehrjährig.
- Total System Solutions: Fokus auf Tools/Software und Referenzdesigns zur Beschleunigung der Kundenintegration; Ziel: höhere ASPs, Attach‑Rates und Kundenbindung.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Zeithorizont: Gen6 und Retimer‑Produkte beginnen Sampling/Produktion; Retimer Launch erwartet "nächsten Monat".
- TAM‑Angaben: PCIe‑Switches: $2B heute → ~$10B bis 2030; Retimer‑TAM ~ $2B bis 2030.
- Kommunikation: Management kündigt mehr Endmarkt‑Transparenz in der Mai‑Berichterstattung an.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Inventarreserven: Neue Rückstellungen letzte Quartal ~$58M; Management sieht Normalbereich bei ~$15–25M/Quartal sobald Sell‑through anhält.
- Fabrikauslastung: Unterauslastungsaufwand aktuell ~$51–52M/Quartal; Abbau wird Jahre dauern, erfordert Wachstum in intern gefertigten Produkten (35–40% Inhouse‑Waferproduktion).
- Marktkonversion: PCIe‑Pfad: Sampling seit Okt; mehrere Designs in Entwicklung, echte Umsatzkonversion erwartet überwiegend 2027; Lead‑time‑Ausdehnungen treten nur in Nischen (3nm Foundries, Substrate/Assembly) auf.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Stärkere Buchungen und klare Plattform‑Wins (PCIe Gen6, Automotive Ethernet) schaffen mittelfristiges Upside-Potenzial, realer Umsatzhebel aber größtenteils ab 2027; kurzfristig stützen verbesserte Margen (~61% Guidance‑Mittelpunkt) die Story, während Unterauslastung und Restbestände als Wachstums‑/Timing‑Risiken bleiben.
Microchip Technology — Morgan Stanley Technology
1. Question Answer
Welcome back, everybody. I'm Joe Moore, Morgan Stanley Semiconductor team. Happy to have the management team of Microchip, Eric Bjornholt, CFO; and Richard Simoncic, COO. So thanks, guys, for coming. Really appreciate it.
Thanks for having us.
A lot of interest in Microchip these days. You guys have probably the best rate of change off the low point and a lot of faith in Steve's ability to kind of get the business reoriented. You guided March up 6% sequentially, quite a bit stronger than seasonal.
Can you help us understand that? Is how much of that is customers not depleting inventory anymore? Any indications of restocking, half of the customers destocking and still like just where are we in that dynamic?
Sure. So let me start by saying during this discussion, we'll be making some forward-looking statements about the future financial performance of Microchip, and we refer to our filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors about the company.
So yes, we're guiding the current quarter up 6.2% at the midpoint. I think it's a combination of things. We've got good product momentum in various areas, which Rich can talk about as we go through some of your other questions. But bottom line is distribution inventory is kind of normalized at this point in time.
If you look back a year ago, we had like a $100 million difference between what we were selling to the distributors and what they were selling through. And now that's collapsed down to only be about $12 million last quarter.
I think customer inventory is still normalizing a little bit at the end customer and at distributors' customers. So there's still a little bit to go there, but the distribution is completed at this point. And then we've got, as I said, some pretty good product momentum in certain areas that we'll touch on throughout this discussion.
Great. And you've talked a little bit about visibility building. You talked about a good January bookings month when you reported. You talked about June backlog looking better, getting that forward-looking visibility a little bit. How much of that feels like it's end demand related? And did that persist after the Chinese New Year holidays?
So I think the demand environment is definitely improving. Our February bookings were also quite strong. And if you look at the first 2 months of the current quarter, they are the highest first 2 months we've seen in bookings since, I think, the June quarter of fiscal year 2023. So booking...
There's a lot of math when you say stuff like that, I got to go back.
All right. I got to make sense of it, it's been a long time.
It's been pretty good, yes.
And it's been good. So backlog is filling up nicely, giving us confidence, obviously, in the current quarter guidance and then giving us better visibility into June and beyond.
And are customers wanting you to have that visibility? Or are they still believing that you can turn stuff in a pretty quick fashion?
They mostly believe that we can still turn it in a pretty quick fashion. We've got 200 days of inventory still on the balance sheet. So we -- and our lead times are generally short.
There are some anomalies to that or some instances where lead times have extended, if it's on very advanced process technology, it could be some things with substrates and some of our back-end assembly and test manufacturing. But generally, lead times are still short.
Okay. And then you mentioned distribution inventory looks cleaned up, but direct is mixed. I guess that seems a little bit more cautious than what we're hearing elsewhere. Some of that due to maybe the excess inventory build that you guys saw at the last peak. But just what's your visibility into that starting to get cleared up?
So you know we have this program called PSP, the Preferred Supply Program. And with that, many of our small to midsized customers didn't get inventory when they wanted it. They had to wait because that capacity and inventory was consumed by those that came first for the product.
And so with that, when they finally could get product, they bought more than what they needed, right? They did not want to get caught in that situation again. In some cases, bought a year's worth or 2 years' worth of product, and that's what's taken this long time to really drain through.
But I think we see significant progress in that. We're waiting to see a nice inflection in sell-through from distribution. That's the next thing we're really looking for because now distribution inventory is corrected for the most part. But when there -- are their customers now correcting or in the process of correcting, that will lead to higher sell-through and the distributors will need to buy more.
Helpful. So when Steve was here last year at this time, he walked us through a 9-point strategic plan, and we're kind enough to orient that around our conference, which we appreciate. The numbers is part of it, we know, the inventory aspects and gross margin and things.
But how are we progressing on the customer relationship improvements, the sort of product focus and those elements of the plan at this point?
I'll let Rich speak to customers and products.
So on customer progress, we really revamped. We changed our whole ethos and how we actually work with customers and talk to customers. We really sped up the rate at which we are releasing products within the company and getting answers to customers.
And Microchip for a period of time there, had become arrogant -- right? I don't know how to say that. And we had to fix that whole relationship with customers. And so that has significantly changed over time.
And then at the same time, we're doing that, working with customers on where do we need to move to. So we really doubled down on wired connectivity, ASA, camera connectivity, robotics. We launched PCIe Gen 3 and Gen 4, believe it or not, 12- and 24-lane switches for industrial applications. And all of those are taking off and doing much better in the marketplace, providing much better growth than a more traditional microcontrollers and basic analog products.
You have a very rich business portfolio, all the acquisitions that you did we know all the pieces that are in there. I guess if you went through that period where you were maybe a little bit arrogant, are those cultures still there, the richness of the product portfolio is still evident. We'll get into some of the specific drivers, but how do you feel overall about the Microchip portfolio? And are you going to give us at some point more -- we sort of have the 3 segments, but like...
So there was quite a bit to fix over the last 2 years. We reorganized the company to remove the silos of technology, and we've built it into now just 5 pillars, right? So it used to be 8-bit and 32-bit and 16-bit and everything was separate, right?
And so now we've changed the organization. So all microcontrollers are run under one person, right? And all of compute is under one person. All of connectivity is under one person. All of analog is under one -- and then we have those groups then working together based on megatrends to put together reference designs and bundled products that actually work together.
And so we got rid of some of the personalities that were in there that were preventing us from actually working as one cohesive team. And that's actually really moved our product development substantially.
Okay. That's helpful.
So I think you had a second part of your question there that was kind of talking about how we disclose things today. Right now, we disclose microcontroller, analog and other as our product lines, and we are working internally to find ways to better and more frequently update The Street in terms of how some of these faster-growing areas are growing because right now, it all kind of gets lumped together. We update end markets only once a year. So we're working on that and more to come on that probably in our next earnings call.
Okay. Yes, because I just asked the question because you've got a lot of really interesting businesses that I knew that old -- I've been doing this a long time. I know the companies you acquired. You have PCR is in there instead of Microsemi...
Yes, FPGAs -- FPGA and other and all of -- everyone in here is timing on their devices. Microchip keeps the world's time. All of the cesium clocks or every GPS -- every credit card transaction, that's all based on our atomic clocks that are out there. And that's also part of other that's in there.
Okay. Great. I look forward to more clarity on that. Underutilization, you mentioned inventory is still north of 200 days. You've been absorbing underutilization charges. What's the target there? And at what point do you view that as being less of a headwind.
So that's going to take us a while to work through. I think in the December quarter, last reported quarter, our utilization charges were about $51 million. And the majority of that is coming from our 2 large wafer fabs. There's some of it that is in our assembly and test factories.
We built up significant capacity during the last up cycle, and we have to grow back into that over time. We did do a fab rationalization, where we shut down our Arizona fab, and so that's in a better position, but we still have a lot of capacity that we need to grow into.
So it's going to take us some time -- some of the growth areas that we'll talk about are actually not internally produced from a fab perspective. Anything in FPGA, most of Ethernet, our data center products are all externally produced.
And so those growing is not going to help us with the fab utilization. It has to be more of our standard microcontrollers and analog, timing, memory products that grow to help us grow back into that footprint.
And it will happen, but it's going to take some time. I think it's still going to be a couple of years that those charges hang on. Now we'll be increasing production as we move through and revenue is increasing. We're increasing capacity this quarter. But you shouldn't expect that $51 million charge to go down by $15 million or $20 million in a single quarter. It's going to be more gradual.
Okay. And what is the target inventory level? And is that different from the external versus internal fabs?
So our total days of inventory target is between 130 and 150 days. We ended last quarter with still 200 days of inventory. So we have progress that we need to make. We are significantly underproducing from what we're shipping today from our internal fabs. So it is coming down and will continue to come down.
And we can't wait for it to get to 150 days until we start to ramp because there's some limitations on how quickly we can add people and get them trained and start more wafers in the factory. So we'll be doing it gradually and making sure we don't get too low, but we still have a ways to go on inventory correction internally.
Is the reason you don't take it down further quickly is because it ends up being disruptive?
Well, there's a mix issue, right? During the up cycle, we were adding capacity and building inventory at the peak of the cycle. And when the cycle crashed and revenue went down so much, the product that we have was out of mix from where orders are coming in today. So it doesn't mean that product isn't going to sell eventually, but it's going to take time.
Many of these devices, it's a foot deep mile wide application space, right? So there's -- some wafer lots we produce may produce products for 5 years off of that. So it's going to take a while to lead that off.
Okay. Makes a lot of sense. You have talked about 65% being a realistic long-term gross margin target, and that seems consistent with your business mix. But it's going to take a while, as you said. Any other aspects to that improvement besides utilization?
So it's utilization and then it's product mix. So we are guiding to a midpoint this quarter on gross margin on a non-GAAP basis at 61%. So there's 400 basis points improvement to come. If you added back the underutilization charges from last quarter, we'd essentially be there. Again, that's a longer-term process to get there.
But we also have very high gross margin products that are going to be ramping at a faster rate than Microchip is growing overall, whether it's PCIe 6 in data center, the Ethernet products that we talked about in our last earnings call, FPGA, and they all have higher than corporate average gross margins. So that will be a tailwind to gross margin. Again, it doesn't help fab utilization, but helps with the overall profitability.
Makes a lot of sense. Maybe if we could talk about some of the growth drivers. Data center, you've been pretty vocal on PCI Express Gen 6. Can you just give us an overview of that technology? We had [ Adsterra ] on stage earlier today. Obviously, they've had some first-mover advantages there. Can you talk about your progress?
So we launched our product line in September of last year. To date, we've gotten 4 confirmed design wins. One of those is -- one design win is $100 million plus per year usage dollars. There's about 20 others that are in design at different customers. Feedback that we're getting from customers is the power consumption is about 20% to 30% less than everyone else's.
And typical gigabit data center, PCI switching is about 8% of the power, 20% power saving is pretty significant. And then the security that's built in. So all of the form fit and function is really exceeding a lot of customer expectations.
And for short distances, the fidelity of the device is -- the feedback from customers is so good that there is not a need for retimers in some of the applications. And we're also working on a series of retimers to match up with this PCIe Gen 6 product. And and we'll be releasing that over the next month or 2.
I don't think Rich said this, but just a reminder that we are the only company that has a 3-nanometer Gen 6 switch. So we are the most advanced product out there in this area.
That's helpful. And you have a long history in PCI.
Yes. So we started in PCI switches with Gen 3 and Gen 4. We were the market leader in Gen 3 and Gen 4. Unfortunately, for Gen 5, we decided to roll and build our own SerDes inside rather than licensing it. That delayed our release to market by 12 to 18 months, and we lost our #1 market status.
And so -- we decided -- in the midst of that, we decided not to come out with a 5-nanometer device, but to jump ahead to 3-nanometer and take that risk. And then we developed a bunch of IP partners to help develop and bring that vision to life.
And the whole reason to jump to Gen 6 on 3 nanometers was to be able to quickly come out with Gen 7 within 12 months. And so we are planning to have that Gen 7 device within a very short period of time.
That's helpful. In general, as you think about data center, it seems like a lot of opportunities for Microchip, knowing the portfolio, again, of the historic acquisitions that you've done. Can you talk about your focus in data center? Any other things like besides PCI?
So within data center, we've also got timing products, precision timing products that we build around these products. All GPUs utilize our security compute devices for Root of Trust in data center. We also, for AC to DC or DC to DC power supplies, almost all of those power supplies using our microcontrollers with integrated DSPs to form the basis of their digital power within data centers.
And that's a pretty big growth engine for us in that space -- so it's not just the switches, there's many other areas. And then what we're also seeing now is that most data centers are now implementing our cesium-based clocks into the data center for precise clocking within the racks.
I was an engineer, I did clock chips 35 years ago, engine history. FPGA for you guys. I actually -- speaking of me being old, I did the Actel IPO covered it for a decade.
Really?
It didn't really grow until you bought it.
It's actually grown significantly because when...
After you bought it, it grew nicely.
Yes. When it's fascinating, they were so focused on the aerospace and defense market. They failed to see just if you brought that low-power value proposition to industrial control, medical markets, there was so much more opportunity for that.
And -- and so that's essentially what we did is Microchip is our largest market segment is industrial control. And so we brought that into all of our customers, and we've seen tremendous uplift in design wins. And now what we're doing is where we've worked -- one of the things that we had to educate our FPGA team on, we shouldn't -- it shouldn't take a PhD to write the software code for every FPGA.
And I remember going out and visiting with the development team a couple of years ago and I sat down with them and I said, it is ridiculous. I don't want a PhD to write the code. I want it much simpler.
And now we're bringing out a whole development suite later on this year, much like we did with our microcontrollers that use AI and VS code and will generate a great deal of the code. So you don't have to have an advanced degree to get a product out to market.
It seems like a pretty exciting space. I mean, given the 2 biggest companies have been acquired and various distractions that they have to deal with kind of you and Lattice have really sold opportunity to really pursue this.
There's really only 4 players out there within the FPGA space, right? And where we're really winning is in just that low-power space. And so a lot of customers will bring us in for those particular low-power fleets.
We're still winning a great deal within satellites that are being launched, the Artemis rocket that was up there, whether it's an Airbus or Boeing, our FPGAs are all over those particular products.
Yes. Great. Cool. Connectivity, automotive, industrial connectivity, you have a broad portfolio of products in those markets. Can you talk about the progress there? And when does that turn...
More top line growth? So we announced just this past quarter that our working relationship with Hyundai Kia Motors. And so we've designed in our Ethernet products within the Hyundai Kia Motor software framework. We are working with other manufacturers.
We just -- BMW just announced something with ASA, where they're using our connectivity for cameras and advanced vehicle architectures going forward.
And so we've -- Ethernet, whether it's in data centers, industrial control, robotics, a lot of the humanoid or robotics that are being built up out there, all are using our Gen 3 and Gen 4 12-lane switches in those humanoids. And that's also a new growth area connected with our Ethernet products. So a lot of activity there. A lot of this ramp or this conversion starts to really take hold later part of this year, 2027, 2028.
Okay. Okay. Great. And then aerospace defense, a market that is definitely in favor with semiconductor investors at this point. You guys have a pretty big portfolio with the Microsemi assets, big increases in defense budgets. Can you talk about the growth prospects? And then maybe wrap in low earth orbit and data centers in the space, any excited about there.
Yes. So that is a huge growth area for us. Typical satellite may have anywhere from 25 to 200 devices from us inside of it, whether it's FPGAs or power products, discretes, Mill 19, 500 devices or all part of those satellite systems.
So there's -- there really isn't a satellite system that launches without something from Microchip in it, right? And it's just that the LEO launch, and there's significant content from Microchip in that satellite system. And almost anything that goes to Earth's atmosphere has -- from any country has something from Microchip in it.
That's helpful. So maybe moving away from the products, talk about some of the trends. Can you talk about pricing? You've talked about pricing discipline. Are you seeing any change in competitive dynamics there?
You've actually seen a couple of companies raise prices on the back of commodities prices rising input costs. Just how do you think about the role of pricing?
Yes. So pricing has been stable for us. We have not done a wholesale price increase on our customers. We are very conscientious with our customers today about preserving and enhancing relationships. That was one of the 9-point plan points was to get our customer relationships back where they needed to be.
So if there is any area that we see a significant increase in raw material costs or whatever it might be, we would selectively share that with the customer and raise prices on them, but this is not any sort of wholesale program that we have. So no intention to do that.
Okay. So really more stability than...
Yes. I just mentioned before, we have become arrogant in some ways and just trying to stay away from that.
And then China, an important market for you guys, one where you do have some domestic competition, but you've talked about it as being relatively small impact. Can you give us a sense of -- is China different than the rest of the world.
Yes. So China, where we're focused in China, China is really acting at typical with our customers, China speed, right? They're trying to get out the best products as fast as possible. Cost is always part of the conversation. It seems like acting with speed is more important to them right now.
And so that's where we're focused on. So we're bringing in our Ethernet products, our ASA products. And so they're really fascinated by the new technology and how can they use it and get newer products and newer technology out to market sooner.
So that's where we're focused. I think there was too much discussion on China for China and this. And at the end of the day, what we found in meeting with a lot of customers, just give us great technology and a reasonable cost and let's move.
Yes. And do you see any parts of that market as being vulnerable to domestic competition that's different than other parts of the world?
There's always been -- I remember my first acquisition that I did there was always domestic competition of telecom way back when -- where they were building the products locally. It's always been there.
There's always whether someone that has similar products to our microcontrollers or analog products with the same part numbers, that's always been a part of the marketplace there.
Yes. So I think I'd summarize it as we are going to be cautious about it. We're going to make sure we're protecting our intellectual property. That is really key for us that we're not turning over our manufacturing technology IP, so it can be copied. And that's going to be important for us to maintaining our margin structure long term.
Yes. And I don't think building there is as important as making sure that you have the right technology at the time.
And is the traditional microcontroller business changing at all? I mean there's been sort of a migration from a bunch of custom architectures to more ARM types of technologies. It doesn't seem to have changed the margin dynamics at all, which you said it wouldn't, but...
Yes. I think there's a lot of -- I think ARM is still prevalent out in the marketplace, but I think customers are interested also in RISC-V now to some degree, whether it's 64-bit or 32-bit, they're interested in common accelerators between the devices as they adopt AI on the edge to do more autonomous decision-making.
So I think the core becomes less of importance rather -- I think tools and software support are actually more top of mind for customers than what the hardware actually is.
Helpful. So I have a couple more financial questions, and then I'll open it to the audience. Leverage, is it still a little bit elevated? How quickly are you looking to pay down debt? Is there a cash return in the future as you think about that? It would be above and beyond the dividend, which...
Yes. So leverage is still high. Essentially, we've flatlined our dividend at this point in time. The Board is 100% committed to keeping the dividend where it's at, so investors don't need to worry about the dividend being cut, but that's consumed a lot of cash flow, and it was really just last quarter where we had the first quarter in quite some time where we generated enough cash to pay the dividend.
We were borrowing for a period of time. And that's not a good position to be -- so we've turned the corner on that. Obviously, revenue and earnings and EBITDA is growing significantly. So net leverage is coming down, but we're still focused on anything above and beyond dividend is going to be used to pay down debt for, I would say, the foreseeable future.
We haven't set a new net leverage target. We set one back on our Analyst Day in like November of 2021, which was 1.5x. And when we got below that, we were returning 100% of free cash flow between dividend and share buyback.
Unfortunately, at that time, that was at levels of earnings that were not sustainable during the up cycle and then EBITDA crashed and we got ourselves in a situation, where we issued essentially an equity instrument that's mandatory convertible preferred last March to ensure we maintained our investment-grade rating, which is important to us.
But we don't want to find ourselves in that again. So focus is going to be maintain the dividend and anything above and beyond that, pay down debt. And I think we're going to be in that mode for some time.
Yes. Okay. And then just generally, how are you guys feeling about all of this? I mean you talked about that the company had become kind of arrogant about certain things.
You feel like you're on a path now that people are excited.
I know Steve in his book talked about shared pain and kind of we don't lay people off, and I know you had to because it got very difficult. How are you guys feeling about the trajectory from here from the standpoint of morale and customer relationships and things like that?
I think employee morale has definitely improved a great deal, right? And that the whole PSP program created a lot of tension with customers for a period of -- we are beyond that with customer interfaces. We spend a lot of time visiting customers on the road.
Next week, I was invited to do the keynote for opening of embedded world, where I'm talking about autonomous edge and what we're doing on creating AI at the edge for our customers, right, the software environment and everything we're putting together and have a ton of customer meetings all next week, totally full. So customers are graciously and we're graciously working with them to much better than we've ever done in the past.
Great. Well, I have to follow up on AI at the edge. So a really popular theme this time last year that people kind of have moved away from and AI is now just a data center thing for people. But ultimately, when the AI gets deployed, there's a lot of applications where we're going to need stuff at the edge. What are you going to talk about next week?
So in one application, there's -- I have a narrative. We have a drill, a ready battery-operated drill, right? And you wouldn't think that you would use an ML model inside a drill. But we work with the customer, we collect the data. We figured out how to get 15% more battery life from that drill by putting a simple model, about 200,000 bits of memory on that drill.
No hardware changes, just software, 15% more battery life. That's a drill. And so I think as we're working with customers, a lot of applications with just simple software models or changes just -- and we're not talking large language models or Gen AI.
We're just talking ML, machine learning models, right? Well-done suite of models that customers can use for wear and tear or vision, keyword spotting, a number of different applications where you could benefit from this technology.
Yes. That's very cool. All right. So let me stop there and see if we have questions from the audience.
When do you think we'll start to see the impact of these new ML models or edge AI, physical AI? So what would that impact be on your company financially?
Yes. Great question. So we spent a lot of time visiting and working with customers to find out what they -- what do you really need, right? Are we just going to throw out a microcontroller with 100 TOPS accelerator and then go to town on it.
And what we found is that some microcontroller manufacturers have 4 versions of accelerators and 4 different software making it relatively impossible to scale or move this around. So what we did was we formed a group to just focus on the software suite, no hardware.
So -- and that -- we're a hardware company, right? And so we gave this group a different charter. We said, we want to develop the best software suite. And we've been acquiring companies and putting that together and create that software suite.
And then I worked with and the team, CEVA Technologies to bring in CEVA accelerators anywhere from 50 TOPS to 1,000 TOPS, so that we can put that same accelerator across our FPGAs, our risk-based products, our ARM-based products, our 8-bit products or what -- it doesn't matter, right?
But what matters is that we have the same accelerator topology anywhere from 55 nanometers to 3 nanometers, but we have a software suite and model suite that can work across all of the products, right? And so that's the division that we set up for this group.
And that vision is resonating well with customers because in many -- more than half of the applications that we found, you don't need an accelerator. You just use your standard hardware, just help me develop a model that I can program on a device.
Does it have sufficient memory for me to run that? And do I have sufficient memory to store the code required.
What about SaaS model.
Yes. So there will be a SaaS model to that, Software as a Service. There will be a place for people to put models in terms of working with that. So there will be a SaaS portion to that as we go.
SaaS as well as hardware as well as just trying -- like the battery-operated drill, it just was not obvious to customers. They had people coming in and selling, no, you have to buy this new $10 microcontroller with a 100 TOPS accelerator on it. No. Just keep buying the same $1.50 device and add the software.
We need to replicate the cloud in our power drill.
Yes. And there's a lot of applications like that, that we're finding out there, a lot of them.
Great. Well, that brings us up to the end of our time. So Eric, Rich, thanks so much.
Appreciate it.
Thanks, everybody.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Morgan Stanley Technology
Microchip Technology — Morgan Stanley Technology
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: Microchip sieht eine deutliche Besserung der Nachfrage: Buchungen und Backlog steigen, das Distributionsinventar ist weitgehend bereinigt und die Guidance für das laufende Quartal liegt am Midpoint +6,2% sequenziell. Management betont Produktmomentum in Peripheral Component Interconnect Express (PCIe) Gen6, Ethernet, FPGA (Field‑Programmable Gate Array) und Edge‑Machine‑Learning‑Software; Fabrik‑Unterauslastung bleibt mittelfristiger Belastungsfaktor.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Organisation: Reorganisation zu fünf Technologie‑Säulen statt vieler Silos; Fokus auf integrierte Referenzdesigns und gebündelte Produktangebote zur Beschleunigung von Design‑Wins.
- PCIe‑Fokus: Start von PCIe (Peripheral Component Interconnect Express) Gen6: vier bestätigte Design‑Wins, eines >$100M/Jahr; 3‑nm‑Fertigung als Differenzierer und Roadmap für schnellen Übergang zu Gen7.
- Edge‑AI: Software‑erster Ansatz für Edge‑ML (Machine Learning), Partnerschaft mit CEVA für Accelerator‑IP; geplante SaaS‑Elemente zur Bereitstellung von Modellen und Tools.
🔍 Neue Informationen
- Inventarstatus: Distributionsdiffenrenz von ~\$100M vor einem Jahr auf ~\$12M zuletzt gesunken; Endkundenseiten normalisieren sich noch.
- Unterauslastung: Unterauslastungsaufwand zuletzt ~\$51M, Management erwartet, dass dieser Effekt über mehrere Quartale bis Jahre abklingt.
- Rampen & Timing: Ethernet‑Conversions und einige Industrie/Auto‑Ramp‑Effekte werden später 2024–2028 bedeutender; konkrete Volumeneffekte hängen an Design‑Win‑Adoption.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Inventory‑Dynamik: Analysten fragten nach Restocking vs. Endkundendestocking; Management: Distribution bereinigt, Endkundenseiten noch im Prozess.
- Fab‑Auslastung: Kritische Nachfragen zu \$51M Underutilization und Zielpfad; Management: Abbau dauert Jahre, Ziel‑Inventory 130–150 Tage (aktuell ~200 Tage).
- Monetarisierung: Nachfrage nach Modell für Edge‑ML/SaaS und Hardware‑Ergänzungen; Antwort: Software‑Suite plus SaaS‑Elemente geplant, viele Fälle benötigen nur Software auf bestehenden MCUs.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Positives Signal für Umsatz und mittelfristiges Margenpotenzial dank starker Design‑Wins (insbesondere PCIe Gen6) und Produktmix; kurzfristig dämpfen Fab‑Unterauslastung und hohes Inventar die Margen. Cashflowpriorität bleibt Dividende und Schuldentilgung—Investoren sollten auf Adoption von Gen6/Gen7 und den Tempo‑Abbau der Unterauslastung achten.
Microchip Technology — Wolfe Research Auto
1. Question Answer
Okay. Good morning, everyone. We'll move on to our next presentation. I'm Chris Caso, Wolfe's semiconductor analyst. So thanks for joining us at our conference. Next up is Microchip. With us from Microchip is Matthias Kaestner. Hopefully, I pronounced that correctly.
Matt is good.
Matt is good. That's fine. And Sajid Daudi from Investor Relations. Matthias is the Corporate VP of Auto, Data Center and Networking. I know Microchip has had you out on the road a bit with investors recently because we've heard data center is kind of good right now. So thanks for joining us. I know -- and Eric, if you're listening, I hope you feel better.
So maybe to start and Microchip has been pretty vocal over the last quarter or so with a view that the cycle is really starting to turn. And of course, Microchip was a little later to see the recovery, and now it sounds like that you are. So maybe you can give us an update of kind of what you see from a booking standpoint, from what's going on with customers, particularly as we go into the Chinese New Year holiday, which I know is an important time for you.
Yes. And before we begin, I'll just kind of share the safe harbor statements, which is that during the course of this discussion, we'll be making certain forward-looking projections regarding the future outlook of Microchip, and we refer you to the SEC filings that identify important risks. And so with that, yes, I think what has most significantly changed in the December quarter is the distribution channel has largely normalized.
So as you know, the sell-through, sell-in gaps came down very significantly during the December quarter, which was down to about $12 million for the quarter. So we believe that kind of quantifies that distribution is largely corrected. Additionally, we're seeing pretty strong and interesting demand patterns, right? So during the course of the December quarter, bookings activity was significantly stronger.
We were seeing the book-to-bill was also substantially above 1. We're seeing expedite requests that have accelerated, especially over the past couple of quarters. So really just continued momentum, continued recovery and really seeing this momentum build into the March quarter, which kind of calls out for the guidance that we provided.
And maybe you could separate out -- well, maybe first to start that does it feel that you're now shipping in line with end market growth right now? Or do you feel like you're still undershipping the market and maybe that's probably not the same answer for every end market?
Yes, exactly. I think really, it's difficult to kind of quantify, make an end market statement with 10,000 customers and having the large exposure that we have with distribution side. And so -- but we do believe that it is normalizing every quarter. Like I said, distribution is largely corrected.
On the direct side, we still have customers that are buying certain products to consumption and certain products, they're still burning inventory on. So that element still kind of continues. So it's difficult to comment on because we just don't have that visibility, but our expectation is that things are normalizing across both sides of the...
Largely in line with end market demand today with some isolated pockets where customers [indiscernible]
And I think what's also been interesting in this cycle is there's different end market growth dynamics depend for the different end markets. And again, under your purview, auto and data center, they're very diverging end market trends there. And so as you look out over the last year, data center has been a big contributor here. Maybe you could help to level set us for how big data center is for Microchip and the extent to which that has driven some growth over the last year, even though you're still going through an inventory correction in some of the other markets?
Data center is one of our larger market segments, so is the automotive market as well. Data center grew in share within the overall Microchip revenue portfolio, while automotive had declined a little bit, but also coming back. We do see strong demand from the automotive side as the cycles are normalizing and the carmakers are doing better in general.
So I mean, data center is a hot topic for everybody is firing on all cylinders, driving some of the shortages on the memory side, et cetera, but that's also a driver for us at Microchip. But Microchip is not dominated by the end market segment data center.
And then we report data center at roughly 19% of last year's fiscal year's revenue, and that includes compute and data center. And then as you know, we roll up our end markets once a year. So next quarter, we'll be providing more color, we'll have that granularity. And then there is definitely talk about breaking out and providing additional data. So next quarter, stay tuned, we'll provide an update on the exact.
That will help us to get the -- do the math on exactly how much of a contributor that was to -- just looking forward, you guys have talked about better than seasonal growth for a couple of quarters now. How far out should we expect better than seasonal growth?
And I guess there's 2 factors that would drive that. One is, do the end markets start accelerating, do your customers start to restock? And then where you're still undershipping demand and snapping back. So for how long should we be thinking about better than seasonal growth for Microchip?
Yes. I mean, I think as you kind of look back at some of the commentary that we've made over the past couple of quarters, visibility continues to improve, though 1 quarter out is really where our best look is. And so our outlook for the March quarter is 6.2% growth and which is above seasonal, typically and I'll argue that nothing has been seasonal over the past however many years. But regardless of that, typically, we see 2% to 3% growth in the March quarter, and we're delivering 6.2%. So we're optimistic.
Our visibility beyond the March quarter is still kind of improving. And so really, our expectation is that we'll continue to see solid strength that this momentum continues. But really, beyond the current -- beyond the March quarter, we're really not making any comments other than we expect this momentum to kind of continue.
Right. And with respect to -- I think on the last earnings call, you started to indicate that you did start to see lead times extend for certain products. Maybe you can go into that in a little more detail. How widespread is that? And obviously, as lead times extend, that gives your customers an incentive to give you a little more visibility.
We still have about 200 days of inventory. So when it comes to our internal manufacturing wafers coming out of our own wafer fabs, we don't have any issue. We maintain the short lead times in most of the cases where we see lead times extending for the most advanced foundry nodes that we're using all the way to 3 nanometers and for some the assembly components like substrates that are currently getting tighter and where we experience longer lead times also our suppliers in the [indiscernible].
Right. And yes, lead times have essentially just kind of bounced out bounce around the bottom in that 4- to 8-week time frame. And so for that extension, you probably need tighter capacity and kind of longer lead times expansion.
Right. But point taken, there's a difference between what you produce internally and externally. And for the data center market, which is strong now, I believe the majority of that is external.
That is correct.
So maybe this provides a segue into what you're doing with factory loadings and the impact of margins. And you did indicate that you were planning to increase the factory loadings on this particular quarter. Talk about why that's the case because I believe the internal business is more of sort of classic Microchip more broader market as opposed to data center.
Yes. Our manufacturing footprint today is about 37% to 40% internal, 60% external. On the internal side, anything 110-nanometer and higher is mostly internal products. And like we were talking about the lower 90-nanometer and lower on the external side. And so given today where we're seeing the momentum in aerospace and defense, networking, data center area, those are higher -- richer mix products and so higher-margin products as well.
And all of that activity is happening in the outside foundries. Internally, we reported underutilization, which is really the only headwind to gross margins today after the March quarter, about $51 million is what we reported. Like you said, we will probably expect to see improvement in that, but it will be more at a steady clip rather than a step-up function in any capacity.
If you look at our guidance for the March quarter, which is calling for 61% gross margin, that is in addition to the fact that last quarter had a good licensing revenue benefit, which we kind of contemplated in our original guidance. And so as the momentum continues, we'll see. Now if the momentum is stronger, we may inflect some of this higher, but our expectation is that you probably should see a gradual gross margin improvement, most likely in the line of what we're reporting for the March quarter, about a 500 basis point improvement -- 50 basis point improvement.
50 basis points. Yes. And to be clear, a big part of the improvement that happened in the March quarter was elimination of the inventory reserve charges. That is correct. And so it sounds like that headwind is pretty much gone by the end of this quarter and your incremental benefit is from mix and improving utilization.
Mix improving utilization. And also, if you remember, we've been writing off a lot of inventory. So the benefit of that is -- it's already been expensed to cost of sales. So that will be a good flow-through coming from there. The challenge with that is that there's a lot of variability. You just don't know how much of that you would sell. We know there's no obsolescence risk on that inventory. But the next 3 months or the next 3 years, it could take that long, right? So it's kind of not predictable or forecastable.
Complete inventory is going to be more than 3 months.
Yes, for sure.
Right, right. But what about -- I mean, in terms of load and the impression we've gotten from prior calls is that your gross margin target is 65%. So it sounds like you're still confident in achieving that. It sounds like that, however, based on what you're talking about with regard to factory loadings, that's not over the next kind of 2 or 3 quarters. It's a bit -- we probably think into next calendar year. Is that a reasonable...
Most certainly. And we've kind of publicly stated that, that will come at a slower pace and probably carry through most of this calendar year into next calendar year. So our path to 65% is very much achievable. We are very confident in our ability to achieve that.
Obviously, we've come back from a gross margin low of 52% or something. So we've recovered about 1,000 basis points over the past year as we've implemented our 9-point recovery plan, but still a ways to go. So the path is clear, and we have -- the timing of that remains -- depends on how strong the market...
Maybe we'll pivot to some of the markets and Matt, while you're -- there's been a lot of interest in Microchip's data center exposure. And I think perhaps some of that interest is the fact that people didn't realize that you had data center exposure, which is perhaps one of the reasons why you're here. So maybe talk to us a bit about where you do participate in data center. You mentioned some of the PCI Express wins on the earnings call. And how broad is the portfolio? Where is it positioned? And how much of it is new?
So our data center business has basically 3 main pillars of products. One is PCI Express switching, PCI Express retimers, and we do this for generations. We're not new in this game. We do this for Generation 3, 4, 5. And now we have Generation 6, which is the latest product out in the market. We're working with customers. It's the first Generation 6 PCIe switch built on 3-nanometer technology that provides a quite significant power advantage over other products that are out there. So this is creating quite a lot of interest.
The other pillar is flash controllers for the large flash storage systems, which includes a complete software stack that comes along. So a very complex product, and we get a lot of traction there. Also, this is not a new family of products, but with every generation, basically the speed doubles. And then PCIe Gen 5 to Gen 6 is doubling of the speed per lane, usually also adding more lanes. So that's the name of the game in the data center connectivity world is all about speed.
And then the third line are HDD controllers, which HDD is considered the older technology, but because they have the cheapest cost for storing data, they will have a very, very long lifetime and a lot of the hyperscalers and data center providers are committed to use HDD for their storage needs. When it comes to content like video content, audio content, et cetera, where the highest access speeds are not really required.
So our hard disk drive is good enough. But of course, also this technology is improving, and we continue to develop products for that segment of the market and have good customer traction where we're sampling to customers where we're closely aligned with them to define the features that they value. We add features not only doubling speed from generation to generation, but also adding features like security, post-quantum cryptography is a big trend.
Quantum computers are not there yet to break the cryptography, but everybody wants to be ready so that the deployments they do in data centers are future-proof. Those are all things that we embed into our products today and where we believe we have a very good position.
Right. So -- and maybe to start with the PCI Express Gen 6. Maybe talk about for some that may not know, the application for that. So why is PCI Gen 6 important?
So within a data center, you got the main processor, the GPU, the likes like NVIDIA, we're not providing this type of product, but a stand-alone GPU doesn't work. It needs to be connected to other GPUs. It needs to be connected to high-speed memory. It needs to be connected to the outside world. And for that, a lot of switching technology and connectivity technology is required. And PCI Express is the de facto standard interface on each and every SoC of every GPU, SoC for servers, and that's where PCI Express is coming into play.
In the past, the cycles from generation to generation were 3 to 4 years. This because of the need in the data centers to have higher connectivity speeds has been compressed down to 18 months to 24 months. So we beefed up our development team and effort to be able to work with this cycle and to be on the forefront and having the first competitive products out with each new technology cycle. The number of PCIe switches in data centers varies depending on the architecture, depending on the GPUs that are being used, but a ratio of 3 to 4 to 5 high link count switches per GPU is not uncommon. It's a substantial number and a substantial market for us.
Right. Is Microchip participating in UALink as well?
We do have activities on the Ethernet side, but UALink is one of many standards that is moving forward. So if you look beyond PCI Express Gen 7, there are competing technologies. NVIDIA is proposing their own evolutions of NVLink to cover some of those markets as they're doing it already today. So this is not new. But there are some more proprietary solutions that are also pitched by some of the industry players in that space. But UALink is certainly on our radar screen.
Maybe speak of the FPGA business as well because that has been another -- I don't know, maybe I say surprise grower, but probably not a surprise to you with good margins. So where is FPGA fitting into the picture?
Our FPGA business is growing very strongly at the moment. So it's one of the ones that are driving our revenue forward. And it's across many different markets. I think the original strength was in the aerospace and defense segment, where we have also radiation hardened product for satellite operations, et cetera. It's a high-margin business and the aerospace and defense market segment of all of our segments is probably among the strongest today for the obvious geopolitical reasons as well. But the FPGA business is not limited to that.
There are good applications on the industrial side, for example, industrial robots. There are applications on the automotive side, and there are also applications on the data center side. In the past -- and that's advanced process technologies, and ASIC development wasn't that expensive. So it was justifiable to develop a custom product for a specific application, even though the volume is not extremely high.
Now with the mass cost and development costs going into triple-digit million dollar figures for the most advanced nodes, you need significant volume to justify an ASIC development. And that's where FPGAs come into play. They use when customers have a specific need to translate protocols to process video data and things like that. So this is across many different industry segments, including data center, including industrial, including automotive and of course, aerospace and defense.
And just one point of clarity just for the audience. I think as we report from a reporting hierarchy standpoint, we report an MCU category and analog category and other FPGA largely sits in the other category as people kind of look at our line items and see just as a highlight for folks.
Right. Then that was an area of strength in the last quarter, but part of that was from licensing, but then FPGA.
Then FPGA was a piece of that as well. And some of the feedback that I got post earnings was that people thought we missed on the MCU analog side where overall, like I said, we contemplated the licensing piece in our original guidance and the upside came from the silicon business, which December quarter, again, seasonally typically is down 2% to 5%. So there's some kind of culture confusion. So hopefully that clears.
I'll repeat the question for the webcast. It's just the question of PCI Express scale-up versus scale-out opportunity -- PCI Express switch scale-up versus scale-out opportunities.
We do see it in both areas. And it depends a lot on the data center architecture that customers are choosing, but we do see deployment of PCI switches and scale up as well as scale out.
Pivot over to auto a bit. Maybe you could speak about the microchip exposure in auto. Historically, the microcontroller business has had a strong auto component. And I think people understand that. Maybe you could talk about some of the other areas you're participating in auto as well, which may not be as well understood.
So historically, microcontrollers was one strong component, but we were, I think, always strong in specific applications. For example, touchscreen controllers or touch controllers in general for touch buttons, surfaces, lighters all the way to the touchscreen where we have a significant share of the market. Car access is another element. So the chip that goes into the key fault, but also all the electronics that are inside the Car to realize the hands-free functionality, approach the car and pull the handler open without taking the key out of your pocket to make this in a secure manner.
It's a tricky thing. So a lot of electronics involved, and we are also one of the 2 big players in this area. It's not just microcontroller itself, complete solutions that go around. We are historically also working on the in-vehicle networking side. So we have connectivity products for LIN, for CAN, for most and for the very early Ethernet connectivity as well in automotive. And we do see a trend that today that up to 20 different technologies used to transmit data throughout the vehicle, which is a challenge to scale.
It's a challenge for the software development. And the big trend is that people are moving away from the multitude of different standards towards a unified Ethernet-based system. And we're extremely well positioned in that as we develop switches for automotive, develop dedicated transceivers from 10 megabit, 10-based T1S all the way up to gigabit speeds that are used in automotive.
While Ethernet -- the Ethernet itself will reduce the software complexity, will reduce the development times of cars with that. So that's important for the carmakers. In addition to Ethernet, we believe that there will be 2 other pillars that will be embedded in future vehicles. One is PCI Express. We have a main computer in the car doing all the ADAS functionality, all the in-vehicle infotainment functionality. And you have high-performance processors.
They need to be connected to each other, also functional safety reasons. They need to access a common high-speed memory. So for that PCIe switches are also required in automotive vehicles, not the same class of switches with the same number of lanes and the same speeds as used in data centers. But for automotive, we derived an automotive switch from our PCI Gen 4 data center switch, added the safety and security features to it as required in automotive, cut it down from the number of lanes from a cost point of view to make it suitable for automotive use. Without being in data center, this would not have been possible because the initial market for that is relatively small. But because we could derive this technology from our data center products, we had a unique opportunity to do so.
And we expect this market to grow fast. By the way, not only in automotive, the same product, we got a lot of interest from server makers, from industrial, for robots, et cetera. So this is proliferating beyond automotive. The third element in automotive, where we develop connectivity solutions and made an acquisition in April last year is the connectivity between the camera and the main computer and between the main computer and the displays.
Today, proprietary technology from competition is used, but the industry is driving towards open standards. And we teamed up with some automotive companies, some OEMs, including BMW, to develop a standard called ASA, Automotive Serdes Alliance. And we have the first products out in the market, get a lot of traction, a lot of proof of concepts, et cetera. Automotive is a slow-moving market. But once you're in, you're in there for 7 years, 10 years for certain vehicles.
So the traction there is tremendous on both ASA, Ethernet as well as PCIe. So I do believe that the future growth in automotive, a significant portion of the future growth in automotive will come from the connectivity side. And just to give you a perspective, CAN, controller area network is the legacy standard that's in cars for more than 25 years now. There are more than 2 billion CAN nodes a year deployed in cars. And with the new Ethernet 10 megabit standard, 10-based T1S, we have a chance to replace many of them over time.
So the market potential for that is tremendous. The benefits for the customers are tremendous. We have everything on the same standard so that the upper layers of the software stack remain the same, while when they have different need for different speed grades, they just exchange the transceiver layer, the lowest layer of the protocol while they can keep the software. Today, they need higher speed. They have to redo the complete system. That's a nightmare.
Now I'll add one just like a dynamic to it that I've been seeing evolve. And this is more of a very long-term kind of statement here. But historically, as you guys have heard about Microchip technology, we talk about our anchor lanes being microcontroller, where the engineer starts their activity there, and then we can build around that with our analog products and so on and so forth.
Most recently, we're now starting to see a couple of new pillars emerge, right, one in the data center and the connectivity piece, one in the compute side and AI/ML, where conversations with customers are starting with that as the core application and then spreading into other attach areas to say, well, how can microcontrollers help with that and so on and so forth. So I think that's a different dynamic that historically, we haven't seen at Microchip, and we're starting to see that emerge. It will play out over time, but I think it's definitely real and happening as we kind of think about the future of Microchip.
I mean maybe it's a segue into the microcontroller market itself, too. And one of the trends that you folks have called out post pandemic has been the migration finally to 32-bit. And for years and years of covering Microchip, I've been corrected oftentimes by certain Microchip people about why there are certain applications, which are just fine for 8-bit will stay with 8-bit. Are we seeing that migration? I know that migration is happening more broadly now. We're seeing that migration happening within the auto market as well.
I think if you look at microcontrollers, it's not so much about the core anymore. And the more advanced process technology nodes, the cost of silicon transistor has come down quite a bit. So it doesn't really matter whether it's an 8-bit [indiscernible] Customers also really don't care that much about it because the microcontroller, including all the analog peripherals, needs to have the right interfaces, the right HDD converters, et cetera, et cetera. But because the cost of transistors came down such so much, it doesn't make a big difference anymore, whether it's a low-end 32-bit core like or an 8-bit core. That's why we do the transition to be more in a uniform architecture to help our customers support that.
We'll continue to support and sell our 8-bit microcontrollers for many, many years. There's no plan to life them, et cetera. And there are many customers that are happy with them and use them continue to use them also new applications. But going forward, the bulk of the development activities are on the 32-bit side.
But does it matter to Microchip if -- and understand the core of it's an 8-bit core, a 32-bit core probably doesn't mean as much to the customer. The cost isn't a lot different now. But the underlying architecture is different. Your 8-bit core is proprietary PIC where 32-bit is going more towards ARM. So how do you deal with that? And does it affect Microchip's historic competitive advantage by that migration occurring?
I wouldn't say so because in fact, the Microchip architecture, you mentioned the PIC is not the only one. I mean through the Atmel acquisition, I personally joined more than 10 years ago from Atmel side, with the AVR architecture. So we have already 2 architectures. And I think we're pretty well versed how to integrate both architectures and now we are already at ARM cores.
It's not new for us that we're using ARM cores into our tool suite that we give to our customers to develop their solutions using our microcontrollers and our tools. So from that, it's not such a big change because it's not new to us. It's just a shift where we put the focus, but I don't expect that our competitive advantage situation will change because of that.
We've got about a little under 10 minutes left. Are there any other questions from the audience because I can keep going, raise hand. Anyway, I'll keep going. Maybe we can talk about China a bit. And China market has been volatile to say the least. Maybe you can speak about what you're seeing in China now and how your approach to the China market may have changed as a result of tariffs and some of the trade uncertainty now.
Think China, it is a volatile market. They're trying to build their own semiconductor industry and pushing that. But we learned that most Chinese customers are pragmatic. They're happy to buy our products, even where a U.S.-based semiconductor company if the price is okay and if the features are the ones they need. There is competition, especially on the low-end side, on the microcontroller side, some of the analog side.
But we have tremendous design momentum on the automotive side, where features -- complex features like the [indiscernible] system are not available from local competition. This may come and evolve over time, but we don't have big restrictions in selling into China. Also, the total of our revenue that stays within China is not getting reexported out is relatively low. It's a high single digit. That's it. So our exposure to the local Chinese market is not as big as some may think.
We do see some restrictions for the more advanced products that go to companies who are closer to the government related to infrastructure like the Chinese telecoms. They get told by the government, you cannot buy foreign semiconductor, you need to use local one. There are a few products where the U.S. administration selling you cannot sell to customer A, B or C in China. But the impact on our business hasn't been dramatic because of that. So it's a pragmatic approach that we're taking to China. We keep our sales momentum.
We have good design interaction in China with Chinese local companies. it depends a lot of interpretation there. Those perceived rules, the Chinese customers or Chinese companies need to have a minimum local content. I think it's more pronounced with those who are closer to the government or partially owned by the government. So they have some preemptive opinions. It's not unique to Microchip. So they feel they need to buy Chinese not to lose subsidies in the future. But it's not a major, major impact to our business today.
And we break down China as it's roughly 18% of total revenue and roughly half of it goes into China for manufacturing and then gets shipped out globally. The other half of 9% or so is more complex Microchip content, so difficult to replicate. So really kind of leaving with a sub-5% exposure that potentially over the long term is at risk. But we'll continue to innovate with new features and...
And have you seen any changes? I mean, obviously, the -- from a trade standpoint, things have changed. But from -- you've always competed with China local competition. Has there been any appreciable change in the capabilities of the local companies of the scale that you didn't see 5, 10 years ago?
Yes, absolutely. I mean not only for our product range, but if you look at advanced SoCs, companies like Verizon, for example, in Beijing, others, there are viable competitors to the large SoC vendors. So they increased their capabilities quite a bit in the Chinese government and the authorities they're pushing. So many, many start-up companies doing semiconductors in China, that we all have to deal with, right? It's not unique to Microchip.
World going forward, yes.
We see -- and in some cases, some Western customers see also accelerated deglobalization, right? We want semiconductors that are not coming out of Greater China and are pushing very hard for that. So we have dual source strategies. We have process technologies installed in Taiwan that we own. We have run the same process technologies in our own fab in Gresham. We have this dual source geopolitically safe combination that our customers are asking for. But this is additional effort, additional effort for everybody and wafers that we source from outside Taiwan are not necessarily cheaper than those are coming from Taiwan.
We've got a couple of minutes left. Maybe I'll finish up on -- with some of the financials, which is something that I know has been important to Steve, your CEO, in terms of the cash return to investors and the debt levels. And when Steve originally stepped down as the CEO, his sill project within Microchip was the cash return project. So maybe you could talk a little bit about that and how the company's thinking has changed on that since we've gone through this downturn.
Yes, yes. I think definitely, it did weigh in on our recent kind of experience, right? So as the market turned south and we experienced a significant peak to trough, that triggered, obviously, that dropped to EBITDA quite a bit. And so our net debt-to-EBITDA ratio skyrocketed, right? And to a point where if we hadn't taken any actions, we could have potentially been in junk category. And so that's what triggered the $1.5 billion mandatory convert offering that we did.
And so based on that experience, I think the near-term focus here for us is really debt reduction. So as I think our net debt-to-EBITDA was 4.18 last quarter, coming down from 4.69. And then obviously, as the business strengthens here, EBITDA is going to get stronger. So it will come down pretty substantially. Back in November 2021, we laid out a target of 1.5x. I think anything sub-2 is really -- we're far from it, but that's really where we're going to kind of trend towards.
And over the near term, given our experience and how that kind of almost tested some covenants and stuff, our focus is going to be to pay down debt. So last quarter, after multiple quarters was the first quarter where our cash flow covered our dividend and some, and so we weren't borrowing for that. So historically, folks that have been following the company know we're a very strong cash flow generator.
So we get back into that. And over the near term, priority would be to pay down debt, and then we'll address it. But I could say I probably say probably no buyback over the near term and dividend is intact with what we are today.
And so I guess, the longer-term strategy of returning cash hasn't changed, but in the shorter term...
Priority hierarchy is changing.
Dividend first, payback second.
It looks like we're just about out of time. So I think I'll pause it there. Gentlemen, thanks for attending, and thanks, everyone, for listening today. Thank you.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Wolfe Research Auto
Microchip Technology — Wolfe Research Auto
📊 Kernbotschaft
- Kurz: Microchip berichtet von normalisierter Distribution (Sell‑through/Sell‑in‑Gap ~$12M) und spürbar stärkerer Buchungslage; Book‑to‑bill >1 und mehr Expedite‑Anfragen. Management sieht Momentum in Q4 (März‑Quartal) und erwartet, dass sich die Erholung fortsetzt, Sichtbarkeit aber vor allem auf ein Quartal am besten ist.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Data Center: Data‑Center‑Portfolio (~19% des Jahresumsatz) mit drei Säulen: PCI Express (PCIe) Switches/Retimer (jetzt Gen6 auf 3nm), Flash‑Controller + SW‑Stack, HDD‑Controller; Gen6 betont Energieeffizienz.
- Automotive & Connectivity: Microchip treibt Automotive‑Ethernet, Automotive PCIe‑Ableitungen und ASA (Automotive SerDes Alliance) voran; Konnektivität soll Wachstumstreiber neben MCU/Analog werden.
- Fertigung & Mix: ~37–40% interne Fertigung, ~60% extern; aktuell Unterauslastung intern (~$51M Headwind) wird schrittweise reduziert, Mixverschiebung in Richtung höhermargiger Data‑Center/Netzwerkprodukte.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Guidance: Management nennt für das März‑Quartal +6,2% Wachstum (über saisonal) und eine Bruttomarge von ~61%; erwartet sukzessive Margenverbesserung (ca. +50 Basispunkte), Ziel 65% über längeren Zeitraum.
- Inventar & Leadtimes: ~200 Tage Inventar intern; Distributionssaldo bereinigt, Reservechargen größtenteils abgearbeitet; Leadtimes extern z.T. länger bei advanced Nodes/Substraten, kurzfristig 4–8 Wochen Schwankung.
- China‑Exposure: China ~18% Umsatz, davon ~9% inländisch (mit hoher Re‑Export‑Quote); langfristig <5% potenziell geopolitisch riskant, aktuell kein dramatischer Impact.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Data‑Center‑Beitrag: Nachfrage nach genauem Anteil und Wachstum—Management bestätigte 19% Jahresanteil, will im nächsten Quartal mehr Granularität liefern, konkrete Breakout‑Zahlen ausstehend.
- Margenpfad & Auslastung: Kritische Nachfragen zu Tempo der Auslastungssteigerung; Management bleibt bei schrittweisem Pfad zur 65%‑Marge, Zeitrahmen eher in mehreren Quartalen bis ins nächste Kalenderjahr.
- Kapitalallokation: Frage zu Rückkäufen vs. Schuldenabbau—Antwort: Priorität liegt auf Schuldenreduktion (Net‑Debt/EBITDA ~4.18, Ziel ~1.5x langfristig); Dividende bleibt, Buybacks kurzfristig unwahrscheinlich.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Präsentation bestätigt konjunkturelle Wende: verbesserte Nachfrage, bereinigte Distribution und erste Margenverbesserungen. Relevante Upside‑Treiber sind Data‑Center‑Designwins (PCIe Gen6) und Automotive‑Konnektivität; Anleger sollten aber beachten, dass Visibility knapp ist, Margenfortschritt graduell erfolgt und Kapitalrückführungen vorerst zugunsten Schuldenabbau zurückgestellt werden.
Microchip Technology — Q3 2026 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Greetings, and welcome to Microchip's Q3 Fiscal Year '26 Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. It is now my pleasure to introduce your host, Eric Bjornholt, CFO. Thank you, Eric. You may begin.
Thank you, and good afternoon, everyone. During the course of this conference call, we will be making projections and other forward-looking statements regarding future events or the future financial performance of the company. We wish to caution you that such statements are predictions and that actual events or results may differ materially. We refer you to our press releases of today as well as our recent filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors that may impact Microchip's business and results of operations.
In attendance with me today are Steve Sanghi, Microchip's President and CEO; Rich Simoncic, Microchip's COO; Matthias Kaestner, Microchip's VP of Networking and Connectivity Business Units; and Sajid Daudi, Microchip's Head of Investor Relations. I will comment on our third quarter fiscal year 2026 financial performance. Matthias will provide an update on our networking and connectivity business, and Steve will then provide commentary on our results and an overview of the current business environment and our guidance for the fourth quarter of fiscal year 2026. We will then be available to respond to specific investor and analyst questions.
We are including information in our press release and on this conference call on various GAAP and non-GAAP measures. We have posted a full GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliation on the Investor Relations page of our website at www.microchip.com and included reconciliation information in our earnings press release, which we believe you will find useful when comparing our GAAP and non-GAAP results. We have also posted a summary of our outstanding debt and leverage metrics on our website.
I will now go over some of the operating results, including net sales, gross margin and operating expenses. Other than net sales, I will be referring to these results on a non-GAAP basis, which is based on expenses prior to the effects of our acquisition activities, share-based compensation and certain other adjustments as described in our earnings press release and in the reconciliation on our website. Net sales in the December quarter were $1.186 billion, which was up 4% sequentially and well above the high end of our original guidance provided on November 6. We have posted a summary of our net sales by product line and geography on our website for your reference.
On a non-GAAP basis, gross margins were 60.5%, including capacity underutilization charges of $51.7 million and new inventory reserve charges of $58.4 million. Operating expenses were at 32% of sales and operating income was 28.5% of sales. Non-GAAP net income was $252.8 million and non-GAAP earnings per diluted share was $0.44, which was $0.04 above the high end of our original guidance. On a GAAP basis in the December quarter, gross margins were 59.6%. Total operating expenses were $555.2 million and included acquisition intangible amortization of $107.6 million, special charges of $4.8 million, which were primarily driven by activities associated with our closure of Fab 2, share-based compensation of $62.1 million and $1.1 million of other expenses. GAAP net income attributable to common shareholders was $34.9 million or $0.06 per share.
Our non-GAAP cash tax rate was 9.6% in the December quarter. We expect to record a non-GAAP tax rate of about 10% for all of fiscal year 2026, which is exclusive of the transition tax and any tax audit settlements related to taxes accrued in prior fiscal years. Our inventory balance at December 31, 2025, was $1.058 billion, which was down $37.6 million from the balance at September 30, 2025. We had 201 days of inventory at the end of the December quarter. Included in our December quarter ending inventory was 17 days of long life cycle, high-margin products whose manufacturing capacity has been end of life by our supply chain partners. Inventory at our distributors in the December quarter was at 28 days, which is in the range of what we would consider to be normal. Distribution sell-through was about $11.7 million higher than distribution sell-in.
Our cash flow from operating activities was $341.4 million in the December quarter. Our adjusted free cash flow was $305.6 million in the December quarter. And as of December 31, our consolidated cash and total investment position was $250.7 million. Our total debt decreased by $12.1 million sequentially in the December quarter, and our net debt decreased by $26 million sequentially. Our adjusted EBITDA in the December quarter was $402 million and 33.9% of net sales. Our trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA was $1.23 billion. Our net debt to adjusted EBITDA ratio was 4.18 at December 31, 2025, and was down from 4.69% at September 30, 2025. Capital expenditures were $22.5 million in the December quarter. We expect capital expenditures for fiscal year 2026 to be at or below $100 million. Depreciation expense in the December quarter was $37.8 million.
I will now turn it over to Matthias, who will provide an update on our efforts in the Ethernet T1S emerging standard for connectivity in the automotive and industrial space. Matthias?
Thank you, Eric, and good afternoon, everyone. I'm Matthias Kaestner, Corporate Vice President and Leader of the Data Center, Networking, Connectivity and Automotive business units at Microchip. Today, I want to report on the meaningful momentum in our connectivity business, driven by 2 primary architecture modernization cycles. Let's have a look at the automotive market segment first. In today's cars, up to 20 different connectivity technologies are used to transmit data between electronic control units, while the amount of data is increasing exponentially. The resulting complexity is a major roadblock to implementing higher levels of self-driving capabilities, over-the-air updates and advanced infotainment systems in a cost and time-efficient manner. Therefore, car manufacturers are moving away from the multitude of legacy connectivity standards towards networking architectures that are predominantly Ethernet-based. This, in turn, reduces software complexity and improves software reusability.
Ethernet, in particular, the new 10BASE-T1S standard has the potential to replace several billion automotive legacy connectivity nodes per year. Microchip has developed automotive Ethernet solutions to support this transition, including a market-leading portfolio of 10BASE-T1S products, switches, transceivers, endpoints and bridges. Automotive Ethernet is complemented by PCIe connectivity for the highest speed data communication needs in the main vehicle computer and by ASA, a new open standard that transfers high-speed raw camera data to the main vehicle computer efficiently. We derived automotive-grade PCIe solutions from our leading PCIe switches for data centers, and we were first to market with ASA Motion Link for standards-based high-speed ADAS camera and display connectivity. We believe Microchip is well positioned across these new connectivity standards. We have design wins and serious engagements with multiple leading global automotive OEMs and Tier 1 suppliers.
Today, we issued a press release in which we announced a strategic collaboration with Hyundai Motor Group to integrate our 10BASE-T1S solutions into next-generation vehicle platforms. Designs are moving from sample evaluation and validation phases, representing platform commitments and next-generation vehicle architectures. The second growth driver for modern connectivity is Industry 4.0, an industrial modernization cycle across factories, robotics, automation systems and autonomous logistics networks that all require real-time mission-critical connectivity. The industrial backbone is already Ethernet-based. However, many devices and systems are at the edge are connected to legacy connectivity standards such as industrial CAN, RS 232, RS485. These legacy standards are now being replaced by Ethernet solutions. Like in the Automotive segment, our comprehensive Ethernet portfolio, including single-pair Ethernet and Ethernet, industrial PCIe switches and ASA camera connectivity solutions are well positioned to capture this opportunity and are already helping customers bridge legacy and advanced industrial connectivity.
In both segments, automotive and industrial, we are tracking numerous design wins. We believe that our competitive advantage is straightforward. We offer a complete portfolio spanning multiple connectivity speeds integrated with microcontrollers and analog solutions. Customers deploy a unified Microchip system, including silicon and firmware rather than assemble components from multiple vendors, reducing complexity, cost and time to market. Industrial connectivity design cycles typically span 18 to 24 months from architecture decision to production revenue. Our recent engagement aligns with pilot production ramps expected in the second half of 2026 and ramping further into 2027. We feel that our market opportunity is substantial. While industry estimates vary, research suggests that the TAM for automotive and industrial Ethernet connectivity together represents tens of billions of dollars by 2030, reflecting a once in several decades modernization cycle. Looking ahead, we expect our connectivity business to be a significant contributor to company growth as these modernization cycles accelerate.
I will pause here and turn the call over to Steve to provide an update on our business and the guidance going forward. Steve?
Thank you, Matthias, and good afternoon, everyone. We had an excellent December quarter, and I will start by highlighting a few salient points of our financial results. Our net sales grew 4% sequentially and 15.6% over the year ago quarter. Net sales were up sequentially in the Americas and Europe and about flat in Asia. Sales from our microcontroller and analog businesses were both about flat sequentially, which was well above the typical seasonal level for the December quarter. The growth primarily came from our networking, data center, FPGA and licensing business units. We are continuing to see the inventory go down at our distributors, at our distributors' customers, our direct customers and contract manufacturers. The distributor sell-in versus sell-through gap shrank to only $11.7 million in the December quarter, down from $52.9 million in the September quarter. This is something we have been expecting for some time, and I have been telling you we also feel that this is a sign that the distribution inventory has largely corrected.
In the December quarter, non-GAAP gross margin was 379 basis points sequentially, was up 379 basis points sequentially. Non-GAAP gross margin reached 60.5%. We had been expecting a 6 handle on non-GAAP gross margin percentage in the March quarter, but we achieved it a quarter earlier. Non-GAAP operating margin reached 28.5% in the December quarter and was up 418 basis points sequentially and up 800 basis points over the year ago quarter. Now to the market environment. We are seeing recovery in most of our end markets, automotive, industrial, communication, data center, aerospace and defense and consumer are all looking better. The strongest sales performance last quarter was in the A&D sector and in our networking, data center solutions and licensing business units. We believe we are extremely well positioned with our Gen 6 PCIe switch with it being the only 3-nanometer-based device currently sampling in hyperscaler and enterprise data center customers, beating our competitors in virtually every specification metric.
Today, I have 3 design wins to report on our PCIe Express Gen 6 switch, each without the customer's name. The first one is a small design win that will start production in second half of this year. It is a small win but significant for us in establishing credibility based on who the customer is. The second one is a larger win and will start production in CQ1 2027. Based on current customer forecast, this win is expected to bring $100 million plus in revenue in calendar year 2027. The third win is a small win with an established long-term customer who buys our prior generation Gen 4, Gen 5 products and will be buying our Gen 6 product. This design goes to production in late 2027, early 2028, and we are working hard to win a lot of other large and small designs. As Matthias said in his prepared remarks, we're also doing extremely well in the automotive and industrial networking space with T1S, ASA and PCIe connectivity products.
Now let's get into our guidance for the March quarter. The bookings for the December quarter were significantly higher than those for the September quarter. The book-to-bill ratio for the December quarter was well above 1, resulting into a much higher backlog entering the March quarter compared to when we entered the December quarter. A comment about lead times. While lead time for our products have been 4 to 8 weeks for some time, we are continuing to experience lead times bounce off the bottom, and we are experiencing increases on some of our products. We're running into challenges on certain kind of substrates and subcontracting capacity and also some foundry constraints on very advanced nodes. These challenges were isolated to specific areas, but are now starting to spread more broadly. Our customer requests for expedited shipments have increased significantly from a couple of quarters ago, pointing to some customers' inventories running low.
Taking all these factors into account, we expect our net sales for the March quarter to be $1.26 billion, plus or minus $20 million. This at the midpoint would be 6.2% sequential growth and up 29.8% from the year ago quarter. We expect our non-GAAP gross margin to be between 60.5% and 61.5% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP operating expenses to be between 31.3% and 31.7% of sales, and we expect our non-GAAP operating profit to be between 28.8% and 30.2% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP diluted earnings per share to be between $0.48 and $0.52 per share.
Finally, a comment on our capital return program for shareholders. Last quarter, we decreased our net debt balance by $26 million as we produced free cash flow that exceeded our dividend commitment. In future quarters, we have -- as we have excess free cash flow above dividends, we intend to continue to use this to bring down our borrowings. With that, operator, will you please poll for questions?
[Operator Instructions] Our first question comes from the line of Matthew Prisco with Cantor Fitzgerald.
2. Question Answer
I guess to kick off, when thinking about the above seasonal guide for margin and growth beyond, how should we be thinking about that continued strength versus seasonality? And what gives you confidence there is that the tailwind from the closing of the sell-in versus sell-through gap theoretically fades? Is that based on -- is it better end demand, potential restocking, idiosyncratic opportunities or perhaps something else?
So this is Eric. I think it's a variety of things, right? So we feel that distribution inventory is pretty much corrected at this point in time, but there's still customers that we sell to directly and customers that our distributors are selling to that are still burning through some inventory. We have really strong backlog for the current quarter, and the bookings have been quite high. So the backlog is continuing to grow. We can't say that we have great visibility outside of the current quarter because lead times are still short, but we can see the order book growing and through discussions with customers, we feel confident that heading into what is typically seasonally our strongest quarters of the year, which is the June and September quarter, that we are really poised nicely for growth.
And then maybe on the gross margin front, can you give us an update on how we should be thinking about the inventory reserve and underutilization charges rolling off? And -- as we move more squarely into this broad-based recovery, are there other levers for gross margins that we -- that should really move the needle here?
So we feel that as we move through the current quarter that the inventory reserves are pretty much going to be normalized at this point in time. We're guiding at a midpoint to 61% non-GAAP gross margin. Inventory reserves are a little bit unpredictable, but we feel that those charges are definitely going to continue to come down this quarter and be compared to the prior quarter and get to more normalized levels. The underutilization charges, which were a little over $50 million last quarter are going to continue. We are ramping the factories this quarter, but this is going to be a couple of year process for us to kind of get those inventory charges for underutilization down. So they'll be modestly down in the current quarter, which I think Steve said in his prepared remarks, but still at a relatively high level. And that's really the biggest driver as we move outside of this quarter to improving gross margin outside of improved product mix over time. We've talked about some of these growth vectors. Last quarter, we talked about our data center business. this quarter, we're talking about our Ethernet and connectivity businesses. And these are areas where the gross margin can be quite high. And we think that, that, as we see the revenue from that come through, will help from a product mix perspective to keep gross margins high and eventually take us back to our 65% long-term target.
Our next question comes from the line of Vivek Arya with Bank of America Securities.
For the first one, I just wanted to get a clarification. For December, your microcontroller and analog segments were kind of flattish, which I realize is better than seasonal, but the growth came from the other segment. I'm curious, is that what you had planned for originally? Basically, what really drove the December upside versus your original guidance? Was it what I'm just calling the product segments? Or was it more the other? And then similarly, as we start the March quarter, what are you expecting from the product segments versus the other segment just so that we can model it appropriately?
So Vivek, the higher revenue on the licensing side was modeled in our original guidance. So that's not where the upside came from. It was up substantially from the prior quarter, but that was in our model. The upside came on the products. the microcontrollers, the analog, the FPGA and all the other businesses were substantially stronger. Remember, in December quarter, usually is down minus 3% to minus 4%, minus 3% to minus 5%. But the fact that microcontroller and analog were flat, so that's where the upside came from, and so was the FPGA and some other product lines.
And March, Steve, any -- how are you thinking about kind of just relative segment behavior versus the 6% sequential guidance?
March looks quite strong. Seasonally, March is up usually 2% to 3%. And after producing a very large upside in the December quarter. Our original guidance for the December quarter, I think, was $1,129 and we produced 1,186. So even after such a large increase and some of that came in with the customers pulling their backlog from March into December, but the March kept filling up even further. So despite pulling a lot of product from March into December, the March quarter backlog started very strong. And that's why we gave a 6.2% sequential guidance, much above typical seasonality and pretty much most product lines are positive. So microcontroller is growing, analog is growing, FPGA is growing further, networking connectivity business, data center timing business, they all essentially seem higher in the current quarter.
Got it. And then on the gross margin, very strong drop-through in December, you're guiding it to 61% for March. What is the time line to get to this mid-60s target? Like if we just assume normal seasonality for the next several quarters, is that something that Microchip could get to sometime this calendar year? Or do you think that it would require a much faster growth and it's more a '27 outcome?
So I think I can't give you the exact timing. But for the last several quarters, we've been doing the math for you with the product gross margin being above 65%, but having 2 charges bring it down. One was the inventory write-off charge and second one was the underutilization charge. the inventory charge has dropped quite a bit. And as Eric said, we expect that the inventory charge will be about normal this quarter, may have a little more to go, but largely normalizes. And then you're left with about a $50 million underutilization charge, which will take some time to go away and bring the additional 400-plus basis points of gross margin, which will get us to our model. And how fast we ramp the factories and how fast that underutilization charge goes down really depends on the growth here in the coming quarters and the next year here. And it depends on the growth really from internal products. we do about 37% to 40% of the products internal and 60% plus external. The underutilization largely is in our internal factories. So it largely depends on the growth from the internally produced products. And it's hard to predict out in time. But every quarter, you should see some improvement and eventually taking it to 65% gross margin.
Yes. I totally agree with everything Steve said. I would just say I don't want the Street to get ahead of where they should be, and it would not be our expectation that I don't know if you said this calendar year or fiscal year that -- or this next fiscal year that we can get to that mid-60s. I am not predicting that's going to happen. I think it's going to be steady growth from where we're at guiding at for this quarter.
Our next question comes from the line of Jim Schneider with Goldman Sachs.
I was wondering if you can maybe talk to your customers' inventory behavior, specifically OEM inventories. It sounds like customers are still maybe drawing down inventories a little bit. I'm curious if you're seeing any signs of customers restocking their own internal inventories? And if so, are you seeing that across any specific verticals? Or are we still in reduction mode?
So we're not seeing customers restocking, but we've got thousands of customers and not every customer is in the same place on inventory. What we're seeing is that the direct customer inventory was high. So if you go back 1.5 years ago, 2 years ago, inventories were quite high. Some customers had up to a year worth of inventory, and they have been taking that inventory down and customers don't only buy 1 SKU. The customers who buy 100 -- a customer that buys 500 SKUs. So as the inventory comes down, it's like the water in the lake, when it starts coming down, the lake bottom is never flat. The rock starts showing up. So that's kind of what's happening. As the customer inventory has come down, the rocks are showing up, which is leading to this expedite, which is exponentially up from a couple of quarters ago. But there are some other products at the customer which still have inventory, and they're continuing to reduce that inventory. But on the remaining products, on some products, they're starting to buy at their consumption rate. And every month, more and more products are falling into that position where the inventory has corrected and they're buying at the consumption rate. The restocking phenomena, I think I say restocking when customers are increasing their inventory, buying more than their consumption. I don't think that is happening yet because lead times are still relatively in check. But as I said, the constraints are broadening, even a run-of-the-mill foundry process and for confidentiality, I can't name the foundry or the specific node, but it's a very generic run-of-the-mill foundry process, and it's full. So when that starts to happen, the next step is the capacity goes tight. Now when the capacity goes tight, one thing that happens is pricing firms up, not necessarily increase price, but the customer conversation leads with availability rather than price. So that is healthy, too for the business. And I think we're approaching where relatively soon in a quarter or so, we'll be facing a situation where customer is more worried about availability than price.
That is helpful color. And then maybe could you just sort of speak to the backlog you're seeing building for the June quarter, if at all? You talked about the higher starting backlog for the March quarter. Maybe talk about sort of the level of orders you've seen thus far this year and sort of where you expect the June quarter to potentially fall from a normal seasonal basis?
So the month of January was extremely strong, uncharacteristic because it kind of starts out slow and a lot of people don't return from the holidays until January 7 or something, depending on where the calendar falls. If there are 2 or 3 days after January 1, it's kind of a very dead time usually until the following Monday. But January backlog was extremely strong. December backlog was extremely strong. People kept booking parts through the holidays. You may recall, we were very conservative going into the quarter because of Thanksgiving as well as Christmas holidays. Thanksgiving came and went and the momentum continued. Then we were worried about Europe shutting down in the middle of December. Usually, that happens and because of Christmas and other holidays and it just -- everything just kept going strong. Bookings were very good. And then we were concerned about the start of the new year, which always starts slow, but it was -- January was extremely strong. And now we are watching the Chinese New Year, which starts next week, and we'll find out whether we miss something on the Chinese New Year. But really, it has all been very, very strong, and that's why we just continue to post good numbers and keep guiding stronger, and I'm fairly optimistic on the business. If you look at the next quarter as of today, so today is February 5, the June quarter backlog is higher today than the March quarter backlog was on November 5. That's the way to measure it at the same point in time. So we are optimistic that we'll have a good June quarter. I don't know if I have anything else to add.
Our next question comes from the line of Blayne Curtis with Jefferies.
I had 2. I want to ask, I know it's small numbers, but I'm just kind of curious the move. The other product revenue was up 18% sequentially. I think you said in the filing, it was a license sale. So I don't know if you can add any color to that? And then does that not repeat into March?
It was not only licensing. In others, we have licensing, we have FPGA. We have memory.
Timing systems.
Timing systems. There's another phenomenon happening in memory. As you know, high-bandwidth memory is really constrained. And in general, just the NAND as well as the flash node flash memory is very constrained. And some of that shares capacity with our SeriLaseSquare business. So a lot of our competitors, especially in Asia, are moving that SeriLaseSquare capacity into the broader flash memory. And therefore, we are picking up market share, and we're getting a lot of strength in our memory business because our SeriLaseSquare memory business is largely produced in our internal fabs where we have a lot of capacity, and we still have a fair amount of inventory. So -- and that falls into others. So we're getting some strength there also, which is quite sustainable because this entire memory shortage isn't going away anytime soon. It could be a couple of year phenomenon. And as we look towards the March quarter and the June quarter, memory business looks quite strong, too. So does FPGA with a lot of strength coming from aerospace and defense and industrial also. And our networking and connectivity business backlog is very strong and so is our data center.
And just to add on to one point there that you had asked, we are not expecting the same benefit that we got on the licensing business in the December quarter to repeat in the March quarter. And in spite of that, we're still guiding up 6.2% at the midpoint.
Strength...
Got you. Yes, I guess that maybe follows into my gross margin question because you are guiding kind of flat. I think if you calculate the inventory write-off, like 5 percentage points of a headwind, you won't get it all back. But it sounded like you expect it to do step down in March. So shouldn't you get a couple of percent benefit from that? I'm just trying to understand the moving pieces in the March -- on gross margin.
So we are guiding up. The midpoint of guidance on gross margin is 61% versus the 60.5% we produced last quarter on a non-GAAP basis. And again, that licensing benefit that we got in the December quarter, that's 100% gross margin that doesn't repeat. So again, that is a headwind in the current quarter to gross margin. And in spite of that, we're showing some nice growth, and that's our expectation that those inventory reserves continue to come down to be more normalized this quarter. Did that address your question?
Yes, makes sense.
Our next question is from Vijay Rakesh with Mizuho Securities.
Eric, just a quick question. Where are fab utilizations now blended? And how should we look at OpEx for the rest of the year? And a quick follow-up.
We don't break out the fab utilization numerically. We just guide you whether it's going up or down. We run a very complex product process mix. So it's not a fab that just has dynamic RAM process and you can say whether the utilization is 80% or 70% or 60%, we run a very complex mix with hundreds of different processes for our microcontroller, analog, memory and other products. And there's a different utilization factor on different processes. So really averaging it is really not very meaningful. But having said that, I would say our current factory utilization is quite low. And therefore, there's a significant upside of the order of $50 million or so in gross margin eventually as we bring the factories to full production. And the other piece of his question was?
The second piece was on OpEx. So you can see based on our guidance that OpEx is growing in dollars in the current quarter, and it's coming down as a percentage of revenue. And we've been kind of signaling to analysts and investors that there's investments that we need to make in our people, right? We need to bring bonuses back to target levels. That is factored into what we're guiding to in the current quarter. And then we've got pent-up demand for raises. We had people on a pay cut last year and cash raises need to come back, and that's really what's driving the increase in OpEx, but we're still laser-focused on bringing OpEx down as a percentage of sales and driving towards over time, our long-term model, which is 25% of revenue, but we've got a ways to go to get there. But these investments are really required to make sure we are retaining and attracting talent that we need to drive the R&D efforts of the company, the product development efforts and the sales support activities to drive the health of our business 3 and 5 years out in time.
Got it. And just a quick one. Aerospace defense, I think this has been a huge driver for Microchip. I think you guys are one of the biggest suppliers there. Any thoughts on how we should look at how that segment does '26, '27, I guess?
So I think if you just look at what's happening geopolitically, starting from the U.S., there is one of the largest defense budget in the U.S. and Microchip is in every offensive and defensive weapon in our military arsenal. There's also commercial airplane production that's building up with Boeing wasn't building MAX planes for a while, and now they're building MAX planes at a record speed. So that's doing very well. Now when you go to Europe, Europe is under a lot of pressure. NATO countries are under a lot of pressure to double triple their defense budget because they haven't spent what they were supposed to spend under the NATO treaty. And so they're increasing their budgets, and we are handsomely benefiting with a lot of European customers doubling, tripling their production. And I think the last piece would be everybody is exploring space. I mean even India landed a Rover on the dark side of the moon. It was loaded with our products. So as space exploration picks up and with all these new companies like SpaceX and all that launching satellites and others, they all have essentially our products in it. So it's facing multiple wins on the back that's driving A&D sector...
And it's also one other comment there, too, there's also quite a bit of investment in new defense and new aerospace as well. drone manufacturers and new defense manufacturers that are popping up and also consuming quite a bit of those products.
Our next question comes from the line of Joe Moore with Morgan Stanley.
You mentioned the FPGA business a couple of times within the other category. Can you give us a sense for what kind of growth you're seeing there? And generally, anything we should be thinking about from a growth or market share perspective in this coming year in FPGAs?
Well, FPGA is seeing a very good growth and I would say, very large growth, and we're gaining share in FPGA. Considering that it's very hard to get competitors' FPGA numbers where Xilinx is bed in AMD and Alterra is now private, so we can't get their numbers. I think giving our FPGA number would just be giving benefits to the others. So we're not ready to kind of break it out. After the year finishes the fiscal year, maybe we'll give you some sort of bracketed number. But for now, I would say we're gaining share over the others and is seeing a very large growth.
Great. And then if I could follow up on the PCI Express switching comments on the hyperscale side. You talked about the 3 customers and $100 million customer next year. Can you give us a sense for -- are those scale-up types of applications? And what does the road map look like? Do you need to move to Gen 7? Do you move to eLink, UALink? Like how do you maintain the revenue momentum once you've established it?
So Gen 6 has quite a bit of runway. I mean we are hardly getting started. We -- on the research side, we're already working on Gen 7. So Gen 7 is already underway, and it has been for about, I would say, 9 months to a year. But on the Gen 6, now is in the design phase with the customers. We have a number of engagements. We released 3 design wins and hopefully, we'll be coming up with additional design wins in the coming quarters. We're working on some mega design wins. I don't have one to announce yet. And if we get some, then this $100 million could look small.
So your question was on scale up versus scale out. I don't know if Steve or Matthias wants to address that...
I don't know if we are willing to disclose that. I just think it's a very sensitive subject because of how some of the competitors are with the customers. And any competitor -- I'm sorry, any customer who is openly known to then buy from Microchip could get the wrath of one of the competitors. So we're really keeping it very guarded.
Our next question comes from the line of Chris Caso with Wolfe Research.
First question is about gross margins and just coming back to the progress.
On gross margins as we proceed here and presumably as revenue gets better. Eric, in the past, we've used a fall-through model, maybe something in the mid-70s or so of incremental revenue falling through. Now that the inventory reserves, they sound like they're going to normalize in the March quarter. Is that the right way to look at it? And if so, what would be the fall-through level?
Yes. I mean I know that makes it easiest to model. I'm not uncomfortable with using something like that, but it will absolutely be lumpier. It's not going to be as smooth as just putting it in a forecast. It's going to be how we ramp the factories, what the mix of product is in any given quarter. But clearly, we still have a ways to go from 61% to our 65% target. And again, I'm not uncomfortable with it being modeled that way, but it will -- clearly, the quarterly results will be a bit different than kind of straight lining it.
I would add -- let me add this thing. I think we are seeing stronger growth on the products that we get from foundry versus inside. FPGA is 100% outside, doesn't run inside our fabs. Data center products 100% outside do not run in our fabs. Our networking products, T1S products that Matthias talked about are all running outside. They do not run inside. Maybe some runs inside, but mostly outside that business unit. So there is a lot of growth coming from outside. And this underutilization is largely in our fabs inside. So that's why the underutilization part would take longer and be slower to come. But all these products that are running outside, these are all very high-margin products, well above corporate average. So what we will not get on the utilization side will pick it up in the higher than corporate margin on these high-growth products from outside. So gross margin will still continue to accrete.
Right. But it's happening because of mix as opposed to utilization.
It's both. I mean utilization is increasing also, but I just want to make the point that the gross margin improvement is not going to come 100% from the utilization only because mix is richening.
Right. So in our fabs, we are -- today, we are significantly underproducing compared to what we're shipping, and that's why inventory is coming down. And so that will change gradually over time and we'll grow back into the capacity. So underutilization will come down as we move ahead, but not at a lightning speed.
I can almost guess your next question, if all these products have higher than corporate gross margin and they're growing faster, then is our long-term model higher?
Let us get there first.
Okay. I want to ask that follow-up then. As a follow-up, -- on the use of cash, and you had talked about a desire to take down debt. Could you go in a little more detail there? And does that mean that you're going to be pausing buybacks even as cash flow improves and prioritize the reduction of debt? And if so, what level of debt are you targeting? What -- how long does that continue for prioritization of debt?
So I think I don't have a hard number for you, but I can talk about it in general. We are honestly spooked by this last cycle, how difficult this cycle was and how close we came with a high level of debt. And as the profits came down with the down cycle, the leverage was going to go above 6 almost, which would be a junk rating, and we had to go raise $1.5 billion of almost this preferred convert to keep our debt rating and all that. So we're largely spooked by a very large debt. So we're going to be bringing down debt for quite some time and keep the dividend flat and not do any buyback until the debt has come down significantly and debt leverage has come down significantly to a number that I can't give right now because we haven't figured that number out.
Right. So, you remember way back in late 2021 at our Analyst Day, we set a 1.5x leverage -- net leverage target. And we did better than that in the up cycle, but that was on earnings that really weren't sustainable looking back. So we want to be conservative from a balance sheet perspective, get debt down. And we're -- this is the -- the quarter we just completed was the first quarter in a long time that our adjusted free cash flow exceeded our dividend payments. So debt's coming down, that's heading in the right direction, but we've got a ways to go, as Steve said.
Our debt leverage was over 4. It was 4.18. So trying to drive a number right now based on any past experience of 1.5 or so is a mute exercise. I mean we're so far away. So let us make some progress. And as we get closer, then we'll try to drive to a number.
Our next question comes from the line of Harlan Sur with JPMorgan.
Steve, relative to 90 days ago when you guys guided revenues down 1% sequentially with the view that customers are wanting to take down their inventories into year-end. Comparing that to what you just delivered, I mean, it looks like your turns business, your short lead time orders booked and shipped in the same quarter came in much stronger than expected. So is it fair to assume that your turns business as a percent of total revenues came in well above historical trends, typically, which is what you would expect, right, in the early phases of an up cycle. And are you still seeing the same or higher level of turns mix this quarter and expedite requests so far increasing this quarter as well?
Yes, correct. January was very, very strong. The turns component in the bookings was quite high. We continue to get the pull-in request. See, a lot of the backlog was getting pulled in from January into December based on customer requests. And now we're seeing the same thing. A lot of the backlog is being pulled from April into this quarter based on customer requests and bookings are strong, and they're replacing that backlog for April while they're pulling the existing one into this quarter. I think the largest piece was somehow because of less inventory, everybody worked through holidays. People didn't stop in Thanksgiving, they didn't stop in Christmas. They didn't stop in the New Year holidays, and we'll find out what happened in the Chinese New Year. So usually, for example, a lot of the distribution business is based on a number of shipping days. And if you have a bunch of holidays where warehouses are closed, then it affects revenue. Nothing affected revenue last quarter. We just kept getting upside. Everybody wanted product. Bookings were very strong. They were pulling it in. They were expediting. There were just all sorts of -- it was an up cycle kind of behavior, which was really suddenly, we didn't model that going into the December quarter. And all that is continuing in the current quarter. I expect 6.2% sequential growth to be a very strong guidance. I mean we haven't grown 6.2% in a very long time sequentially. So this is very, very good.
I appreciate that. And if I ex out licensing revenues, your other segment still grew close to like 8% sequentially, right? As you mentioned, some of the product growth was FPGA, data center memory networking. I didn't hear you mention this, but I seem to recall historically that the team has had very strong traction in data center SSD controllers, both the chip, but even more importantly, like you guys, I think, have a very strong firmware stack. Right now, data center SSD demand is very strong, right? AI compute is finding all of these new use cases for SSDs. Is the Microchip team benefiting from this? Are you guys still committing R&D investments to the data center SSD franchise?
Yes, absolutely. So we support and continue investing in the storage segment of data centers into the switching segment of data centers, both for -- and the storage, both for flash as well as for HDB. So we've got 3 solid product lines that we are supporting and continue to invest in.
Thank you. There are no further questions at this time. I'd like to pass the call back over to Steve for any closing remarks.
Well, we want to thank all the investors for sticking with us through this last year of recovery, and we finished the year pretty good, and we're looking for an outstanding calendar year 2026. And we'll see some of you on the road as we go to some conferences this quarter. Thank you.
This concludes today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Q3 2026 Earnings Call
Microchip Technology — Q3 2026 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $1.186M (+4% gegenüber dem Vorquartal (QoQ), +15.6% gegenüber dem Vorjahr (YoY)) — deutlich über der ursprünglichen Guidance.
- Non‑GAAP EPS (Earnings per Share): $0.44, $0.04 über dem oberen Ende der Guidance.
- Non‑GAAP Bruttomarge: 60.5% (GAAP 59.6%; inkl. Unterauslastungs‑ und Inventurabschreibungen).
- Adj. EBITDA (adjusted EBITDA): $402M (33.9% des Umsatzes); TTM $1.23B; Net‑Debt/Adj. EBITDA 4.18x.
- Inventar & Cash: Inventar $1.058B (201 Tage), Distributor‑Bestände 28 Tage; adjusted Free Cash Flow $305.6M; Cash+Investments $250.7M.
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Connectivity‑Momentum: Fokus auf Automotive/Industrial Ethernet (10BASE‑T1S). Angekündigte strategische Zusammenarbeit mit Hyundai; mehrere Design‑wins, Pilot‑rampen H2 2026–2027.
- Data‑Center & PCIe: Gen6 PCIe‑Switches mit drei Design‑wins; eines davon erwartet >$100M Umsatz in Kalenderjahr 2027; Gen7 bereits in Arbeit.
- Kapitalallokation: Free Cash Flow über Dividende; Überschuss‑FCF soll primär zur Schuldentilgung verwendet werden; Buybacks werden ausgesetzt, OpEx steigt temporär zur Stabilisierung von Gehältern und Personal.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Umsatzguide: März‑Quartal $1.26B ± $20M (Midpoint +6.2% QoQ, +29.8% YoY).
- Margen & Ergebnis: Non‑GAAP Bruttomarge 60.5–61.5%; Non‑GAAP OpEx 31.3–31.7% des Umsatzes; Non‑GAAP Betriebsgewinn 28.8–30.2%; Non‑GAAP EPS $0.48–$0.52.
- Risiken: Laufende Unterauslastungsbelastung (~$50M), volatile Inventurreserven, zunehmende Substrat/Foundry‑Engpässe und Saisonalität (China‑Neujahr) können Guidance beeinflussen.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Nachhaltigkeit der Nachfrage: Kernfrage: ist das Momentum echtes Endkundennachfrage‑Wachstum oder Restocking? Management sieht breite Erholung, aber weist auf heterogene Kundenlage und kurze Sichtbarkeit hin.
- Margenpfad: Diskussion über Weg zu ~65% Bruttomarge; Management nennt Normalisierung der Inventurreserven und sukzessiven Abbau der Unterauslastung, gibt aber keinen festen Zeitplan.
- Operative Transparenz & Kapital: Publikum forderte Fab‑Utilisierungszahlen, Kundennamen und konkrete Schuldenziele — Management blieb vage (keine Kundennamen, keine Ziel‑Leverage), bestätigte jedoch Priorität auf Schuldentilgung statt Rückkäufen.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Starkes Q3: Umsatz und Non‑GAAP‑Ergebnisse über Guidance, klare Wachstumshebel in Automotive/Industrial Ethernet und Gen6 PCIe. Margenweiteres Aufholpotenzial besteht, bleibt aber von mehrquartalsweiser Reduktion der Unterauslastung und Mix‑Effekten abhängig. Kapitalrückflüsse an Aktionäre werden zugunsten der Schuldentilgung zurückgestellt.
Microchip Technology — Barclays 23rd Annual Global Technology Conference
1. Question Answer
[Audio Gap] with Microchip Technology. Thank you very much for being here today. I'm Tom O'Malley, U.S. semi and semi-cap analyst. Crazy times I know you guys have been bounced around between conferences.
But I think a question that I'd like to lead off with and have kind of talked about broadly in the conference is there's this huge AI tailwind, right? $3 trillion in spend plus. You guys obviously attack this in a different way than the data center-centric players. Maybe talk about how you guys attack this and what's going on with the edge?
Sure. So I'm going to let Rich answer the question, but I'm just going to say during the course of this discussion, we'll be making certain forward-looking statements about the future financial performance of Microchip, and we refer you to our filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors about the company. So Rich, talk about Microchip and data center.
Yes. So we're attacking it, you've probably seen the last release that we did our 3-nanometer PCIe Gen 6 switch. So we're attacking the market from the PCIe switching standpoint. We've been in PCIe switches for Gen 3, Gen 4, a little bit of Gen 5 and now Gen 6 in a very large ramp. We'll be introducing retimers that match with that Gen 6 next quarter. And we also play within the AI data center in timing, secure boot. There's a number of other product lines that also play within that particular market space for us. So it's a large market for us today and growing considerably over the next 5 years.
It's really interesting because if you look at analog mixed signal players and their reach into the data center, that is very much a digital forward market in certain instances. And so the players that have existed there, the Astera Labs, the Credos, the Marvell, Broadcom, they talk about software platform and how important that is on a go-forward basis. Can you talk about how your offering competes with them? You've spoken recently about how you guys have something very similar.
Yes. We have ChipLink. So Microchip has been -- was a predominant a major supplier of Generation 3, Generation 4 PCIe switches. We launched ChipLink, which is a software platform that supports our PCIe switches. It is considered the gold standard within that marketplace. Gen 5, we decided to roll our own SerDes. We were about 12 to 18 months late. So we are a minor player within Gen 5. But the ChipLink software suite is still there, and we continue to enhance it. And ChipLink is ready to go with the Gen 6 release. And then because we've also skipped a generation where our competitors are all sitting on 5 nanometers, we jumped to 3-nanometer on this Gen 6. And this allows our customers to move very quickly to Gen 7 as they finish out their Gen 6 deployments.
So you have opportunity within the data center. And then I would assume also as this proliferates to the edge, the microcontroller portfolio, how are you guys seeing your business develop there? Have you really seen an intersection point? Because, I mean, you have your smartphones today, but then there's going to be devices that you would imagine come in the future. Those need to be connected. Where are we at in that transition?
So on the edge, so we -- one of the new groups that we formed was the AI/ML group. And believe it or not, majority of the applications that we see coming in for our customers using microcontrollers on the edge do not need an accelerator. They're having us develop models for vibration, for wear control, for sound, battery management. All of those, we're building a model too. They can download a model. We port their data in, we train a model and then we port that on to the particular microcontroller or FPGA that they're looking to use. Where we are using accelerators are on our FPGA products. So if you're looking at a vision system, optical inspection system, that's typically where object detection, where accelerators are used. But for very basic sensors, temperature, light, no accelerators are really needed on those products.
We've talked to a lot of companies here who have not only the microcontroller portfolio, but also radios that are associated with those. We went through this transition, the connected MCU. Is radio a differentiator? Or is really the microcontroller the differentiator? And how important is it to have the whole suite of both radios and also the compute side?
Well I think it's actually both. I think what we're seeing is hardware connections, T1 Ethernet, T1S Ethernet. That is actually the backbone. So when you look at robotics in terms of where it's going, Industry 4.0, we're seeing much more uptake on wired communication. So we've taken our Gen 4 PCIe switch and created the 12-lane, 16-lane, 24-lane device, and that's being designed into various companies' reference designs for their robotics platform, cars. So you need much higher wired communication in these applications. So T1s, T1, 2-wire Ethernet is really -- we're seeing that as a huge growth area. In fact, every customer that we talk to, the beginning conversation is not wireless. It's always about Ethernet and T1 Ethernet and T1S.
One more question on this side just because we've heard increasingly more on this. You've heard the battle of scale ups, right, scale up architectures, Ethernet, UAL et cetera, I would imagine with the switching portfolio. with E.SUN, you would potentially be able to offer some switching products in the back in -- is that something that you guys have talked about. Is that an area of opportunity over the long run in the data center?
So we offer our PCIe switches are both scale up and scale out. So we're doing both. We also have some Ethernet products where we offer scale out and have been doing that for quite some time. So we already offer products in both areas. And probably the PCIe Gen 6 switch offers probably the greatest growth right now.
All right. So you're resuming a little on the portfolio side, maybe back up to more of the macro side. So it's been, what, 3 years now. We've all been waiting for the restart in some of the cyclical end markets, auto and industrial. I was listening to you guys last week -- on the margin, it sounded incrementally better for sure. You guys obviously narrowed guidance as well more positively. Could you talk to the health and wellness of auto and industrial? Is this time to say, okay, we're off to the races here. Or is this still -- things are a little bit better, but we need to wait and see?
There was so much inventory that was built up during the last up cycle that we've been -- with 100,000 customers, we've been slowly working through that. And it's taken a long period of time. But what we are seeing now is broad-based booking strength across geographies, across end markets. And that is telling us that more and more customers as we move ahead every month are needing to buy inventory more in line with what consumption is. And so I think that applies to automotive and industrial. Rich, add anything to it?
No. I think a lot of industrial customers who are down probably about 20% from the peak, 20%, 30%. And most that I have spoken to are looking for just consistent mid-single-digit growth going forward, sort of rebaseline and are growing from here. In automotive market, most -- a lot of the inventory is pretty much depleted for the most part there, and we're probably going to be looking at consumption. In fact, we're seeing a lot of our automotive customers start to lay out backlog on us now going out 6 months or 9 months from now as it's getting back to more normality in terms of how layer -- orders layer in for us.
So really, it's a conversation with your customers around their inventory levels, which seemingly are better than they were before. And then bookings are a reinforcement of that idea with customers willing to put orders on you for the next 3, 6, 9 months?
Yes. And our lead times are still very short. We've got 199 days of inventory and lead times are short. So there isn't a huge incentive for customers to give us a bunch of visibility, but we're having customers that haven't bought from us in some time coming back and placing orders and that's telling us that we're getting near to the end of this inventory correction.
There's also another factor. I think some people overlook sometimes during that whole COVID period, there was 2 years of essentially no new product design, right, by most of our customers. right? They were looking for alternative sources. They were trying to figure out how to get products out. And some of those designs that were post that COVID period are starting to come to fruition. We're about 6 to 24 months depending on how you time that where those new designs start to come in. So we're starting to see new designs come to production and layer in on top of also inventory correcting. So there's another factor in there too.
So I did a little napkin math and please correct me if I'm wrong, but if I look at pre-COVID seasonality in the March quarter, it's up modestly, 1% to 2%, tell me if that's off. And then if you think bookings are at our lead times are short, were happening through the December quarter. I think people walked away feeling like, hey, maybe into next year, we could be a little bit better than seasonal. I don't want you to guide. But can you talk about like marrying those 2. Is that the right way to kind of think about things broadly?
Yes. So I would say, typical March is in the range you say it's flat to up a couple of percent. And we think that we can do meaningfully better than that with the way the backlog is layering in to the March quarter. So obviously, December quarter is ending up better than what we had expected just a month ago, and we are seeing backlog build really nicely. So I think we're in a really good place, not just for March, but to show a really strong 2026.
Different companies that I cover work in different ways with the channel. Could you describe your relationship with the channel? And then is there any behavioral changes that you're seeing either with your direct customers or the channel that vary from one another? Would that indicate any sort of various trends like there's been a concern out there that channel would be pulling a little more because customers are taking inventory, harder to read those guys than direct customers. Can you walk me through any of that?
So we operate with 3 different types of distributors. We use the global distributors, the arrows and the in the future electronics of the world. We use the catalog distributors like the DigiKeys and the Mousers that help seed the market with new designs, and then we have a bunch of what we would call regional distributors that are more kind of direct extensions of our sales force that might just carry the Microchip product line from a microcontroller perspective at least, and then can be pure advocates for us with the customer. .
All distributors have been taking inventory down. Sell-through activity from distribution to their customers has exceeded sell-in for quite some time. It was about a $53 million difference last quarter, but distribution inventory is getting to the point where they're going to start needing to purchase in line with end consumption. And we think that inventory that is bled out of distribution is sitting with the customers of theirs, which we don't have complete visibility into, but we think they've been in inventory also. So it has a nice kind of a double effect that will impact revenue.
In terms of our relationship with the channel, it's quite good. About 47% of our business goes through distribution. So it's an important way for us to the long tail of customers. And many customers choose distribution because they provide services, whether it be logistics, kitting, payment terms whatever it might be. So we don't steer customers one way or the other. So distribution is an important piece of our network. I think inventory might come down just a little bit more, but it's getting close to being corrected in distribution.
Yes. So it sounds like the bookings loan are giving you confidence into the March quarter, but then there might be this second wave of actually restocking some of the channel, which has gotten extremely, extremely lean, is undershipping in demand, given where inventory was historically, that could be another layer on at some point maybe in 2026.
It is. And the bottom line is customers and distributors react to what our lead times are at, right? And if they can call us up today and they need product in 4 weeks and they can get it. There's not a lot of incentive for them to build inventory, particularly when we're in a -- not a great economic situation right now and there's someone uncertainty. So with that, I think they're being conservative. And until they get burned and place an order, they can't get it fast enough, there's not a lot of incentive to build out. And we've got a lot of inventory, as I say. But at some point in time, that dynamic will change and inventory will need to increase because we're on the lower ends of what we've seen historically in the channel.
So let's talk about -- and we talked about your -- the inventory position of your customers, talk about the channel and demand, right? So ISM in the U.S. to a contraction, auto SAAR data, not super great for the next 12 months or at least forecasted. Can you talk about any varying views from just the broad health of those end markets? And then where can you guys see secular growth that gets you a little bit better company growth versus those end markets which are trying to kind of flash?
In terms of secular growth, where we're seeing good growth is back-end data center products, obviously, right? So our data center product groups are growing new designs, new activity. Second market is in the communication market, whether the Ciscos, the Nokia, the -- those are all growing. In the A&D market, right, those are all growing markets for us. So within those 3, even though [indiscernible] may be down, those 3 markets are all growing real demand, right? And so those are doing very well for us.
Have you guys broken out as a percentage of total revenue, how big data center is today?
So we've broken out data center and compute combined, okay, when that was about 19% of our revenue last year. We haven't given any more granularity than that, but it's a combination of both.
I imagine growing as time goes along.
Yes. In A&D, we broke out it's about 18% of revenue last year.
Yes, I want to jump into that next. So could you talk about A&D? I mean in terms of the companies that we're seeing here, the verticals that are growing outside of AI, you can't really name a better one other than A&D. You have obviously, ground-based radar rates, satellites to some certain extent. Where do you guys...
Yes. Yes. So we play in all of them. Quite literally, right, whether it's hypersonics, whether it's patriots, whether it's ground defense systems, drone defense systems, those are all Microchip marketplaces. There is nothing that leaves earth Albert without Microchip. There's no defense program that doesn't use our devices. The Mars rover had over 130 products on at the Dane's Web telescope that transmits those beautiful pictures back to earth, use our drivers and various technologies to take those pictures and send them back, whether it's the DART to move or Artemis all our devices.
And then we've recently -- in fact, we just got it at the wafer fab, we were contracted by NASA to develop the next-generation space computer, which is we're calling a high-performance space computer. It's a Octal RISC-V, 64-bit machine. And so the space community has essentially been using an Intel 286 forever. And now we have given development systems to almost anyone doing anything with aircraft and space, whether it's Boeing or Raytheon or Thales or Safran. And they're all now developing code for that next generation of space computer. And that's -- and we'll probably be sampling that mid this year to those customers, maybe even earlier.
So it sounds like Broad inventory coming down in these broader end markets. But if you look at wireline, data center, A&D, like these are areas of secular growth where don't just look at these end markets and what they're doing, look at where the secular growth drivers are that are becoming an increasing percentage of revenue, that can drop some more topline growth.
Yes. So if you're an industrial customer and you're doing Industry 4.0 and you want to have vision and sensors or robotics, RS-232, 45, can, lane or out of speed, right? You need to upgrade to Ethernet. And a lot of these industrial accounts are moving whole scale to wire twisted pair Ethernet. And we're seeing a great deal of design activity, and those will be layering into our revenue in '27 and '28.
So if you look at the different analog and mixed signal stories kind of across the space, there are various ownerships of own fabrication facilities. There's the fab-light model, there's the full ownership. You see Tiago in one direction. Remind us where your strategy is there. And then as inventory comes down, could you help us think about the levers that you get on the operating model as you start to see revenue growth for these opportunities?
Yes. So we do about 37% of our wafer fab in-house. And today, that's in 2 factories, 1 in Oregon and 1 in Colorado. We did this last year shut down our factory in Arizona as we rightsized manufacturing when Steve Sanghi came back to the customer -- or came back to the company, and we're focused on inventory reduction. But we're in a good spot. We've got lots of clean room space to grow into in those factories. We actually have about $400 million of equipment that is sitting undepreciated on the balance sheet and ready to deploy as it needs it. We had about a $50 million underutilization charge running through cost of sales last quarter. That will come down gradually over time as we grow back into our capacity.
But we're reducing inventory right now. So we are producing at a level that substantially less than what we're shipping at, and then we'll have to pull the levers as we go through to increase capacity at the right point in time. We actually are producing more out of our wafer fabs this quarter than last quarter, and I expect that to continue as we move through 2026. So that is one lever on gross margin. The bigger lever on gross margin in the short term is we have been taking accounting charges for what we call inventory reserves, writing down inventory based on our policy. And last quarter, that was almost $72 million. I would say a normalized level for that because there's always some level of inventory reserve is between $15 million and $25 million. So we're sizing this is about $50 million quarterly benefit to gross margin that is going to come back to the P&L sometime over the next 3 or 4 quarters.
So even when we initially guided this quarter, down 1%. Now we're guiding up about 1%. Gross margin was improving because these reserve charges are going down. And it's driven by 2 factors. One, inventory on the balance sheet is coming down. And the basis of the calculation is looking back on a trailing 12-month revenue, which has been declining, and that is inflecting upward at this point in time. So that's a big driver. That is going to benefit gross margin, and it's pretty material. So we've got a long-term target of 65%. Last quarter, we were 56.7%. We have a very clear path to get there.
And then on the operating expense side, our target model is 25%. We're more like in the 32% plus range today. So we've got a long ways to go on that, and that's going to be driven by revenue growth over time and us being cautious and appropriate as we make investments in the business. But OpEx dollars will be increasing, but OpEx as a percentage of sales will gradually come down.
Helpful. I want to pivot a little bit to the geography conversation. So something that we've seen in microcontrollers since has been a worry a long time. There is nothing new. You guys have heard this. It's just on at least the low end side, 8-bit microcontrollers. You're seeing an increasing presence from China. Is that in your eyes completely domestic China? Are they able to sell that product globally? Are you seeing more competitive dynamics with China and the markets that you're playing in today?
A lot of that's just local. And a lot of that's 32 bit. And most companies for security reasons are not building in programmable devices outside of that, especially for infrastructure or tax dollars in play. So that's a very different thing there. And so a lot of those products are available in China. We -- if you look at where Microchip has been going, we've been moving much more to the higher end in products. But the bigger story with Microchip now is really connectivity, networking, compute, those types of devices in terms of where our growth is. I mean we're still investing quite a bit in microcontrollers. We've done a lot of work in consolidating, improving the tool suite.
We announced an AI code assistant that goes with all of our microcontrollers where we've grounded a large language model and cuts development time on microcontrollers anywhere from 40% to 60% and in fact, there's just one development tool of the Year award. And so we're helping customers to be much more productive using the devices, right? And so it's not always the absolute cost of the device. It's the software suite and the tools that support getting that product to market. And I think Microchip still leads on that tools environment on microcontrollers.
Yes. So you're saying essentially the slow investment in semichemical government has going to China. We've seen it. We've historically played an area where there's competition. We're moving away from that. There's not some sort of cliff that we're approaching where part of revenue that we're addressing today needs to move away over time with China, it's really we're moving on to the new spot.
And we disclose what our China revenue was in our public filings. We've about 18% of revenue. We believe about half of that goes to multinationals, the manufacturer and free trade zone as comes back to the U.S. and Europe. So we've got 9% exposure roughly to domestic China, and half of that is in products that China competition can't touch. So we're talking about 4% or 5% of revenue exposure and these customers chose Microchip because we have the right product, right? A lot of the applications that we sell into have very long lives, too. So there's some pressure there over time, but I don't think it's material to the overall business.
You guys have the benefit of conversations with customers that we don't. We look at the ISM data, we look at the auto data, what should we be focused on when we're looking at the health and well being of the markets broadly because you've been doing a lot of this in the face of poor and demand, still, right? Working through inventory, cleaning up the channel like this has all been in an environment where I really haven't seen what is normalized auto and industrial growth. So what are you looking for as a key sign for markets turning around? I think the market feels like there's been a couple of false starts here. What should we be paying out to do?
I think as interest rates come down, overall market start to improve a little bit more. I think as U.S. savings rates improve and consumer confidence gets in there, overall markets start to improve. We got to a point where U.S. savings rates were as low as 3.2%, and that is just a healthy spot to be at, right? And so now it's come up much -- it's approved greatly. And so hopefully, we start to see some of that turnaround. When it comes to manufacturing index, we're starting to see a lot of industrial customers moving onto new designs. So you've got the new security standards, CAR -- CRA standards coming out entire product lines have to be upgraded to meet these new security standards. And so -- what we're seeing is a lot of older designs need to be redone, right? Upgraded on security, upgraded to meet new Angie standards, and so we're seeing a lot of refresh taking place within those particular marketplaces.
You've talked about improving free cash flow and dropping leverage. What are your actions that you're going to take in the near term in terms of capital allocation that gets you there?
So we are happy to say that this quarter, our free cash flow covers the dividend. And that has not been the case for the last I'll call it, several quarters. So that's a good turning point for us, and that's just going to accelerate as we get into 2026. So we are fully committed to the dividend at the levels that it's at. Investors should not expect an increase in the dividend in the short term. And we also are not going to be in the market buying back stock because we need to get the balance sheet healthy and bring leverage down. But I think those metrics are going to improve greatly as we move through 2026. EBITDA is going to be growing the debt -- overall total debt on the balance sheet is going to be coming down, and that's a priority right now. It gets balance sheet healthy, be committed to the dividend, but not be in the market buying back stock until leverage gets down to a much more reasonable level.
Rich and Eric, it sounds like things are at a turning point here. Let's hope that this is the jumping point we've all been waiting for the last couple of years. Thank you so much for being here. I really appreciate it.
Yes. Thanks for having us. Thanks, everybody.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Barclays 23rd Annual Global Technology Conference
Microchip Technology — Barclays 23rd Annual Global Technology Conference
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Kernbotschaft: Microchip positioniert sich als Infrastruktur‑ und Schnittstellenlieferant für Data Center und Edge (PCIe Gen6, 3‑nm) statt als reiner AI‑accelerator‑Player. Parallel Ausbau von Edge‑AI/ML‑Tools und schrittweise Margen‑ & Bilanzverbesserung durch Inventarkorrekturen; Backlog signalisiert stärkere 2026‑Dynamik.
⚡ Strategische Highlights
- PCIe & ChipLink: Einführung eines PCIe Gen6 Switch (Sprung zu 3‑nm), ChipLink‑Software ist Gen6‑bereit; Retimer-Produkte angekündigt für das nächste Quartal.
- Edge‑AI & MCU: Neues AI/ML‑Team liefert vortrainierte Modelle für Vibration, Sound, Batterie; FPGA‑Beschleuniger für Vision, AI‑Code‑Assistent reduziert MCU‑Entwicklungszeit ~40–60%.
- Fertigung & Bilanz: Inhouse‑Fertigung ~37% (Oregon, Colorado), ca. $400M an einsatzbereiter Ausrüstung; Management sieht Hebel auf Bruttomarge und OpEx‑Hebung durch Umsatzwachstum.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Guidance & Margen: Management meldet positive Backlog‑/Buchungslage; aus zuvor negativer Guidance wurde nun eine leichte Aufwärtsbewegung (~+1% vs ursprüngl. -1%).
- Inventarwirkung: Letzte Rückstellung ~ $72M; normalisiert wäre $15–25M — Management erwartet ~ $50M/Q Vorteil für Bruttomarge über die nächsten 3–4 Quartale.
- Space & Sampling: Neues "High‑Performance Space Computer" (Octal RISC‑V 64‑bit) soll Kundenmid‑Sampling Mitte dieses Jahres erfolgen.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- AI‑/Data‑Center‑Position: Kritische Nachfrage zur Wettbewerbsfähigkeit gegenüber Broadcom/Marvell; Antwort: Fokus auf PCIe‑Switching, Software (ChipLink) und 3‑nm Sprung als Differenzierer, aber Gen5‑Lücke bleibt.
- Channel & Inventar: Analysten fragten nach Distributor‑Verhalten; Management sieht Distribution (~47% Umsatz) weiter leeren, aber bevorstehende Re‑Stock‑Wellen möglich, Lead‑Times derzeit kurz (199 Tage Inventar insgesamt).
- Kapitalallokation: Nachfrage zu FCF und Buybacks: FCF deckt Dividend; Dividend bleibt, keine Rückkäufe bis Hebel reduziert; Fokus auf Schuldenabbau.
⚖️ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Für Aktionäre bedeutet das: klarer strategischer Fokus auf höherwertige Schnittstellen (PCIe Gen6/3nm) und Software plus Wachstumssignale aus Backlog; kurzfristig Treiber sind Inventarnormalisierung und Margenaufholung, langfristig Disziplin bei Kapitalallokation und De‑Leverage.
Microchip Technology — UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
1. Question Answer
Good afternoon. Hi. I'm Tim Arcuri. I'm the semiconductor and semi-equipment analyst here at UBS. And I'm very pleased to have Microchip with us. We have Steve Sanghi, who's the CEO of Microchip, we have Eric Bjornholt, who's the CFO and we have...
Brian.
Brian McCarson.
Brian McCarson, who runs data center. So thanks to all of you.
Thank you.
So let me start off, Steve, you made an announcement yesterday, took the fourth quarter, took the December quarter to the high end of the range. Can you just speak to what the drivers are of that and what you're seeing in the business?
Certainly. So before I begin, I wish to remind you that during this presentation, we'll be making some projections and other forward-looking statements regarding the future financial performance of Microchip. These always involve predictions and the actual results may vary materially. So I refer you to Microchip's filings with the SEC regarding some important risk factors about the company.
So having said that, Tim, when we made our announcement in November and had a conference call on November 6, we were really worried about the impact on December quarter from the holidays. Customers -- December quarter is historically our weakest quarter of the year. And many year-end customers often want to dress up their balance sheet and not hold a lot of inventory. And we were just concerned that the turns required may not materialize even though lead times were short. And usually, when the backlog is low and the lead times are low, turns fill up. But I think we were spooked by the holidays.
And so seeing what we saw, taking the risk for the holidays into account, we guided the December quarter to be down minus 1 sequentially. It's usually down minus 3 to minus 5. So it was better than seasonal, but probably not good enough. And as the month has gone by, the results have been very good. November was a phenomenal month.
We had very strong bookings, very good turns. But in addition to that, a lot of the customers who had placed their backlog for January decided to pull it in. So we're getting a large amount of pull-ins. And some of them were having trouble satisfying because a lot of our inventory is in die and we still have to assemble and test it. So I think with the strength we saw in November, I would say that the holidays are now have been derisked. So therefore, I had to pull the guidance up, and we feel very strong about it.
Now when we told back in November that our March quarter was shaping up to be very good, a number of investors and analysts asked the question, what gave you the confidence that the March quarter would be strong, people can always push their orders out. Well, it was a good question, but the reality has been different. In fact, they have pulled it in. And they have placed a lot more orders where the March quarter has even strengthened further beyond what it was on November 6. So good this quarter, very strong March quarter, and the June quarter also looks very strong. So I think maybe the well-expected inflection point in the business is here.
And is there any particular end market that's been stronger? Or has it been broad-based?
So we're seeing recovery really in all the end markets. We've been talking for a while that our data center and aerospace and defense business looks good. The other business is industrial, automotive, communication, they seem to have joined, and now I will put them in the plus category.
The consumer business, which is kind of one of our smaller businesses, was hurting somewhat from the uncertainty from tariffs, but people have finally resigned to the fact that there is no immediate settlement coming on tariffs, and they are really just switching to running their business in a normal way. So I would say that business is doing well also.
So I think you talked about customers pulling even from June into March. Is that what's making March better? Or are these new bookings that are shipping in March? Or is it orders that were in backlog that were supposed to ship in June that are actually pulling into March?
So they're not pulling in from June to March, they're pulling in from January into December, and placing a lot more backlog in March. So despite some backlog pulling in from March quarter to December quarter, March quarter is still stronger. And June is just new bookings aging into December -- into June.
Got it. And I think you said November was the best bookings month in 3 years. Is that what you said?
Yes. So I've said that probably 4, 5 times, September was the best booking month in 3-plus years, I think so was June and so was July and November beats them all by a mile.
Okay. And is there any sense, Steve, so typically, March is -- I think March is usually up a little bit seasonally, 1% to 2% is what our math is. And you had already said that you expect it to be better than that. So this just sits on top of that. So you should be quite a bit better than what...
We should be significantly better than the numbers you just said.
Great. Okay. Let's just talk about the sort of long-term growth rate of the business and sort of what the dynamics are. What do you think changed for customers? Do you think that there was some of this backlog aging that you were talking about coming out of last call, and it was like -- it was almost as if customers were placing orders on a prospective basis, and they weren't sure what was going to happen because of tariff uncertainty or whatever. So they were putting orders in the backlog that was sort of longer dated. And what sort of broke in the month of November, do you think?
So 2 things are happening. Number one, the inventory has been coming down. I would say the distributor inventory correction is in the ninth inning and a number of distributors are really kind of fully corrected, but a few of them had a little bit left. So that's in the ninth inning. So therefore, distributions are starting to buy a lot of product because their inventory is fully corrected.
The OEM customer inventory is probably in the eighth inning. So they maybe got another quarter to go. But these customers on all their products, it's not -- inventory is not same on every product. On many products, the inventory is low, so they're buying those. So some of the strength is coming from people starting to take their purchase equal to their consumption. So that's where some of the strength is coming from.
The second area is coming from is in 2023 and 2022, most of our customers' design activity basically stopped. Parts were so hard to acquire. They were spending all the time finding whatever parts they could and then substituting the designs and the board with the new products so that they could continue to run their manufacturing. So there was a significant demand destruction over those couple of years because of lack of NPI, new product introductions.
That changed in '24 and '25. Our customers have been designing their new products, and many of them are now starting to turn to production. And we'll see more and more of that as 2026 gets underway. So those 2 factors are really driving the growth. And that will continue for several quarters. But eventually, sometime in '27, let's say, after 4, 5, 6, 7 quarters, the growth kind of goes back to what the microcontroller and analog, just market growth is someday. And what we are trying to do is building a new Microchip, which we have tried to do in the last year, in which we're adding 3 additional pillars to our business other than just the microcontroller and analog.
And those 3 pillars are: One is network and connectivity, the second one is high-performance compute and third one is AI on the edge. And all these 3 pillars have products and markets which are growing substantially faster than the mature microcontroller and analog markets are growing. And our goal is to basically link up where these new accelerated growth begin when our generic microcontroller and analog business is becoming an industry growth so that we can have a larger than industry growth for years to come.
And probably the best and most lucrative part of that business seems like the opportunity in the data center business. So I brought my data center head, Brian McCarson, with me today, and I'd like to have him tell you a little bit about our data center opportunity. I can come back and I can talk about the rest of network and connectivity and compute, if you so like. So Brian?
Yes. So thank you, everyone. Thanks for having me. So I'm Brian McCarson, I lead our Data Center Solutions business unit within Microchip. And our business is broken up into 3 basic categories. We support memory control infrastructure. We support storage control infrastructure. And our fastest-growing business is around PCIe-based connectivity. So these are switches and retimers.
Now if a GPU is going to communicate to a CPU, that language that Intel CPU or an AMD CPU communicates with is PCIe based. And so we are 1 of 2 major players in the PCIe switch market. And we have now a fourth-generation product. So we have PCIe Generation 3, 4 and 5. And Steve just recently announced our latest innovation, which is PCIe Gen 6, which is the world's first 3-nanometer PCIe-based switch.
And we're particularly excited about this product launch because for a few reasons, we -- one, it shows Microchip at the bleeding edge of data center infrastructure technology with, again, that world's first switch on 3-nanometer. But this product also has a lot of differentiating features, which make it really interesting in the growing data center market. And one of those is it's -- it has the best power efficiency of any other switch that's out on the market. To the extent it could have meaningful savings for an entire data center from an energy infrastructure perspective versus our competitors.
And the second is it's the only product on the market with fully vetted and developed multi-cast technology. And what multi-cast means is your GPU needs to send a signal to 20 different storage banks because it's doing retrieval augmentation for training, it has to send that signal 20x to each of those banks. And our technology allows that GPU to communicate to our switch, and then we take care of that 1 to 20 communication. So we're offloading some of the burden that the GPU has to carry, and that's adding a lot of additional incremental value to choosing our product.
So this represents, as Steve stated, a shift in Microchip's position in the market where we are also participating in the bleeding edge of the innovation cycle with AI data centers. And we have additional products which are coming, which will be supporting both enterprise server markets as well. So it's an exciting time for the Data Center Solutions business, and we're seeing some pretty significant interest on these new products.
Brian, can you just talk -- can you give us a sense of how big do you think this business can be over time?
Well, I won't speculate on how big this individual business will be, but what -- from a number of different analysts have externally predicted the PCIe switch and retimer market to be upwards of $12 billion a year by 2030. And we intend to be a meaningful participant in that market with industry-leading products. And of that, maybe 15%, 20% is speculated to be retimers and the rest goes towards those PCIe-based switches.
And how do you win in this market? This is not a market that you participated in much in the past, and you're competing with companies who are fairly strong in incumbents? What do you bring...
So we did compete in this market. We have -- we're, in fact, the only company today that supplies Gen 3, Gen 4, Gen 5 and now Gen 6. This -- originally, the business came with the Microsemi acquisition, which was only Gen 3 and Gen 4 at that time. So the company and its prior Microsemi, we've been competing in it for years. We didn't do well on the Gen 5 because the Gen 5 product was about 1.5 years late to market. So when we came back, usually, the hyperscalers adopt any future generation much faster than the enterprise customers do. Enterprise customers come in about 18 months, 2 years late.
So we had a lot of designs with Gen 5 now and the enterprise customers later, but we missed the earlier hyperscalers. In Gen 6, we are the first to market with the most advanced product, and we're talking to pretty much every hyperscaler except one for some unknown reason. So I think many of these will be turning to production in about a year or so time frame. There will be a significant growth in that market. And after that, about a year, 1.5 years later, a lot of the enterprise customers start designing. They usually follow the hyperscalers by about a year to 18 months.
So the inflection of that business is more of a 2027 event versus...
No, it's second half of '26.
'26, okay? Great. Maybe, Eric, I can ask you about, I think the goal -- you sold in about $50 million below in disty, selling was about $50 million below sell-through last quarter. I think the plan was that it would gradually get better, but it wouldn't get to parity until maybe June or later in the year, actually. It sounds like maybe distribution gets to parity faster now. Can you just kind of talk about that?
Yes. No, we think we're getting close. We think it's within the next 2 quarters that it gets there. I think there'll still be a difference this quarter. But distribution inventory is getting pretty low. And it's not across the board at every part, as Steve kind of talked about, but it's getting in a good spot where they're going to have to start buying with -- in line with what end consumption is. So I think we're within 2 quarters of that happening.
And can you talk about factory loadings? I know you had -- I think you had $51 million in underutilization charges last quarter, and you were planning to start to bring the factories back on, certainly back end for sure. But can you just -- can you talk about sort of the trajectory? It sounds like you're going to turn the factories back on a little more -- a little faster now actually.
So we look at capacity really closely within the company on a regular basis. We are producing more out of our wafer fabs this quarter than we did last quarter. And I expect that progression to continue in 2026. But this $50 million or so of underutilization charges are going to take us some time to work through. There's 2 major pieces that are impacting our gross margins negatively today. One of those is our inventory write-offs or inventory reserve charges and the other is capacity utilization.
The inventory write-offs, which was almost $72 million last quarter, that will get back to normal quicker than the capacity underutilization. It depends on the slope of the revenue curve, obviously, but we added a lot of capacity during the last up cycle, so it's going to take us some time to work through that.
And Steve, you talked about product gross margin. I think it was 67.4% last quarter, I want to say. Should we expect it to stay in the 66% to 68% range? And does the data center business help maybe bring the product gross margins up?
So there are a lot of puts and takes. So to do the math on it, you're correct that our product gross margin was about 67.4%. And from that, we took 2 charges, inventory write-off and underutilization. Those charges had a negative 10.8% impact on the gross margin. So 67.4% minus 10.8% gave you the gross margin that we announced, which I think was 56.7%. And this quarter, we've guided up to 58-point-something. We're fairly confident that we'll put a 6 handle on it in the March quarter. And then from there to 65%, I think it's probably a slingshot. I don't know how long it takes, but it looks very good.
So our product mix is very rich. The strength is in data centers, FPGA, communication business unit, Aerospace and Defense, some industrial. So the mix is very rich and the strength is in all those products where the gross margins are high. So that's why you're seeing that basic product gross margin being 67.4%. Also included in that is our licensing business, which is 100% gross margin, and that's very strong. As the foundries are ramping, every single foundry is ramping right now with AI and other things.
And if they license on our technology, we're getting royalties on it. So that's adding to a very rich gross margin. But what you said is 67.4%. And as the data center ramps, does it go above that? Well, I think our long-term margin target is still 65%. And if we longer term do higher than that, let's get closer before we take a look at it. There are a lot of moving parts in the business. There are parts of our business, which are also very competitive. But I think we feel pretty good about gross margin.
Great. And Steve, what -- so if you go back and you look at what you think the business grows at, what the long-term CAGR is of the business and maybe layering in these new data center opportunities, what do you think -- and it depends on the base because we don't really know what the right base here is because it's shut around so much. But what do you think the long-term CAGR is of your business?
So I think we're not prepared yet. I think we want to probably wait another sometime where our business gets back to the baseline so we understand where we are and then layer in the normal growth in our legacy businesses, microcontroller, analog and some connectivity and then link up to the higher growth rate from data center, FPGA, high-performance compute, network and connectivity, which will kind of have a much higher growth rate and then blend it all together and see where we are before we can talk to you. That exercise is underway, but not ready to roll out yet.
Great. And then with respect to the fab shutdown, back to you, Eric. So how much does this play just in terms of where your utilization is going to be? And do you think now given that the business is actually getting better, I mean there was some thinking maybe there might be some more consolidation, but now that the business is actually getting better, like how do you think about the fab shutdowns and how it helps margins going forward? Have we seen the impact from it yet?
So I want to make sure I understand the question on fab shutdown. So we are -- we shut down Fab 2, which was the Arizona fab. That's what you're referring to, correct?
Yes. Yes.
Yes. So I think we're in a good spot today. I mean we expanded the clean room space significantly, both in our other 2 larger fabs in Colorado and Oregon during the up cycle. We've got a lot of equipment that we purchased that is not placed in service yet that we can grow into and we can take some of the Fab 2, the Arizona fab tools and transfer them as needed to these other facilities.
So I think from a capacity standpoint, we are in a really good position. We can't just turn a fab on overnight, though, right? And so it will be a gradual ramping back into our capacity over time. And that's why I talked about the underutilization charges being kind of a gradual decline as we move through the upcoming couple of years.
Great. Steve, I want to ask you about China. And you have this JV in China to more like a Chinese company in China, I think you've said. So can you just talk about that? Can you talk about how that's going? And I think you've taken your exposure and you often whittle it down to be -- you say, well, by the time that you whittle it down, it's a low to mid-single-digit number that's actually at risk of domestic displacement.
So we do not have a JV in China. We had talked about a strategy a year ago where we would build a partnership with a company who will buy our die and then assemble and test it in China and then ship into China as the local product. That was when the definition of made in China, was assembled in China. Through these various rounds of trade negotiations, China has changed the definition of made in China. And the definition today is fabbed in China, not assembled in China. And we don't do very much fab in China.
So we abandoned that strategy quite a while ago, and I think we have spoken to investors about having abandoned that strategy. Since then, we have instituted some other strategies that not quite liberty to say because of competitive reasons. But there are a lot of ways to have intermediary involved who buy your product, program them, write some software, put in the boards and then sell it to the customers as local product and things like that.
So we're doing various different things to be able to have the customer think. Customers just want to check a box made in China for Chinese government. They don't want to buy the local product. They want to buy our product. And we are basically helping them do it. Our business in China is not suffering. We've been getting the same question in China for more than a decade. There's not a meeting where the China question doesn't come up. Our China business is solid. It's growing. It's doing very well. Year after year after year, our percentage of China business has not dwindled. And Chinese threat is largely overplayed. I think Chinese competition is in a very low-end commodity area. They don't largely not make the kind of products we make.
And how much do you think, Steve, how much do you think the microcontroller world is still benefiting from Moore's Law? And does that have some effect on limiting the TAM at all? And can you talk about just how much do you think that the MCU business is actually growing?
So microcontroller business is really not on Moore's Law trend really and really hasn't been. There's no microcontroller, generic general purpose microcontroller, which is at 3-nanometer. I think the center of gravity or rather than the center of gravity, let's say, the most advanced general purpose microcontrollers are probably being built on 22-nanometer, which is many generations behind the 3-nanometer. It is on a treadmill where parts go on more advanced technology every couple of years, but it's not competing with the data centers and GPUs and CPUs.
Right. But I mean just that treadmill, do you think that, that's in some way capping the growth of the market at all?
I don't think so.
You don't think so. And maybe you can talk also about your competitive position in that market. Some -- I get questions. Some investors perceive you as overexposed to 8-bit. This is not my words. These are -- I'm sure that you get the same questions as you as overexposed to 8-bit and underexposed to 32-bit. So when you get these questions, how do you respond to them?
Well, I mean, I think we've been answering it for a long time, but anybody can believe what they want to believe. 32-bit is our largest business and 8-bit is the second. As part of the restructuring after I came back, we combine an 8-bit and 32-bit together. So it's really one single business unit. We go to customers with this barrage of products and they can design whatever they like. They can design a 8-bit, they can design a 32-bit, they can switch back and forth.
But I think what it gives us is there are competitors that only have 32-bit. So if you're a hammer, everything is a nail. But customers have low-end applications where they want a very small footprint, near 0 sleep power, very small pin count and just a tiny bit few instructions to be able to just wiggle something or move a fan or do something a little bit. And they don't need the complexity of 32-bit. They don't need to connect to Internet or Wi-Fi or Bluetooth or anything else. And many of our competitors don't have a solution for them. We have a solution for a toaster, a blender, an iron, a garage opener as well as servers and automobiles and high-end robotics and everything else. So we are a full-purpose microcontroller supplier. I think we're proud of what we do, and we have succeeded for 35 years and continue to do well.
Do you think as you push more aggressively into these new opportunities such as data center, does that increase the amount of OpEx and the amount of R&D that you're going to have to spend?
No, it doesn't. I think per product, per invention, they also have much larger revenue. So look at, for example, when you design an analog product, the revenue per product is quite small, but the investment to make that product is quite small. In microcontroller, the revenue per product is much larger than analog, but the investment is much larger because you need software, development tools and all that. When you get to a product like Bran, the revenue per product is huge and the investment is huge, too. So I think in terms of percentage of OpEx from the revenue, I think it scales appropriately.
And then, Steve, last question, and I asked you this on the call last time, you still have these LTSAs. And your point was these are still around because it helps you stay connected to the customer. Can you give any tangible examples of maybe a situation where you have a customer sitting in LTSA that you're able to then go and say, "Well, I can sell you something else because we have this connectivity."
So I think we did these LTSAs trends for long-term supply agreement at the height of the market when the parts were very hard to get. And what happened is customers gave us a significant amount of money and made commitment to buy a certain number of unit volume or revenue dollars per quarter for 5 years. And when they buy the quarter's quantity, then they get 1/20th of their money back every quarter and in 5 years, the money would be returned.
So number one, 2 or 3 years have gone by and most customers have gotten half of their money back or more already. But the second thing that happened is pretty much no customer met their target of what they were going to buy. And what we were doing prior to I came back is that we were forcing customers to buy what they signed up for. And that's what resulted into a large amount of inventory. We were forcing people to buy what they didn't need and distributors to buy what they didn't need.
So we got rid of all those rules. So today, we still have some of customers' money, but we give that money every quarter, almost irrespective of what they buy, and we're letting them buy what they need. So we're very flexible. But we still keep a little pressure, "Hey, I'm helping you. You made this commitment, and I'm relieving you of that commitment, giving you still the money back, but you should give me a preference for design," and we're getting that. We're getting there. I mean just recently, just in the last 2 weeks, there is a very, very major design on a T1S networking product at a major customer in Europe, and it's a whopper of a design we were heading towards, and we would not have gotten it if we didn't have the money.
Well, that's great. Well, we're out of time. Thank you to all of you.
Thank you very much.
Appreciate it.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
Microchip Technology — UBS Global Technology and AI Conference 2025
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Takeaway: Microchip berichtet von einer breiten Nachfrageerholung: starke Buchungen im November führten zu Anhebung der Dezember‑Guidance; Management sieht auch März und Juni als robust. Treiber sind Distributor‑ und OEM‑Inventarabbau sowie wiederkehrende New‑Product‑Introductions (NPI).
🚀 Strategische Highlights
- Data Center: Fokus auf Hochleistungs‑Recheninfrastruktur: Microchip positioniert sich mit PCIe‑Switches und Retimern für AI‑Datacenter als „Bleeding‑edge“-Anbieter.
- PCIe Gen6: Vorstellung des weltweit ersten PCIe Gen6‑Switches auf 3‑Nanometer‑Prozess; verspricht bessere Energieeffizienz und native Multicast‑Funktionalität.
- Produktmix: Drei zusätzliche Wachstums‑Säulen neben MCU und Analog: Network & Connectivity, High‑Performance Compute und Edge‑AI; Ziel ist überdurchschnittliches Wachstum langfristig.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Launch & Timing: Gen6‑Switch vorgestellt; Management sieht Produktions‑/Adoptions‑Inflection für Data‑Center in H2 2026. Analystenschätzung für PCIe‑Markt bis 2030 ~$12 Mrd.
- Margen & Charges: Produkt‑Bruttomarge vor Sonderposten ~67,4%; Abschreibungen/Unterauslastung schlugen ~10,8 Prozentpunkte negativ zu Buche (Inventar ~$72M; Unterauslastung ~$50M).
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Nachfragequelle: Kritische Nachfrage: Management erklärt Pull‑ins (Bestellungen vorgezogen) plus breiten Endmarktaufschwung statt nur punktueller Nachfrage.
- Kapazität & Auslastung: Diskussion über Fab‑Shutdown (Arizona Fab2) und schrittweise Rückkehr zur Auslastung; Unterauslastungs‑Effekte bleiben quarters‑übergreifend.
- China & LTSAs: Keine JV‑Fabrik in China; Strategie angepasst nachdem „Made in China“ jetzt fab‑basiert definiert ist. LTSAs (Long‑Term Supply Agreements) werden flexibler gehandhabt.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Implikation: Kurzfristig positive Nachfrage- und Guidancesignale; Margen sehen Erholung (März‑Guide ~58%+, langfristiges Ziel 65%), aber Aktionäre müssen Inventar‑ und Kapazitätsabschreibungen sowie die tatsächliche Marktadoption von Gen6 im Auge behalten.
Microchip Technology — Wells Fargo's 9th Annual TMT Summit
1. Question Answer
Perfect. We'll go ahead and get started. I'm Joe Quatrochi, the semi and semicap analyst here at Wells Fargo. Excited to have the Microchip team here, Eric Bjornholt from -- the CFO as well as Sajid from IR.
So you guys just reported a couple of weeks ago. Maybe just like to like level set the conversation a little bit. Can you talk about just what you're seeing from a demand perspective, looking at the December quarter? When did you kind of realize December maybe a little bit more seasonal than you previously kind of were thinking? Let's just start there.
Okay. Let me start by doing the typical disclosures that during the course of this discussion, we'll be making certain forward-looking statements about the future financial performance of Microchip, and I refer you to our filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors about the company.
Okay. So the demand environment. So we have actually had pretty healthy bookings activity over the last several months. We go back to July and we highlighted to the Street that our July bookings were the highest that we've seen in a month for 3 years. August was seasonally soft, which is normal, and then September was higher than July. And then we followed that up with October, which was also higher than July, a little bit lighter than September, but we've had really good bookings 3 of the last 4 months.
What's changed a little bit is the aging of those bookings. So the bookings are aging a little bit further out in time. And so the amount of those orders that are actually translating into turns orders, orders received in the quarter for delivery in the quarter, is lower than we originally expected. And so even though we are guiding the current quarter to be above seasonal at down 1% at the midpoint, it's a little bit lower than what our expectations were a couple of months earlier. But things are trending in the right direction. Our bookings in the September quarter grew 10% over what they were in the June quarter. We had a book-to-bill of 1.06. And our backlog today is building very nicely in the March quarter, and that is giving us very high confidence that the March quarter is going to be above seasonal.
Okay. I think when you guys reported that you said, I think, it was like the first 2 days of November, like the bookings were strong in the first few days. I mean, curious if there's any update there, like they've remained strong like now that we're kind of middle of the month or towards getting closer towards the end of the month?
Yes. So bookings in November have continued to be strong. So that trend has continued.
Okay. And then I guess, as we look into March, like what gives you the confidence that like you don't see a similar trend that you saw like in -- for December that like things just kind of -- the bookings age a bit, and they get pushed out like to June? Like I guess, like talk about that just like that confidence.
Yes. So let me clarify that we are not seeing pushouts of orders. Once they're placed, we're seeing very little pushouts. There's a lot more pull in activity a customer might schedule an order for February and now say, hey, I need it in December, or I need it in January. So there's not really a push activity. Again, what was different is the new bookings were coming in were aged a little bit further out in time. And we really attribute that to in the December quarter that we're in a little bit of a soft economic environment.
It is not unusual for companies to have extended kind of shutdowns in December around the holidays and do a little bit of balance sheet dressing leading into the calendar year-end, which is the year-end for many of the companies. So I think really that's the phenomenon that's happening. Microchip continues to have extremely short lead times for our products. And so we see quite a bit of backlog that is placed in the month of January, and customers know that, hey, if they have some upside in this quarter, and they actually need that product pulled into the month of December that we can likely accommodate that.
Okay. Okay. I guess like you talked about like seeing like the elevated amounts of like expediated orders and things from customers. I guess like what do you think maybe changes that dynamic as you get into '26? Is it just macro confidence? Or you talked about also like your lead times, right, or extending or the lead times to deliver to customers, there's becoming like a gap in that time, right? Like they don't match. So like maybe help us like are you educating your customers in that dynamic? Or just what's their response?
So let me start by saying is that lead times are still generally very short. We do have pockets of products that have lead times that have extended out a little bit. We highlighted this on our quarterly earnings call, and not this last one, but the one before, that some of our data center products, which run on higher process technology nodes, we outsource a lot of the assembly and test on those products. And that capacity was getting consumed by some things in AI or iPhone build for Christmas. And so the lead times were just longer than expected, that continues to happen for a small portion of the products, but the vast majority of products still have short lead times.
And I don't really expect customers to give us that much better visibility until they start to see those lead times stretch from us and the rest of the industry. And right now, everybody is still sitting on pretty healthy levels of inventory. So lead times are short. And in that environment until the customer experiences something different, -- and it could be that, hey, a month ago, I placed an order with Microchip, and I needed something in 4 weeks and they could get it to me. Now I placed an order, and I needed it in 4 weeks, and I can't get it for 6 or 7 weeks, then they start thinking about it a little bit differently in terms of giving us a better backlog pipeline.
Okay. Okay. How does that like just kind of the more difficulty in visibility? Like how does that translate into thinking about factory loadings and like gross margin dynamics, just given like the underutilization right now?
Yes. So we took action and closed one of our wafer fabs earlier this year and ran the last production through what we called Fab 2, which was Arizona-based facility in kind of early May time frame. And by taking that action, today, we are producing way less than what we're shipping, and that's why inventory is trending down each quarter. So we're in a really good position today that by adding some people into the factory starting more wafers, we can ramp capacity pretty quickly. But we ended last quarter with still 199 days of inventory, which is still high.
Our long-term target is 130 to 150 days. But since we're producing at a level that's quite a bit lower than what we're shipping at, we can't wait to start ramping those factories until inventory is magically at 150 days or inventory will go too low because these fabs are large operations, you need to add headcount, you need to get people trained. You can't increase capacity in a wafer fab by 40% in the quarter. It's a gradual thing. So we're actually starting that this quarter or underutilization charges, which were about $50 million last quarter, aren't going to come down significantly this quarter because it takes some time to fill the line in the factory. But our expectation is that we'll have to continue as we move in and through 2026, and those underutilization charges will continue to come down.
Okay. Okay. Maybe from a demand perspective, I think one of the areas that's been more of a bright spot, right, has been like aerospace and defense. Can you talk about, I guess, like the demand that you're seeing there? Maybe you can split it out like U.S. versus rest of world and just the opportunities?
So our Aerospace and Defense business has been really our steadiest business over the last couple of years. And obviously, the U.S. defense budget is quite high this year. The NATO countries are being encouraged to spend more. And so we're seeing quite a bit of activity there. We are the largest supplier of semiconductors to the Department of Defense. And so we've got a really good view into what's happening there, and we're having lots of great customer conversations about things needing to be replenished and restocked because of some of the activity that's going on from a defense perspective around the world. So we're in a great position. A lot of that business came to us through our Microsemi acquisition back in 2018, but that business has grown nicely and now we're selling more of the broader Microchip product line into that aerospace and defense market, and we see very nice growth opportunities over the coming years there because of the increase in spend.
Okay. That's helpful. Thinking about just like the growth algorithm, we're thinking about like the growth markets for you. I mean, data centers, also another opportunity you guys have been talking a lot about. Maybe can you just kind of remind us like where you participate in the data center? And then like what do those opportunities look like out in front of us and we can also talk about some of the product announcements you've recently made?
Sure. I'll let Sajid take that.
Yes. On the data center side, today, we're serving that space with a full stack solution with our connectivity products, our power controllers -- sorry, storage and memory controllers, our timing solutions and our power management portfolio. And so it's really a full approach from a full stack standpoint. And then on the connectivity side, we've been in that space for a very long time with our Gen 3, Gen 4, Gen 5 products and then more recently, as you highlighted, we announced our Gen 6 product, which is the first of a kind or first one on 3-nanometer, so first in the industry for a 3-nanometer product. And essentially, what that does is it really helps kind of solves for a very critical problem in the data center space today, which is power efficiency. And so as you kind of move down to 3 nanometer, our -- that product has compared to what is currently in the market at about 144 lanes, our product has 160 lanes driving 15% to 20% efficiency per lane. And so we're presently sampling that today, and so we'll expect revenued from that later down the stretch, but pretty excited about that opportunity because it is a pretty significant ramp-up over there. And then we'll have a steady cadence of new product announcements to that kind of support that. So primarily those would be the kind of areas in the data center side.
Okay. And I guess, I mean, like I think data center has historically been like 15% to 20% of the business, and we'll get an update here in March. But where do you think that could go over time? Like could it go to 30%, 40% of the business? Like how do you think about like just kind of the mix drivers of the different end markets?
So it's hard to say. We see the opportunity there quite large. As Sajid said, we've got a very significant focus within the company. It is a little bit different type of business than what you historically think of Microchip if you think of more kind of lagging edge process technologies. But it's been a successful business for us in the past. We're not going to say doubling down on it, but we definitely are investing in it heavily today. We've got a new leader of that group that joined the team that actually spoke on our last earnings call, and he's really holding the team accountable on product deadlines. The market is quite different in terms of you've got to hit your market window, right? If you're late by 6 months or 9 months on a standard microcontroller analog product that's going to sell for 20 years, it's not a big deal, right? But if you're late in this market, your opportunity to gain share or even keep your share is challenged. So we're excited about it. I don't want to put percentage terms around it of where it can be, but it definitely can grow from -- I think it was 18%, 19% of our business last fiscal year, it can grow over time quite nicely.
Okay. Yes. On the PCIe, like the Gen 6 switch that you briefly touched on, I mean, can you expand on just the competitive positioning of that product relative to peers and just kind of like where your value proposition to customers that you think can drive some pretty meaningful opportunities there?
So it's a big market, right? I think in talking to Brian McCarson, that the PCIe market that this product can address over time, it's about a $2 billion market. And there's some large players there, not to name names, but there are some large players there. And we think that by having the most advanced power efficient product in the market that, that's really attractive. And we've been successful in this area before. But here, we're hitting it with a product that is -- it's got technical capabilities beyond what the competition has today and that we're super excited about it and more product introductions to come over the coming year or so, which are going to add to that excitement.
And the customer engagement is quite high at this point in time. The sampling efforts are going really well. And as Sajid said, it doesn't really hit anything from a materiality standpoint, from a revenue perspective until the second half of our next fiscal year. So think of it as kind of September, December time frame of next year. But we're excited, and we think the growth opportunity is nice. The margin profile on these products is also quite good. So it's going to absolutely help us as we continue on this path of improving our growth trajectory and our operating model.
Okay. That's helpful. Maybe switch gears a little bit. Let's talk about gross margin. Maybe before we get to some of the more like things that you're doing more idiosyncratically, how do you think about like pricing into next year?
I think pricing is going to be quite stable for us. It's stable on existing business. It is always price competitive at the point of design, and we're leading with our newest products with customers that are going to be cost effective, and we'll continue to improve on their margin structure over time as they ramp. So it's not different than what we've seen in previous cycles at this point in the cycle when everybody has inventory and is scratching and clawing for market share. Pricing for new designs is always competitive, and we're going out there and trying to win business being aggressive on price, but also cognizant that over time, these products as they ramp in volume are going to have a better cost structure and lead to the margins that we need in the business.
Okay. That's helpful. You're guiding, obviously, for gross margin improvement in the December quarter. But when do we think about like this model getting back to like 60%? Like obviously, you talked about 65% maybe over time, but when do we just get back to 60%?
So we are guiding this quarter, which is slightly down. At the midpoint, it's down 1% in revenue, and gross margins are improving from 56.7% last quarter to 58.2% at the midpoint of guidance. So we've got a lot of positive things happening in the margin area. So there's 2 main charges that are dragging gross margin down today. We talked a little bit about underutilization in terms of our fab capacity in our earlier question, that was about $50 million charge last quarter. The larger charges we are taking an accounting charge for inventory reserves based on our accounting policies, which is about $72 million last quarter.
Now it's a relatively complicated calculation. But the basis of it looks at trailing 12 months of revenue. And that is finally at the point where it is inflecting and not falling any longer. And as that happens, when inventory dollar balances on the balance sheet are decreasing, those charges are going to decrease significantly. So that it was about $72 million charge in the September quarter, normalized that might be -- it varies quarter-to-quarter, but it could be $15 million to $25 million. So there's roughly $50 million of improvement in that line item alone. And we have our sights on -- we haven't given any guidance, but we have our sights on getting to a 60% gross margin very soon as early as the March quarter.
Okay. And like to get to that, if it happened in the March quarter, I mean, can you do that probably still look like even if things were more seasonal in the March quarter? Or do you still have to be kind of above seasonal?
I think it's likely that we can get there in a normal quarter, and we are pretty confident that we're going to have an above seasonable March.
Okay. Okay. The path of inventory reserve charges, I think you talked about that you always have some, right? That path like getting back to the -- I think, it's like $15 million, $20 million is what you normally have, like is that linear? Or how do we think about that like on the -- or is it more -- could it be choppy, I guess?
It could be a little choppy, but my expectation as we make our way down towards that, I'll call it roughly $20 million, it's $15 million to $25 million a quarter, is that it's going to steadily come down. It might not come down by $15 million or $20 million every quarter, but the trajectory is going to be there, and I expect those charges to normalize absolutely in the next year.
Okay. Okay. We talked a little bit about fabulization a minute ago, but maybe just can you help us just kind of like the logistics of turning on more capacity? Like what does that entail? Maybe like just so we can kind of better understand like it's not just turning on a light switch, right?
Yes. I mean so fabs are large, complex manufacturing engines. We have run way more capacity through our 2 remaining U.S. wafer fabs in the past. And so the facilities are set up to do it, but you need people, you need people to do that and you need a trained workforce. And so as inventory levels and revenue levels supported, we will start running more wafers in the factory, adding people. And we -- probably the maximum we can increase output in a factory is probably 15%, maybe maximum 20% in a quarter. And hypothetically, if you're starting at 60%, right, you can only take that 60% to 70% in the quarter and then 80% in the next quarter, rough numbers. And so it takes time. So we will do it gradually.
And we have a huge focus ever since Steve Sanghi came back on reducing inventory. That was 1 of his 9 points, and we're making really good progress on it. I think in the calendar year now, through September, we've reduced inventory by like $260 million, and inventory days have come down, but not where we want it to be yet, but coming down a really nice trajectory. So we're in a good position. And even if there was a pause and demand coming back, inventory is still coming down each quarter because we're producing so much less than what we're shipping. So we're in a good spot.
Right. I mean on that, I think you talked about this past quarter of your sell-in versus sell-through in the distribution channel, like that continues to kind of shrink. I mean, I guess that how do you think about the trajectory of that? Like do you think you can be like shipping to in demand pretty quickly here on that channel part?
Yes. I think on the channel part, I would expect over the next couple of quarters for that. It was a $53 million difference in the September quarter. I'd expect that to go to roughly 0 over the next couple of quarters. Now there's a lot that's going to drive that, right? I mean we let our distribution partners determine the level of inventory that they want to hold. We don't manage that for them. But we have reduced distribution inventory to 27 days at this point in time. And it's been a wide range historically.
At the peak of the up cycle, it was as well as 17 days because we just -- nobody could get enough inventory. But it's been as high as 47 historically. So we're closer to the low end of that range. And again, when lead times are short, cost of capital is still relatively high from an interest rate perspective. Distributors are going to continue to work inventory down, but I think it's getting close to the point where they're going to have to start buying soon in line with end consumption. And then there's -- the other component of it is when do the distribution customers inventory get to a level where they need to start buying again with their end consumption. So we have a bit of a multiplier effect there that can happen on revenue eventually.
Okay. One of the things that I thought it was interesting, like in your filing, you guys disclosed like the difference of like revenue from products, from foundries versus, I guess, what would be implied of like internal production. And it seems like maybe more of the revenue recovery has actually been kind of like some of the foundry produced products. Does that matter to gross margin?
It really doesn't, and that number can move around and be a little lumpy quarter-to-quarter. So we know that our data center products had a good quarter last quarter. That's all advanced technology stuff that we don't do internally, right? So it varies. But we have -- essentially, we -- we have good cost processes, both internally and through our foundry partners and then price our products in the marketplace to drive the margins that we need for the business. So there's not a significant difference between the 2. I mean we can have an internal product that has a well above corporate average margin and then we could have an FPGA product as an example, that is definitely outsourced from a wafer fab perspective that has super high gross margins. So it varies by product.
Okay. Okay. Maybe shift gears a little bit, talk about kind of capital allocation. How do we think about -- we've seen obviously like a stabilization of like the P&L and revenue we got maybe a nice kind of trajectory over the next several quarters. How do we think about just like the recovery in free cash flow?
So we've been in a position for multiple quarters now where we have essentially been borrowing to pay the dividend, and we are fortunate that this quarter, that changes. So this quarter, we fully expect that our free cash flow from the business covers the dividend. It was important to us to maintain the dividend at the level that it was at. So there was never really a discussion of cutting the dividend. But -- and we have confidence in the long-term cash flow from this business. But as we generate cash flow from here above and beyond dividend, that is absolutely going to be used to pay down debt. We borrowed some money to pay the dividend for several quarters. We need to pay that down. And quite honestly, our leverage is still higher than we would like it to be.
If you look back to 2021, when we at our Analyst Day, we set a 1.5x leverage target. And during the up cycle, we got below that. I think we got down to about 1.27, but this last quarter was well above 4. And luckily, as we move forward on quarters, we have lower quarterly EBITDA looking back 12 months rolling off and higher months coming on. So that leverage is going to start to come down this quarter and both in dollar terms start to come down and the actual net debt-to-EBITDA leverage numbers will come down also. So I think we're in a good spot, but I think investors should not expect us to be increasing the dividend in the short term, definitely not doing share repurchase in the short term. We've got to get the balance sheet right and pay some debt down.
Okay. I mean how do you think about just -- you talked about a little bit, but like getting leverage down versus -- from kind of math of EBITDA going up, right, that ratio getting smaller versus like just the absolute like debt reduction? Like how do we think about like what's the right amount of cash that you think you need to have on the balance sheet?
So I mean, we've got really low levels of cash today. I think we're quite efficient with how our treasury and tax team manage our money. I think last quarter, we only had about $250 million of cash on the balance sheet. And I don't think that number needs to change much from there. It can fluctuate a bit quarter-to-quarter. We have a large line of credit outstanding that we can tap into if we have short-term cash needs, or we can issue commercial paper to cover that. But we probably borrowed in the range of $300 million to $350 million to fund the dividend over these multiple quarters. And absolutely, we've got to pay that down first before we even think about doing anything differently on the dividend or share repurchase. And the Board has some time to make that decision. But absolutely, we are focused right now that we need to get that leverage target down and the recommendation is going to continue to be -- to continue to delever.
Okay. That makes sense. Maybe shift gears a little bit. An area that I get a lot of questions on from investors is China and their position in the semi market and just kind of the various different China for China strategies. I mean, can you talk about just the competitive dynamics you see there as well as just kind of your strategy for China?
Sure. So we sell about 18% of our revenue into China. And these are rough numbers, but we think about half of that was to multinationals that will manufacture in a foreign trade zone and ship it back to either the Americas or Europe for end consumption. But there's about half of it or 9% of the overall revenue that is for domestic consumption in China. There's probably half of that number, which is complex products that Chinese competition don't make today that there really isn't that type of internal competition. But that leaves about 4.5% of the revenue that is kind of subject to that domestic competition over time. And that's what we would like to protect. And there's likely no matter what we do, there's going to be some saw bleed on that over time. Clearly, these customers chose Microchip because we have the right product, the right service and all those things that they needed. But there is pressure for domestically based Chinese companies to buy from a domestic local China supplier.
So we've essentially mapped out our supply chain in all of our products and made that available to our customers. And in some cases, they can source a product that's wafer fab in the U.S. or wafer fab at a foundry in Taiwan and pick and choose because some of those things are a bit flexible on the structure of where it's going to be manufactured, whether it's wafer fab, assembly or test. But longer term, we will need to see where all these tariff rules settle out and how that potentially impacts our customers. The impact to Microchip directly is going to be very small, but the impact that it has on our customers will help drive decisions in terms of what they want to do from a manufacturing perspective and what they might expect us to do, and we'll work that over time as the rules are hopefully eventually clarifying.
Okay. That makes sense. Back to kind of -- if I did the math right, 4% to 5%, that's kind of maybe more subject to Chinese competition. Can you like help us understand is that more -- is that MCU is that like lower ending to use? Or where does that kind of...
I would describe it as kind of more standard microcontroller and analog products. Yes.
Okay. Okay. I guess maybe shift gears a little bit more, but back to the kind of the P&L. I mean you guys have done a lot of just kind of trying to rationalize costs and things. So can you talk about just kind of where -- as we see, right, revenue starting to inflect, how we think about adding costs back to OpEx, R&D just how you think about like just kind of the incremental margin of the business. Obviously, gross margin is a big lever, but how do we think about OpEx as a piece of that?
Yes. So we went through a reduction in force back in March, and we think we really rightsized the headcount for the company for where we're at today. When we have turnover today, it is not kind of an automatic, you get a replacement. We are really emphasizing with our team finding ways to be more efficient, right? And in some cases, that might be using AI and can be other alternatives for us to be able to become more efficient. And the team is doing a good job at that, and our turnover has exceeded what our replacements have been recently, but we want to make sure that we are investing resources in the right areas to drive the long-term health of the business, whether that's with our new products, whether it's customer support, whatever it might be. So we're really focused on that.
We have a long-term operating model of 65% gross margin and 40% operating margins, so 25% OpEx. And we're quite a ways away from that today, right? We've talked about gross margin already. But on the OpEx side, we've got a lot of improvements to do, and there's going to need to be revenue growth for us to get to that number, and we're expecting that. But we will be prudent on how we make investments in the business. There are certain programs that we need to continue to bring back to employees and bonuses are the big one of those to get back to paying bonuses at around 100% of target that's kind of the expectations our employees have over time. And we were paying 250% bonuses at the peak of the up cycle, and they went to 0 and they've been 0, and we've started to bring those programs back. But we need to continue to do that because we absolutely need our employees to be engaged and motivated to come to work, and that will put some pressure on the dollars of OpEx, but I fully expect that OpEx as a percentage of revenue will continue to come down towards the model.
Okay. And those variable costs like targets and things like those reset in March? Or into the next fiscal year or...
No. We run quarterly growth programs on bonuses, right? And so there's quite a bit of flexibility in that. In a good quarter, you can take bonuses up. In a bad quarter, you take bonuses to 0 or take them down. And that gives us the ability to manage OpEx dollars based on the environment that we're seeing in a given quarter.
Okay. That's helpful. Maybe just -- we've got a couple of minutes left here, and I have a couple of more questions. One of the areas, I think, like maybe it gets a little bit like hidden by reporting other revenue, but like your FPGA business, I think, has been a bright spot. Maybe can you talk about just like what you're seeing there of like what's been driving that business?
So it's a really good business. This is another business that came to us through that Microsemi acquisition that I think I mentioned earlier. And there's really 4 significant players in that market. I'll refer to them their historical names, Xilinx and Altera, which are part of larger companies today, Microchip and Lattice. And Microchip's historical footprint when we acquired Microsemi was in the A&D space and kind of in the mid-level market, not the high end, not the low end. And we're continuing to expand that over time with new product introductions, so we can approach on the higher end and encroach on the lower end and get a larger share and then expand from just being a player in A&D into industrial, automotive and other markets. And it's been a really great business for us. The margins are quite high. The growth opportunity in front of us is still really good. And we're excited about what we're doing in FPGA. It's not something that we break out for investors on a regular basis. We've shared some data on an annual basis a few times in the past, but it's grown quite nicely, and we are absolutely continuing to gain share there.
Okay. That's helpful. Maybe just last question. You take a step back and kind of round out the discussion. You look at the Microchip story and what do you think like investors maybe don't like fully get or don't appreciate that we should or spend more time working on?
So I think there's a couple of things. Probably the largest thing is just gaining confidence in can this team drive the operating margins to the level that we've committed to the Street. That's a 40% target. I think the midpoint of our guidance this quarter is 25.7%. So there's a huge gap between those numbers, and I will tell you that our confidence is high that we can get there. We've been well above those numbers in the past, and we were coming out of a pretty steep down cycle here, but the earnings leverage that comes with that, the cash flow that it's going to generate are very significant. So I think it's a little bit underappreciated. It's really just math, but it's really the investor base gaining confidence that we can actually get there. And again, internally, we are highly confident that we can do that.
I think the other thing it probably takes more time, and we've started to do this on our last earnings call, but really explaining to the Street that we are not just a standard microcontroller and analog company anymore, right? We highlighted data center in the conference call, and Sajid spent a little bit of time answering one of your questions on that today as a really good opportunity. We had a quick question on FPGA and what we're doing there. Some of the things that we're doing in the communications market is just different. And it's not kind of old trailing-edge technology, it's more advanced and the growth opportunities are pretty high. So I think as we go through the coming quarters, we will continue to highlight some of these things, maybe our Ethernet 10-based T1S products would be another area where we could spend some time and just educating investors about micro because we haven't had our Analyst Day in a long time. So that falls on us to continue to educate the Street on those things.
Okay. Perfect. We'll end it there.
All right. Thanks, everybody.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Wells Fargo's 9th Annual TMT Summit
Microchip Technology — Wells Fargo's 9th Annual TMT Summit
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kern: Microchip sieht weiter starke Buchungen, diese werden aber "gealtert" geliefert (Bestellungen mit weiterem Lieferdatum). Dezember war saisonal schwächer; Management erwartet für das März-Quartal ein über dem Saisonalwert liegendes Ergebnis. Backlog wächst, Leadtimes überwiegend kurz.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Data Center: Vollstapel-Ansatz (Storage/Timing/Power/Connect) und erstes 3‑nm Gen‑6 PCIe-Produkt mit 160 Lanes (15–20% Effizienzgewinn pro Lane); Sampling läuft.
- A&D: Aerospace & Defense als stabiler Wachstumsblock; Microchip größter Halbleiterlieferant des US-Verteidigungsministeriums.
- Fabriken & Inventar: Ein Werk geschlossen, Inventartage bei ~199 (Ziel 130–150); Ramp‑Ups begrenzt (~15–20% Kapazitätszuwachs/Q) und schrittweise geplant.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Timing: Management bestätigt March-Quarter „above seasonal“; Gross Margin Guidance steigt auf ~58.2% im aktuellen Guidance‑Quartal; Ziel 60% möglicherweise schon im März‑Quartal erreichbar.
- Produkte: Gen‑6 PCIe (3 nm) sampled; umsatzrelevante Mengen erst H2 des nächsten Fiskaljahres.
- Charges: Unterauslastungsaufwand zuletzt ≈$50M; Inventar‑Reserven $72M (normalisiert $15–25M/q).
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Bookings vs. Pushouts: Analysten fragten, ob Bestellungen verschoben werden; Management sagt: wenige Pushouts, aber neue Bestellungen kommen mit späteren Lieferdaten.
- Leadtimes & Sichtbarkeit: Diskutiert wurden kurze Leadtimes, punktuelle Verlängerungen bei Advanced-Node-Produkten und die Folgen für Kundenvorlauf.
- Fabrikramp & Margen: Logistik des Hochfahrens, Limit von %‑Zuwächsen pro Quartal und Dauer der Unterauslastungsaufwände wurden hinterfragt.
- Kapitalallokation: Free Cash Flow deckt jetzt Dividende; Fokus auf Schuldentilgung vor Buybacks/Dividendenerhöhung.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Erholung ist im Gang: Buchungen und Backlog stärken die Zuversicht, Margen sollen durch Inventarabbau und Kapazitätsanpassung rasch steigen. Wichtige Wachstumstreiber sind Data Center (neue 3‑nm-Produkte) und Aerospace/Defense. Kurzfristige Risiken: Inventardynamik, Leadtime‑Pockets und China‑Wettbewerb.
Microchip Technology — Q2 2026 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Greetings, and welcome to the Microchip's Q2 Fiscal 2026 Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions]. As a reminder, this conference is being recorded. It is now my pleasure to introduce your host, Steve Sanghi. Thank you, sir. You may begin.
Thank you, operator, and good afternoon, everyone. During the course of this conference call, we will be making projections and other forward-looking statements regarding future events or the future financial performance of the company. We wish to caution you that such statements are predictions and that actual events or results may differ materially. We refer you to our press release of today as well as our recent filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors that may impact Microchip's business and results of operations. In attendance with me today are Rich Simoncic, Microchip's COO; Eric Bjornholt, Microchip's CFO; Brian McCarson, Microchip's VP of Data Center Business Unit; and Sajid Daudi, Microchip's Head of Investor Relations.
I will provide a reflection on our fiscal second quarter 2026 financial results, then Brian will provide an update on our data center business, and Eric will go over our financial performance. I will then provide an overview of the current business environment and our guidance for third quarter of fiscal year 2026. We will then be available to respond to specific investor and analyst questions. I will now highlight a few salient points of our financial results. 6% sequential sales growth, net sales were up sequentially in Americas and Asia and flat in Europe, which is not bad for a summer quarter in Europe. Sales from our microcontroller and analog businesses were up sequentially.
Specifically, our MCU business grew 9.7% sequentially with strong contribution from 32-bit MCU, while our analog business increased 1.7% sequentially. Our Gen 4 and Gen 5 data center products are seeing strong sales growth, albeit from depressed levels as customers seem to have finished their inventory correction. In the new products area, our blockbuster product announcement came on October 13 when we announced the industry's first 3-nanometer-based PCIe Gen 6 switch to power modern AI infrastructure. Brian McCarson will comment on this later in today's call. Our non-GAAP gross margin was up 236 basis points sequentially. Incremental non-GAAP gross margin was 95% sequentially. Non-GAAP operating margin was up 364 basis points sequentially. Incremental non-GAAP operating margin was 84.6% sequentially.
Our incremental gross and operating margins are very positive. Inventory went down by $73.8 million sequentially. Calendar year-to-date reduction in inventory is $261 million. Inventory days were 199 days. Our inventory over 3 quarters has gone down from 266 days to 251 days to 214 days to 199 days. Underutilization in our factories in September quarter was $51 million. The product gross margin in the September quarter was 67.4% due to a rich product mix driven by data center products. We added $71.8 million of a new -- we added $71.8 million of new inventory write-off and $51 million of underutilization charge makes a total of $122.8 million of charges. Divide that by the net sales of $1.1404 billion and you get a non-GAAP gross margin impact of 10.8 percentage points. Subtracting it from the product gross margin of 67.4%, we got a non-GAAP gross margin of 56.7%, which is what we reported. So the product gross margin remains very healthy. We still need to bring down inventory write-offs and underutilization charges.
We are pleased to announce that we have entered into a purchase and sales agreement to sell our Fab 2 wafer fabrication facility located in Tempe, Arizona to a third party. The sale of this facility is part of our previously announced plan to restructure our wafer fabrication operations. Under this restructuring plan, Microchip completed the closure of Fab 2 in May of 2025 and begin to transfer the process technologies from Fab 2 to Fab 4 in Gresham, Oregon and Fab 5 in Colorado Springs, Colorado, both of which facilities have ample clean room space for expansion. The transaction is subject to closing conditions and is expected to be completed in December 2025. Now we have a special guest for you today. Let me introduce Brian McCarson, Corporate Vice President of our Data Center Solutions business unit. Brian will speak about our recent announcement of industry's first 3-nanometer-based PCIe Gen 6 switch. Brian?
Thank you, Steve, and good afternoon, everyone. I'm the Corporate Vice President and Leader of the Data Center Solutions business unit at Microchip. And today, I'm excited to introduce you to the latest addition to our Switchtec family of products. Our new Gen 6 PCIe switch announced on October 13 marks a significant milestone in Microchip's technological leadership within the AI and enterprise data center infrastructure markets. The build-out of AI data centers continues to accelerate with hyperscalers committing to gigawatt scale deployments. Some recent announcements have outlined single infrastructure projects in the 5 to 10 gigawatt range, targeting completion between 2026 and 2027.
These developments are driving our current design engagement cycles. It is critical to understand that regardless of whether our customers deploy NVIDIA, AMD, Intel or custom ASICs, all require high-performance PCIe switching infrastructure. This is where Microchip's Gen 6 Switchtec products are designed to excel. Last month, at the Open Compute Project Global Summit in San Jose, California, we introduced the industry's first PCIe Gen 6 switches manufactured using 3-nanometer process technology.
These new devices deliver 4 distinct competitive advantages. First, PCIe 6 doubles the bandwidth to 64 gigat transfers per second per lane compared to PCIe 5.0, eliminating GPU to storage, memory and CPU bottlenecks that constrained previous generations. Our new Gen 6 switch features an industry-leading maximum of 160 lanes per device, significantly increasing total data transfer capacity. Second, our 3-nanometer implementation provides 15% to 20% power per lane advantage over competitors' products developed on 5-nanometer and older technology nodes.
This is critical when deploying hundreds of thousands of GPUs and switches in multi-gigawatt data centers. Choosing Microchip's devices enables customers to lower total power consumption without compromising performance. Third, all our Gen 6 Switchtec devices offer advanced device telemetry and multicast capabilities, allowing a single GPU data packet to be transmitted to multiple devices simultaneously, thereby improving GPU efficiency.
And fourth, we have implemented a secure boot-based hardware root of trust that supports post-quantum cryptography and is CNSA 2.0, the commercial national security algorithm suite compliant, meeting or exceeding both government and commercial security requirements. This represents industry-leading device security. We are now sampling these products to qualified customers and recent engagements have been validating both our technical approach and our market timing. From a financial perspective, we believe this represents a significant growth opportunity for the company. AI servers require substantially more PCIe switching infrastructure than traditional servers to enable resource pooling and the composable architectures that hyperscalers demand. Our total addressable market encompasses the entire data center PCIe fabric, not just a subset. We are vendor agnostic, selling into all data center and AI architectures.
Design win cycles typically span 12 to 18 months from initial engagement to production, aligning our current sampling activity with initial production starting in June 2026 and volume ramping towards the end of calendar year 2026. Looking ahead, our Gen 6 Switchtec devices position us to capture a meaningful share of the committed AI infrastructure build-out across 3 growth vectors: hyperscale training infrastructure, enterprise AI training and inference deployments and high-performance computing applications. I will pause here and turn the call over to Eric for comments about our financials. Eric?
Thanks, Brian, and good afternoon, everyone. We are including information in our press release and in this conference call on various GAAP and non-GAAP measures. We have posted a full GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliation on the Investor Relations page of our website at www.microchip.com and included reconciliation information in our earnings press release, which we believe you will find useful when comparing our GAAP and non-GAAP results. We have also posted a summary of our outstanding debt and our leverage metrics on our website.
I will now go through some of the operating results, including net sales, gross margin and operating expenses. Other than net sales, I will be referring to these results on a non-GAAP basis, which is based on expenses prior to the effects of our acquisition activities, share-based compensation and certain other adjustments as described in our earnings press release and in the reconciliations on our website. Net sales in the September quarter were $1.14 billion, which was up 6% sequentially and $10.4 million above the midpoint of our September quarter guidance provided on August 7. We have posted a summary of our net sales by product line and geography on our website for your reference.
On a non-GAAP basis, gross margins were 56.7%, including capacity underutilization charges of $51 million and new inventory reserve charges of $71.8 million. Operating expenses were at 32.4% of sales and operating income was 24.3% of sales. Non-GAAP net income was $199.1 million and non-GAAP earnings per diluted share was $0.35, which was $0.02 above the midpoint of our guidance. On a GAAP basis in the September quarter, gross margins were 55.9%. Total operating expenses were $549 million and included acquisition intangible amortization of $108.1 million, special charges of $6.3 million, which was primarily driven by our activities associated with our closure of Fab 2, share-based compensation of $53.3 million and $12.3 million of other expenses.
The GAAP net income attributable to common shareholders was $13.9 million or $0.03 per share and was positively impacted by our settlement of an audit with the IRS dating back to fiscal year 2007. Our non-GAAP cash tax rate was 9.5% in the September quarter. We expect to record a non-GAAP tax rate of about 10.25% for all of fiscal year 2026, which is exclusive of the transition tax and any tax audit settlements related to taxes accrued in prior fiscal years. Our inventory balance at September 30, 2025, was $1.095 billion, which was down $73.8 million from the balance at June 30, 2025. We had 199 days of inventory at the end of the September quarter, which was down 15 days from the prior quarter's level, driven by our inventory reduction actions. Included in our September ending inventory was 16 days of long life cycle, high-margin products whose manufacturing capacity has been end of life by our supply chain partners. Inventory at our distributors in the September quarter was at 27 days, which was down 2 days from the prior quarter's level.
Distribution sell-through was about $52.9 million higher than distribution sell-in. Our cash flow from operating activities was $88.1 million in the September quarter. Our adjusted free cash flow was $38.3 million in the September quarter. And as of September 30, our consolidated cash and total investment position was $236.8 million. Our total debt decreased by $82 million in the September quarter, and our net debt increased by $247.7 million. Our adjusted EBITDA in the September quarter was $341.8 million and 30% of net sales. Our trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA was $1.103 billion, and our net debt to adjusted EBITDA was 4.69 at the end of the quarter.
Capital expenditures were $36.5 million in the September quarter and included approximately $20 million for a building purchase in India, supporting our ongoing R&D activities in Bangalore. We expect capital expenditures for fiscal year 2026 to be at or below $100 million, and depreciation expense in the September quarter was $39 million. I will now turn it back to Steve, who will provide some additional commentary on our September quarter results and our guidance for the December quarter. Steve?
Thanks, Eric. As you saw in the last quarter, our net sales continued to grow sequentially. We are continuing to see the inventory go down at distributors, at our distributors' customers, our direct customers and contract manufacturers. The distributor sell-in versus sell-through gap did not shrink last quarter. It was $49.3 million in the June quarter, and it was $52.9 million in the September quarter. The good thing about that is that distributor inventory went down even further. We expect that the distribution sell-in will eventually rise to meet the sell-through over the next couple of quarters.
Next is gross margin. As I described in my summary earlier, product gross margins were very healthy at 67.4%, but our inventory write-off and underutilization charges knocked down the non-GAAP gross margin to 56.7%. We still need stronger sales to drive down inventory write-off and underutilization charges. However, our customers and distributors are taking advantage of short lead times and are continuing to drive down their inventory. Now to the market environment. We are seeing some recovery in our key end markets in automotive, industrial, communication, data center, aerospace and defense and consumer. They're all looking somewhat better.
The strongest sales performance last quarter was in the data center market, albeit from depressed levels as the inventory at end customers and distributors corrected, we saw a large increase in bookings and shipments of our Gen 4 and Gen 5 products, which included PCIe switches, memory, flash controllers, storage and rate cards. We believe we are extremely well positioned with our Gen 6 PCIe switch with it being the only 3-nanometer-based device currently sampling in hyperscaler and enterprise data center customers, beating our competition in virtually every specification metric. Now let's get into our guidance for the December quarter. Our backlog for the December quarter started lower than the starting backlog for September quarter. The bookings for July were higher than bookings for any month in the last 3 years. August bookings were seasonally low, but better than our expectations and September bookings were quite strong as expected and the best booking month in 3-plus years.
Overall, September quarter's bookings were 10% higher than those of June quarter. The book-to-bill ratio for the last quarter was 1.06. October bookings were higher than July, so we have a good start to this quarter's bookings, and November bookings so far are very strong. Embedded in these strong bookings is the observation that customers and distributors are scheduling these for March delivery and are continuing to lower their inventories into this calendar year-end. A comment about lead times. While lead times for our products have been 4 to 8 weeks for some time, we are continuing to experience lead times bounce off the bottom and are experiencing increases on some of our products. We're running into challenges on certain kind of substrates and subcontracting capacity and also some foundry constraints on very advanced nodes.
These challenges remain isolated to specific areas. Our customer request for expedited shipments have increased significantly from a couple of quarters ago, pointing to some customers' inventories running low. I also want to remind investors that December is seasonally our weakest sales quarter of the year and is typically down low to mid-single digits sequentially. This is mainly due to a lot of holidays in the quarter and our customers shutting down their factories during the holidays. Taking all of these factors into account, we expect our net sales for the December quarter to be $1.129 billion, plus or minus $20 million, which would be down 1% sequentially at the midpoint.
We expect our non-GAAP gross margin to be between 57.2% and 59.2% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP operating expenses to be between 32.3% and 32.7% of sales, and we expect our non-GAAP operating profit to be between 24.5% and 26.9% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP diluted earnings per share to be between $0.34 and $0.40. I want to highlight the operational discipline in our business model. Despite a seasonally challenging December quarter with expected slightly lower revenues, our operational improvements are expected to deliver strong profit performance. Non-GAAP operating profit is projected to increase by over $13 million sequentially at the midpoint of our guidance. This operational discipline is evident in our business model's ability to deliver significant flow-through of incremental revenue to operating profit in normal business environments.
While we are only providing 1 quarter of guidance, and that is for this current December quarter, which is seasonally the weakest sales quarter of the year with a lot of holidays and customer shutdowns, we currently expect 3 strong quarters of March, June and September 2026. March quarter backlog is currently strong, and we currently expect March quarter sales to be stronger than a seasonal low single digit up sequentially. Finally, a comment on our capital return program for shareholders. Starting this quarter, we expect our adjusted free cash flow to be roughly even with our dividend payment driven by increasing profitability, low CapEx and liberating cash inventory. In future quarters, as we have excess free cash flow above dividends, we intend to use this to bring down our borrowings. With that, operator, will you please poll for questions?
[Operator Instructions]. The first question comes from Chris Caso with Wolfe Research.
2. Question Answer
I guess to start, maybe you could characterize what you're seeing now versus what you saw 90 days ago. At that time, you did talk about expectations for better than seasonal growth in both the December and March quarter. It sounds like December is on the better end of normal seasonality. But how do you feel now against what you thought 90 days ago?
So I think as you have seen through a lot of industry announcements of our peers and competitors, the total business environment have taken a slightly softer tone. I think you saw that through most of this earnings season. And ours are really no different. Even though our December quarter guidance is better than seasonal, seasonal would be minus 3% to minus 5%, sometimes minus 5%, and we're only down minus 1%. I think if you go back 6, 9 months ago, I would have expected to continue to have small sequential growth even in the December quarter. But number one, the overall softer tone in the business environment; and number two, some impact of tariffs on customer psyche and people don't know when to make capital investments or not and people are holding back.
I think a combination of all those things have led to this guidance we have given. Now if you look at the last quarter bookings, you ordinarily wouldn't think so. Our bookings were 10% higher. And if we had kept getting the turns at the pace we were getting in the prior quarter, September quarter would be -- December quarter would be a lot higher. But as I mentioned in my comments, we observed that customers are scheduling these bookings for March quarter and are continuing to decrease the inventory on their balance sheet, leading up to their year-end distributors as well as the customers. So this is sort of a strange push pull that's going on in the market. So we think we need to just hunker down for this one quarter, which is the weakest quarter of the year. And then we have strong momentum going into March and should be back-to-back from several good quarters.
Understood. As a follow-up to that, you mentioned that the product gross margins were holding up, but obviously, the charges are what's weighing on the gross margins. Could you give us an update on what you expect from both the inventory reserve charges and underutilization charges as you go through with presumably those next stronger quarters as you get into next year? How quickly can some of those charges start to roll off?
So we, in general, don't know and don't guide those things for the future quarters. We just kind of look back and guide the actual that we experienced in the quarter. And current quarter is sequentially down 1%. So it's harder to make a whole lot of impact when your sales are actually minus 1%. We are looking for just a few days of reduction in inventory. And then I don't really have a guidance on utilization or inventory write-off in the current quarter. But if I look at it over the next several quarters, leading into stronger quarters of March, June and September, we currently expect to start ramping our factories at some point in time, start hiring people late in this quarter and then start ramping the factories.
So as you ramp the factories because the inventory is coming down and as you ramp the factories, that will lead to lower underutilization. And regarding inventory write-off, the products we are writing off now is not from excess build. If you go back a year ago, 1.5 years ago, we were building lots of excess product above the sales. Factory footprint was very large. And we were writing off product because just even the freshly built product was really in excess of demand significantly. That's not what's happening today. Our utilization in our internal fabs is quite low actually and inventory is coming down. But what's happening is a lot of the product we built 2 years ago based on then customer demand, in many cases, the mix has shifted and some of that product is slower moving. So once it becomes 2 years old, we have to write off the rest of the product.
So that is what's driving some of these write-offs in every quarter. It's not that the sales are 0 on those products. They will sell off, but they are not selling at a pace which would prevent them some of it from being written off. So I think in either case, we are -- we're really in the eighth or ninth inning on this entire inventory write-off as well as the underutilization. This one quarter, which is the weakest quarter of the year is going to hurt sort of where it falls in the year. But after this quarter, I'm quite optimistic that we're going to have back-to-back good quarters and we will make a meaningful difference in inventory write-offs and utilization.
I think I'll just add a little bit to what Steve said. So we did talk about how our plan was to ramp output out of the wafer fabs in the December quarter. We are still doing that. So it is increasing. The impact on underutilization charges in the current quarter will be modest. They'll be down, but just ever so slightly. And then our assumption is that the inventory reserves will come down. But as Steve said, it is hard to predict. But we are guiding a pretty nice sequential increase in the non-GAAP gross margins to like 58.2% at the midpoint of guidance. So we are still seeing some benefit there in a tough quarter.
Our next question comes from Tim Arcuri with UBS.
Steve, so I wanted to understand just kind of what's going on. I know it's sort of this weird environment where December is soft, but people are booking out into next year. And you can kind of see it in the backlog. I know you stopped giving backlog breakouts in the filings. But in March, your current backlog was very low and a lot of it is parked in LTSAs still. So what are these LTSAs? I mean, it's coming down very slowly. Why is it taking so long to bring these down? And I mean, if customers want product, I would think that like what's the point of parking stuff out in March and June and giving you no visibility in the near term?
We don't have any more LTSAs out there. When I came back last year, we actually here this month, very rapidly, we dismantled our program and essentially removed many of the customers' obligations on these long-term projects. And we took some cancellations. We took pushouts. We essentially allowed the customer to reset their backlog. So there's no impact on LTSA today. Customers are not taking any product they do not need. But...
Steve, let me just insert one thing there, Steve. So you're referring to PSP. We still have some of these LTSAs in place, and we've been flexible with customers in terms of pushing out their requirements. They might have put in a 5-year expectation with us, and we aren't holding them accountable for taking that inventory and allowing flexibility to push that out by a year or 2 years, whatever they need to keep that engagement strong. And that's what Tim is referring to that he sees in our public filings on the LTSAs. They are coming down, but coming down slowly.
Okay. So I was meaning that we dismantle the PSP program. And on the LTSAs, we're not forcing customers to buy anything that they do not need. We are basically being very flexible. They can buy what they need, and we're not forcing them to buy what they don't need. So that's not really causing any kind of problem. I think this is just -- I would have hoped that where the customers' inventories are low, they will take substantial intake at direct customers as well as distributors in the December quarter. But what we are observing is we're getting strong bookings, but they're scheduling it in March. And just basically, lead times are fairly short and they're taking chances and driving the inventory lower than I would have thought they would do.
Got it. So I guess just from the perspective of like what the point is of even having these LTSAs there because they're barely coming down actually. So really, the only thing that matters is kind of the current portion of what's -- I mean, you're not disclosing backlog anymore, but the current portion as of March was actually pretty small. So the LTSAs, like what's the point of even having them if they don't provide you any coverage in a quarter like December?
It basically incentivizes the customer to continue to design with us. If you are sitting on a push where they can use our part or they could use TI or NXP's part and they're equally good and prices are similar, if they have an LTSA with us, I think that breaks the push. So there are those kind of benefits in engagement. But in general, it's no longer providing us any extra visibility, and we're not forcing the customer to take the product they don't need. [indiscernible] What got us into the trouble in the first place.
Right. One thing I want to clarify, Tim, is we have not changed anything in terms of what we disclosed in terms of backlog. That is a requirement that we put that number in our 10-K, so we do that once a year, but it has never been disclosed to my recollection in our quarterly 10-Q filing. So it's once a year thing that we do with the 10-K filing.
It was in the Q actually last year, but totally get it.
The next question comes from Vivek Arya with Bank of America.
Steve, I'm curious what's driving your confidence to expect the next 3 quarters to be above seasonal? Your lead times are still low. There are so many macro cross currents. And most of your peers, as you mentioned, founded a little more defensive and were hesitant to guide more than the current quarter. So I'm curious, what are you seeing that they are not seeing to suggest that the next 3 quarters would be above seasonal?
So March quarter is driven by just the visibility of the backlog. If you look at our backlog today for March quarter and compare it to what the December quarter backlog was, on August 6, I think that would be a 1 quarter difference, right? The backlog for March quarter today is much higher than December quarter backlog was on August 6. And the bookings that are coming in, its turns component into the March quarter is very strong. So March quarter, my comment is largely driven by visibility and the rate of bookings and turns. Now beyond that, I think customers are stretching their neck a little bit, distributors true by taking inventory down this quarter, which really they should not.
In many cases, where the inventory is low enough, but they are basically dressing up their balance sheet for the end of the quarter and want the product in March, with the customers' inventory having come down significantly and distributor inventory coming down significantly, there is still a $50 million gap in sell-in and sell-through, which we think some will correct in March and the balance will correct in June probably. And then the rate of bookings is likely to continue as customers replenish their inventory. So my outer quarter commentary is driven by just the inventory will even get lower and they will need the product for June quarter and September quarter. And June and September quarter are historically our 2 strongest quarters of the year. They were both up nicely this year and many times, they're up usually even in soft years. So I'm less concerned about June and September and March quarter is driven by the visibility.
Understood. And for my follow-up, gross margins are going up nicely in December. Is that mostly utilization driven? I think on the last call or before that, you had mentioned that you expect it to take utilization up by 15%, 20%. I'm wondering what level are you taking it up? And do you expect to increase it again in March? And is there like a target level of inventory in dollars or days that we should think about until which point you will be more careful with taking utilization up further?
Eric, can you take that?
Yes. So I mean we're essentially managing our manufacturing output on a weekly, monthly basis. And so not going to break out the percentages that we're going to increase. But we're shipping out of our factories an amount that is significantly higher than what we are producing. And so we can't let that get too out of whack. So -- because we just can't ramp the factories super quickly, so it will be over time. So I would expect that we'll continue to ramp the fabs that those are decisions that we can make as we go through each month and look at the environment and see where inventory and backlog and revenue expectations are. The second part of your question was what, I'm sorry?
Sorry, do you expect to increase it again, Eric, in March, right? If you're expecting several above seasonal quarters, then does it mean that there's an expectation that you'll continue to increase utilization?
Yes. We will need to continue to ramp the factories over time. It probably won't be a steady increase. It's just going to depend on the environment. But in the case that March, June and September have revenue growth, we would definitely be doing that.
The next question comes from Joe Quatrochi with Wells Fargo.
I was curious if you could comment, is there any specific end markets that you can point to that you're seeing this kind of push, pull more than others?
I don't really know if there can be an end market-specific commentary on it. I think we're getting bookings across the board on most segments, bookings are fairly strong, but the bookings delivery requested is in the March quarter, leaving the December quarter as per our guidance.
Yes. As you know, we don't break out end markets on a quarterly basis, and it's a little more difficult for us to track it. We break it out once a year, but it seems like this is a pretty broad-based phenomenon that we're seeing.
Okay. Fair enough. And then on the Gen 6 PCIe switch offering, you talked about maybe tightness at leading-edge wafers. Curious being at 3-nanometer, what's your kind of line of sight in terms of wafer availability as you look to ramp that in the second half of next year?
Brian?
Yes. So we see a really healthy long-term strategic relationship with our foundry supplier in 3-nanometer, which is TSMC. And we believe we have the line of sight to the capacity that's needed to support our customer needs.
The next question comes from Blayne Curtis with Jefferies.
I wanted to just ask because maybe I had this wrong. I thought that the inventory charges were supposed to go away pretty sharply into the end of the fiscal year. I guess you're guiding to continue in December. So I guess what changed? I guess, as forecasts start going up, I thought that the kind of the level of inventory would match the increased forecast and you wouldn't have this charge. I know you're saying the mix is now different. So is that what's changed? And kind of how far out should these inventory charges extend?
I think with this weak quarter of December, we got to get through. But after that, I think we should in the stronger quarters, start to sell the inventory, significant inventory and have the charges really start to drop. Honestly, I expected charges to drop a little more than they have, and this weak quarter isn't helping. But I still feel that the inventory charges will come down rapidly as the year-over-year sales growth improve. So I think that's the key thing, and I've talked about it before, because you take the prior 1 year of sales and multiply it by 1.5 to get 18 months equivalent, and then you compare your inventory to that number.
And if your inventory is higher than that number, then you have to write off the balance. So while our sales have been improving in the last 2 quarters, our year-over-year sales have been negative. So every quarter, the last 12 months sales have been coming down. And therefore, it's 18 months equivalent has been coming down. And that's what kind of has been driving some of the inventory charges. And starting this December quarter, that phenomena is reversed year-over-year starting to grow. When that happens, I think it will have impact on write-offs, inventory write-offs coming down.
And then just to wrap some math behind that, I guess, the current impact is around, call it, 5% percentage points to gross margin. So you said it should come down over the next several quarters. So is that the right way to kind of add back that 4%, 5% headwind to the 58% that you just guided to? And then I'm assuming utilization would help by a few points as well. Is that the right way to frame gross margin over the next couple of quarters, 4 quarters?
So that's exactly the right way to frame. So if you look at for September quarter, add the underutilization and the inventory charges, they added up to $122.8 million and divide it by revenue, that was 10.8 percentage point impact. I think as those charges come down, gross margin goes up dollar for dollar essentially. And that's our path to a 65% gross margin. So the product gross margin last quarter was 67.4%. So from a product gross margin standpoint, we're actually ahead of our longer-term target. But we just got to have -- these charges need to come down. And this current soft quarter isn't helping, but I think we'll regain momentum starting the March quarter.
Thanks, Steve.
And we have said this publicly, but that $71.8 million charge we had this last quarter, that charge never goes to 0. There is always some level of inventory reserves that are taken. And we do believe that at some point in the future, we will start to get a benefit of selling through a higher level of what's previously been written off. We just don't have line of sight to that, and that is hard to predict, but there's always some level of charge.
The next question comes from Harsh Kumar with Piper Sandler.
Steve, the analog business in September quarter, the analog business was a little bit slow to catch up. Most of the sales came from microcontroller on the incremental side. Is that how you see the December quarter shaking out? Or do you expect a little bit more of an even contribution from -- like a similar percentage contribution from MCUs and analog?
Harsh, if you look at the June quarter, those things were reversed. Analog growth was a lot stronger than the microcontroller growth was. And either you or somebody else asked the exact same question that analog grew more and microcontroller grew less and is that what you want to -- is that what you will see in September quarter. In September quarter, they reverse. Microcontroller did better and analog did worse. So these things go back and forth. I think these are both large product lines and thousands and thousands of customers. And just everything is not perfectly linear. In some quarters, one is higher, other quarters, different one is higher.
Fair enough. And then when I think of -- at least I think of Microchip, I don't think of 3-nanometer leading -edge products as something that you're focused on. You're obviously highlighting it here in the earnings call. Is this a sort of a strategic shift where you will target more of leading-edge data center products? Just some color on your strategy would be helpful here.
Yes, you should absolutely take that as a strategic shift. We hired Brian McCarson into Microchip. After I came back last year, I think, Brian, you joined us in when exactly?
January of this year.
January of this year, so it was just a couple of months later. And Brian is focused on getting our data center products to state-of-the-art in market positioning. And this one, the 3-nanometer Gen 6 Switchtec device is the first one. And you'll see a series of new devices coming in from this business unit, all state-of-the-art products to gain significant share in the fast-growing data center market. Now we are -- this is not the only place we're putting attention.
We also formed an AI business unit. I think I talked about it some time ago. And this was just a few months ago. So you'll be getting some updates on what's going to come out of that group. We're also putting a lot of effort into our FPGA business unit. You'll be hearing some new product announcements in this coming year on our FPGA products. You heard our high-performance space computing announcement, I believe, where we're doing a -- under a NASA contract, we're doing the next-generation space computer. So yes, it's a strategic shift towards continuing to do what we're doing in microcontroller and analog and all these other products. But in addition, have a component of our business, which is across more advanced nodes, high-performance products, lower power, market-leading products with a much higher growth profile, thus pulling the overall CAGR of Microchip higher than you would otherwise expect. That is the strategic shift.
The next question comes from William Stein with Truist.
Steve, any estimate or best guess as to when the underutilization charges and inventory write-downs get to sort of a normalized level where maybe we'd see the product margins just show on the non-GAAP P&L without a whole lot of adjustments. Maybe I guess that takes us to somewhere between 65 your target and where you're running now a little bit higher than that. Is that something we should expect sort of in the early part of fiscal '27, do you think? Or will it be further out?
I'm not comfortable forecasting at this point in time, especially in an otherwise soft quarter. I think we will make substantial improvement in the next fiscal year. We'll make improvement in March. And then again, June is the start of the next fiscal year. So you're not directionally wrong. I just don't want to put an absolute time frame or an absolute figure.
As a follow-up to that...
I think we're confident in saying that the inventory write-offs normalize quicker than the underutilization goes away. Both will be moving in the right direction, but underutilization will take longer is our expectation, but we're not putting a time frame around it.
That's helpful. As a follow-up, when I have discussions with investors, particularly ones bullish on Microchip, they look at these 2 charges and they say, well, those will go away at some point. But then also we'll get -- we'll get some leverage on the gross line, some gross margin leverage. So we'll actually see gross margins go higher than that level. And I wanted to check my understanding of this because I think the underutilization charges are designed to sort of simulate a 90% utilization level. So you may get higher margins, for example, from mix. But from utilization, can you correct me if I'm wrong, that we shouldn't see higher gross margins than the product gross margins you're referring to from utilization unless we get above 90% utilization. Is that approximately correct?
Eric?
Yes. So when Steve is quoting the 67% plus product gross margin, we would not recommend that anybody puts that into their models, quite honestly, as that's where we're going to end up. We have a 65% long-term model. We just did whatever it was, 56.2 -- excuse me, 56.7%, and we're guiding to 58.2% at the midpoint. So we've got a long ways to go. Each of our factories has a level of what we would call normal utilization. It could be 90%, the number you used in one factory, it could be 75% in another factory.
And it's just going to depend on how the revenue mix comes in over time. Obviously, in the up cycle, we were running at 100% plus capacity in just about every factory. And at that point in time, there was other things that were helping and expedite charges and whatnot, where we got to 68% plus gross margin. But that is not standard by any means. And we're really focused on getting to the 65% -- and when we get closer to that number, we'll obviously reevaluate and provide future guidance to you guys.
The next question comes from Harlan Sur with JPMorgan.
Can you guys give us an update on the Fab 2 closure, rightsizing of Fab 4 and Fab 5 back in the June quarter? You guys were targeting about $115 million in cost savings annually at that -- at the current quarterly revenue run rate, that's about 250 basis points of gross margin improvement. Is all of that now accounted for in your current gross margin profile? Or is there still more on the come?
Eric?
Yes. So for Fab 2 specific -- for Fab 2 specifically, we talked about $90 million of annual cash savings, right? And we're on our way to accomplishing that. But as Steve indicated, with this agreement that we have in place that's still subject to closing conditions, if that closes in December, we'll get some cash from that, which isn't going to be disclosed at this point in time. But those costs really aren't impacting our non-GAAP gross margins today. The 2 biggest factors are the underutilization charges and the inventory write-offs. But it's great that we've got to this point with that factory and getting it completely out of our cost structure, hopefully, by the end of the quarter will be a nice step for us.
And then -- thanks for the update on your PCIe switching portfolio. On a segment reporting basis, data center and compute was 19% of your total revenues in fiscal '25. What's the rough mix of data center versus client or PC compute? I assume majority of the segment is data center focused. Any way to quantify it? Is it 60-40, 70-30? I mean these products are more application-specific, so easier to track. I assume you guys track this mix pretty closely, but any way to quantify the mix differences?
Yes. We don't break that out to that level of degree to everyone. Majority of that is related to data center more than anything within that bucket of 19%.
The next question comes from Joshua Buchalter with TD Cowen.
I also wanted to ask about the backlog visibility. So you mentioned more customers wanting to take orders in March than December, which I understand because lead times are short and they can. But given the backlog is down sequentially and you're expecting an above seasonal March after what seems like an above seasonal December, maybe you could spend a little bit of time talking about longer term, what's driving the confidence after March that you're going to see those 2 to 4 quarters of very strong results? Is it demand signals? Is it expectations of inventory restocking because you're nervous that -- or your customers get nervous that things are too low? Just trying to understand what signals you're seeing as we get into '26.
So I think as we get on the other side of the December quarter, you have several wins on the back kick in. Number one, the difference between sell-in and sell-through has to close. Distributor inventories are going to become normal here. They have come down very significantly. There is maybe a little bit to go here and there, but they're largely getting corrected. So when the correct in another quarter or so, you have a $50 million sell-in to sell-through gap that needs to close.
So that is a wind on the back. And it will close by people buying more product on sell-in, which is a GAAP revenue. The second is the same phenomena on our direct customers, contract manufacturers. As their inventory corrects, they will start buying what they're consuming. Today, they're buying much less than what they're consuming. So that's another wind on the back. And third, June and September are seasonally strong quarters. December is our weakest quarter. March is the next better and then June and September usually are strong. So we have strong quarters coming up, plus we have this inventory phenomenon in distributors, direct customers and contract manufacturers. All of that together, I think we'll have a decent financial performance.
And then I also wanted to follow up on the 3-nanometer PCIe switch. Maybe you could give us a few -- some details on what's your expected go-to-market and sort of how mature the commercial engagements are. You're doing 3-nanometer, your peers are at 5-nanometer. Are you competing on performance versus cost as a result? And should we expect meaningful revenue contribution in 2027 with the part coming out at the end of 2026?
Brian?
Yes. Several really good questions there. We are targeting this family of products at the hyperscaler, the enterprise OEM and ODM customers. So we're covering all segments of the -- both AI data center and enterprise data center markets with these products. And in addition to the customers that I mentioned, we see a sizable market. We think the total available market for our Switchtec family of devices that we serve should exceed $2 billion per year today. And while there's a lot of variation in different expectations for growth, we're expecting greater than 10% CAGR on that total available market through 2035. So given that we expect to release to production by June 2026 and typical design win cycles with customers, 2027 and the latter part of 2026 is when first revenue should be appearing.
The next question comes from Chris Danely with Citibank.
So Steve, just going back to your earlier comments, you said that you expected the December quarter to be a little better and things seem to get a little softer at some point in the September quarter. Can you just talk about, I guess, when that happened? And did any particular areas like geos or product lines or anything stand out on the softer side and why you think that happened? Do you think there were some tariff-related pull-ins earlier in the year? Or is something else happening?
So I think our bookings remain strong. July was one of the best booking months in 3 years. And then August was slower, but still better than expected, and I have talked about the August was always slow because of the holidays and vacations and all that, but it was better than expected. And September was very, very strong, best booking months in 3-plus years. And the book-to-bill ratio was positive. The bookings were up 10% sequentially. The only reason why I say December is a little softer and disappointing is the customer decided to give us strong bookings, but schedule them in January and essentially address their balance sheet for calendar year-end.
So therefore, the turns component of that wasn't as strong as I would have expected. With the inventory corrected, I thought customers and distributors will restock. Well, they decided to restock 3 weeks later, not restock on December 26, but restock on January 15. And that's kind of the difference we're talking about. Therefore, the backlog for March looks good. On certain product lines, the March quarter backlog is stronger than December quarter backlog. Not across the board, but on some key product lines. So this is the observation which changed what I thought would happen. I thought with all this inventory correction, December quarter would be a lot stronger, low single-digit up rather than minus 1%. But this phenomenon that they decided to buy that product in January rather than buy it in December has changed that equation.
Okay. And just my follow-up. So you mentioned some constraints. It sounds like they're still mostly on the back end. Are those constraints getting worse? When do you think you can get them under control? And is it causing you to miss out on any sales?
So, it's not -- nothing is disastrous. We are managing it, but the substrate capacity is the one that was extremely constrained, if you remember, a couple of years ago, 3 years ago. And now as these advanced products have come in, all the AI products and products from all these companies going into high-end data centers and all that, they all require substrate capacity. And in the last quarter, we were also competing with cell phone builds for the December quarter because they all require substrate.
So we were competing with some significant demand. Now that demand is for new product launch, and that is over now. So some of those constraints have gotten less so, but it's still really touch and go. I think, yes, in certain cases, customers wanted the product in September or in December, and we're shipping it a quarter later, yes. It's not hundreds of millions of dollars, but it's meaningful.
The next question comes from Joe Moore with Morgan Stanley.
I wonder if you can just help us try to triangulate where the demand actually is. Looking at your bookings levels, 1.06 is pretty good, but your revenue is about half of what it was at the peak. And I guess the real consumption is somewhere between that peak number and where you are now. But just as you look at the bookings pattern, do you have any updated sense on where we're going to get when we get to consumption levels?
I cannot help you or anybody else to figure out where the exact consumption level would get to. I would agree with you that it's somewhere between the peak and where we are. But which one it is closer to where it is, I think that's a million-dollar question. Honestly, this entire recovery has been a lot slower than anybody would have expected. I think all these tariffs and customer concerns about capital investments in automotive to EV to gasoline shift, and there have been a lot of curves that have been thrown at this market.
And the overall progress has been less than I personally would have wanted. So we'll continue to make that progress. I think pick up pace in the March quarter, but I'm not willing to guide where we eventually reach equal to consumption. I think that remains a challenging exercise.
Okay. Fair enough. And then with my follow-up, the data center products, when you talk about the new switch and things like that, where do you guys stand in terms of hyperscale cloud relationships? Do you have partnerships there where they're coming to you and saying, here's the product we need. Can you help us to develop that? I know you have a lot of data center businesses that were acquired when they were sort of enterprise-centric. Can you just update us on where you are with going to market with these bigger cloud customers?
So Brian, we do business with all of them. Why don't you take that question?
Yes. So we have active engagements with all the hyperscalers and OEMs you would expect across this broad both enterprise and AI data center market. We do not work on custom ASIC products as our main business. So we instead focus on understanding the workloads that our customers are most interested in accelerating and optimizing within the data center and build the right competitive features to best meet their needs. And I think this latest announcement around our first-to-market 3-nanometer Gen 6 PCIe switch demonstrates that with industry-leading security features, industry-leading telemetry, industry-leading power and performance per lane. And so we will continue to build our products with the hyperscaler OEM, ODM and enterprise data center markets directly in line.
At this time, I would like to turn the call back over to Mr. Steve Sanghi for closing comments.
Yes. Thank you very much, everybody, for hanging in there. And as I said, after this quarter, I think we should get back strong momentum, and we'll see some of you on the conference circuit this quarter. Thank you very much.
Thank you. This does conclude today's teleconference. You may disconnect your lines at this time. Thank you for your participation, and have a great day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Q2 2026 Earnings Call
Microchip Technology — Q2 2026 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $1.140,4 Mio (+6% seq; $10,4 Mio über Guidance‑Midpoint)
- Non‑GAAP Bruttomarge: 56,7% (+236 Basispunkte seq; Belastung durch Inventarabschreibungen/Unterauslastung: 10,8 Prozentpunkte)
- Non‑GAAP EPS: $0,35 (Earnings per Diluted Share, EPS; +$0,02 vs Guidance‑Midpoint)
- Inventar: $1,095 Mrd / 199 Tage (YTD Reduktion $261 Mio)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Produktstrategie: Einführung des ersten PCIe Gen6‑Switches auf 3‑nm als bewusster Vorstoß in AI-/Data‑Center‑Infrastruktur; Sampling läuft, Ziel für Produktionsstart angegeben.
- Fabrikumstruktur: Verkauf von Fab2 (Tempe) angekündigt; Prozesse werden zu Fab4 (Gresham) und Fab5 (Colorado) transferiert, um Kostenstruktur zu verbessern.
- Operative Disziplin: Fokus auf Inventarreduktion, Margen‑Flow‑through und Kapitalrückfluss: Dividende heute, überschüssiger Free Cash künftig zur Schuldenreduktion.
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Umsatzprognose: Q3 (Dez): $1,129 Mrd ±$20M (Mid: -1% seq).
- Margen & EPS: Non‑GAAP Bruttomarge 57,2–59,2% (Mid ~58,2%); Non‑GAAP EPS $0,34–$0,40.
- Hinweis: Management erwartet stärkere Quartale (März–Sep 2026); Risiko bleibt aufgrund anhaltender Inventarabwicklungen und Unterauslastung bestehen.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Inventar & Unterauslastung: Kernfrage zur Dauer der Abschreibungen; Management gab keine feste Frist, erwartet Rückgang mit stärkerem Umsatzverlauf (verbesserte Quartale ab März/FY27).
- Backlog & LTSAs: Analysten kritisierten fehlende kurzfristige Sichtbarkeit; Kunden verschieben Lieferungen ins März‑Quartal, LTSAs wurden flexibler gehandhabt.
- Gen6 Ramp: Nachfrage und Foundry‑Kapazität (TSMC) wurden thematisiert; Sampling läuft, Serienreife Ziel Mitte 2026, nennenswerte Umsätze eher Ende 2026/2027.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit für Aktionäre: Microchip zeigt deutliches operatives Hebelpotenzial (starke Produkt‑GM, Margenverbesserung), kurzfristig belastet durch Abschreibungen und saisonale Schwäche; strategische 3‑nm‑Investition in Gen6‑Switches bietet mittelfristig signifikantes Upside bei gleichzeitiger Rückführung von Schulden.
Microchip Technology — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
1. Question Answer
With that, good morning, everybody. Welcome to the Goldman Sachs Communacopia Technology Conference. I'm Jim Schneider, the semiconductor analyst here at Goldman Sachs. My pleasure to welcome Microchip with us today. We're happy to have CEO, Rich Simoncic, and Head of Investor Relations, Sajid Daudi with us today. Welcome, guys.
The quarterly we reported back in early August, I thought your commentary was fairly constructive. You noted increased bookings, rising backlog levels in some pockets, lead times expanding and reduced inventory on your balance sheet. And I think you also talked about minimal Poland activity. So I'll ask you a few questions about the core and the trends you're seeing right now to lead off. So your June quarter backlog I believe was the head of the prior quarter. July bookings sort of the highest at the time. How do you continue to see trends in your backlog and bookings since then? And how is linearity tracked since your last earnings call?
Okay. So just before I answer that, I may say some forward-looking statements. Please refer to our online documents for appropriate risk factor based on what I'm saying.
So before I get going here, we definitely saw a much better bookings last quarter. July was probably the highest bookings that we've seen in probably 2 years. August came in, although not as bad as it could have been, it was -- it looked more reasonable than we've seen in past August where typically August or some of the worst bookings month. And so no commentary on September as of yet, but we have seen much better bookings in the July time frame. Much better.
Okay. Very good. And then in terms of the end markets, which ones for fiscal '26, do you see rebounding most quickly? Is that auto, industrial, defense, cloud, data center, et cetera. And which do you think could be more sluggish for some period of time?
So right now, probably our top markets are AI, data center infrastructure. We're seeing some of our PCI switches pickup or Gen 5 PCI switches pick up. We're working on releasing our Gen 6 PCI switch and re-timer as well. We're also seeing connectivity and networking, our growth in T1 connectivity has really garnered a great deal of design activity. So when it comes to factory 4.0 automation, automotive, robotics and humanoid all of those need much higher connectivity speeds and that's where Ethernet T1 comes into play. And interestingly enough, we used to always look at attach on a microcontroller as the main stay, but we're seeing significant TSS or attach associated with our connectivity and networking products and that will generate quite a bit of growth going forward.
The other area of strength that we're seeing in the Aerospace and Defense segment as well, which is about 18% for last fiscal year. And again, beyond just the spend that we're seeing from the U.S. side, even our NATO allies and NATO customer or NATO -- them spending their defense budgets is also helping, so that's another area. And then FPGAs play -- those products play into that segment pretty nicely and all carry a much kind of richer margin profile as well.
Yes. I think some many people do realize that Microchip supplies about 20% of semiconductors for all aerospace, defense and space programs, right? So for instance, Mars Rover has about 130 devices from Microchip. The James Webb telescope. The other reason it's able to beam those brilliant pictures back to earth, the way it does is because we develop the driver technology that goes in there. And so when it comes to anything that leaves our earth atmosphere or defense, that's where Microchip comes in. Our -- the latest generation of high-performance space computer is Octal risk 5 architecture. Most people would never think that the next-generation space computer would come from Microchip. That should come from A&D that come from Intel that should come from. But no, that's coming from Microchip, and that's being designed into multiple platforms by a number of defense and aerospace customers around the world.
I think one exception to that broad end market improvement, you think you noted on the call was automotive. That's been a controversial end market for a lot of companies. Just curious whether you're seeing any changes there or any kind of improvement or not?
So we don't play very much in China EV vehicles, where we're focused on is a lot of connectivity where in a lot of microcontrollers that are on the edge in those automotive automobiles. HMID. And then when you look in a car and you see those beautiful touch panels that are across the dashboard, 90% of those touch panels all are using Microchip's HMID products. So when you look in that Mercedes and you've got that full wrap around, that's Microchip technology that enables all of that. And so we're seeing great growth in those particular areas. We're seeing a lot of design activity in the next generation of can and control every network and LIN are just not capable of the speeds and the amount of sensor interfaces that you have in those cars, and that's where the next generation of Ethernet comes in. We're seeing a lot of design activity on those platforms, too.
Very good. Just 1 point on inventory. I think last quarter, you talked about your inventory on balance sheet going down by a little over $120 million sequentially. Maybe give us a sense like how much of that was sort of distributor destocking internal improvement? Like maybe give a sense of what you're seeing from an inventory perspective, both on your balance sheet and your customers.
So we are aggressively cutting overall inventory. So we're manufacturing at about 50% of demand to bring that inventory demand down to bring that overall inventory down significantly. And that's what caused us to go from that 261 peak number by the end of September in the low 190s range. And then we'll start to slowly ramp up the factories again in the December quarter to match where actual demand is. So we're bringing that inventory down very aggressively. Just no value to having that high inventory there. For the same reason, we thought to have no visibility, right?
When you have huge inventories or huge stock positive inventory most people in their general mind think that, that's a good thing, right? But what it does is it forces essentially customers to give you no backlog and no visibility as to needs actually are. And that actually creates a bigger issue with semiconductors. So you have to have the right balance of inventory and 261 days it's just way too much.
Yes. Makes sense.
And the September quarter guidance close for 195 to 200 days.
Great. Maybe one more short-term question before I move to some longer-term questions. in terms of your growth outlook and what you're seeing from China specifically, you just mentioned not so much on the EV side, but how do you think about the potential impact to the business based on sort of the macro challenges that sort of tariff regimes and everything else that we're seeing right now. And maybe talk about how your overall China business is tracking?
So it's interesting, about 18% of our revenue is China. About 9% of half of that are shipped into trade zones and then ship right back out. So there's really no tariff influence. And then we have about 4% or 5% that is more proprietary in nature, AB converters, higher-end micro connectivity devices, and that's not subject to getting a lot of pressure from -- within China semiconductor manufacturers. That leaves about 4% to 5% of product that's at risk that's from build outside that's brought into China that's been consumed. And we're working on different models to protect that overall revenue. But China is probably the first country that corrected the inventory early on. And so China continues to improve in some ways. Again, we don't play in China EV, but there are many other markets that are still growing within China.
Yes. Very good. Pivoting to some more strategic issues. Since his return to the company's CEO, Steve Sanghi, has kind of had a 9-point strategic plan for the company. You made a lot of progress on those fronts. What do you see as the most important remaining steps for the overall company still to be completed? And then maybe, Rich, where are you focused on most in terms of operational objectives?
We're still working to get the inventory back down to that 130 to 150 days we have. What I'm mostly focused on is we're developing our product strategy within microcontrollers we've reorganized significantly the microcontroller groups in terms of bringing together in one organization. making sure that the connectivity and networking and data center businesses are properly funded to grow. Also have created a new AIML BU or business unit within the company just to really drive growth. We've got a number of business units that all need some type of accelerator or network process are built into those products.
And rather than having each group independently do their own. We're working on a unified network process or an accelerator that can be used by 5 to 8 BUs within the company. And so quite a bit of work is going on in that area within Microchip.
Okay. Great. And then maybe within the strategic review, the financial targets you sort of laid out, you talked about operating expense goal of 25% of revenue. Right now, you're just above 30%. Where is the path to 25% look like for Microchip, how fast can you get there? And sort of keeping in mind the fact that the Microchip historically has this kind of philosophy or culture of shared sacrifice and downturns and kind of how you expect that to reverse or not in the upturn?
So we've already announced that we've gone too long without bonuses and we went very long on shared sacrifice. This reminds we have the 2001 inventory correction. Many of the people in this room were not even here then. But when you look at the last time the semiconductor industry got far ahead of its skis, the way it did here was 2001. And it took almost 3 years for the industry to find its bearings again. I know a lot of people are say, well, that's a long time. But when an industry overinvests and gets too far ahead, it takes that much time to get back to where it needs to be some degree. And as we're getting to 25%, the difference between back then and today is there's probably a lot more productivity gains from AI implementation and operations Microchip, we started our AI business operations implementation back in 2017, whether it's AI, ML, deep learning.
So probably 87% of all orders placed on Microchip are actually auto scheduled using deep learning product recommendations for customers, the reason why we get so much TSS is that's all AI generated, and that's been being done for probably about 5 years. We're now working and moving into a lot of productivity improvements in software generation and design generation. So that's -- we've been doing optimizing overall expenses for quite some time in investing in this area. So we feel pretty confident about getting back to that 25% Model.
And I would just maybe add to that as thinking about modeling. So use the March number, is that really factored in all the layoffs and everything. So that's your baseline number. And the variable piece of that OpEx line is the variable comp which we have a lot of control. So that will vary and be pretty disciplined.
Okay. Very good. Maybe switching to some of the end market trends that you're seeing right now. You touched on it before, Rich, about data center. That exposure has grown over time. It seems to be a good business for you. We've also heard from others that the crowd of the space. So maybe talk about Microchip and what applications do you see? And do you address most commonly. What's your competitive advantage there?
So we address Ethernet, USB hubs, our timing products and our PCIe switches are the predominant products that we're pushing. We try not to chase even though we are an analog power supplier, we try not to chase the power side of that business because to be a jump ball from each generation to the next in terms of winners and losers. And so we focus on the connectivity portion of that. Connectivity timing and our microcontrollers are used for essentially power management within those. And then security, we are the security route of trust for all of the GPUs that are produced. And so our security devices are sold into all of those manufacturers today.
Interesting. And the emergence of Generative AI, has that really changed your focus in the market at all? Or is it just made the market bigger with the same products you had before?
I think it's just made the market bigger. It's interesting with AI has been around a long time and companies that didn't get on the AI bandwagon, back on in 2017, 2018, really are way behind because AI technology has been around for -- you should have been using it to do, to help improve productivity for a long time. GenAI just make it more familiar to everyone. But we brought GenAI on as soon as we could behind our firewall, and it created the brag models for multiple functions within the company. And it's really driving a lot of productivity. So I think as more companies figure out the benefits to AI and that benefits the GenAI that, that market is just at its infancy.
I think there's going to be tremendous growth as people start to really figure that out. I talked to a lot of friends of mine that are at different companies and a part of the venture networks and so many companies are just so still behind the learning curve on Gen AI and what it's good for and overall AI in particular. I think you'll probably find some of the people in this room still are not really using it effectively to do what they need to do on a daily basis.
Guilty as charged. But maybe talk a little bit about the Aerospace and Defense. You called that one out tendentially before. It's been a good market for you. Maybe talk about what you think about that market and your exposure to it is underappreciated by investors. Why is the intricate opportunity for Microchip specifically? Your competition?
So you know what, we -- Microchip specializes in long-lived devices, right? That's where we focus. For instance, you mentioned before, power, why are we going into doing something within power in AI and data center because that -- I don't consider that long lived. That becomes jump all of these generations. So we are focused on the security aspect, the timing aspect, which is has much longer life. So within A&D, we have a lot of technology or knowledge in the area of radiation hardening and packaging that and security that defense and aerospace customers really desire.
And we've got a 60-year heritage that we inherited from some of the acquisitions and relationships that are in thousands of programs that have been there for quite some time. So we've got people that have, I don't know, a strong association with these customers and an extremely strong association with this marketplace in terms of what it needs. And so they are very devoted when is just at the Paris as show meeting with all of our clients. And it was fascinating to see every product that we worked up to had Microchip in it to some degree everything. And then we're looking forward to our next generations of products and what HPSC could do for them. And most people don't even probably realize this Microchip is but doing silicon carbide for probably 25 years in aerospace and space applications. So we didn't use silicon carbide to go after cars and inverters. We use it to go after power cores and power supplies that are sitting in space for 25 years. And that's been our focus, those long-lived applications, and we have those relationships with those customers. They look to us for that knowledge and dependability.
And within that or maybe on top of that, FPGA, that's been a pretty strong brewer for you. Maybe talk a little bit about sort of where your where you're playing where some of your competitors may not be playing and why that's kind of a drill opportunity for Microchip?
So the original FPGAs were designed for extremely low power applications. you have high compute with very low power. Typically, Microchip FDA for a 50% to 60% less power than all other FPGAs made. And I was specifically designed that way or architected that way for space or defense application radios. We've -- since we've acquired Microsemi, we've now positioned that entire product line in the industrial control into medical customers. So one particular application is think of a probe in a medical application where you're doing an ultrasound on someone. That probably has an FPGA and they are probably 164 lanes of high voltage that Pro gets very hot with a technician using that particular ultrasound probe. If you replace that pro with a Microchip FPGA, you cut the power and have -- and now that operator or a technician can use that probe all day long without fatigue or issues.
And so what we've done now is we've found markets that we serve Microchip serves and have slowly been working that technology into all of our industrial customers, our medical customers and finding significant growth areas across the board. And so if we look at the FPGA business, it's probably more than doubled since we bought Microsemi, and we continue to see more traction. So now what we're doing is where we're moving up in the product range with our PolarFire 2 products, and we're also moving down in the product range, offering some lower cost alternatives that we just announced and then offering some alternatives for -- even on a very low end, where customers can do more ASIC type of device.
Great. And then I mean you touched on industrial and obviously, it's a very broad market across a bunch of submarkets. Maybe talk about for Microchip's business where you see the most traction and the most growth right now over the next maybe couple of quarters or so.
I'd probably see probably the most design traction that we're seeing is in our connectivity and networking because all markets because of the nature of whether it's humanoid, whether it's Industry 4.0, whether it's automotive, all of the interface and connectivity standards that have been out there for so long, can land RS-232, 45 or all obsolete now. You cannot you cannot move the amount of data around on an application with those old technology standards. And so probably the -- when we go to -- when I'm going to visit customers next week, I'll be through all Europe. What customers want to talk to us about the most is what are we doing in AI? And the second one is what are we doing in connectivity. That is customers' biggest issues that they're seeing right now.
Pivot to operations for a second. Near your heart, I'm sure. Just maybe talk about the TSS, total system solution approach that you've been taking for several years now. How has the strategy sort of unfolded for you? How does it differentiate you from your competitors? And maybe talk about if you can quantify market share gains or any kind of other quantitative metrics you can put to that in terms of the success of DSS?
So what we've done over time is within the product definition itself when we call them anchors. When we come out with an anchor product, the first thing that we do, we have groups of people that look at, okay, what are the surrounding devices that can add to that overall solution. So for instance, for FPGA, we just came out with a very sophisticated product family of power management ICs or PMICs that are specifically tailored for that product. So rather than having someone else create a PMIC or a power management IC this device is made for that product line to optimize its overall performance. And so we have design where we design specific products to optimize the performance.
And that what we also have is we have a recommender tool that we -- an AI tool that we put online probably about 6 years ago that essentially when a salesperson enters account, they pick up an anchor device, let's say, it's a smoke detector or a door lock -- it immediately goes through our system and then with a 90% correlation factor presents to that salesperson, all of the devices that should go with it. And then all of the associated documentation and then the highest probability of win ratio in terms of tracking it. So when you have tens of thousands of products, you can't have each salesperson is not going to know what to sell in a particular account.
And so what makes it all work is that recommend their tool that recommends the appropriate device to sell. So when we came out with, for instance, our T1 product line or T1s, we program or help that recommended tool or grounded in information that will recommend the associated devices and -- and so in our design in activity on our T1 products, we are seeing more revenue in our attached products than we actually are seeing in our T1 products, leave it on that. And so that's how that whole system works for us.
Interesting. And then relative to AI, you've talked about an AI coding assistant, which I don't think most people would think about in the microcontroller context. But how long have you had this product internally when you've be really good to customers? And what has the feedback been?
So it's kind of an interesting story. It started probably about 2.5 years ago. I hate writing software personally, I'm a hardware person. And so we had our development tool group, and I went to the -- when these GenAI tools came out, I wanted to have him start working on a cogenerator to assist our customers. And so I went and I wrote some programs. And I hadn't checked them out and they were all perfect. And I could -- before that, I couldn't get them to do it. But since I was this hardware guy and I wind up writing a bunch of software. He -- the Vice President of the group bought into it, and then he started using it.
And at that time, we're using the public GenAI software and it hallucinates, it was okay, but it wasn't great. And so we did is we brought it behind our firewall, and we started creating RAG models. And grounding it to eliminate hallucination. And so we grounded it, eliminated hallucination and then we started using it internally for 1,000 or so software developers. And so we -- once we did that, the amount of grounding that took place, the hallucinations essentially were nonexistent. And then we then vectorized all of our data sheets and knowledge bases so that it was easy for the RAG model to consume that information and data.
And then what we found was our internal software engineers, we're seeing about a 40 -- 20% to 40% productivity improvement. So then in February, we decided to release it to our customers. Our customers started seeing the benefit. And what we did is we vectorized all of our YouTube videos, all of our training videos. And so now a customer is writing code can bring up the information, it will actually auto fill out the code, see what they're writing or to fill it out. If they are not familiar with how a microcontroller or something works, the code will actually recommend the YouTube video and will actually index to the exact 2-minute, 16 seconds point that they mentioned, what they want to know about in that video.
So all in one environment, they get the data sheets, help video context, auto generation of code quality checks, testing all in one application. And now we've the most recent release that we did this week or this month is going on is we've added AI agents to it to actually take a lot of the functions to work off of the programmer itself. And so we were the first to come out with it. And I think it has to do because we've been working with AI since 2017, 2018, we're not unfamiliar. We were very early with GenAI, putting it behind our firewall, grounding it, creating sandboxes and then creating rag models for people to use. So we're pretty sophisticated in this area and our customers are really starting to see the benefit of -- and I know internally, we have absolutely seen the benefit of this.
Interesting. Interesting. Then just maybe switching topics a little bit to pricing. I mean, I realize you're not in the commodity business, you're focused on high-margin long-lived products. But we have some interesting gyrations during COVID, big changes in pricing and competitors have added a lot of capacity operationally over the last several years. So maybe talk about how you think about the analog side of the portfolio in terms of forward pricing trends you're expecting over the next couple of years more longer term?
So obviously, we reduced pricing on our products. But pricing doesn't change that much that quickly. So pricing is typically on the next design that takes place. But you've got designs that were put in production 20 years ago, 10 years ago, 15 years ago. the ability for those customers to move or redesign those products is somewhat limited. And so really, the battle is always on the newer designs. And so what happens is as you get the newer designs, they're much more competitive, but you've got this whole long tail of older designs that are at much higher prices. And so it becomes a blend over time. So -- and that's where we put that forecast of single-digit ASP reduction over time. It gets back to a more normal design approach as we go forward.
So that's more of like a go-forward perspective on new designs, but -- but it's a mix effect in terms of the fact.
There are some price reductions on old designs that's not that much because most customers, let's say someone comes in with this much cheaper device they go and they said, okay, I'm going to redesign this and they find the engineers that worked on it 10 years ago, just don't exist anymore. The design files don't exist anymore. It may have been designed on an older EDA platform. And to resurrect that they have to actually convert that to the newer EDA platform for them to actually redesign that particular product. You could never really -- one of the things I've learned over time because it's very difficult to buy already existing sockets in the design. Just in fact, whenever I develop new product lines at Microchip over the years, and they've developed a lot of new product lines, our target is not to go after what's already designed.
In fact, until salespeople don't waste our time with already designed in. Let's just focus on new design wins, new activities and here is why. That's where the money is, rather than wasting time trying to do go back and try to convince a customer to redesign something. It just doesn't work.
Yes. Makes sense. Maybe probably time for one more question, but I wanted to sort of ask you with respect to manufacturing footprint and your strategy, I mean you have production capacity in the United States, you also have outsourced capacity, which is relies mainly in Asia. I think some of your competitors have been very vocal about doing a lot more onshore U.S. capacity. And now we have a tariff regime in place where that incentivizes U.S. production. So maybe talk about your manufacturing strategy long term vis-a-vis your competitors and then your understanding about Microchip's applicability to the new tariff regime that was recently announced?
So about 18% of our revenue, probably look at it this way, about 18% of our revenue is A&D. That's almost all done on onshore, right? Assembly, testing, manufacturing, we've got a number of fabs that do that. And then we've got quite a bit of analog and microcontrollers that have done, I'm sure. And then our foundry partners have built out, whether it's TSMC or GlobalFoundries are in the middle of building or have built fabs onshore. And so we fit that because we do a lot of our production already onshore at Microchip. I think we've -- we've said before that about 45% of our revenue in terms of wafers is 40% to 45% is not sure. And that number is actually a little better when we start to look at assembly and test and we take Wafer Foundries that build onshore.
Very good. I think with that, we're pretty much out of time. But thank you very much, Rich, and Sajid being here. Appreciate it.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
Microchip Technology — Goldman Sachs Communacopia + Technology Conference 2025
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: Microchip meldet Besserung bei Bestellungen (Juli „stärkster Monat in ~2 Jahren“), setzt auf Wachstum in AI/Data‑Center und Konnektivität (T1 Ethernet, PCIe), treibt aggressive Bestandsreduktion voran und nutzt firmeneigene GenAI‑Tools zur Produktivitätssteigerung.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Endmärkte: Fokus auf AI/Data‑Center, Konnektivität/Networking und Aerospace & Defense (A&D ≈18% des Umsatzes); Automotive nur selektiv (HMID, Cockpit‑Displays; nicht China‑EV).
- Produktfokus: Ausbau von PCIe‑Switches (Gen5 live, Gen6 in Entwicklung), FPGA‑Portfolio (PolarFire2), T1 Ethernet und speziell angepasste PMICs zur Stärkung von Total‑System‑Solutions.
- Organisation: Neues AIML‑Business‑Unit, Vereinheitlichung von Microcontroller‑Teams und Aufbau eines geteilten Accelerator/Netzwerk‑Stacks für mehrere BUs.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Bestellungen: Juli war ungewöhnlich stark; August moderat besser als typische Saisonalität; September noch unkommentiert.
- Inventarplan: Fertigung bei ~50% der Nachfrage, Ziel weiterhin ~130–150 Tage, kurzfristige Guidance nennt ~195–200 Tage.
- GenAI‑Produkt: Interne GenAI‑Coding‑Assistants seit ~2,5 Jahren; extern im Februar freigegeben und jüngst um AI‑Agenten erweitert; intern 20–40% Produktivitätsgewinn.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Backlog/Linearity: Nachfrage‑Trendanalyse seit Q zuletzt: deutlich bessere Bookings in Juli; Management gab keine konkrete Monatsprognose für September.
- China & Automotive: China ≈18% Umsatz (davon ~9% Re‑export), nur ~4–5% wirklich tarifrelevant; Automotive‑Exposure limitiert auf Connectivity/HMID, nicht China EV‑Kernmarkt.
- Kosten & Operatives: Ziel OpEx ≈25% des Umsatzes (aktuell >30%); Weg dorthin über Produktivitätsgewinne (AI, variable Vergütung) und disziplinierte Personalmaßnahmen.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Call liefert vor allem operative Farben: Nachfrage in AI/Networking verbessert sich, Inventar wird aktiv abgebaut, und firmeneigene AI‑Tools erhöhen Effizienz. Für Aktionäre heißt das: moderates Nachfrageturnaround mit Fokus auf margenstarke, langlebige Anwendungen (A&D, FPGA, Konnektivität); Beobachten: Bestell‑Linearity, Inventartage und OpEx‑Pfad.
Microchip Technology — Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
1. Question Answer
Thanks for coming out so early. I'm still Chris Danely, your friendly neighborhood semiconductor analyst here at Citigroup. Next up is our top pick Microchip. Now why is it our top pick. I'm a simple man, despite everything that my wife and kids say. Basically, we see the highest margin and earnings expansion in our coverage universe. It's really no more complicated than that. And it's my distinct pleasure to have one of the living legends of the semiconductor industry up here. Steve Sanghi, the Chairman and CEO. We also have Nawaz Sharif, who's the VP of Finance for Europe. In case anybody wants to ask specifically about Europe or anything else about at Microchip.
And I hate giving a plug or recommending or even talking about one of my dastardly competitors. But I think one of the sort of examples of why Steve is so good is he made a presentation at one of our competitor conferences last -- like late November, early December, when he was back in the seat for literally less than a month, and the analyst said, "Hey, so what's the plan? And Steve spoke contemporaneously for probably 10 or 15 minutes, there's obviously no teleprompter at these conferences or specifically when it comes to Steve, and he went through its 9-point plan in the restructuring. And to me, it was pretty amazing and how plugged in that Steve is.
So Steve, thanks very much for coming.
Thank you Chris.
And let's jump right into the 9-point plan. Maybe just run through it again and talk about where we are on those 9 points, how things are going, and then we'll go ahead and run from there.
Geat.Thank you, Chris. And I just want to say that, during this presentation, we might be making some projections and other forward-looking statements, and these involve a lot of estimates and predictions and actual results may vary materially. So I refer to you to our filings with the SEC that identify some important risk factors.
Now Chris, answering your question about the 9-point plan. The 1st part of the 9-point plan was resizing our manufacturing footprint. During the go-go days post COVID, our manufacturing footprint became too large and we were building a large amounts of inventory producing well, well above what we were shipping. And the inventory got as high as 266 days. So first thing I needed to do was the downsize of manufacturing footprint. We closed down one of our older smallest Fabs and downsize the other 2 Fabs and also downsized somewhat assembly and test.
And today, we're producing significantly less every quarter than what we are shipping. So therefore, inventory is dropping rapidly. And 2nd point of the 9-point plan was the inventory reduction from 266 days in -- at the end of December, we were 251 days at the end of March, 214 days at the end of June and are expected to be below 200 at the end of September and will continue to go down from there. And at this point in time, we are producing well below what we are shipping. And we have said that we will start growing our capacity again, starting the December quarter, utilization will start increasing and capacity increase will be about 15% to 20% per quarter starting the December quarter.
The 3rd and 4h point of the 9-point plan was to do a deep dive on all of our business units as well as look at all of our mega trends, key corporate growth initiatives and essentially go through every one of them in a deep dive fashion to either reconfirm what we're doing or to change what we need to change. And we made some changes. We made some changes to the megatrends and we made some changes to our business units. So those things are all completed.
The 5th part of the plan was to look at our channel strategies with distributions around the world. As you know, we have a very, very broad distribution around the world. We use global distributors, which are Arrow, Avnet and The Future. And we also use a large number of regional distributors in China, in Taiwan, in Korea, in Japan and in Europe. So unlike some of our competitors, we have a very broad distribution network, and we want to take a look at that. We want to look at the margins we're giving it to them and made some changes, which were made and have been implemented. We also terminated a couple of small distributors that were not performing.
The 6th point of the plan was really reconnect in a meaningful way with all of our customer base worldwide. With some of them during the go-go days became very transactional, parts were hard to get and everybody was just looking for where I can get parts. So we put a major effort to improving our relationship with our customers worldwide, which is still an ongoing process. But as a big project, it was completed, and I would say our customer relationships today are very healthy. We're reengaged. Our funnel is growing, design funnel is growing, and we're doing extremely well.
The 7th part of our 9-point plan was to unveil a new long-term business model. The business model that was on the street prior to me coming back to do this job, really had a remnants of peak performance during peak performance, we were charging customers a lot of expedite charges. There were a lot of capacity reservation charges, there were just all sorts of stuff and prices had gone up some beyond reasonable, and we didn't believe that, that business model in a steady-state fashion was doable. So we unveiled a new business model to the street, which I think we did it in March. And that was a long-term gross margin of 65%, operating expense of 25% and operating margin of 40%. And we're making a very good progress towards that and I'll cover one of that gross margin.
And the number 8th was -- I'll come back to gross margin. Number 8th was operating expenses. So our operating expense at that time was 39% of our business, and our long-term model was 25% of our business. And I didn't think we can get from 39% to 25% without doing something meaningful. During the peak performance days when so much of the revenue was driven by inventory shipments to customers and distributors and a lot of the inventory is still there, still high, a growth in operating expenses driven by that revenue really wasn't the right thing to do. And therefore, we must correct it. So we made that correction in the March quarter by a worldwide layoff, which was our first in 25 years, but that needed to be done. And so with the help of that and with the revenue improving on operating expenses, we are halfway there. 39% has come down to about 32%, and the rest taking it from 32% to 25% will happen through -- mainly through revenue improvement, revenue coming back to the entitlement when the inventory goes away, but there is some attrition built in there also.
So that was the #8 and #9 was the CHIPS Act. We haven't taken any money from the CHIPS Act. We were still negotiating when my predecessor left I put that negotiation on hold, pending review of the entire business review of our capacity and then the administration change and CHIPS office really didn't have any directions regarding what to do. So they never really reengaged with us. And so we never got any CHIPS Act money. And now it looks like to get any CHIPS Act when you have to give equity. So not interested in that.
No plans for the government to take a stake in Microchip, good. I like that. So let's just sort of jump into how the year has gone. I mean your sales are largely growing faster than your peers, after this big bed ugly downturn. Why do you think that is? Do you think that some of it is just sort of the law of the bounce in semis because your sales declined a little faster than peers? Or is there something else going on out there that's enabling you guys to put up these good growth numbers so far this year?
So there are 2 things going on. One is during the go-go days, everybody had some sort of program with their customers where they were taking long-term backlog and either all of it or a portion of it was noncancelable and nonreturnable. Everybody had a different name for the program, our name was PSC, preferred supplier program. Some of the people called it NCNR, noncancelable, nonreturnable. The sentiment of the program was fine when it began. Customers wanted it. We wanted it. Customers wanted some surety that they will get the right allocation, so they were willing to make a longer-term commitment. Nobody really knows what they need a year from now. I don't know what we need a quarter from now, but somebody knows what do you need for a year from now. So demand changes a lot.
When the lead times started to come down, then the program should have been brought down rapidly from a year of frozen backlog to 9 months to 6 months to 3 months, and that's what Microchip did not do. And when the customers wanted to change to their schedule, what I'm told by customers and I've visited a huge amount of them that we were more inflexible with the customer than some of our competitors were. And that obviously caused some problems. So therefore, when we eventually started to bleed out that backlog that was not real and the customers didn't want it, our sales fell much more than other people because we started almost a year late in correcting that.
So therefore, as we speak, we still have high inventory at the end customers. We still have somewhat high inventory in the distribution channel, although distribution has corrected a lot more than the direct has corrected, but the distribution customers have inventory because distributors passed on some of those programs to their customers. So distributions customer is sitting on a significant amount of inventory and all that correction is still underway.
So -- but we do business with 110,000-plus customers, so it's a very, very long tail. And everybody is not always at the same line. So every month, almost thousands of customers complete their correction and start buying. So therefore, there's a constant wind on the back with increasing number of customers completing their inventory correction and starting to buy again. So that's one factor why sales are doing very well.
The second factor is, I think we are in a number of markets that are doing extremely well, better than sort of the average market. And 3, I would mention is, one is Aerospace and Defense. Our Aerospace and Defense business went from 9% of our business just a couple of years ago, it was about 18% of our business last year. There are 3 pieces of Aerospace and Defense. There is Aviation, Commercial as well as Military. There is Military Hardware, Offensive and Defensive Hardware and third is Space. And all 3 are just doing extremely well.
U.S. just passed the largest Defense budget ever, exceeding $1 trillion and they're rebuilding all the ammunition that has been depleted by 2 wars, building drones and missiles and tanks and planes and Navy ships and radars and everything else and our parts go into everything. We're the largest Defense supplier to U.S. Defense, Offensive and Defensive and nobody even is close enough to us.
The second piece of that is Aviation. Now for a while, Boeing wasn't building a bunch of planes. MAX planes were shut down and all that. Now it's all rebuilding and they have a huge backlog of nearly $1 trillion going 15 years forward, and we have a heavy content in every plant. And the third portion is Space. So Space race is heating up again, not only by NASA, a lot of other companies, India just landed a rover on the dark side of the moon. Who would have thought that India will have a space program and land a vehicle on the moon. And it was loaded with our chips.
And then there are all what's described as new space with all the new companies like Amazon and Elon Musk companies, SpaceX and other, everybody trying to go to space. So that part of the business is very good. So Aerospace and Defense is one. Second part is industrial. It's doing very well. It has a lot of new stuff going on, the robotics and AI and automation of the factories and a lot of stuff happening, a lot of factories coming back to U.S. So we're really doing very well in that area.
We're also doing very well in the Data Center business unit. There is huge growth in data centers. It looks like you cannot ever make enough of them. And there, we are core travelers with CPUs and GPUs and others. We don't make CPUs and GPUs for the data center, but we're core traveler providing power management, providing PCI expressed bars, providing Ethernet connectivity, a lot of other things in the servers and in the data centers.
And the third piece of the business that is doing very well is what we, in general, call it, network and connectivity, networking at in the factories, networking at home, networking in the cars, networking in the data centers and those are USB hubs and Ethernet and various conversion from 1 protocol to the other, connectivity in the car, CAN bus, Linux, 10BASE-T1s. So those are segments of the business, which are really doing very, very well compared to the others.
Great. All right. I have a series of questions on all of those comments you just said. I did have some of your larger shareholders demand that I ask a couple of different questions. Number one, on the Aerospace and Defense. With all of this sort of NATO spending going on, how do you feel like your exposure is to Europe on the Aerospace and Defense and the ability to take advantage of that?
So I actually forgot to mention that not only the U.S. budget is above $1 trillion, Trump has been pushing NATO to increase their spending and most NATO countries are doubling or tripling their spending over the next 2 or 3 years. And we are designed into all sorts of stuff, there also drones and missiles and tanks and greater installations and on and on and on and on. In fact, the day we announced we're going to close down one of our Fab, one of the European French customer that is in the Aerospace and Defense business came to see me and said, "We heard you closing down a Fab, and we're planning to triple our business. How are you going to do it? I said, don't worry, your parts are not made in that Fab. So there is a huge growth going on driven by additional NATO spending as they're trying to shoot up their defenses.
Great. And then just to run through the numbers. So Aerospace and Defense was around 18% of business last year. I think Industrial is 41%?
30%.
30% -- sorry.
So in some presentations, the company has included Aerospace and Defense and Industrial like some other companies do. So if you -- so the numbers change. But if you look at -- if you leave Aerospace and Defense out, then Industrial is about 30% of our business, and Industrial includes medical.
Got it. So Industrial 30% and then Aerospace and Defense is another 18%.
And Data Center is 19%. So that's Data Center is #2. Aerospace and Defense is #3. Automotive is about what 18% -- Automotive about 18% and the rest is Communication and Consumer.
Great. One other question was given the issues that happened with PSP, whenever the next upturn happens, contrary to popular belief, I do believe there's going to be another upturn in analog and semis. Is it fair to say probably not going to be another PSP program in the next upturn?
It certainly won't have a PSP name on it. I don't know what kind of program it will be. I just would say that every cycle is different. I have seen so many of them, have navigated so many of them. And we've had unit recessions, we have had pricing recessions. We have had a recession with wars and famines and Y2K and others. You have to look and study each cycle as it comes and respond to it with quickness and vigor. And here, I think we put it in place, but then we didn't manage it well enough to undo it as the requirements of the business changed, and that program was no longer valid. We allowed it to run for 1 year, 1.5 years longer. So I don't know what the next cycle would bring. But I assure you that we'll manage it like we manage many of the business cycles, except the last one.
Great. And then you've been on point as to when this recovery first started about saying, "Hey, our bookings this month were better than last month and this quarter, it was better than last quarter and this week is the best in 36 months or something like that. Can you give us sort of a rundown of those statistics?
Sure. So bookings started really increasing starting the March quarter. And if you look at bookings were pretty stable all last year at a very low level. And then January, February, March, one was higher than the other. They were meaningfully higher in January, February, March. April, May, June continued, it was higher than the March quarter. July was higher than any of those months. It was the best month in 36 months.
Now historically, August is one of the worst months because Europe goes on vacation and there a lot of vacations in U.S. and other parts of the world. So we always count on a weak August and then a very strong [indiscernible] December -- September, sorry. August was better than what I would have thought. It was very strong in the beginning, then it was weak in the middle as everybody goes on holidays. And the last week was really very strong. So overall, it ended better than I would have expected.
So I think we're doing very good. September came out very strong with first day was a holiday. So we only have had one day of data for September. It was very strong. So I would think that September won't disappoint and we'll end up with a good quarter.
And then given this strength in bookings, I know you came out and said on the previous conference call that you expect above seasonal growth in the December and the March quarters. Maybe give us some of the reasons why you have confidence in that? Does it tie back to your comment earlier where you said every month, we've got, I think you said thousands of customers starting to order again? Are those tied in?
Yes. So it's the same 2 reasons why expect December and March to be better than seasonal is that inventory continues to correct, and we have lots of additional customers coming to production where we have a design win, they were buying parts, they have excess inventory. And when the access inventory depletes, they start buying it again. And most customers, they don't have just won't design. Some customers are buying 50 different parts from us and 50 different designs.
The largest won't is, I think, 950 designs, but that's not everybody. So what happens is some parts run out of inventory and then they start buying those parts again, then every month, more and more parts they start buying. So I think that phenomena will continue, which will lead to better than seasonal, both for December and March. So inventory correction is won't of them. And inventory correction is in 3 different places. It's in our direct customers. It's our distribution customers and it's in distribution itself because you may recall that in the March quarter, distribution shipped out $103 million more than what we shipped into distribution. So huge sales in, sales out difference.
So distributor inventory went down by $103 million in the March quarter. That number dropped to about half. It was $49 million difference from the June quarter, where sales out was stronger than sales in. So distribution inventory is declining. I think over the next couple of quarters, that number will match basically. So there is another wind on the back where sales in, which is really the GAAP revenue is increasing, driven by distribution, buying more and more because their inventory is dropping. So that's number one.
And the second reason, I think, is all these strong segments that I described, the Aerospace and Defense, Connectivity, Data Center builds. They're all adding market forces with which our business is growing, and I think it's only going to strengthen in the coming quarters, and that would be wind on the back.
Great. Another sort of area you've been a leader in is the lead times. I think you made some comments on the last conference call that you've seen some, I guess, times of certain products start to extend. I don't know if anybody else is seeing that yet, although we'll see what happens in October. Can you maybe talk about the circumstances that surround that? And do you expect be able to get that under -- to get that under control? Or will we see more lead times extend as business continues to improve?
Certainly, for for 40 years in the business, I've been trying to teach the customers the difference between lead time and cycle time unsuccessfully.
I don't think it's just you, Steve, I think exactly the same thing.
Cycle time is what it takes to build a product from wafer start to finished goods and shipping to the customers. And that, depending on given process technology -- can be anywhere from 12 months to 12 weeks to 20 weeks. And for Aerospace and Defense product, sometimes it can be more than that because you got to build a part and take a sample, burn them in for 3 months, depending on what the requirement of the customer is and then ship it to them. So the cycle time can be quite different.
Lead time is if I have 100,000 parts in the inventory, and I get in order of 5,000 pieces, lead time is essentially 0. And if I have them in the die form and I have to assemble and test them, I can assemble and test in 4 weeks -- 2 to 4 weeks depending on whether I'm doing it internally or doing it in externally. So what happens is, when that inventory, let's say, 100,000 parts of inventory starts going down and the inventory is now 30,000 pieces, and I get an order of 50,000 piece from somebody. And the same customer a month ago was buying it with 4 weeks lead time. And now I say, well, it's going to take 16 weeks, and they don't understand it, and they go crazy.
And that's the difference between the lead time and the cycle time window, I have to build it. And we build a large amount of our parts as do the rest of the industry, which builds standard catalog parts. You don't all build them to order, you build them to a forecast because we enter a quarter with not the quarter fully booked. So therefore, we rely on having a good forecast and have a good judgment, make the right kind of wafer starts. So when the order comes, we can finish them in 4 to 8 weeks and give it to the customer.
If every part -- if you start a quarter with a low backlog and every part had a 16-week lead time, you'll blow every quarter, that would be very difficult. So in general, we're in good shape where we can match the customer demand to the parts we already have in the WIP. But on some specialty parts and other places where you get a bluebird from a customer and they want a large quantity where you don't have it, then the lead time immediately goes to the cycle time and the customer goes crazy. And that starts to happen incrementally when the cycle changes. And when it becomes very broad-based, that's when everybody says, hey, lead time is long and customer gets it and their lines are down and then they start placing backlog.
So that broad-based lead time increase hasn't happened yet and is not happening. Lead times are fairly short. But what you're starting to have is [indiscernible] . here and there. And won't specific case, where there's a problem is on very high-end Data Center kind of products where we need substrates and very high-end packaging -- in that capacity, we are competing with the new cell phone build. This is a cell phone build cycle where new products get launched in November, December time frame, And all AI Data Center build. So we're competing with that capacity. And driven by that, we have some capacity shortages in the back end. We've got plenty of die, but -- we have some challenges in the back end. So that's a unique problem that goes away, I think after cell phone build is completed. But beyond that, we got spotty problems all over, not enough to wake up the customer. I actually even gave a plug at the conference call on warning customers to make sure you have sufficient backlog, but I don't think anybody listened.
All those [indiscernible] Customers. I had 2 questions for the stage of the Southwest. Yesterday, we had a whole bunch of analog companies talking about 2 areas where we got differing opinions, and I just wanted your take. First was on the Automotive end market. As you said, it's like mid-high teens percent of your revenue. Some companies are saying it's good. Some companies are saying it's not good. What's the Microchip take on the state of the Automotive end market?
I was in Detroit earlier this week and just came from the -- yesterday and met with a lot of customers and have a fresh take on the Automotive business, at least for the U.S. and many of these customers also do a lot of business in Europe. The Automotive business is healthy. It's very healthy, driven by the number of cars, the Automotive customers are building. The SAAR is very healthy. It's in the $16 million range, which is really as high as it ever gets.
But the Automotive business as semiconductor industry sees it, is not doing as well because there's inventory. Every customer I visited had inventories. So our business with them is not as good because they have inventory, but the numbers of cars they are building is very high. And that's where the disconnect is.
I think many people say, well, Automotive business isn't healthy, depending on which way you look at it. If you look at it by how much are we shipping, our Automotive is behind Industrial and behind Aerospace and Defense in being healthy. But if you look at the number of cars our customers are building, how much parts of customers are consuming, it is very healthy.
Okay. And then another one was on demand in China. So there's this constant drumbeat or fear of this China for China strategy, apparently, some people think this is brand new. I've been seeing it going on for about 25 years, but some companies are saying that their China business is good. Some companies are saying their China business is hurting. Maybe talk a little bit about your China demand trends and then the China for China impact or not impact on Microchip?
So our China business is very healthy. I think the China question has been asked for probably a better part of the decade. People have worried about China 10 years ago and they are worried about it now, there's a constant worry about China. Our China business is doing well, very well. More than half of our China business is really done with multinationals who just simply manufacture there and the parts are shipped outside. The parts we ship are in the export zone usually, which don't have any tariffs. So that part of the business is very healthy, and these companies are designing western parts. There's not a local competition in large part of the Chinese business.
The other half of the Chinese business, half of the half, which is another quarter are fairly complex products where there is not an equivalent Chinese local product available. So these are not low-end microcontrollers and analog and catalog parts. These are high-end data center parts, FPGAs, high-end switches, PCI Express, high-end microcontrollers, high-performance analog, all sorts of products where we're doing very well in those, which leaves the last quarter of our China business.
So China is about 18% of our business. 9% is the first kind, largely in export zones, half of the half, which is 4.5% is a lot of this business where we don't have the competition, which leaves the last 4.5% where we do have some competition. But we largely find customers, they want our product and they're simply saying, can I buy your product but get it through a Chinese entity, so I can check the box that I'm buying a local product. And I think there are various strategies being pursued in the industry, and we're working on some techniques there where our product can be available to look like a Chinese product that somebody can say, check the box or we're buying it locally.
Yes. I think on the conference call, you guys -- did you say you expected the China business to be up this quarter or...
Yes. Yes. China business will be up this quarter.
All right. Thanks, Steve. That's all we have time for. Thanks, everyone. Appreciate it.
Thank you.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
Microchip Technology — Citi’s 2025 Global Technology
📊 Kernbotschaft
- Fokus: Microchip setzt die angekündigte 9‑Punkte‑Restrukturierung konsequent um: Fertigungsfläche verkleinert, Inventar stark reduziert und Kunden‑/Distributionsbeziehungen neu justiert.
- Momentum: Buchungen und Umsatz zeigen seit dem März‑Quartal klare Verbesserung; Management erwartet weiter überproportionales Saisonalwachstum in den kommenden Quartalen.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- Fertigung & Inventar: Eine Fabrik wurde geschlossen, andere verkleinert; Lagerbestandstage fielen von ~266 auf 214 und sollen <200 Tage Ende September erreichen.
- Kapazitätsplan: Produktion soll ab dem Dezember‑Quartal wieder wachsen; Management nennt eine Zielrate von +15–20% Kapazitätszuwachs pro Quartal ab dann.
- Finanzmodell: Langfristziel: Bruttomarge 65%, operative Aufwände 25%, operative Marge 40%; Opex sank von ~39% auf ~32% des Umsatzes, Ziel 25% durch Umsatzwachstum und weitere Attrition.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Zeitplan: Konkrete Kapazitätssteigerung ab Dezember‑Quartal angegeben (15–20% p. Quartal).
- Inventarkennzahlen: Explizite Reihe: 266 → 251 → 214 Tage; <200 Tage Ziel Ende September.
- CHIPS‑Akt:** Keine Aufnahme von CHIPS‑Geldern aktuell; Management lehnt Kapitalbeteiligung (Eigenkapitalabgabe) ab.
- Vertriebsdaten: Distributor‑Abverkauf zeigte in Q3/2023 einen Überhang von $103M; in Q4 reduziertes Ungleichgewicht auf $49M.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Aerospace & Defence: Management sieht starken tailwind (US‑Verteidigungsbudget, NATO‑Aufrüstung); Teileanteil stieg auf ~18% und gilt als klarer Wachstumstreiber.
- Lead‑Times: Unterscheidung Lead Time vs. Cycle Time betont; aktuell keine breitflächige Verlängerung, aber punktuelle Backend‑Engpässe (Substrate/Packaging) durch gleichzeitige Mobilfunk‑Builds.
- China & Automotive: China (~18% des Umsatzes) als stabil beschrieben (Aufteilung: Export‑Fertigung, High‑End‑Nischen, und ein kleiner Wettbewerbsanteil); Automotive gesund nach Produktionszahlen, aber noch belastet durch Kunden‑Inventare.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Schlussfolgerung: Präsentation bestätigt: Microchip liefert operativen Turnaround (Inventarreduktion, Opex‑Senkung) und sichtbare Nachfrageverfestigung. Positiv für Margen und Gewinnwachstum; Anleger sollten Backend‑Packaging‑Risiken und den Verlauf der Inventarkorrektur weiter beobachten.
Microchip Technology — Shareholder/Analyst Call - Microchip Technology Incorporated
1. Management Discussion
Thank you for standing by, and welcome to the Microchip Technology Fiscal 2025 Annual Shareholders Meeting.
I'd now like to introduce your host for today's program, Steve Sanghi. Please go ahead, sir.
Thank you and good morning, everyone. It's 9:00 a.m and the 2025 Annual Meeting of the Stockholders of Microchip Technology Incorporated will please come to order. I'm Steve Sanghi, Chairman of the Board, CEO and President of Microchip Technology.
I would also like to introduce the additional members of the audience. First I will introduce the other members of the Board of Directors. When I call your names, please standup and be recognized. Ellen Barker, retired Senior Vice President and Chief Information Officer of Texas Instruments; Rick Cassidy, retired Senior Vice President of Corporate Strategy at TSMC; Matt Chapman, retired CEO of Northwest Evaluation Association; Victor Peng, retired President of Advanced Micro Devices and Karen Rapp, retired CFO of National Instruments.
Next, I will introduce the company's executive staff that are in attendance today, starting with Rich Simoncic, Chief Operating Officer; Eric Bjornholt, Senior Corporate Vice President and Chief Financial Officer; Mathew Bunker, Senior Corporate Vice President, Operations; Lauren Carr, Senior Corporate Vice President, Global Human Resources; Mike Finley, Senior Corporate Vice President, Operations; Patrick Johnson, Senior Corporate Vice President, FPGA and Timing Business Units; and Joe Krawczyk, Senior Corporate Vice President, Worldwide Client Engagement.
A partner of the firm of Ernst & Young, the company's independent registered public accounting firm is also here today, John Gaylord.
I would also like to introduce Rob Suffoletta, he is on the back. A partner with the law firm of Wilson Sonsini Goodrich & Rosati, who serves as the company's outside legal counsel.
Pursuant to the company's bylaws, I have been appointed by the Board of Directors to serve as Chair of this meeting. Rob Suffoletta will serve as Secretary of this meeting.
Notice of this meeting stating the time, place and purposes was mailed on or about July 7, 2025, postage prepaid, to each stockholder of record at the close of business on June 20, 2025.
Affidavits of mailing have been received by the company and are available for inspection at this meeting. 539,674,554 shares of common stock were outstanding at the close of business on June 20, 2025, and are entitled to vote at this meeting.
Now with respect to the voting of your shares. If you have already mailed in your proxy and you do not want to change your vote, then you do not need to do anything at this time. If you did not turn in your proxy, or if you wish to change a proxy you previously submitted, or if you hold a proxy to vote the shares of another stockholder, please submit those proxies to us at this time.
Anybody who wants to change their votes or they are holding proxies for other shareholders, if not, lastly if there is anyone here who did not submit a proxy and who wishes to vote their shares in person, please raise your hand. So that Macy can distribute the ballot to you. Anybody that did not vote, any stockholder who wants [indiscernible]? We will collect those ballots when we open the polls for voting in a few moments.
In accordance with the provisions of Delaware law, the Board of Directors has appointed Rob Suffoletta to serve as the Inspector of Election at this meeting, and he subscribed the oath of his office prior to the meeting. Rob has informed me that a quorum is present, and I declare the meeting open for business. If there are any questions that relate directly to one of the proposals, I would like to receive that question at the time that we consider each of the proposals. Otherwise, we have reserved time after we complete the business matters of this meeting for a question-and-answer period. So please hold all questions not related to the proposals until the question-and-answer period.
The first proposal is election of the company's directors to serve for the ensuing year and until their successors are elected and qualified. A nominee for director shall be elected if the votes cast for such nominee's election exceed the votes cast against such nominee's election. Nomination for directors will now be received. I recognize Eric Bjornholt.
My name is Eric Bjornholt. I nominate Ellen L. Barker, Rick Cassidy, Matthew W. Chapman, Victor Peng, Karen M. Rapp, Steve Sanghi for election as directors of the company.
Rich Simoncic?
I second the nomination.
Since no other nominations were received, the nominations are now closed.
The second proposal is to ratify the appointment of Ernst & Young LLP, as the independent registered public accounting firm of Microchip for the fiscal year ending March 31, 2026. The affirmative vote of the holders of the majority of the votes cast affirmatively or negatively at the meeting is required to adopt the proposal. Is there any discussion on this proposal? A motion calling for a vote on this proposal will now be received. I recognize Rich Simoncic.
My name is Rich Simoncic, I move for the adoption of the following resolution: resolved to ratify the appointment of Ernst & Young LLP as the independent registered public accounting firm of Microchip for the fiscal year ending March 31, 2026.
Joe Krawczyk?
I second the motion.
The third proposal is to hold an advisory nonbinding vote regarding the compensation of our named executives. The affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the votes [indiscernible] I am being asked to speak louder.
The third proposal is to hold an advisory nonbinding vote regarding the compensation of our named executives. The affirmative vote of the holders of a majority of the votes cast affirmatively or negatively at the meeting is required to approve this proposal. Is there any discussion on this proposal? If not, then a motion calling for a vote on this proposal will now be received. I recognize, Joe Krawczyk.
My name is Joe Krawczyk. I move for the adoption of the following resolution: Resolved, to approve on an advisory nonbinding basis the compensation of named executives.
Mathew Bunker?
I second the motion.
The polls are now open for voting on the proposals before the meeting. The time and date of opening of the polls is 9:07 a.m. today, August 19, 2025. Macy, please collect the ballots of those stockholders who wish to vote in person. If you have a ballot, please raise your hand so that we can collect them.
[Voting]
The polls are now closed. The time and date of closing of the polls is 9:08 a.m. today, August 19, 2025. Will the Inspector of Elections, please announce the vote?
With regard to Proposal 1, the election of the Microchip Board of Directors, I hereby declare that all the nominees are duly elected as directors of the company to serve for the ensuing year until their successors are elected and qualified.
With regard to Proposal 2, to ratify the appointment of Ernst & Young LLP as the independent registered public accounting firm of Microchip for the fiscal year ending March 31, 2026, I hereby declare the proposal has been approved.
With regard to proposal 3, an advisory nonbinding vote regarding the compensation of Microchip's named executives, I hereby declare that the compensation of the named executive officers has not been approved by nonbinding advisory vote.
At this time, I recognize Karen Rapp.
My name is Karen Rapp. I'm a member of the Microchip Board -- and Board of Directors and Chair of the Compensation Committee of the Board. As the inspector of election just reported, the shareholders did not approve the advisory, nonbinding proposal regarding the compensation of Microchip's executive officers. In the prior 14 years, our shareholders approved the say-on-pay vote with an average vote of over 92%. So we're disappointed that the proposal is not approved this year. Since the proposal is nonbinding and advisory, it will not impact the compensation of Microchip's executive officers. However, the Compensation Committee and the Board will consider the outcome of the vote in evaluating executive compensation in the future.
This year, we received feedback from proxy advisory firms and certain shareholders that they do not support time-based RSU grants to interim CEO, and this is the key reason that they voted against the say-on-pay vote. They felt that the RSU awards granted to Steve Sanghi, after he was appointed as Interim CEO, should have been at least partially performance-based instead of time based.
This onetime award vested quarterly over the 2-year period from February 2026 through February 2028, and was approved by the Compensation Committee after considering other mechanisms. The Board and the Compensation Committee felt that Mr. Sanghi was uniquely positioned to provide leadership transitions and to minimize disruptions to the company's operations and strategic initiative.
Upon Mr. Sanghi being appointed as a permanent CEO in July of 2025. The Compensation Committee approved an RSU award for Mr. Sanghi that was 60% performance based and 40% time based and vested quarterly over the period of May 2028 through August 2029. The performance metric is based on Microchip's cumulative non-GAAP operating margin over a period of 12 quarters ending June 30, 2028. There is overlap of vesting of the interim awards grant and the award associated with the appointment as permanent CEO.
The other Microchip executives were granted RSU awards in July 2025. That is the same performance metric and were 50% performance-based and 50% time based. Thank you for your continued support of Microchip.
This concludes the formal portion of our meeting. Before I adjourn the meeting, is there any further business? If not, I will entertain a motion to adjourn. Mathew Bunker?
I move that the meeting be adjourned.
Eric Bjornholt?
I second the motion.
All in favor say, aye.
[Voting]
Opposed say no?
[Voting]
The meeting is adjourned. Please stay seated. At this time, we will hold a question and answer period. If you have a question, please raise your hand. For you to be recognized, please state your name, your relationship with the company and then your question, and your relationship with the company, state that you are stockholder, you are an employee or whatever the relationship you have and then please ask the question.
[ Chu Wong ] I am a shareholder, [indiscernible] cash flow. Can you comment on that?
Sure. For the last several quarters, going back more than a year, as Microchip profit fell significantly during the prolonged industry correction, Microchip did not produce enough free cash flow to pay dividend. And therefore, during that time, we had to borrow money each quarter to make the shortfall in the cash flow [indiscernible]. Microchip will cut its dividend like some of the other companies have done at similar time. But Microchip made a commitment that we will not cut the dividend. Instead, we built up the balance sheet by raising $1.45 billion of a mandatory convertible transaction, which is an equity-like instrument in February of this year. And with that, we brought our debt leverage down. And we also said based on improvement in the business during the last quarter, which was a very good quarter, that the September quarter will be the last quarter we need to borrow a small amount of money to pay dividends. After September quarter our profit will recover enough to [indiscernible]. Did that answer your question.
Thank you very much, this meeting is adjourned.
Thank you, ladies and gentlemen, for your participation in today's call. This does conclude the program. You may now disconnect. Good day.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Shareholder/Analyst Call - Microchip Technology Incorporated
Microchip Technology — Shareholder/Analyst Call - Microchip Technology Incorporated
🎯 Kernbotschaft
- Datum: Annual Shareholders Meeting am 19. August 2025; 539.674.554 ausstehende Aktien per 20. Juni 2025.
- Ergebnis: Alle Direktoren wiedergewählt; Ernst & Young als Abschlussprüfer ratifiziert; die Advisory‑Vergütungsvorlage ("say‑on‑pay", nicht bindend) wurde abgelehnt.
- Kernaussage: Aktionärsprotest richtet sich gegen zeitbasierte Restricted Stock Unit (RSU)‑Awards an den Interim‑CEO; Board kündigt Überprüfung an.
⚡ Strategische Highlights
- CEO/Vergütung: Steve Sanghi nach Interim‑Phase permanent CEO (Bestellung Juli 2025). Interim‑RSU waren zeitbasiert; spätere CEO‑Zuteilung 60% performance‑, 40% time‑based.
- Leistungsmaß: Performance‑Metric ist kumulierte non‑GAAP (bereinigte) operative Marge über 12 Quartale bis 30. Juni 2028; andere Führungskräfte 50/50 performance/time.
- Kapital & Dividende: Im Feb. 2025 wurde eine Mandatory Convertible‑Transaktion über $1,45 Mrd. platziert zur Bilanzstärkung; Management bekräftigt Dividenden‑Commitment.
🆕 Neue Informationen
- Vergütungsdetails: Konkrete Fristen: Interim‑Award vestet quartalsweise Feb 2026–Feb 2028; CEO‑Award vestet May 2028–Aug 2029 (Overlap vorhanden).
- Kapitalmaßnahme: Offenlegung der $1,45 Mrd. verpflichtend wandelbaren Emission als Mittel zur Reduktion der Leverage; keine neue operative Guidance genannt.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Cashflow: Ein Aktionär fragte zur Free‑Cash‑Flow‑Situation und Dividende; Management erklärte, dass Fortdauer der Branchenkorrektur zuvor zu Fremdaufnahme führte, die Convertible‑Platzierung aber Bilanz stärkte und man erwartet, dass das Quartal September 2025 das letzte mit Kreditaufnahme zur Dividendenauszahlung sein wird.
- Say‑on‑pay: Proxy‑Advisors und einige Investoren kritisierten zeitbasierte Interim‑RSUs; Board begründet die Einmalzusage mit Führungskontinuität, nimmt Stimmbild aber in künftige Entscheidungen auf.
🔎 Bottom Line
- Relevanz: Keine operativen Guidance‑Änderungen, wohl aber ein deutlicher Governance‑Weckruf: Aktionäre verlangen leistungsorientiertere Vergütung. Kurzfristig wichtig: mögliche Verwässerung bei Convertible, Dividendenrisiko bis nachhaltige FCF‑Erholung und erhöhte Aufmerksamkeit auf die Ausgestaltung der Performance‑Metriken.
Microchip Technology — KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
1. Question Answer
Okay. Good morning. I'm John Vinh. I cover semis here at KeyBanc Capital Markets. We're pleased to have Microchip with us this morning, and we have Eric Bjornholt, CFO. Welcome, Eric.
Yes. Thanks for hosting me. Appreciate it.
Obviously, just very topical right now is just kind of the cyclical recovery. I think you and your peers are seeing similar recovery trends. Maybe just take a minute, Eric, just to walk us through what you're seeing from a recovery perspective, maybe talk about bookings trends and book-to-bill and lead times and customer inventories?
Sure. I'm going to start with the disclaimer that during the course of this discussion, I'll be making certain forward-looking statements. I refer you to our filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors about the company.
So with that out of the way, bookings have definitely improved. We broke out a book-to-bill ratio in the March quarter. It was 1.07. It was above 1 in June, and then we made the comment on our earnings call last week that our July bookings were the largest bookings that we've seen in 3 years. So bookings have improved, obviously, coming off a low base after the kind of the inventory correction. But definitely, March marked the bottom for us, and we have seen an improvement in bookings. And obviously, we had a really good quarter this last quarter, growing 10.8% sequentially and seeing improving metrics in gross margin, operating margin, et cetera.
Great. Maybe just a couple of follow-ups there. Given that July bookings were your largest in 3 years, your guidance into third quarter was kind of largely seasonal. So if the bookings were the largest in 3 years, why not a more optimistic outlook there?
So I would say that our guidance for the quarter was above seasonal. We're guiding 5.1% up. We don't have any quarter that is seasonally up 5% plus. And bookings obviously age out in time. We have a high level of inventory today. We have extremely short lead times for most of the product portfolio. And so there's a lot of turns involved to get to the number that we guided to. And the bookings dry up the further you go out in time, right? So visibility is pretty low, and that's just a function of where lead times and inventory are today.
Okay. To that point, I'm wondering if you could just clarify this point that I think Steve had talked about on the call how you're sending out letters to your customers and encourage them to book further out that typically at this point in the cycle, you're going to potentially see an extension of lead times. There may be some concerns that there's maybe some elements of that PSP program. Can you just clarify exactly what you're trying to encourage and what you're trying to do with that sort of notification to customers?
Okay. So, actually, the only notification that we've given to customers was through our earnings call. And in that call, Steve, our CEO, said, "Hey, we've got pockets of lead times extension at this point in time." I think you're referring to historically, we used to post on our website, hey, customers get your orders in because lead times are extending. And we haven't done that as of yet. But we are seeing -- we outsource roughly 30% of our assembly and test, and we're seeing that some of that capacity is pretty tight right now as some of the OSAT suppliers are working on iPhone builds and maybe data center AI activity that is pretty hot right now. And so that capacity is getting consumed and lead times have extended.
And it's actually at the point where some of our data center business could be stronger this quarter, but we're not able to deliver what the customers want because those lead times have stretched. So that's typically how these things work that it starts to get lead time extension on a portion of the product portfolio, lead times start to extend and then you start over time, getting better backlog visibility. What we're trying to prevent is customers getting surprised and you have 10 customers come in and order the same product and the lead times go from 6 weeks to 12 weeks, and they can't get the product when they need it. So it's just general communication that we're doing.
Okay. Have you gotten any sort of feedback from your customers since you've made that sort of announcement on the earnings call?
So it's early, quite honestly. So I haven't got any specifically. Obviously, traveling here this week, I haven't got feedback from the sales team. But I think customers will take notice, and we'll highlight these things to customers, particularly those that are buying those products that are seeing the lead time extension and hopefully get some traction with better backlog coverage. And there's really no penalty for the customer to do that. They can cancel or reschedule that product anytime before 45 days before the delivery date. So if they gave us 16 weeks of coverage, they still have flexibility to push things out or pull things in.
Okay. Is 45 days the same cancel window that you had previous to COVID?
So it has changed over time. I think at one point in time, for some of our products, it was as short as 30 days. It extended out to be like 90 days during COVID, and now it's back to 45. And I think that's a good spot for us to be.
Okay. Obviously, your June quarter results were extremely strong. Can you just talk about how much of that strength that you saw in the quarter was due to tariff-related pull-ins versus just recovery?
So we think it's mostly recovery. We go out every quarter, our sales team and talk to customers and have our distributors talk to their customers that had any significant change in their quarter-on-quarter or year-over-year revenue and get that feedback and say, what's happening, right? Most of that feedback is that, hey, our inventory is drying up, and we're needing to start purchasing more in line with what the consumption is. And we did get a few customers, particularly in China that did note tariff related. And when we expand that out, we think it was probably a $5 million to $9 million impact on the quarter of pull-in. But I think there's equal amount of customers that are kind of frozen in their tracks waiting for all this whole tariff situation to get resolved and understood because once they buy our part, then they have to manufacture their good, whatever it could be, washing machine, automobile, et cetera. And they want to know what that final landed cost is going to be, and that's difficult when things are in flux. So I think it's on both sides. We think it was a pretty immaterial impact on the quarter.
Right. It sounds like you feel very confident that kind of the inventory levels at your end customers are largely normalized. Obviously, if you look at distribution inventory, it's easier to get your handle on that. Can you just walk us through what the process you use because you have so many customers out there to get kind of a sense of where the end customer inventories are and why you have confidence that things are normalized there?
So it is challenging, right? We do 47% of our business through distribution. We get real-time reports from our distributors every month that tell us what their inventory levels are. We obviously know what they're shipping through to customers, and we know what we're selling to them. So we can measure that pretty easily. And distribution inventory has been coming down dramatically over the last 7 quarters. The difference between sell-through and sell-in, sell-in being our GAAP revenue recognition was $103 million in the March quarter, that dropped to $49 million in the June quarter. So it is coming down. I think there's still a bit more of distribution inventory to come down, but they're definitely seeing that they've got plenty of products where inventory is kind of at rock bottom and they're needing to order again.
Now the direct customers, many of these customers signed up for the PSP program early and got preferential treatment. And so I think there still is some level of inventory that our direct customers are working through. We can't quantify that for you because we don't know exactly what it is, but we see a lot of good signs in the business.
One of the things we saw this last quarter is that distributions sell-through increased for the first time in 8 quarters. So that tells me that, hey, the distribution customers are working through inventory and eventually are going to start purchasing more in line with what consumption is. When that happens, the distributors will need to buy to support that activity. And the same thing will happen at the direct customers, but we can't quantify it exactly. But there's pockets where customers are running out, and there's pockets where they still have some inventory.
Right. When you look at this recovery and you look at the different segments or end markets, where are the areas where you're seeing the most amount of strength? And maybe what are some of the areas that are still lagging a bit?
So we are obviously seeing really good traction in aerospace and defense today. That was 18% of our business in fiscal '25, which completed in March, and defense budgets are going up around the world. We are the largest supplier of semiconductors to the U.S. Department of Defense. So that works in our favor. So that's an area that's quite strong. We're seeing the data center business starting to come back, which is good to see. General industrial is obviously a large piece of our business, and that's a mix there where some customers are buying again and other customers are still working through inventory. Automotive has been a little sluggish, which I think is kind of familiar with what you're hearing from other companies.
Great. Aerospace defense, obviously, has been a pretty consistent area of strength for you, obviously. Can you just talk about your portfolio there? What's differentiating yourself with that market? And is that largely the Microsemi portfolio there?
So a large piece of it is the Microsemi portfolio. Obviously, that's a company that we acquired in 2018. So we've been working with customers and our product divisions to get more of our products qualified that we can sell those into customers. So it's FPGA, has a heavy footprint in aerospace and defense, but we're selling standard microcontroller and analog products today, some of our memory products, some of the timing products, some of our system-level products go into aerospace and defense. So it's broad-based. It's more than just Microsemi, but that's the largest piece.
Great. You had acknowledged that there was maybe 6% of your customer base where you had some work to do to kind of improve your relationships there. Obviously, some of this obviously had to do with the follow-up from the PSP program. Can you just talk about what you are doing specifically to improve on those customer relationships? And maybe just give us an update in terms of what kind of progress you're making there?
So we've made really good progress. And I think at this point, we don't have a customer issue any longer, right? There's going to be the small percentage that have hurt feelings or whatever. But we've met with them, fallen on our sword. We've explained to them how we got to the point we were at. They understand it, right? Everybody had extended lead times in some form of NCNR program, noncancelable, non-reschedulable program during the upcycle. We clearly stuck with our program a couple of quarters longer than we should have, and we talk through that with customers, and then we find ways that we can partner with them to provide value. And that's why they've obviously selected Microchip to work with historically.
And ultimately, the engineers like working with us. We deal with the purchasing managers and help mend fences there and with the C-suite. And I think we're in a good spot today. We -- Steve announced this as part of his 9-point program. And when we went through that work between kind of when he came back in November and really our early March earnings call, we had made a lot of progress in that time frame. It's continued over the last 4 months, and I think we're in good shape. So I think customer relationships are healthy.
Right. I think you were also very transparent in acknowledging that maybe the PSP program wasn't kind of the best program to implement during this last pandemic cycle. What have you really learned about it? What safeguards have you implemented in this next recovery? And what are you planning to do differently going forward?
Yes. So PSP was definitely not all bad. There are many customers that were PSP participants that would sit here and tell you we had a great experience. We got supply when we needed it. We didn't have lines down situations because of Microchip. So there was good that came out of it. But it extended too long. We didn't have appropriate safeguards across what we were doing, where you could have a situation where a customer has been a steady customer for the last 5 years and buying 10,000 units a month, right, and fluctuating modestly. And the PSP program could have consumed capacity to them where that steady long-term customer couldn't get product for 52 weeks because lead times stretched so long.
So we're putting certain things in place where we can look at customer behavior and past history, not just direct customers, but through distribution to make sure that we reserve capacity in the future for those customers and don't let it get consumed when lead times stretch again and backlog goes up because it will in the future. And so we're using AI and machine learning to help us with that to identify those things, and I think we're going to be in a much better spot in the future. And I don't think we'll ever do a program like PSP again that goes out 12 months for NCNR. But NCNR is important in some instances. I won't say that we'll never use it, but PSP, a program like it will not come back in that exact form again.
Great. As part of your 9-point program, or turnaround plan, there is some fab rationalization in there. What are you doing in terms of just optimizing your fab footprint to take into consideration that concerns around Section 232 tariffs and some of the geopolitical related tariff risk there?
Right. Okay. So we do a little less than 40% of our wafer fab in our U.S. factories. It used to be 3 factories. Now it's 2 factories. We closed the Arizona fab. The last production came out of there in May. But none of that production that was produced in Fab 2 is moving outside of the U.S. It's moving to our other 2 U.S.-based fabs, 1 in Colorado and 1 in Arizona. So the production in the U.S. for us is not changing because of that. We expanded clean room capacity and equipment capacity significantly during the up cycle, and we think that we can support peak revenue plus again from those other 2 factories because they've got the largest footprint. Fab 2, which we closed was our smallest of our 3 domestic fabs.
So from a 232 perspective, I think we're actually in a really good spot, right? We have domestic manufacturing today. We continue to invest in that. I mentioned before that we are the largest supplier to the U.S. Department of Defense, which is pretty important. And we're continuing to invest. And then when you look at some of our foundry partners. We use foundry partners that actually have U.S. footprint also. So if you look at the dollars that we source through U.S. fabrication, through our own fabs and then our partners that have facilities here. So TSMC has a fab in Washington, GlobalFoundries has a fab in New York. X-Fab has a fab in Texas. You combine those together, we do about 50% of our wafer fab domestically, which I think should qualify us to be exempt, but we'll see how the final rules play out.
Great. One follow-up I had on that is, are you supporting any sort of fungibility between some of your overseas capacity with your U.S. capacity? Is that something that you're working on at all?
So there's some of that, right? We have certain products that can run in our internal factories, and they can run in an external factory because we have process technologies that are qualified both in our internal fabs and an external partner. And essentially what we've done is we have mapped out for our customers where they can see this is the point of fab, this is the point of assembly, this is the point of test and done that in a way where depending on where all this tariff stuff falls out, they can pick and choose where material is sourced from that gives them the best answer for them depending on where we're shipping that product.
So it's not perfect. I mean, there's lots of product that is produced on advanced nodes where we don't have the ability to do those by ourselves internally, but our foundry partners might have multiple locations where they can do that, and we'll maximize that to the extent that we can.
Are there any questions? There.
Kind of [indiscernible] mandated, the new kind of architecture, how do you implement that [indiscernible] that you talked about, I think, on the call?
So, that is definitely a new thing for us. We're making investments there and supporting what customers need and obviously want to be compliant with everything that we need to be on a global basis. So it's just continued investment that we need to make over time. And I don't think it's a material needle mover for us, but something that's important to a portion of the customer base.
Does it go across the entire [indiscernible] portfolio?
I do not know the answer to that. We can follow up separately. If you want to follow up I can get the business unit person to chime in.
Any other questions? Great. Eric, maybe you can talk about kind of the China market right now. Maybe just walk us through your China for China program. Are you also just giving -- given the geopolitical tensions out there, are you seeing more pressure on your Chinese customers to kind of move to local sources? I know there's always been competition in that domestic market, but maybe just talk about that.
Right. So we talked about a China for China plan back in March, and I think with all the tariff that have changed between then and now and still waiting for some of that to get finalized, that is not a completely finalized plan as of yet. Again, we've mapped out our sourcing of each product, so our customers can see that, and we can work with them to find the optimal manufacturing flow that works for them depending on the country of location.
China competition is definitely an issue for a portion of our product over time. We do about 18% of our revenue in China. We think about half of that is done through multinationals that we ship product into a foreign trade zone over there. It's manufactured and then it ships back to the U.S. or Europe. So that really isn't at risk. But the 9% that is kind of domestic consumption is something we obviously look at. We think about half of that is products that Chinese competitors don't have, and so there really isn't competition for us domestically there and the customers need to use our product line. So an FPGA could be an example of that. A data center product could be an example of that. It has a couple of examples of there. But leaves probably 4% to 5% of the revenue that is subject to domestic competition, I'll call that kind of standard microcontroller and analog product.
And clearly, those customers have chosen Microchip because they want to work from us -- with us. But there is pressure from the local government for them to source domestically if they can, and that's where our China for China program will come into play and finding a way to make as much of that product, be sourced from an area, could be sourced from Taiwan. Is that considered China or not, right? China would probably think so, Taiwan would not. But there's a lot of permutations and combinations, and we will work with our customers to best service their needs. But there's going to be more and more competition on that 4.5% of revenue, and we'll continue to invest and support our customers and invest elsewhere where we think we can get the biggest bang for our buck.
Great. Can you talk about the pricing environment right now? And maybe also just comment on how does that compare to the pricing environment you're seeing in the China market?
So I would say pricing for Microchip is pretty stable. We are being aggressive at the point of design, which is normal for this point in the cycle. All of our competitors have excess capacity and are fighting for sockets just like us. So we're being aggressive with pricing there. We talked about likely a mid-single-digit pricing decline this fiscal year, and then it probably gets more stable after that.
But that's really just being aggressive at the point of design. But once we're designed in, those prices tend to hold through the life of the application. All the work is done upfront. The pricing is set there and then the customer is designed in with a proprietary product that is not pin-for-pin compatible with any of our competitors. So pricing is stable.
Great. As part of the turnaround plan, I think you talked about adding an AI business unit. What's your AI exposure today and what are the opportunities that you see to grow that franchise?
Yes. So this is new, the AI business unit. So we created an Edge AI business unit that is really looking today at maximizing the benefits of the portfolio that we have today and building a go-to-market strategy around that, and then getting all the business units that support the AI ecosystem to work together for common sets of IP, common go-to-market strategy, feeding our sales force with the proper collateral material to make ourselves successful. So there's definitely IP investment that's going to be made. There's helping to shape new product development for some of these business units that have the opportunity to really do well there. It could be MCU, MPU some of our wireless products, our data center products, et cetera.
And with that, it's a relatively small portion of our business today, but it's got a growing footprint, and we are very well positioned with some of the products that we have today, just kind of enhancing the software working with the customer to do that to do really well.
Great. Can you talk about just the puts and takes of how we think about kind of the gross margin expansion as we continue through this recovery?
Sure. So our long-term target model on gross margin is 65% on a non-GAAP basis. The last quarter was just over 54%. We're guiding the current quarter to 56%. And there's 2 significant charges that are impacting gross margin today. We have underutilization charges from our factory, which were just over $50 million last quarter. And then we have accounting charges for inventory reserves, which fell last quarter to about $77 million. It was $90 million the quarter before, but those are going to come down very rapidly as we move ahead.
The basis for those calculations, you take a snapshot of inventory and look at 12 months of trailing revenue demand, and we've been in a falling revenue environment and inventory has been up until the last couple of quarters, pretty stably quite high. And so inventory is coming down rapidly. We've got a goal this year to reduce inventory on the balance sheet by $350 million. So that alone will take those charges down.
And then with the revenue inflecting upwards, that's also going to take those charges down. So those charges never go to 0. There's always some inventory that is subject to those charges, but that $77 million could come down to $20 million, and that's $57 million of gross margin improvement or 5 percentage points that will come back to gross margin pretty rapidly here over the coming quarters.
And then the capacity underutilization charges will be more gradual. I think that will spread over a couple of years. We are -- that charge is going to come down just modestly in the current quarter, and that is really from our back-end factories ramping assembly and test activities. We drained finished goods last quarter. We don't want to do that again this quarter. And then we've indicated publicly that we plan to increase wafer starts in our factories starting in December, and we'll gradually do that over time as revenue and inventory supports it.
Great. Looks like we're out of time. Thank you, Eric.
All right. Thanks, everybody. Thanks, John.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
Microchip Technology — KeyBanc Capital Markets Technology Leadership Forum
📣 Kernbotschaft
- Kernaussage: Bookings und Nachfrage erholen sich: Book‑to‑bill stieg nach dem März‑Tief, Juli war der stärkste Buchungsmonat in drei Jahren. Distributions‑Inventare fallen, Sichtbarkeit bleibt begrenzt wegen kurzer Lead‑Times und Auslastung bei OSAT (Outsourced Semiconductor Assembly and Test). Management bleibt daher vorsichtig in der Guidance; Margen sollen mittelfristig durch Inventarrückgang und sinkende Bewertungsabschläge profitieren.
🎯 Strategische Highlights
- PSP‑Lehren: PSP‑Programm wird nicht in identischer Form wiederholt; künftig Einsatz von KI/ML zur Priorisierung und Vermeidung langer NCNR‑Bindungen (NCNR = nicht stornierbar/nicht verschiebbar).
- Fab‑Footprint: Konsolidierung: eine kleinere US‑Fab geschlossen, operative Produktion bleibt in US‑Fabs; kombiniert mit Partner‑Fabs ca. 50% Wafer‑Fertigung in den USA.
- China‑Strategie: "China‑for‑China"‑Mapping für Produkte; ~4–5% Umsatz lokal gefährdet, andere Teile geschützt (z.B. FPGA, Data‑Center).
- Edge‑AI: Neue Geschäftseinheit für Edge‑AI (Künstliche Intelligenz am Rand), heute klein, strategisch für Cross‑BU‑IP und Go‑to‑Market.
🔭 Neue Informationen
- Wesentliche Zahlen: Unterauslastungs‑Charges ≈ $50M, Inventurabschreibungen fielen auf $77M (vorher $90M); Ziel: Inventarrückgang um $350M dieses Jahr; Non‑GAAP Bruttomarge letzte Quartal ≈54%, Guidance aktuell ≈56%.
- Operativ: Geplante Erhöhung der Wafer‑Starts ab Dezember; Juli‑Bookings trotz starkem Monat nicht in Guidance eingepreist wegen hoher Turnrate und kurzer Sichtbarkeit.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Guidance‑Konflikt: Warum trotz stärkster Juli‑Bookings in 3 Jahren keine positivere Guidance? Antwort: hohe Lagerumschläge, kurze Lead‑Times und geringe Sichtbarkeit über längere Horizonte.
- PSP‑Remedien: Wie werden Kundenbeziehungen repariert? Antwort: direkte Gespräche, flexibilisierte Stornofrist (45 Tage) und interne Maßnahmen zur Kapazitätsreservierung.
- Kapazität & China: OSAT‑Engpässe und China‑for‑China‑Plan wurden thematisiert; Fungibilität zwischen Standorten besteht begrenzt, einige Produkte bleiben konkurrenzanfällig.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Cautious optimism: Erholung ist real und Distributionsbestände fallen; kurzfristig limitiert Sichtbarkeit und unterauslastungs‑/Bewertungsabschläge die Margen. Strategische Schritte (Fab‑Optimierung, PSP‑Kontrollen, KI/AI‑Einheit) reduzieren strukturelle Risiken und stützen mittelfristiges Margen‑Upside für Aktionäre.
Microchip Technology — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
1. Management Discussion
Good afternoon, ladies and gentlemen, and welcome to the Microchip Q1 Fiscal 2026 Financial Results Conference Call. [Operator Instructions] This call is being recorded on Thursday, August 7, 2025. And I would now like to turn the conference over to Mr. Steve Sanghi. Thank you. Please go ahead.
Thank you, operator, and good afternoon, everyone. During the course of this conference call, we will be making projections and other forward-looking statements regarding future events or the future financial performance of the company. We wish to caution you that such statements are predictions and that actual events or results may differ materially.
We refer you to our press releases of today as well as our recent filings with the SEC that identify important risk factors that may impact Microchip's business and results of operations. In attendance with me today are Rich Simoncic, Microchip's CEO, Eric Bjornholt, Microchip's CFO; and Sajid Daudi, Microchip's Head of Investor Relations.
I will provide a reflection on our fiscal first quarter 2026 financial results, Eric will go over our financial performance and Rich will then review some product line updates. I will then provide an overview of the current business environment and our guidance for second quarter of fiscal year 2026. We will then be available to respond to specific investor and analyst questions.
Microchip employees are often referred to as chippers. I will begin with a question for all of you and then I will provide the answer. How many chippers does it take to deliver a good quarter? The answer is that it takes quite a few, but they all showed up to deliver an outstanding quarter like we produced in the June 2025. And that is the point I want to make. 18,000 employees of Microchip worked all last year on a pay cut have not received a bonus or a salary increase in a year and suffered through a gut-wrenching global layoff earlier this year in March.
These employees working with high morale came together to deliver an outstanding quarter. I tip my head to all 18,000 employees of Microchip worldwide. I will highlight a few salient points of our financial results. 10.8% sequential sales growth. Net sales were up sequentially in all geographies. Sales from our microcontroller and analog businesses were both up in double-digit percentages sequentially.
Non-GAAP gross margin was 230 basis points sequentially and incremental non-GAAP gross margin was 76% sequentially. Non-GAAP operating margin was up 670 basis points sequentially and an incremental non-GAAP operating margin was 82% sequentially. Inventory went down by $124 million sequentially. Our target for the whole fiscal year is a $350 million reduction. So we are off to a very good start.
Inventory days were 214 days. Our inventory over 2 quarters has gone down from 266 days to 251 days to 214 days. We expect inventory at the end of September quarter to be between 195 and 200 days. The inventory write-off in the June quarter was $77.1 million down from $90.6 million in the March quarter. The inventory write-offs are expected to decrease again in the September quarter.
Underutilization in our factories in the June quarter was $51.5 million, down from $54.2 million in the March quarter. We expect the underutilization will modestly decrease again this quarter with a more significant decrease in the December quarter. Adding $77.1 million of inventory write-off and $51.5 million of underutilization charge makes a total of $128.6 million of charges, divide that by the net sales of $1.075 billion and you get a non-GAAP gross margin impact of 12 percentage points, adding it to the reported non-GAAP gross margin of 54.3% indicates that the product gross margin was 66.3%.
The point is as inventory write-off and underutilization charges decreased, we believe our long-term non-GAAP gross margin target of 65% is achievable. We have accrued about $5.5 million from the upside profit to provide a small bonus to our 18,000 employees who deserve it very much. The net impact from this accrual is less than $0.01 per share. And with that, I will pass it on to Eric Bjornholt, who will take you through a more detailed financial performance last quarter. I will come back later to discuss the business environment and provide guidance for the second quarter. Eric?
Thanks, Steve, and good afternoon, everyone. We are including information in our press release and on this conference call on various GAAP and non-GAAP measures. We have posted a full GAAP to non-GAAP reconciliation on the Investor Relations page of our website at www.microchip.com, and included reconciliation information in our earnings press release, which we believe you will find useful when comparing our GAAP and non-GAAP results. We have also posted a summary of our outstanding debt and our leverage metrics on our website.
I will now go through some of the operating results, including net sales, gross margin and operating expenses. Other than net sales, I will be referring to these results on a non-GAAP basis, which is based on expenses prior to the effects of our acquisition activities, share-based compensation and certain other adjustments as described in our earnings press release and in the reconciliations on our website.
Net sales in the June quarter were $1.075 billion, which was up 10.8% sequentially and $5.5 million above the high end of our updated June quarter guidance provided on May 29. We have posted a summary of our net sales by product line and geography on our website for your reference. On a non-GAAP basis, gross margins were 54.3%, including capacity underutilization charges of $51.5 million. new inventory reserve charges of $77.1 million, operating expenses were at 33.7% of sales and operating income was 20.7% of sales.
Non-GAAP net income was $154.7 million, and non-GAAP earnings per diluted share was $0.27, which was $0.01 above the high end of our updated guidance. On a GAAP basis in the June quarter, gross margins were 53.6%. Total operating expenses were $544.6 million and included acquisition intangible amortization of $107.6 million, special charges of $22.2 million, which was primarily driven by foundry contract exit costs and our activities associated with the closure of Fab 2, share-based compensation of $45.2 million and $7.5 million of other expenses.
The GAAP net loss attributable to common shareholders was $46.4 million or $0.09 per share. Our non-GAAP cash tax rate was 11.25% in the June quarter, and we expect to record a non-GAAP tax rate of about 9.5% in the September quarter. Our non-GAAP tax rate for fiscal year 2026 is expected to be about 10.25%, which is exclusive of the transition tax and any tax audit settlements related to taxes accrued in prior fiscal years, and was positively impacted by the impacts of the recently passed one big beautiful bill. Our inventory balance at June 30, 2025, was $1.169 billion and down $124.4 million from the balance at March 31, 2025.
We had 214 days of inventory at the end of the June quarter, which was down 37 days from the prior quarter's levels by our inventory reduction actions is what drove this. Included in our June ending inventory with 16 days of long life cycle, high-margin products whose manufacturing capacity has been end-of-life by our supply chain partners. Inventory at our distributors in the June quarter was at 29 days, which was down 4 days from the prior quarter's level.
Distribution sell-through was about $49.3 million higher than distribution sell-in. Our cash flow from operating activities was $275.6 million in the June quarter. Our adjusted free cash flow was $244.4 million in the June quarter. And as of June 30, our consolidated cash and total investment position was $566.5 million. Our total debt decreased by $175 million in the June quarter and our net debt increased by $30.2 million.
Our adjusted EBITDA in the June quarter was $285.8 million and 26.6% of net sales. Our trailing 12-month adjusted EBITDA was $1.167 billion, and our net debt to adjusted EBITDA was 4.22% at June 30, 2025. Capital expenditures were $17.9 million in the June quarter, and we expect capital expenditures for fiscal year 2026 to be at or below $100 million. Depreciation expense in the June quarter was $39.5 million. And I will now turn it over to Rich, who will provide some commentary on our product line innovations in the June quarter. Rich?
Thank you, Eric, and good afternoon, everyone. I am pleased to share our operational progress this quarter, highlighting strong momentum across aerospace, defense, AI applications and network connectivity. As a leading semiconductor supplier to the Department of Defense and our native Iles, our aerospace and defense business continues to strengthen amid increased global defense spending driven by geopolitical tensions and NATO monetization with over 60 years of aerospace and defense heritage, including from our acquisitions, we have recently achieved significant defense industry device qualifications and continue to expand our product portfolio to support commercial aviation, defense systems and space application.
Microchip plays a key role supporting products to many modern defense platforms. Also our radiation-tolerant FPGA solutions can deliver up to 50% power savings while maintaining the highest levels of security and reliability. We have recently expanded our FPGA portfolio by introducing cost optimized solutions that deliver up to 30% cost reduction while maintaining industry-leading performance and security. This positions us firmly across both high-reliability defense applications and broader industrial markets.
Microchip continues to be a leader in the microcontroller industry and enabling customers with our AI coding assistant, aiding customers to achieve up to a 40% productivity improvement and programming our microcontroller devices. At Masters, our major technical conference this week, we previewed further advancements for the attendees with the inclusion of AI agents into the AI coating assistant that will be released into the market in September this year, further improving productivity and reducing time to market for our customers.
The AI build-out continues to create substantial opportunities across our portfolio. We have secured design wins in data center infrastructure, spanning AI acceleration, storage, and network infrastructure with tier 1 cloud providers and enterprise leaders. We have strategically expanded our connectivity, storage and compute offerings for AI and data center applications as well as intelligent power modules for AI at the edge.
Security remains paramount as defense and AI deployments proliferate. We have made significant advances with embedded controllers that feature a mutable post-quantum photography support, which was recently mandated by the NSA. This support enhances the security of platforms using our digital signing for secure boot and secure firmware over-the-air updates. These capabilities are essential enablers to protect our defense, industrial and AI applications well into the future in compliance with critical standards such as CNSA 2.0 and the European Cyber Resiliency Act.
With that, I will pass the call to Steve for comments about our business and guidance going forward. Steve?
Thank you, Rich. During the last quarter's earnings conference call, I talked about a trifecta effect on our revenue growth. We saw that effect in action last quarter. First, our distributors' customers inventory is getting corrected, and we saw the first sequential increase after 2 years in distribution sales out last quarter. Certainly, the distributor sell-in versus sell-through gap shrunk from $103 million in the March quarter to only $49.3 million in the June quarter.
So distribution selling is rising to meet the sell-through, and we believe there is more to go. And third, our direct customers inventory is getting corrected, and we saw the first sequential increase in direct sales in 2 years. This trifecta effect led to a 10.8% sequential growth in our net sales in the June quarter. We believe that this dynamic is still in effect. Importantly, we believe that we are seeing what -- we believe what we are seeing represents structural demand recovery as we remain below normalized end market demand levels.
After 2 years of correction, we believe we are filling a supply chain deficit rather than experiencing any significant pull-forward activity. The second effect I have spoken about is the impact on gross margins. As the inventory comes down, our inventory write-off will decrease, thus growing our gross margin percentage. And as the inventory comes down and we start to grow the factories again, our underutilization charge will decrease and will further grow the gross margin. We saw these 2 effects in action last quarter.
Our inventory write-off decreased from $90.6 million in the March quarter, to $77.1 million in the June quarter, our factory underutilization charge dropped from $54.2 million in the March quarter to $51.5 million in the June quarter. This combined effect is adding to our gross margin. We expect the increase in gross margin percentage will continue as the inventory write-off continues to decrease, and we ramp the factories, which will lower the underutilization charge.
We currently plan to start increasing wafer starts in the December quarter. Now the market environment. We are seeing some recovery in our key end markets, automotive, industrial, communication, data center, aerospace and defense markets and consumers are all looking somewhat better. While we have not seen any material tariff-related pull-ins in April and May, we saw some selective acceleration of orders from Asia, which appear to be tariff related.
We believe that such pull-ins amounted to only mid- to high single-digit millions. However, it is important to provide context on pull-ins more broadly. We are still shipping below normalized end market demand across most of our markets after 2 years of inventory correction, this depreciated to normal demand levels means that any pull-in we are seeing represents underlying demand where the inventory has run out at the customers rather than borrowing from future quarters.
Now let's go into our guidance for the September quarter. We believe substantial inventory destocking has occurred at our customers, channel partners and downstream customers and the trifecta effect is in play. Our backlog for the September quarter started higher than the starting backlog for June quarter. And as of this time, the backlog for September quarter is comfortably higher than the backlog for June quarter at the same point in time.
The bookings for July were higher than booking for any month in the last 3 years. I will make a comment about lead times. While lead times for products have been 4 to 8 weeks for some time, we are experiencing a lead time bounce off the bottom and increases on some of our products. While we have sufficient inventory, it is mostly held in the DI form. We still have to package and test the products. We're running into challenges on certain kind of lead frames, substrates and subcontracting capacity. While these challenges are isolated to specific areas, we expect them to broaden and lead times go from the 4 to 8 weeks range to more like 6 to 10 weeks range out in time and on certain products, they are likely to go to 8 to 12 weeks range.
The customer and distributor inventories have begun to run low on many products. We are increasingly getting short-term shipment requests and pull-ins of the prior orders. Our customers will be well advised to manage their backlog and have 12 to 16 weeks of their needs on backlog, so they are not cut short. The emerging lead time pressures and increasing customer requests for expedited shipments reflect the reality that inventories have run too low on certain products. This dynamic supports our view that we are seeing demand normalization from a severely corrected starting point rather than speculative buying on any -- or any significant pull-forward activity.
Taking all of these factors into account, we expect our net sales for the September quarter to be $1.13 billion, plus or minus $20 million. We expect our non-GAAP gross margin to be between 55% and 57% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP operating expenses to be between 32.4% and 32.8% of sales. We expect our non-GAAP operating profit to be between 22.2% and 24.6% of sales.
We expect our non-GAAP diluted earnings per share to be between $0.30 and $0.36 per share. I want to again highlight the leverage in our business model with a $54.5 million sequential increase in net sales at the midpoint, we would expect to see approximately 77% of such amount to go to the bottom line as non-GAAP operating profit.
As the inventory drains further in inventory write-offs decrease, we expect our gross margin recovery will accelerate. And with the incremental profits going to the bottom line, we will have tremendous leverage. Finally, a comment on our capital return program for shareholders. After this September quarter, we expect our adjusted free cash flow to exceed our dividend payment driven by increasing revenue and profitability, low CapEx and liberating cash from the inventory.
Therefore, we do not expect to have to borrow money to pay our dividend after this quarter. In future quarters, we intend to use this excess and adjusted cash flow to bring down our borrowings. With that, operator, will you please poll for questions.
[Operator Instructions] One moment, please, for your first question. And your first question comes from the line of Vivek Arya.
2. Question Answer
Steve, many of us equate better than seasonal sequential trends as a sign of recovery. So when you look at your September quarter outlook, sales up 5% or so sequentially. Would you call that seasonal, above seasonal? I think basically what we're all trying to get our hands on is that yes, there is a recovery, but are we done with that stronger recovery as in a lot more above seasonal quarter. So just how would you describe September seasonal above seasonal? And then what does that kind of inform us as to how December could shape up in kind of similar terms?
So thanks, Vivek. September quarter guidance of 5.1% up sequentially would be considered well above seasonal our seasonal increase usually per quarter are really in the 3% range in the September quarter and December quarter usually is the weakest quarter of the year, and ordinary times, totally normal inventory times, December quarter will be sequentially slightly down and March quarter will be up again. So we were strongly above seasonal in the June quarter. We're strongly above seasonal in the September quarter, and I would expect that we'll continue to be above seasonal in December and March.
All right. And when we look at several of your peers, they had a strong June they kind of guided September linage, but they expressed some caution as they looked at December onwards, mainly because there seems to be kind of this renewed that about the delayed impact of tariffs and whatnot. What's your read Steve, of the macro environment? Do you think that as you look out beyond September that the recovery is as strong as you thought 3 months ago? Just how would you kind of contrast the kind of recovery you are seeing versus the slightly more conservative tone that some of your analog peers have indicated on their earnings calls.
So Vivek, our sales went down much more significantly than others because of really excessive inventory at the direct customers as well as channels driven by our PSP program, which was launched during the COVID year and continued well afterwards. Many of our competitors and peers got after noncancelable, nonreturnable treadmill. I think a year earlier than Microchip did and we -- therefore, we continue to ship large amount of products to our customers and distributors in accordance with the PSP rules.
So therefore, when we eventually corrected our sales went down much, much harder than others. So what we are seeing right now is the trifecta effect we talked about inventories going down at our distributors' customers, they're going down at distributors, our sales in catching to sales out from distributors, our direct-to-customer inventory is going down. So we believe the dynamics that are taking place at Microchip are more driven by those kind of factors and not any kind of tariff-related pull in.
We have done substantial analysis -- on the tariff question. So part of our normal process each quarter is to ask our distributors to explain any significant fluctuations in their customers' quarterly sales. This is done at a very forensic level, so covering a large percentage of our customer base. We did this, and we identified a small number of customers that identify tariffs as a reason for the sequential change in the revenue.
When we extrapolated this data, we believe the impact came out to be only mid- to high single-digit $7 million, $8 million, $9 million range. We have no direct customers that indicated that tariffs was the reason for the increase in revenue. I also want to remind investors that a very high percentage of our direct customer exposure in China actually is manufactured in free trade zones that are not impacted by tariffs. So therefore, the phenomena we're seeing at Microchip is really related to inventory digestion than any kind of tariff plan activity.
And our next question comes from the line of Harsh Kumar.
Steve, I've got 2 as well. Steve, I was hoping that for September quarter, you could help us understand the growth between the 2 key end markets, auto and what I would call as pure industrial. And why I'm seeing pure industrial is because you're in defense and defense is very strong for obvious reasons, and it's skewing things for the industrial category. So I was hoping that just outside of defense, if you could just talk about in September, which ones -- how do you see auto versus pure industrial playing out?
So with such a strong growth of 10.8% sequentially, which you annualize it, it's a phenomenal enormous rate of growth. So with a very, very strong June quarter, we actually saw growth in growth. All of our product lines, end markets, microcontrollers, analog, so it was very, very broad-based in all geographies. So therefore, I think my simple answer would be, we saw a recovery pretty much in all end markets.
Okay. Fair enough. Can I ask you, Steve, at this point, you feel like sell-through is equal or higher than the sell-in at your distributors? And if there's a gap, what kind of gap are -- to the best of your knowledge, I know it's a difficult 1 to answer. What kind of gap exists. And your inventory dollars came down, I think, about $124 million, which is a big number. How far do you think you are from where you want to be in terms of optimal inventory level?
I think we gave you the number in our prepared remarks, let me put it on.
Maybe I missed Steve.
Sell-through and distribution was $49.3 million higher than what sell-in was. And that's just the distribution piece of our business, which is a little less than 50%. We absolutely believe that our direct customers are draining inventory too and consuming more that we're shipping to them, but we just don't have real-time data to show you. But that $49.3 million compares to $103 million the quarter before. So the gap is shrinking, but there's still a gap.
There's still a $43.3 million gap. So sell-in is rising to meet sell-through. We closed half the gap last quarter, and we don't know it could take a couple of more quarters to close the rest of the gap.
Progress we're making towards inventory, right? The inventory target overall. And Steve, do you want to dress that do you want me to?
So I'll address it. So we are bringing inventory down in days of sales in pretty heavy chunks. It was 266 days of inventory at the end of December that came down to 251 days at the end of March, came down to 214 days, very large drop at the end of June, and we are forecasting that we'll break the 200 million and be between 195 and 200 at the end of September. In dollars of inventory reduction, we reduced inventory last quarter by $124.4 million. So we're making massive progress by shutting down one of our fabs, the TMP Fab 2 and a substantial scaling down of our other fabs.
We are producing products in our factories, which is well, well below the rate of consumption. That's why the inventories are dropping by a very large amount. And that essentially will continue. We will start growing wafer starts in December quarter, as I said in my remarks, and not that our inventory has fully come down. But if we wait until our inventory is totally normal to then start growing the fabs, we're going to have to grow the fabs by 30%, 40% in a single quarter, and that's not possible. So therefore, we have to start early and asymptotically reach the number where the fabs need to run.
And your next question comes from the line of Chris Caso from Wolfe Research.
I guess the first question maybe following on some of your prior comments is just getting a sense of how far below end demand you think you're really shipping now and recognize you have your best data with distributors, and you talked about how low point of sale is. And I guess the quick math, it would seem like -- I guess, you're about maybe 10% below point of sale and distribution. But the distributor inventory is also not at bad levels. Do you have a sense of how much, by how much you might be under shipping real end demand to your direct customers?
We have a sense, but the sense is not audit proof and really can't be discussed outside. The number that we could share and we have shared is the gap between sell-in and sell-out because those are 2 actual numbers. Other than that, how much inventory our distributor customers have is very anecdotal by asking a distributor by asking some of the customers that we jointly visit. And since the customer base is so broad, having 110,000-plus customers, even if you do the analysis based on larger customers, it's really -- it's not audit proof. And then when you get to your direct customers, the analysis even more difficult many of our large industrial customers by 900 different line items and produce the product in 26 different factories around the world and some products have inventory and some products are short and they're expediting those products.
So to get a total feel for it is very difficult, but anecdotally, as we do the analysis, we know many, many line items that have a run rate, and they are not buying because they still have inventory. And on other line items, they were not buying 2 months ago or 3 months ago, and they're buying now, which means the inventories are running low. So I think when I put it all together, I believe inventory correction will continue for some time and our sales will continue to grow towards the more normalized levels. Exactly how far are we? And when will that end? I don't think I can put a number with very high confidence.
Great. I mean it sounds like -- and maybe if I could ask a different way, which would be easier to answer. Do you think that you're undershipping the direct customers by more or lesser more or less than the distribution customers based on the rough analysis you've been able to do?
Again, just directionally during the Gogo days, we prioritized shipping to direct customers more than to distributors. So direct customers got a more than fair share of the product. And therefore, direct customers, in most cases, build a higher amount of inventory than the distributors were able to do. So I think just by that statement, I would say the inventory at direct customers is probably higher than the inventory at distributors.
And your next question comes from the line of Blayne Curtis from Jefferies.
I wanted to -- maybe I missed, I just wanted to know the timing. You talked about lead times extending from 48%, 6% to 10%, 8% to 12%. Is that now or is that where you expect it to go?
So lead times, broadly on most of our products lead times of 4 to 8 weeks. But on certain products, like I said, in certain pockets, the lead times have gone longer and some of them are 6 to 10 weeks and some are even headed towards 8 to 12 weeks. And those are cases where we are short of lead frames or short of substrates or in a given pocket, given package type, our subcontractors are overbooked, we're trying to find and negotiate a place. So this always starts partly like this. And we have a substantial recovery to go through in our sales fall because we're shipping so much below the in consumption. So this is just a warning shot to our customers to really bring their backlog healthy because the lead time being short, you get very short-term booking, you get very short-term visibility.
So it's a message to our investors, but more than that it's a message to our customers to make sure that they look at their demand for 12 to 16 weeks and give us that backlog so we can buy lead trends and substrates and start wafers and do everything in the right mix to be able to meet their needs.
Got you. So I think you kind of answered it, but you said that you had more bookings at this time versus last time, the same time frame last quarter. I guess, lead times kind of the duration of the part we don't know. Is the -- when you look at how you set the guide is the level of turns you're looking for in the quarter, the same? Or is it different?
Yes. So July bookings were the largest bookings for any month in the last 3 years, any month of June quarter, but any month of the prior 3 years. So we had a very, very strong month of July. Now bookings every quarter are different based on how much backlog you begin with and what the lead times are. If the lead times are short, you get high tens of the lead time, the longer you get less cans. And our backlog started in September quarter stronger than June quarter and the turns requirement is about the same. And with the same kind of turns requirement roughly, I think we'll have a good quarter.
And your next question comes from the line of James Schneider from Goldman Sachs.
I was wondering if you could maybe comment on any end markets that you think are materially lagging in terms of end demand, Steve, I know you talked about a number that are -- they're doing well as most of them, I believe, any that are lagging? And do you see any improvement in the ones that are lagging. The reason I ask the question is because I believe your other products didn't really grow much sequentially and I think they were down slightly sequentially. Just trying to understand what happened there.
I would say -- this is Rich Simoncic. I would say automotive is still lagging more than any of our other markets today. If you wanted to be specific about that, AI data centers or data centers are doing very well and recovering industrial, some of the smaller and medium-sized customers are starting to recover. It seems that the 1 that's probably lagging the most is automotive at this point in time.
Yes. And that other category of revenue that you're referring to is everything other than the microcontroller is an analog and includes licensing and some other things that tend to be a little bit more lumpy. So that can drive some of that fluctuation quarter-to-quarter, Jim.
Okay. That's helpful. And then maybe just as a follow-up, relative to the President Trump's press conference yesterday where we talked about tariff exemptions for companies with U.S.-based investment or increased U.S.-based manufacturing investment. Just wanted to confirm, is it your understanding that our existing U.S. manufacturing investments qualify you for that exemption? Or do you have to do more? Or do you not know yet?
Yes. So I think anything President Trump says is never clear. And often changes a week or 2 weeks later. But the way we understand what he said is it's not by products that are made in U.S. and the products are made overseas. So we make some products here, and we make some products overseas in TSMC and other places. So it's not that you have to pay a tariff on the products that are made overseas, but you qualify as a company. Now as a company, we make a large amount of manufacturing in the U.S., and then we also buy wafers from foundries outside.
So because we made so many investments in U.S. and large amount of our manufacturing in U.S. Our interpretation is that we will qualify to be exempt from tariffs. And if that is the case and if that holds, then I think we are okay. And maybe in better shape than some of our competitors like the Japanese competitors and others.
And your next question comes from the line of Timothy Arcuri from UBS.
Steve, you said bookings are the highest since July 2022. But in reference to another question, you're guiding up 5%. Yes, it is better than seasonal, but it's not that much better. And then you just said that turns are about the same in Q3, unless I misunderstood what you said. So to me, that kind of implies that a lot of these bookings are filling in Q4 as indeed December rather than calendar Q3. So is it fair that you can say at this point that December should be another really good quarter?
Yes, I think I'm not willing to get that far. I think I said in my commentary that I expect us to continue to be above seasonal in September, December and even into March. Good quarter is anybody's definition, I don't know without numbers what that means. But what happened in -- on July 1, our backlog for the September quarter was meaningfully higher than our backlog for the June quarter on April 1. And if we get about the same amount of turns this quarter as we got last quarter, then we'll have a good September quarter. Having said that, there are strong bookings this quarter, summer turns and some are going into the calendar fourth quarter.
Okay. And then you did say that lead times are lengthening, and you actually said you're encouraging customers to expedite orders. I think a lot of us see what happened last cycle and worry that when we hear that, that it could scare customers off a little bit because of the potential to get back into like a PSP sort of a dynamic. So if lead times are already sort of doubling for some products and you barely even come off the bottom. How are you managing this messaging to customers to avoid what kind of happened last cycle?
So first of all, we're not asking any customers to expedite orders. We're simply asking them to place the order with a scheduled backlog. So today, a lot of the orders are very short-term orders because lead tons are very short. And what they need in Q4, they think they can place the order in late September and still get the product. And we're simply saying, look a little bit further ahead and layer in the backlog for every month going out 4 months which is not the same as expediting orders. We're not asking them to take the product early. We're not trying to ship above demand. We're simply asking them to place the orders. Secondly, we're not changing the rules of cancellation. So if they give us a higher visibility and their demand changes, higher or lower or they want to change the product. The product is cancelable. It's not noncancelable order. So they have complete flexibility. Therefore, there is no comparison to a PSP environment here.
Right. The other thing that we are seeing from customers and Steve kind of alluded to this earlier, is we are seeing them. They'll have an order already on the books and then they asked to pull that in. And sometimes that can be challenging without visibility to be able to meet their new request to date. So having better backlog visibility helps us better service the customer. So that's really all we're saying here.
Yes. And at least having the extended backlog, even if they do wind up pulling that in, that is still better for us because it allows us to plan capacity and purchase materials that we may need to build that product.
Your next question comes from the line of Harlan Sur from JPMorgan.
Steve, on the accelerated demand signals from Asia, Asia was up about 14% sequentially versus Europe and North America at about 8%. Even if I exclude the mid- to high single digits millions of dollars, which may be pulled forward, Asia was still up strongly at about 12% or 13% sequentially. And then on a year-over-year basis, Asia in the first half was down only about half of what the U.S. and Europe was to the first half of the year. So what's driving the relative strength in Asia, both sequentially and through the first half of this year?
I think a lot of the Asia strength is a proxy on what's happening in U.S. and Europe because we build our customers European and U.S. customers build a lot of their product in Asia. So we report sales by where we sell -- where we ship the product, not where it is designed or where the origin of the customer is. So a lot of our U.S. customers are asking us to ship the product in China or Taiwan or Vietnam or Asia or wherever. So I don't think you can quite look at it by numbers, you could say, Asia is stronger, but a lot of that strength is coming from U.S. and European customers.
Yes. I think another impact that we see and saw in the June quarter is you're comparing it to the March quarter, which has the Chinese New Year, right? So there's some of that effect that's reflected in the June quarter results.
That's true. More shipping days.
Yes, that makes a lot of sense. Okay. And I apologize if I missed this. I think you did mention something about turns business, but in addition to the strong rising orders that you saw in March, June and a cyclical recovery, we typically do see stronger turns business, right? -- orders placing fulfilled in the same quarter. I know your current business rose as a percentage of sales in March. Did that turns percentage grow in the June quarter? And what are you guys seeing thus far here in the September quarter?
Yes. So I would say that turns were strong in the June quarter, and that's not surprising because we obviously beat on revenue, so turns were higher. And lead times are really short for the vast majority of products, and we would expect turns to continue to be a pretty high number for us, given where lead times are today and obviously, if lead times stretch that will change over time.
And your next question comes from the line of Quinn Bolton from Needham & Co.
I just wanted to ask on the gross margin guidance. Can you give us some sense what total charges for underutilization and write-offs you're assuming in that 55% to 57% range.
So we don't break that out. We did say that we'd expect the underutilization charges to be modestly lower, and I would say that is mainly driven by activities increasing in our back-end factories that's driving most of that. The wafer starts, as Steve indicated, are really planned to go up in the December quarter. And we expect the inventory write-offs to be lower it's a hard number to forecast quite honestly, but we do expect it to be lower as the comparison because we start this by looking at 12 months of trailing demand for the calculations and that is getting to be a bad metric for us with the revenue increases that we're seeing. And then obviously, our overall inventory dollars are coming down also, which helps with that. So it will be lower, but giving you an exact number is difficult to do.
We shipped hundreds of thousands of SKUs in the quarter. So -- and this write-off inventory write-off is SKU by SKU, looking at every SKU, where its inventory is and comparing it to last 12 months of shipments. So it's a complicated calculation and we can make an accurate forecast of it.
Understood. Okay. And then the second question I have is just on those products where you're seeing lead times stretch out to size 6 to 12 weeks. How much of that is sort of substrate packaging related versus wafer related? And if it's wafer related, is it mostly outsourced wafers or internal wafers as obviously, wafers take probably the longest in the manufacturing cycle. So I'm kind of wondering, at least on those products where you're seeing lead times extend why you wouldn't be increasing the wafer starts now rather than waiting to December?
Majority of that is in substrate or packages, and that's typically how that all starts as business starts to turn around. We still have quite a bit of die stores or die inventory on many of our devices. So it tends to be a matter of just pulling that product out of die stores and ensuring that the substrates and the rest of the assembly materials are in place to bring that out. And that's what shifted. A few weeks at a time.
No. We're not seeing strategies on our internally produced product yet. It's mostly back-end like Rich said, and there could be 1 or 2 places where -- we have products coming from a large number of fabs at foundries because this company is built up of acquisitions with Microsemi and Atmel and SMSC and everybody bought product from different fabs. So we buy product from a large number of fabs. And I think there are a handful of fabs where certain nodes are constrained. So just very, very spotty, there are a few places where external die is constrained, and we're trying to beef that up. But all the rest of it in foundry and all of the technologies internally, we are putting our capacity and we're putting a die.
But it sounds like it's more back end and front end at the current point in time?
You're correct. Yes.
And your next question comes from the line of Joshua Buchalter from TD Cowen.
Maybe to follow up on Quinn. Can you maybe speak to us about what you're looking for that's going to give you the signal that it's all clear to raise utilization rates? Is there a certain inventory target? Is there sell-through demand that you're looking for? I guess I'm curious to hear why there's so much conviction that December will be the right time, given you are seeing some cyclical signals improving and while at the same time, inventory levels are elevated. Just curious how you're thinking about that holistically.
So I think the fact is that our current production output from our 2 fabs with third fab closed is so far below our shipment rate that if we do not start increasing utilization in the fabs then there will be a point where we'll have to double the capacity just to get to the shipment rate. And that takes a long time to ramp. You can grow certain percentage every quarter. So therefore, we have a forecast over the next 2 years and how much value will be needed for that bounce off the die inventory, how long will it take for that to deplete. And then what is the rate of growth by which we can grow our both Oregon and the other fabs and then this is solving a math problem on when we need to begin.
You just have to begin well before well before your die inventory goes too low because once the die inventory goes too low, then you get in trouble very rapidly because we're producing only half the product that we need every quarter.
Okay. And I guess on that note, I understand you don't want to break out the utilization and write-down charges by quarter. But any rules of thumb that we should think about as to how those charges should unwind? Is there a certain revenue level or any other factors that we could think of, again, as we think about modeling those charges coming out of the model?
We gave you incremental gross margin didn't really give you incremental gross and operating margin.
We did. But maybe it would be helpful to say that we expect those underutilization charges to take longer to come out of the system than the inventory write-downs. I think the inventory write-downs happen quicker, and the ramping of our factories will be gradual over time. So hopefully, that helps a little bit.
And your next question comes from the line of William Stein from Truist.
Product gross margin, as you highlighted, was 66.3% and your long-term target is lower than that at 65%. And I wonder, does that imply that there's that you are somehow exceeding your long-term target because of mix or pricing? Or maybe help us reconcile why product gross margin once these unusual charges go away would decline from where it is now?
Well, number one, charges don't ever go to 0. There's always some mix issues where certain product is built and the demand went away. Number two, when you're 12 percentage points away, I wouldn't quibble about a 1% here and there. What I'm simply trying to say is many investors ask us how are you confident that you'll get to 65% gross margin. And we're seeing that is achievable based on the math.
But is -- I'm really trying to ask is mix or something else going to change such that perhaps it's the defense end market exposure that's quite high now. And as that mix normalizes, does that have an effect of dragging gross margins?
We ship hundreds of thousands of SKUs every quarter. We have 20 business units, and mix changes every quarter. Some of our -- so I think you're making too much of that 65 versus 66%. I don't differentiate those 2 numbers.
Yes, I would agree with that. And you shouldn't you sent look at this long term, we think that our product gross margins are going to go down. We're introducing lots of really high-margin products. And we talk about based T1s or Ethernet products, those are going to be higher than corporate average. We have a lot of confidence in how our FPGA business is going to grow over time. That's higher than corporate average. So it's -- there's a lot of moving parts there, Will. I understand your question. But as Steve said, we're really just trying to frame this, that we have confidence in getting to our long-term model. And the mix will have some effect over time. But we've got high confidence that we can get there, and it's just going to take us some time.
That helps a lot. If I can squeeze 1 more in. If sell-in and sell-through sort of continue in September as they did in June, you should be pretty well aligned by the end of the quarter. Is that the right way for us to think about this such that maybe by the time we get to December, we're looking at sell-in being aligned or maybe even higher than sell-through?
I would not think that. I think there is a lot of slow-moving product in distribution. We call it sludge and it's just not perfect mix. The product it was bought 2 years ago in certain mix and demand always comes out in a different mix. So I think this will take more than just the September quarter to close. We're not telling you that September quarter will be sell-in and sell-through will be equal.
Yes, there'll be a difference still. And I've kind of been saying, I think maybe by the end of the fiscal year, we're pretty much aligned, but that's a guess.
And your next question comes from the line of Chris Danely from Citi.
Just real quick on the incremental gross margins, Eric, I think you said 76% for the September -- excuse me, for the June quarter. For the December quarter, since you guys are turning the fabs back on or at least increasing utilization rates, would that incremental gross margin go up? And if so, roughly how much?
No, I think it will be roughly in that same ballpark. If you look at our guidance, you look at the revenue change and where we've guided gross margin, too, I think it will be about the same. And I think our fall-through to operating profit to would be in a similar range to what we saw in the June quarter.
Great. That's super helpful. And then a question for Steve. So Steve, now that you've been back in the front of the Microchip many been here for a good 9 months. How would you describe Microchip's competitive positioning, especially on microcontrollers? Are you -- have you seen any improvement? Has it been better than you thought, worse than you thought? How do you see your share going forward? Maybe talk about a path to gaining back market share, anything there? So.
So I think market shares are kind of hard to decipher when you're dealing with such a large inventory change. when you simply measure by revenue divided by the total revenue of the industry, it would seem that the market share is much lower. But if some of that revenue comes back when our customers' inventory goes away, and if you grow higher than the overall industry, which seems to be the case, I have compared our numbers against semiconductor industries, June ending report for microcontrollers and we grew substantially more in microcontroller, it will we grow double digits roughly.
Yes. And the industry was up only about 6%, 6.5% sequentially. So that means we gained share in the June quarter. So some of that share gain is coming back. I think it's going to take a little longer for us to go down this journey before we can really tell what happened. But 1 of the things which we have corrected is, we were weaker at the very low end of 32-bit microcontrollers because we were serving those functionalities with 8-bit microcontrollers. And as customers wanted to be in 32-bit microcontrollers, we had a good portfolio of midrange parts and high-end parts but we didn't have entry-level parts.
We were competing with 8 bit on that. And I think that's 1 thing I corrected after a return. And there are a couple of very, very good low end 32-bit parts that we're developing at a very, very good price point. So first 1 of them gets introduced to the market nearly the start of the next calendar year. So those would be -- those will strengthen our position further. But I think more than that, there are a few things we have done. One of the thing was -- for 8-bit and 16-bit we had our own proprietary architecture, pick architecture. We don't use ARM or anybody, any industry standard architecture. So therefore, all the tools were ours, we developed our own tools.
So when we went to 32-bit microcontrollers and adopted ARM as well as MIPS architectures to build it our internal strategy remained that we brought those parts on our own tools, which were proprietary tools. And ARM has a substantial market share at a 32-bit level and all of the competitors build on based products. And many of those companies don't even build the tools because they just simply send the customers to more industry standard tools from like IR and Sega and others, Kyle and a number of other companies.
So basically, when we compete with at a customer we're trying to jam our proprietary tool where the customer already has an industry standard tool. And if our products will simply work on that industry standard tool, we'll have a lower resistance level. So I think that's 1 thing we have changed in the last 9 months where we have enabled all of our 32-bit products to be able to run on industry center tools and we're even working with 1 company at least who will even support our 16-bit DSP on industry standard tools.
So there are things we are doing to make alliances more competitive make it easier for our customers to do business with and adopt our products. The other thing that Rich talked about was quoting assistance that we have developed, which is a first in the industry, and we're giving it to our customers, it saves almost 40% time for development, it basically writes the code for you and nobody else has come up with a tool like that. So everybody would, but we're the first. So I would say, I think our position is still good, still very competitive. But we did lose share with our PSP strategy. And we hope that some of it is not permanent. And as our sales are growing, we will come back.
And your next question come from the line of Tore Svanberg.
I had a question on the pace of the decline of the -- on the utilization charges. So I appreciate you're going to start increasing utilization in the December quarter. And I think right now, obviously, those charges are coming down by a few million dollars, obviously, because you still have inventory. But when do we see more step function declines in the utilization charges? Is that going to be when you get to that $130 million, $150 million inventory day target? Or could we potentially already see it before you get to that level?
It would happen well before that. As I said, if we wait until the inventory comes down to between 130 to 150 days, then we're going to require a very large step function increase in our fabrication output in the following quarter, which is impossible. So therefore, you have to grow over 5, 6 quarters, then we have to start much earlier. So utilization will start improving well before our inventory gets to those kind of levels. I think you should see a substantial improvement in utilization probably in December quarter and then continue every quarter after that.
That's great color. And then on your cash flow. So great to see the cash flows are not going to be big enough to cover the dividend. You did say that any excess cash flow is going to be used to pay down debt. What's sort of the new target level for that so that we can try and understand when the buybacks are going to start to pick up again?
So I think what we have said is -- and I have the only number as approximate, Eric may have more number. I think we have borrowed about -- through this quarter, we would have borrowed about $300 million.
It's about $350 million.
About $350 million, $350 million to cover the dividend in the last x number of quarters since our cash flow became less than the dividend. So next $350 million of excess cash flow over dividend will go to bring that debt back to where it really was. So that's factor number one. Factor number 2 is -- our leverage is still very high. We just finished the quarter with a leverage of 4.2%. And if you recall, when we started to increase the dividend and started to buy back stock and all that, we had said we want the leverage to be 1.5% or lower. So it's quite a way to go before we get back to that kind of leverage and a very strong investment-grade rating. So I wouldn't look for a stock buyback in the near term.
Your next question comes from the line of Vijay Rakesh from Mizuho.
Eric and Steve. Just a quick question on the underutilization. I think your inventory write-downs and underutilization is kind of running 50-50. Do you guys think most of the inventory write-downs get done by the September quarter?
I don't. I think it takes longer than that, Vijay. But what we expect is that the amount of the inventory write-downs will continue to decline as we move through the fiscal year. So it's going to take some time, but the charge dropped from $90 million to $77 million last quarter. We expect it to be lower than the $77 million this quarter. And that cadence to continue now for multiple quarters as we see into the future. And underutilization, I think we've talked about a little bit more in response to some of the other analyst questions, it's going to go down modestly this quarter. And when we increase wafer starts in the factories in the December quarter, it will take another step function down, but that one's going to take a little bit longer is because we are significantly underutilizing our factories today. And we'll grow it back over time as inventory declines and revenue improves.
Got it. And Steve, in response in your Section 232 on some of the exemptions that Microchip could get with investing in the U.S. Is your understanding that it puts you at a much better position versus like this ST Micro and Infinion and S and some of your peers there.
Well, I would hope so. I don't really know fully what the rules are, but I think we produce a higher percentage of our product in U.S. than some of the companies you mentioned do. But I don't know whether it makes a difference what percentage it is. I think it's going to be more black and white. If you do some manufacturing in the U.S. and you qualify for no tariff. I don't know what the rules will be. I think some of those companies have fabs in U.S., some others don't. And I don't know the rules, they're clear enough to be able to interpret that. I hope we have an advantage, but I'm not sure.
And your next question comes from the line of Christopher Rolland from Susquehanna.
Just maybe a clarification or just understanding tone here. I guess, first of all, typical seasonality for December and March? I know it changed since addition of Atmel. I think the last update was maybe down 5% in December and negligible for March, but down a little bit. Maybe if you could update there us on that. And then, Steve, you said you thought you'd be better than seasonal, but I think the Street was at plus 5% or something like that for the December quarter. So like is that tone as much as 1,000 basis points better than seasonal? If you could update us there, that would be great.
Let me maybe start by saying I don't think seasonal in December is down 5% for us. I think maybe it's down a couple percent and then maybe seasonal. It's been a long time since we've been seasonal and maybe seasonal in March would be up a couple of percent. So maybe start with that. And we are not at a point where we want to provide any guidance or able to provide any guidance yet for December. We think our business is trending in the right direction, but we're not ready to provide guidance. So I'll start with that and see if Steve wants to add anything to it.
I think exactly I wanted to say that your numbers have a larger bracket on it. I think December is usually down a couple and March is up 2 or 3 maybe -- I'm sorry, up by 2 or 3. And my expectation is that the business would be better than seasonal in both quarters without being able to put numbers on it.
Okay. And then secondly, maybe on AI. I know there was some stuff in the prepared remarks, but you guys had an dates on the percentage or the dollars contributed from AI and if there were any products that are just going gangbusters just above your expectations, whether they're like PCIe switches or retimers or FPGAs or timing products, just anything that's significantly outperforming your expectations around AI, that would be great.
We haven't broken that out, but we are seeing more and more uptick from our customers using the tools. It's still relatively new. We just launched this in the February time frame in terms of AI code support. It's being used behind our firewall for over a year by our internal engineers and our support engineers supporting customers and it's improved productivity within our own engineering force quite a bit. On the FPGA front, we're seeing most of the uptick or use of AI is in vision, detection, our vision systems for detecting people or visual inspection and factories are probably the fastest growing areas that we're seeing AI and acceleration used in our products.
Yes. Any data center products, not the AI coating tool, I apologize.
No. We have not put out data in terms of pertaining to the AI coating tool in terms of what it benefits. Right now, the only number that we've given is that typically customers and engineers that are using and are reporting about a 40% productivity improvement, which, in the end, translates to tie to revenue improvements.
And your next question comes from the line of Janet Ramkissoon from Quadra Capital.
Congratulations and a nice turnaround, guys. Most of my questions have been asked, but just a couple of little things. Given the recent decline in the U.S. dollar, how does that affect you? And if we see higher budget deficits and higher need to sell more debt and which may lead to a further decline in the dollar. How is that likely to affect you in the next couple of quarters?
Yes. So foreign currency fluctuations don't have as large as impact on us and some of our competitors that are not a U.S. based with us. We really sell 99% plus of our revenue is in U.S. dollars. A lot of our assets are going to be U.S. dollar based. So I think the impact to us is smaller than what you would see with some of our European competitors as an example.
Okay. And secondly, if I may, any comment about your Chinese business or trends? Any insights on what's going on in that market? Chinese business.
Chinese business. I think business in China was very strong. It bounced back very strong from March quarter, which is a Chinese New Year quarter to June quarter, up, I think, 14% or something. So our business is doing very, very well. Everybody is talking and concerned about what's going to happen with tariffs. And I think that's dominating the agenda. But on a business level, it's not really having an impact today.
There are no further questions at this time. I will now hand the call back to Steve Sanghi for any closing remarks.
Well, I want to thank all the investors and analysts for hanging in with us. I think we're on our way, making a very, very strong recovery from the lows in the business environment. And we'll see many of you at a number of conferences will go to starting early September.
Yes. We actually had a conference as early as next week. So we'll be -- we've got a lot of conferences this quarter, and we look forward to further discussions with everybody.
Thank you.
This concludes today's call. Thank you for participating. You may all disconnect.
Transkripte auf Deutsch freischalten
- Alle Event Transkripte auf Deutsch
- Sofortige Übersetzung
- KI-Zusammenfassungen für die wichtigsten Insights
Microchip Technology — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
Microchip Technology — Q1 2026 Earnings Call
📊 Quartal auf einen Blick
- Umsatz: $1.075 Mrd. (+10,8% sequenziell; $5,5 Mio. über aktualisierter Guidance)
- Non‑GAAP‑Bruttomarge: 54,3% (Non‑GAAP = bereinigt; inklusive Underutilization/Inventory‑Charges)
- Produkt‑Bruttomarge: ~66,3% (Management‑Berechnung ohne speziellen Abschläge)
- Non‑GAAP EPS: $0,27; GAAP‑Ergebnis: Verlust $0,09/Aktie)
- Cash & Inventar: Adjusted FCF $244,4 Mio.; Inventar $1,169 Mrd. (214 Tage); Ziel Ende Sep: 195–200 Tage)
🎯 Was das Management sagt
- Inventarabbau: Zielgerichteter Rückgang (266→251→214 Tage); Write‑offs und Underutilization fallen und sollen weiter sinken.
- Fertigungs‑Plan: Wafer‑Starts sollen ab dem Dezember‑Quartal erhöht werden, um Underutilization schrittweise zu reduzieren.
- Strategische Schwerpunkte: Wachsender Fokus auf Aerospace/Defense, AI‑Datenzentrum‑Designwins, radiation‑tolerante FPGAs, AI‑Codierhilfe (Produktivitätsgewinn bis ≈40%).
- Kapitalallokation: Nach Sept. erwartet man positive Adjusted FCF gegenüber Dividende; Überschuss soll zuerst Schuldenabbau statt Buybacks dienen; kleiner Bonusakkkord an Mitarbeiter ($5,5 Mio.).
🔭 Ausblick & Guidance
- Q2 FY2026 (Sep): Umsatz $1,13 Mrd. ± $20 Mio.; Non‑GAAP‑Bruttomarge 55–57%; Non‑GAAP Opex 32,4–32,8%.
- Profitabilität: Non‑GAAP Betriebsgewinn 22,2–24,6%; Non‑GAAP EPS $0,30–$0,36.
- Risiken: Back‑end Engpässe (Leadframes/Substrate), punktuelle Tariffolgen (Management schätzt Effekt nur mid‑high single‑digit $M), Unsicherheit beim Tempo des Write‑offs/Underutilization‑Abbaus.
❓ Fragen der Analysten
- Inventar vs. Nachfrage: Kernfrage war, wie viel Microchip noch "unterliefert" – Management nennt Shrinking Sell‑in/Sell‑through‑Gap ($49,3 Mio. vs $103 Mio.) und verweist auf noch vorhandene "Schludge" in Distribution; keine präzise Audit‑Zahl geliefert.
- Lead‑times & Timing der Ramp: Analysten verlangten Erklärung, warum Wafer‑Starts erst in Dez. erhöht werden; Antwort: aktuelle Engpässe primär Back‑end; Ramp erfordert Vorlauf, daher gestaffeltes Hochfahren.
- Mix & Margen: Frage nach Einfluss von Defense/AI‑Mix auf langfristige Marge; Management bleibt bei Ziel ~65% Produktbruttomarge, sieht aber Mix‑Schwankungen und keine kurzfristige Änderung.
⚡ Bottom Line
- Fazit: Starkes sequenzielles Rebound‑Quartal: Umsatzwachstum, spürbare Margenverbesserung und deutliche Inventarreduktion. Kurzfristig besteht Upside durch weiteres Sinkende von Write‑offs und steigende Fabrikauslastung; mittelfristig bleiben Back‑end‑Engpässe, Unsicherheit beim Tempo der Abschreibungen und Tariffragen relevante Modellrisiken. Kapitalpolitik priorisiert Schuldenabbau und Dividendendeckung vor Rückkäufen.
Finanzdaten von Microchip Technology
Umsatz
Der Umsatz stellt die Summe aller Einnahmen eines Unternehmens z. B. für dessen Produkte oder Dienstleistungen dar.
Umsatz (TTM) einfach erklärtDirekte Kosten
Direkte Kosten sind die Kosten, die direkt im Zusammenhang mit der Herstellung des Produkts oder der Dienstleistung entstehen.
Bruttoertrag
Der Bruttoertrag gibt an, wie viel vom Umsatz nach Abzug der direkten Herstellkosten im Unternehmen verbleibt. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von der Bruttomarge (engl. Gross Margin).
Brutto Marge einfach erklärtVertriebs- und Verwaltungskosten
Die Vertriebs- & Verwaltungskosten (engl. Selling, General & Administrative expenses, kurz SG&A) beinhalten alle Aufwände für Marketing und den Verkauf sowie die allgemeine Verwaltung des Unternehmens.
Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten
Die Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten (engl. research & development costs, kurz R&D) geben Auskunft darüber, wie viel das Unternehmen in die Forschung und die Entwicklung seiner Produkte investiert. Vor allem prozentual vom Umsatz und im Vergleich zu direkten Wettbewerbern sind die Kosten interessant.
EBITDA
Das EBITDA (Earnings Before Interest, Taxes, Depreciation and Amortization) ist der Gewinn des Unternehmens vor Zinsen, Steuern und Abschreibungen. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von der EBITDA-Marge.
Abschreibungen
Abschreibungen stellen Wertminderungen von Vermögensgegenständen des Unternehmens dar (z.B. durch Abnutzung von Maschinen).
EBIT (Operatives Ergebnis)
Das EBIT (engl. Earnings Before Interest and Taxes) ist der Gewinn des Unternehmens vor Zinsen und Steuern, das auch als operatives Ergebnis bezeichnet wird. Berechnet man den prozentualen Anteil vom Umsatz, spricht man von
der EBIT-Marge.
Nettogewinn
Der Nettogewinn stellt den Gewinn oder Verlust nach Abzug aller Kosten dar.
Nettogewinn einfach erklärtaktien.guide Basis
| Mär '26 |
+/-
%
|
||
| Umsatz | 4.713 4.713 |
7 %
7 %
100 %
|
|
| - Direkte Kosten | 1.992 1.992 |
3 %
3 %
42 %
|
|
| Bruttoertrag | 2.721 2.721 |
10 %
10 %
58 %
|
|
| - Vertriebs- und Verwaltungskosten | 674 674 |
9 %
9 %
14 %
|
|
| - Forschungs- und Entwicklungskosten | 1.086 1.086 |
10 %
10 %
23 %
|
|
| EBITDA | 961 961 |
11 %
11 %
20 %
|
|
| - Abschreibungen | 431 431 |
12 %
12 %
9 %
|
|
| EBIT (Operatives Ergebnis) EBIT | 530 530 |
41 %
41 %
11 %
|
|
| Nettogewinn | 119 119 |
2.524 %
2.524 %
3 %
|
|
Angaben in Millionen USD.
Nichts mehr verpassen! Wir senden Dir alle News zur Microchip Technology-Aktie direkt und kostenlos in Deine Mailbox.
Auf Wunsch erhältst Du jeden Morgen pünktlich zum Frühstück eine E-Mail, die alle für Dich relevanten Aktien-News enthält.
Microchip Technology Aktie News
Firmenprofil
Microchip Technology, Inc. beschäftigt sich mit der Bereitstellung von Halbleiterprodukten. Sie ist in den Segmenten Halbleiterprodukte und Technologielizenzen tätig. Das Segment Halbleiterprodukte befasst sich mit dem Entwurf, der Entwicklung, Herstellung und Vermarktung von Mikrocontrollern, Entwicklungswerkzeugen und Analog-, Schnittstellen-, Mixed-Signal-, Konnektivitäts- und Zeitgeberprodukten. Das Segment Technologie-Lizenzierung bietet Lizenzgebühren und Tantiemen im Zusammenhang mit Technologie-Lizenzen für die Verwendung von eingebettetem SuperFlash-Flash und Smartbits für einmal programmierbare Technologien. Das Unternehmen wurde am 14. Februar 1989 gegründet und hat seinen Hauptsitz in Chandler, AZ.
aktien.guide Basis
| Hauptsitz | USA |
| CEO | Mr. Sanghi |
| Mitarbeiter | 17.900 |
| Gegründet | 1989 |
| Webseite | www.microchip.com |


